JP2019217052A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To give a player satisfaction and enhance game amusement.SOLUTION: An internal lottery combination includes a first bonus combination BB which ends upon satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition after start of operation and a second bonus combination BB which does not use a lottery, a display of an operation pattern, or an operation termination as a replay probability variation trigger. After a BB game ends, the game machine changes the game mode to a first replay time RT1 in which a first replay lottery mode can be maintained with an upper limit of 10 finite counts. When an RT2 transition trigger pattern combination is displayed during the RT1, the game machine changes the game mode to a second replay time RT2 which operates in a second replay lottery mode. When the RT2 transition trigger pattern combination is not displayed during the RT1, the game machine, after the finite counts, stays in a high-probability replay time RT0 with a high replay probability until a first bonus combination is won.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 178

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Conventionally, as described in Patent Literature 1, after the end of the operation of a so-called big bonus BB, which is a "continuous actuating device for a first-class special accessory," a high-accuracy game having a high probability of replay under a predetermined condition. There is known a gaming machine which can shift to the replay time RT and can expect to win the BB again without reducing the number of medals in hand in the high-precision replay time RT even if one BB operation is completed (paragraph). 0468).

JP 2015-150347 A

  However, in the gaming machine described above, if a combination of the falling trigger symbols is displayed during the highly accurate replay time RT after the end of the BB operation and the combination of the falling trigger symbols is displayed, the gaming machine falls down to a state having a low replay probability. In many cases, it is not possible to obtain the BB winning again before the fall, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest may decrease. Here, it is conceivable that the high-accuracy replay time RT after the end of the BB operation is continued until the next BB is won. In this case, during the BB operation and / or during the high-accuracy replay time RT, The net additional medal number (total acquired medal number−total inserted medal number) must be greatly reduced, and it is difficult to satisfy the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can give a player a sense of satisfaction and enhance a gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the spinning is performed based on an internal winning combination and an operation of a corresponding stop button (e.g., stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R). In the gaming machine for stopping the reel,
For the internal winning combination, display or operation of a combination of a first bonus combination (for example, BB, RB) for starting operation by displaying a combination of operation symbols and terminating the operation when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a winning or operation symbol. Including a second bonus role (for example, a penetrating MB) that completes the game without ending the re-game probability.
After the game in operation of the first bonus combination is finished, the game is shifted to a first replay time (for example, RT1) in which a predetermined first re-game lottery mode can be maintained up to a predetermined finite number of times. ,
If a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols is displayed during the first replay time, a second replay time (for example, RT2) in a second replay lottery mode different from the first replay lottery mode is displayed. )
If there is no display of the combination of the transition trigger symbols during the first replay time, after the result of the finite number of games is obtained, the replay in the second replay time is performed until the first bonus combination is won. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to stay at a high-precision replay time (for example, RT0) in which the replay probability is higher than the game probability.

  Accordingly, when the operation of the first bonus combination ends and the process shifts to the first replay time, the winning of the second bonus combination is obtained and the second bonus combination is activated, so that the finite number of times during the first replay time is achieved. It is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the number of games can be consumed, and the combination of transition trigger symbols is displayed before the result of the finite number of games is obtained and the transition to the second replay time is reduced. Game results can be obtained. In this way, after a finite number of game results are obtained during the first replay time, it is possible to stay in the high-accuracy replay time, and even if one operation of the first bonus combination is completed, the replay probability is reduced. In the high state, it can be expected that the first bonus combination is won again.

  In addition, since the first replay time to be shifted after the operation of the first bonus combination is set to a finite number, it is not necessary to particularly greatly reduce the number of net additional game media in the first bonus combination and the first replay time.

In the above gaming machines,
During the operation of the second bonus combination, it is preferable not to display a combination of transition trigger symbols for shifting to the second replay time. In this case, the second replay time is set during the operation of the second bonus combination. It is possible to prevent the player from having to worry about unnecessary transition to the game, without giving the player a fear that the game may be shifted to.

In each of the above gaming machines,
During the operation of the second bonus combination, the number of acquired game media can be changed in accordance with the operation mode of the stop button, and the game until the operation of the second bonus combination is completed by changing the number of acquired game media. It is also preferable that the number can be adjusted. In this case, a larger number of games can be secured until the operation of the second bonus combination is completed, and a finite number of games can be consumed during the first replay time. It is possible to further promote, and it is possible to increase the probability of staying in the high-precision replay time from the first replay time after a finite number of game results are obtained.

Furthermore, in each of the above gaming machines,
Preferably, the second replay time is such that the game proceeds to the high-accuracy replay time after a predetermined second finite number of game results have been obtained. Even if it shifts to the 2 replay time, it shifts to the high-precision replay time when the result of the second finite number of games is obtained. Therefore, the second finite number of times functions as a so-called ceiling game number and passes through the second replay time. When the player directly stays at the high-precision replay time from the first replay time, the player can be given an impression as if he / she went straight to the ceiling, and the gaming interest can be further enhanced.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a player a sense of satisfaction and enhancing amusement in a game.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is a whole perspective view showing the external structure of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. FIG. 2 is an overall front view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the sub control board of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a transition flow of a game state of the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of the notification of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot machine and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot machine and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the abbreviation of the winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a flow of a game in a general game state in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the CZ1 middle mode up lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the CZ2 point up lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the ART random determination table in CZ stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the ART random determination table in CZ stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game in the above-mentioned pachislo machine during normal ART. It is a figure showing a flag conversion lottery table during ART stored in the pachi-slot machine. FIG. 3 is a view showing an ART level determination table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing a CT random determination table during ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART addition addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during CT in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the lottery table during CT memorized by the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the flag change lottery table during CT memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT addition addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the lot number lottery table added to the number of CT sets stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during the bonus in the pachislo machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing an additional ART game number during bonus stored in the pachi-slot machine, showing a lottery table. It is a figure showing the CT lottery table at the time of the bonus end memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a flow of an exceptional game in the above-mentioned pachislot machine in a general game state. It is a diagram showing a non-ART flag conversion lottery table stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the normal start of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CZ of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during the normal ART of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CT of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during BB of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ-ART termination of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control processing of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management processing of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the main control board of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio display of the said pachislo machine. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the information display of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing an example of a pattern of lighting timing of a state indicator in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of winning of the lottery transfer to a specific area in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure showing a basic game flow of the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the outline of each game state which the above-mentioned pachislo machine has. It is a figure showing an internal lottery table and a shift lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ at the time of performing the transition lottery to ART game state with the probability determined uniquely. It is a figure showing a counting method of the number of limit games in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the method of the limit processing of the specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the time of the end of the specific section in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing an example of a pattern of signal output timing to an external device in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect performed with the external device performed in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect performed with the external device performed in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in the specific area | region in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure showing an example of a precursor realization method using a specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing an example of a precursor realization method using a specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing an example of a saving method of the number of times of navigation in the case of performing the specific section of the number of times of navigation management in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately during a specific section in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately during a specific section in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation individually during a specific area in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately during a specific section in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately during a specific section in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game at the time of managing a lip navigation and a bell navigation separately during a specific section in the said pachislo machine. It is a figure showing an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of the setting change in the said pachislo machine. It is a transition flow of the payout state of the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process during MB operation in a ball-out state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the payout state and the game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the game state of the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing a symbol arrangement table. It is a figure showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure showing an internal lottery table. It is a figure showing the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure showing the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure showing the flow of the game in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing a normal_ advantageous section shift lottery table. It is a figure showing a normal_ advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure showing a normal advantageous_ART lottery table. It is a figure showing the SCZ mode shift lottery table at the time of reaching the normal advantageous_specified game number. It is a figure showing a normal advantageous_SCZ mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing a normal advantageous_SCZ lottery table. It is a figure showing an SCZ_ART lottery table. It is a figure showing a SCZ mode lottery table at the time of SCZ_SCZ end. It is a figure showing a normal advantageous_ advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during "ART" in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing an ART_ART mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing an MB operation_ART mode shift lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_normal addition lottery table. It is a figure showing an MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table. It is a figure showing an ART_history type lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_additional specialization zone lottery table. It is a figure showing ART_initial high-precision lottery table. It is a figure showing an ART_chance mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing an ART_chance mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing an ART_chance mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing an additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure showing an additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure showing an additional lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure showing a common_higher-ranking game number lottery table. It is a figure showing ART_last freeze lottery table. It is a figure showing a common_end time advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the advantageous section concerning specification example 1. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the advantageous section concerning specification example 1. It is a figure for explaining the flow of the advantageous section concerning specification example 1. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a flow of an advantageous section according to the first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram for comparing payout amounts in an advantageous section between the first specification example and the first embodiment. It is a figure for explaining the flow at the time of the end of the advantageous section concerning specification example 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a flow at the end of an advantageous section according to the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining after power-on when there is no setting change and after power-on when setting has been changed as a third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the relationship between the elapsed game number of normally advantageous, and a privilege. It is a figure showing the method of the history lottery during ART. It is a figure showing another example of the history lottery during ART. It is a figure which shows the addition notification method during ART. It is a figure showing the production stage during ART. It is a figure showing the production stage during ART. It is a figure which shows the ending control during ART. It is a transition flow of a game state concerning a modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which collectively shows the state of the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp which concern on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows additional control in an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows additional control in an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the privilege at the time of ART transition. It is a figure showing re-recognition of a state reset. It is a figure showing arbitrary reset of an advantageous section. It is a figure showing the number ceiling of games using an advantageous section. It is a figure showing game nature using an advantageous section. It is a figure showing the game nature by the bonus without the setting difference in the normal section. It is a figure showing another example of a shift lottery method to an advantageous section. It is a figure showing the shift lottery table of the advantageous section used in the another example. It is a figure showing the shift lottery table of the advantageous section used in the another example. It is a figure which shows the calculation method of an accessory ratio. It is a figure showing another example of composition of an advantageous section. It is a figure showing another example of an advantageous section shift lottery table. It is a figure showing lighting timing of an advantageous section lamp. It is a figure showing another example of a limiter of an advantageous section. It is a figure showing a control method of a number limiter. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of a number limiter. It is an internal lottery table (setting 1) of a "gaming system using a single with a setting difference in an AR machine" which is a modified example of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the specific game section in "the game system using the single with a setting difference in AR machine" which is a modification of the present invention. In the internal lottery table (setting 1) at RT0, RT1, and RT2 corresponding to the “gaming machine in which the winning rate and the matching rate are increased by not winning the high payout combination in the MB during RT” which is a modified example of the present invention. is there. This is also an internal lottery table (setting 1) for RT5 and the like. It is a transition diagram of a game state similarly. It is a figure explaining the composition of the game machine which carries the "split and rotation liquid crystal" which is a modification of the present invention. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of a gaming machine equipped with a “split and rotating liquid crystal” which is a modification of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of a game state of a game machine equipped with a "mechanism in which a player can select the game property of reel control" which is a modified example of the present invention. It is an internal lottery table (setting 1) at RT0 to RT4, RT6, and RT7 of a gaming machine equipped with a "mechanism for allowing a player to select a game property of reel control" which is a modified example of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing one embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. In addition, as the game medium, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals. In addition, the present invention is not limited to gaming machines that pay out gaming media, but is applicable to enclosed gaming machines in which a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a bonus is given as electronic data, such as earned points when predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is also possible. In the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”), which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability becomes higher than normal during a specific number of plays. A pachi-slot provided with an assist replay time (hereinafter, referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT operates at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever 6, the pachislot machine 1 receives one value (for example, 0 to 65535) from a random number within a predetermined numerical value range. Hereinafter, a random number value) is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 to be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means detects a predetermined winning probability from among a plurality of combinations based on detection of a start operation of a unit game on the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined starting condition). Determines the internal winning combination.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along a pay line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which a bonus such as payout of medals, activation of replays (replay), activation of bonuses, and the like are given to the player, and other so-called "losing". Such is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, reel stop control means (a main CPU 31 described later, a motor drive circuit described later). 39, stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, which will be described later), based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed, stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Do.

  Here, in the pachislo machine 1, basically, control for stopping rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number of symbols is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control unit uses the specified time to change the symbol combination to a winning line (hereinafter, “effective line”). ), The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, reels are set within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the activated line by using the specified time. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  When the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is related to the winning. It is determined whether or not it is.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line based on the stop of the symbol change by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to a winning, a privilege such as payout of a medal is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop operation (the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation, and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, various effects are produced using light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter, effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried by a sub-control board described later.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, and when a winning is determined. I do. As described above, in the pachislo machine 1, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, a combination of symbols to be aimed at) is provided. Is provided to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

A housing 60 forming the entire pachislot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a disposed on the upper front of the cabinet 61, and a lower front of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b arranged at the bottom. The cabinet 61 houses equipment used for the game (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.
Note that the cabinet 61 is a member for fixing the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, and thus may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

  The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 at the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that performs an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of a sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, for example, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided at a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. The display window 4 displays a cross-up line obliquely to the upper right, a top line at the upper stage, a center line at the middle, a bottom line at the lower stage, and a cross-down line oblique to the lower right.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 symbol. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines connecting the 3 × 3 symbols displayed by the display window 4 linearly.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is an effective line, and a winning determination is made based on a combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining a winning.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, “the number of inserted medals” includes both the number of BETs by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on each outer peripheral surface on which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for a game is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner.

  Below the display window 4, a pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed. In the horizontal plane of the base 10, a medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, there is provided a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 4) which is turned on when a medal can be inserted.

  By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (three) provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted every time the one bet button is pressed once. When the one bet button is operated three times, three medals to be provided for the unit game are inserted, and the activated line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting medals for performing a game) are referred to as “insertion operations”.

  An information display 14 is provided substantially at the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter, inserted number). The information display 14 also includes information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying to the player is provided.

  Further, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. Is provided. The instruction monitor is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a “push order combination” is provided in which combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) are different. The mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, “1” is displayed when the pressing order “1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)” is notified. When the push order “2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C)” is displayed, “2” is displayed, and the push order “3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R). "3" is displayed when announcing "). The notification of the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by a main control board 71 via a door relay board 74. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, the information of the stop operation may be notified by using other means controlled by the sub control board 72, for example, The above-mentioned display unit 100 may notify the information of the stop operation.

  In this case, the mode of notification on the instruction monitor may be different from the mode of notification on other means. That is, in the instruction monitor, it is only necessary to notify the information of the stop operation to be reported in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information, and it is not always necessary to directly report the information of the stop operation (for example, “1” is displayed in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the notification content may not be specified depending on the player, and it cannot be said that the notification is direct.) On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly reported. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays “1” corresponding to the notified push order uniquely, while the other means (display unit 100) performs the first stop operation by pressing the left stop button. May be directly notified of the action to be performed on the reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the information of the stop operation may be controlled according to the game state. More specifically, the information of the stop operation may be reported in the later-described ART game state (see FIG. 7) without reporting the information of the stop operation in the later-described general game state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front surface of the pedestal section 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals obtained by the player with a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving unit 16.

  On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a tilting operation of the player and starting a variable display in the display window 4 is provided. It is attached so that it can be tilted within the range of the angle.

  At substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are provided as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R respectively by a pressing operation of the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 6 is operated, and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop.

  A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the upper front surface of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the lower door 62b on the side of the surface that stands substantially perpendicularly to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub-display device 201 is provided on the left side (the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side), and the second sub-display device 202 is provided on the right side (the medal insertion slot 22 side).

  At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the received player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when receiving an operation by a player, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 5) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

  In the front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, speakers 9L and 9R for effecting sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right, and a medal payout port 15 for paying out medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving part 16 for storing paid-out medals is provided.

  On the lower front surface of the lower door 62b, a waist panel 25 having a design corresponding to the motif of the model is provided on a surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16 from above and below. Installed. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Configuration of circuit included in pachislot machine]
This is the end of the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachislo machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, an external centralized terminal plate 73 electrically connected to these, and peripheral devices (actuators).

<Main control board>
FIG. 4 shows an electric configuration mainly including a main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 mainly includes the microcomputer 30 installed on a circuit board. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Such as a random number generator)
The main CPU 31 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

  The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the application.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
As peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30, there are stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. The input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, Various circuits such as a door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

  The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes symbol variation means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbol displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition.

  The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have made one rotation in accordance with each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have made one rotation.

  The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a fixed angle.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse has been output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Thereby, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. The symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one each time the pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses required for rotation of one symbol. The symbol counter is provided for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 50 detects the reel index.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. The payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 reaches the number of payouts. .

(External centralized terminal board)
The external central terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / dispensed from the main control board 71, the number of games, the information on the presence / absence of bonus operation, and the like, and displays these signals as the number of games and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or a host computer of a game arcade. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

  Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of payout of medals (including credit storage) or at the time of a replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. The door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so as to be able to transmit information only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, one-way communication between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 is possible in which information can be transmitted only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72.

  A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

  The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal accepted by the medal slot 22 has passed through the selector. The MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. The 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the activated line based on the detection result of the medal sensor 42S or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1-bet switch. The settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

  The door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and has LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R inside the stop button for displaying a reception state of the stop buttons. And an information display 14 (instruction monitor) for notifying the user.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 5 shows an electrical configuration mainly of the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

  The sub control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

  The sub CPU 81 controls output of video, sound, and light according to a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82 in response to a command transmitted from the main control substrate 71. Note that the ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, the extraction of effect random numbers, the determination of effect contents (effect data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 9R is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, the sub-control board 72 connects an accessory relay board (not shown) to the display unit 100, and also connects the first sub-display 201 and the second sub-display via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a sub relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and relays a wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 to various peripheral devices by relaying wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub-control board 72. . For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown) and a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of gaming state of pachislot machine]
Next, a game state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and a transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of a bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the state between the flags is a state in which the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  The presence / absence of a bonus is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. The presence / absence of the bonus is determined by a game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  Further, the main control board 71 provides six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination relating to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is where the combination relating to replay is the internal winning combination. Is a game state in which the probability determined as is a medium probability. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high.

  The RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags of an RT1 gaming state flag to an RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the on / off state of these flags in the main RAM 33 to manage the RT gaming state. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies an RT gaming state according to the ON RT gaming state flag as a current RT gaming state. When all the RT gaming state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the (1) bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 changes the game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition state. Then, when the combination related to the bonus is won in the (2) inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

  Further, the main control board 71 terminates the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state when medals exceeding a specified number (216) are paid out in the (3) bonus state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) a bell spilling is displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the (5) bell spilling is displayed.

  When the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the (6) RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state. Further, when the bell spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the (8) RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 shift lip is displayed, the game state is shifted from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state.

  Here, the spilled bell is determined for each type of the pressing order bell when a pressing order bell (F_3 optional bell_1st, F_3 optional bell_2nd, F_3 optional bell_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd), which will be described later, is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT2 transition lip is not pressed in the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, when the RT3 transition lip is determined as an internal winning combination, an RT3 lip described later (F_RT3 lip — 1st, F_RT3 lip — 213, F_RT3 lip — 231, F_RT3 lip — 3rd) is determined as a pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, when the RT4 transition lip is determined as an internal winning combination, an RT4 lip described later (F_RT4 lip — 123, F_RT4 lip — 132, F_RT4 lip — 2nd, F_RT4 lip — 3rd) is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, while notifying the stopping operation advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a transition flow of a gaming state regarding presence or absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of the notification. The general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which the details of a stop operation advantageous to the player are not notified, and is a game state disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player performs a game from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state according to the situation) so as to shift to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. .

  The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 7, the normal game state includes a normal game state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and the CZ are gaming states in which the destination gaming state is different from each other. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state shifts to the CZ, and the CZ shifts to the ART gaming state, Is performed.

  The normal game state is the most disadvantageous game state in the pachislot machine 1, and there is a possibility that the normal game state may shift to CZ as shown in FIG. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed, and (A) when the shift lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

  The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state is high. As shown in FIG. 7, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in the CZ, a transition lottery to the ART is performed. (B) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 transitions the game state from the CZ to the normal game state, and (C) When the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the ART is won among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 6, since the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART win. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, ART preparation is performed until a transition to the RT4 gaming state after the ART is won, and a stop operation required to transition to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation is notified.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the ART is won in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 7, the ART gaming state is generally constituted by ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states having different playability, and the normal ART is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during a predetermined number of games (for example, to display a combination of symbols with a large number of paid-out medals). , And a stop operation necessary to maintain the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds an additional ART period to the normal ART. This is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During the CT, the game is usually played without exhausting the duration of the ART.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal ART to the CT or the general game state is made. Specifically, in the normal ART, a transition lottery to CT is performed. (D) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state from the normal ART to CT. In the normal ART, the duration is managed. (E) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal ART to the normal game state (normal game state or CZ). The method of managing the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary, but the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration according to the number of games. Of course, instead of the number of games, the duration may be managed based on the number of medals paid out during the normal ART or the difference number. Also, the number of times that the notification that affects the payout of the medals during the normal ART is performed (navigation) The number of times may be used to manage the duration.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that a transition from CT to normal ART is made. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed. (F) When the duration is completed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described later in detail (see FIG. 37).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that a transition from the general game state (normal game state or CZ) and the ART game state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, (2) when the combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. Migrate.

  In the bonus state, a lottery transition to the ART is performed. (G) If this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state from the bonus state to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the state has shifted from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control board 71 does not change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transfer lottery is not won. )). Further, when the (H) shift lottery during the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when shifting the game state from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 determines that the ART is being prepared. The game state is shifted to the ART game state via the terminal.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The pattern types are "white 7", "blue 7", "chile top 1", "chile top 2", "chile bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2". And "Cactus 3".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 assigns a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position "0" when the reel index is detected, and also sets the reel 3L. , 3C, and 3R, in the order in which the symbols move in the rotation direction, the symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

  As described above, by using the middle of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chile top 1", "chile top 2", "chile bottom", "replay", "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2", and "Cactus 3".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “Chile on 1” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each of the symbols (symbol code 4 to 10) of “Chile upper 2”, “Chile lower”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” And “00000100” to “00000010” as data.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination) determined in advance according to the type of privilege, data to be stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a symbol combination when the symbol combination is displayed. (The number of medals to be paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a winning. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a bonus such as payout of a medal, operation of a replay (replay), and operation of a bonus game (casual action device) is given to the player. If the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called "losing". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item "out" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "out".

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored, and a “data (bit corresponding to the symbol combination in one-byte data) stored in the storage area”. Data for designating ")." In the present embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 22 one-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” illustrated in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of the symbol constituting the combination.

  The payout number specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 11, when the combination name “C_9 A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

  The contents column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 9, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, the combination names “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point B_02” are bell-spilled eyes. When the bell spilled eyes are displayed along the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

  The combination names “C_maintenance lip A_01” to “C_maintenance lip G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines displayed on the display window 4, that is, the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line. When the replay is displayed along the activated line, a replay operation is performed.

  The combination names “C_RT2 lip A_01” and “C_RT2 lip A_02” are RT2 transition lip. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 shift lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state shifts to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 6).

  The combination name “C_RT3 lip — 01” is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 shift lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state shifts to the RT3 game state (see FIG. 6).

  The combination names “C_RT4 lip A_01” to “C_RT4 lip D_02” are RT4 transition lip. When the RT4 shift lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 6).

  Further, the combination names “C_Chililip A_01” to “C_1 certain Chililip D_01” are Chililip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chile symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the symbol "Chile upper 1" and the symbol "Chile lower" are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile symbol is a name when the symbol “Chile upper 1” and the symbol “Chile lower” are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the activated line, a replay operation is performed.

  The combination name “C_Chililip A_01” in Chililip is a combination of symbols in which the Chile symbol is displayed on only one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes referred to as "simple lip". The combination names “C_Chililip B_01” and “C_Chililip C_01” in Chililip are combinations of symbols in which Chile symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, hereafter, it may be called "dual twin lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names “C_Chili lip D_01” to “C_1 sure chili lip D_01” are combinations of symbols in which the Chile symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the combination thereof). This is a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation for displaying a combination of symbols has failed (so-called mis-pressing), and may be hereinafter referred to as "triple lip".

  Further, the combination names “C_reach lip A_01” to “C_reach lip P_02” are reach lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special symbol combination is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach-eye lip A_01” is a symbol combination in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed.

  The combination names “C_RB combination A — 01” to “C_RB combination G — 02” are the 9th out of the BBs. When the 9th out of BB is displayed along the activated line, 9 medals are paid out. In addition, out of the ninth of the BBs, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” is indicated by 7 symbols (designs) in any of the five lines displayed in the display window 4. A combination of symbols in which three “white 7” or the symbol “blue 7” are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when a stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols has failed); Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "7 out of BB". On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. May be called.

  Also, the combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which “hat-hat-hat” is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out.

  Also, the combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first appearance. When the first roll is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. Also, the combination names “C_SP1 — 01” and “C_SP2 — 01” are determined results. When the determined result is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the activated line, three medals are paid out. Also, the combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When the weak cherry or the strong cherry is displayed along the activated line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines information of a lottery value corresponding to each combination. FIG. 13 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 game state to the RT4 game state, and FIG. 14 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 game state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0-65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by making a determination as to whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the greater the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role assigned to this is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it can be seen that in each gaming state, the type of combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_Chili lip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when “F_Chililip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” are determined as the internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, specific control (described later) This flag conversion will be described later.

  Note that, even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, the “F_reach eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination along with “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3 to 6, No. 15 to 18), and the “F_reach-eye lips A to D” are not independently determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, when the “F_reach eye lip AD” is determined as the internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the “F_reach eye lip A to D” If it is displayed), the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

  In the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 14, the role related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combinations and symbol combinations>
FIGS. 15 to 20 are comparison tables each showing a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an active line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line in the combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 has the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 22, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed. Even a combination of symbols with a symbol may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, stop control (for example, a symbol to be preferentially drawn in) is made different according to a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed or a current game state. Even a combination of symbols with a mark may not be displayed. Accordingly, the correspondence between the combination of the combination and the combination of the symbols actually stopped and displayed is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Correspondence between winning combinations during non-flag and combinations of symbols stopped and displayed>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in a gaming state excluding an inter-flag state and a combination of symbols stopped and displayed (some combinations are omitted). In the pachislot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a combination of symbols displayed according to the order (push order) of the stop operation (“push sequence combination”) is provided. The symbol combination associated with “push order correct answer” in FIG. 21 is a symbol combination advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to “push order incorrect answer”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation advantageous to the player, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, the combination of the symbols associated with the “push order correct answer” is displayed. In addition, even in the ART gaming state, the pressing order in which the answer is incorrect may be reported, but the details will be described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the suffix of the name of the pressing order indicates the correct pressing order. Specifically, the ending “1st” of the role name means that the correct pressing order is the first stop operation with respect to the left reel 3L, and the ending “2nd” of the role name is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the last character “3rd” of the role name indicates that the correct push order is that the first stop operation is the right reel. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the role name means that the correct push order is “left, middle, right”, and the end “132” of the role name has the correct push order “left”. , Right, middle ", and the suffix" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the suffix" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct pushing order is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the combination “F_Chililip” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, FIG. 15 of the chililip (see FIG. 9) is used. 20 are displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the replay (refer to FIG. 9) will be displayed in FIG. 15 to FIG. Any of the combinations of the indicated displayable symbols is displayed along the activated line. In addition, referring to FIG. 15 to FIG. 20, the role “F_Chililip” cannot display the triple chililip (“C_Chililip D_01” to “C_1 sure Chirilip D_01”), and the single chililip or the double chililip (“C_Chililip”) A_01, C_Chililip B_01, and C_Chililip C_01) can be displayed. That is, the role “F_Chirilip” is a role that cannot display the triple Chirilip.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is a combination of different symbols displayed in accordance with the order of pressing, and when the order of pressing is correct, the combination of Chill Lip (see FIG. 9) Any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 are displayed along the activated line, and when the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. Either of the displayable combinations shown in FIG. 20 is displayed along the activated line. Referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, it can be seen that the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Chill Lip” can display triple Chill Lip. That is, the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Chill Lip” are the roles that can display the triple Chill Lip.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the reach lip ( 9 and 10) are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a replay (see FIG. 9) is performed. 9) is displayed along the active line.

  Note that the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles “F_Chililip”, “F_Probable Chililip”, “F_1 Probable Chililip”, and the roles “F_Reach eye lip A” to “F_Reach eye lip D” may be arbitrary. In the embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_Reach-Lip-A" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach-lip is displayed. Will be done.

  Regarding the combination “F_maintenance lip A” and “F_maintenance lip B”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) regardless of the pressing order is an effective line. Is displayed along. In addition, the combination of symbols “F_maintenance lip — 1st” to “F_maintenance lip — 3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 9) 15 to 20 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 9) 15 to 20 are displayed along the activated line.

  In addition, the combination of symbols “F_RT3 lip — 1st” to “F_RT3 lip — 3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition lip (see FIG. 9). Are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, any of the combinations of displayable patterns shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed as the activated line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination of symbols “F_RT4 lip — 123” to “F_RT4 lip — 3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 shift lip (see FIG. 9). Are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, any of the combinations of displayable patterns shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed as the activated line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 11). Are displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spilled eye (see FIG. 9) or a first roll (see FIGS. 11 and 12) is displayed.

  Regarding the combination “F_common bell”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the bells (see FIG. 11) regardless of the pressing order is displayed along the activated line. Regarding the combination of “F_Sabot 1” and “F_Sabo 2”, any of the combinations of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 of the cactus (see FIG. 12) regardless of the pushing order is along the active line. Is displayed.

  Regarding the combination "weak chile", any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 12) regardless of the pressing order is displayed along the activated line. Regarding the role “F_Strong Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2”, any of the combinations of the symbols that can be displayed among the strong cherries (see FIG. 12) shown in FIGS. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between winning combinations between flags and combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols stopped and displayed (some combinations are omitted). In particular, BB (“C_BB1” during the inter-flag state) "C_BB2") can be displayed. In the “whether BB can be established” in FIG. 22, “O” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “X” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination relating to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination relating to the bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_Chililip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the symbols in the correspondence shown in the combination "F_Chililip" in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the symbol combinations displayed when the push order shown in FIG. 21 is correct may be displayed, or only the symbol combinations displayed when the push order is incorrectly displayed may be displayed. It may be.

  For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination “F_BB1 + F_3 alternative bell_1st”, the combination of the symbols in the correspondence relationship shown in the combination “F_3 alternative bell_1st” in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, For example, only the bell displayed when the pushing order is correct may be displayed, and the bell spilled eye or the first roll displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may not be displayed. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 lip_1st", only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition lip displayed when the pressing order is correct may not be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, if any of the combination related to the bonus and any of “losing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of winning combination>
The correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed has been described above. Next, a data table used when performing various lotteries in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and the like will be described. In the following, a winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated. Before the description, the abbreviation of the winning combination will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating abbreviations of winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are referred to as a role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are called a role “push order bell”. The role “F_Common Bell” calls the role “Common Bell”, the roles “F_Sabo1” and “F_Sabo2” call the role “Cactus”, the role “F_Weak Chile” calls the role “Weak Cherry”, and the role “F_Strong” Chile 1 and F_Strong Chile 2 are called the role "Strong Cherry."

  In addition, the winning combination “F_Sure Chilllip” and “F_1 ChillClip” will be referred to as a role “Triple Chill Lip” if the flag conversion random determination is won, and will be referred to as “Replay” if the flag conversion random determination is not won. Similarly, winning combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” are called a “reach-eye lip” when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called “replay” when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion random determination will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles “F_reliable lip”, “F_1 reliable lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is independently used as the internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state. When determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, when this flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, an increase in the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

  As shown in FIG. 21, for the combination “F_Sure Chililip” and “F_1 Sure Chililip”, a symbol combination of “triple chililip” is displayed when the push order is correct, and a symbol combination of “Replay” when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the case of the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination "F_Sure Chill Lip" and "F_1 Chill Chill Lip" are treated as the combination "3 Chill Chill Lip", and information for displaying the symbol combination of "3 Chill Chill Lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is treated as the role “Replay”, and information for displaying a combination of symbols of “Replay” is notified (for example, , A push order other than the forward push is notified).

  Similarly, the combination of the symbols “R_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye-lip D” is displayed when the push order is correct, and the symbol combination “replay” is displayed when the push-order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as the role of “reach-eye lip”, and the combination of the symbols of “reach-eye lip” is used. The information to be displayed is notified (for example, the symbol "white 7" is aimed at by sequentially pressing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of the symbols “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as the role “replay”, and information for displaying the symbol combination of “replay” is displayed. Notify.

  By performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification, when a flag conversion lottery is won, a combination of symbols of "triple lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. According to the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is given in accordance with the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player, the special privilege is displayed by displaying the symbol combination of "3 consecutive chili lip". You will feel that it has been granted.

  In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state, rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of symbols to be displayed) differs depending on the type of the internal winning combination, as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given according to the state, the winning probability of the combination is made different. A technique is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of a winning combination can be made different according to the presence or absence of a bonus or the RT gaming state. For example, only the RT4 gaming state is set as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state). Alternatively, a method of providing another game state such as an RT6 game state or an RT7 game state is also conceivable). However, the opportunity for changing the winning probability of the winning combination (transition opportunity of the RT gaming state) is limited, and therefore, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus based on the flag conversion random determination and the notification based on the result of the random determination is performed in addition to the internal random determination for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of a given combination of symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. In other words, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given Can be reduced in appearance frequency.

  In the following description, the winning of the flag conversion lottery when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination will be described as “3 consecutive combinations of the roles“ F_Sure Chill Lip ”and“ F_1 Sure Chill Lip ”. In some cases, it is referred to as converting to "Chirilip" (or simply converting to "triple Chirilip"), and when the roles "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations Winning the flag conversion lottery is referred to as converting the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” to “reach eye lip” (or simply converting it to “reach eye lip”). There is.

[Flow of game during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, a description will be given of the flow of the game in the general game state. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal game state is shifted from the normal game state to the general game state CZ, and then the normal game state is shifted from the CZ to the ART game state, thereby changing the general game state (non-ART) to the ART game state. (See FIG. 7). FIG. 24 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of a game when shifting from the normal game state of the general game state to the CZ of the general game state.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as CZ lottery states. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the degrees of expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state are different from each other. It is easy to do. When the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to CZ (see FIG. 7).

  The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones in which the degree of expectation of winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ is different, CZ3 is a chance zone where the ART lottery is always won, and CZ1 and CZ2 are the ART lottery with a predetermined probability. Is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state, a CZ that shifts from the normal gaming state is randomly selected from these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Next, FIG. 24B is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the CZ1 and CZ2 in the normal game state to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period during which a rank having a different degree of expectation to win the ART lottery performed during CZ is promoted, and the second half is a period during which a lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, a six-stage mode is used as the rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of the CZ1 continues the first number of games (for example, up to 12 games), and performs mode promotion random determination based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

  Also, during CZ2, ten levels of points are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues the second game number (for example, up to 15 games) and performs point promotion lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

  In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A compete against each other is performed, and in the latter half of the CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B compete against each other is performed. This battle effect is continued for a third number of games (for example, up to four games), the winning or losing is managed based on the result of the ART lottery, and when the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and the non-winning is performed. If so, the enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, if the so-called rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the battle effect, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle effect is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the game is defeated in the latter half of the battle effect, and the game state basically shifts to the normal game state thereafter. On the other hand, in the case where the ART is won in CZ1 and CZ2, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and thereafter, the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via preparation for ART).

  Subsequently, FIG. 24C is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the CZ3 in the normal game state to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues the fourth game number (for example, a maximum of 17 games), and performs ART random determination for each game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via ART preparation. In the CZ3, a freeze may occur. In this case as well, the game state shifts to the CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the fourth game number elapses without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is determined at the time of the transition.

[Data table used during general gaming state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal middle and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 25 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for transition lottery in the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of the CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of the CZ is also shifted at the end of the bonus and at the end of the CZ and ART. FIG. 25A is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to in each game during the normal game state. FIG. 25B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used to shift the CZ lottery state at the end of a bonus or the like, and is referred to at the time of changing a setting, at the end of a bonus, or at the end of a CZ or ART.

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A defines the information of the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

  In the following various data tables, information on the lottery values is conceptually shown. In the figure, “0” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “extremely low” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0% to less than 1%” is set. “Extremely low” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “1% to less than 10%” is specified, and “low” means that the lottery probability is “10%”. “Medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “30% to less than 60%” is defined, and “medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “30% to less than 60%” is defined. “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “extremely high” means a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. “Extremely high” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “99% to less than 100%” is defined. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  Then, in the various data tables described below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256 and “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The internal random determination is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for the random determination by the specified random determination value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Be done.

  Referring to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is the internal winning combination. . Also, when the current lottery state of the CZ has a high probability, it is understood that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. .

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (B) defines the information on the lottery value of the CZ lottery state after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. Referring to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25B, it can be seen that the CZ lottery state always shifts to the high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 26 is a CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery. FIG. 26A is a CZ lottery table used when performing the CZ lottery based on the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ random determination as to whether or not to pull back the CZ at the time of CZ failure or ART termination.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (A) defines the information on the lottery values related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 in association with the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26A, it can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher when the current CZ lottery state is high probability than when it is low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26 (B) defines the information of the lottery value regarding the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3. When the CZ fails (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or when the ART gaming state ends, the CZ pull-back lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG.

<CZ1 Medium Mode Lottery Table>
FIG. 27 is a CZ1 medium mode lottery table used for the CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The CZ1 mode up lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29A described later, in the CZ1, the probability of winning the ART random determination increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to mode 6, the ART random determination is always won. Note that “mode 1 UP” in the lottery result means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and “mode 2 UP” in the lottery result means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. In other words, if the current mode is “2” and the “Mode 2 UP” is won, the mode of CZ1 increases from “2” to “4”. Further, when the lottery result is won in “mode 6 UP_freeze occurrence”, a freeze is generated, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 28 is a CZ2 midpoint lottery table used for CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 medium point lottery table defines information of a lottery value regarding the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29B described below, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the point increases, and when the point increases to 10, the ART lottery is always won. Note that “point 2 UP” in the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2. For example, if the current point is “2” and the point is won as “point 2 UP”, the point of CZ2 is “ It will rise from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result is won at “point 10 UP_freeze occurrence”, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CART ART Lottery Table>
FIGS. 29 and 30 are CZ ART lottery tables used for ART in CZ. FIG. 29A is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 29B is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 29C is a CZ used for the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ1, CZ2, during the latter half battle), and FIG. 29D is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

  The CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 29A defines information of a lottery value regarding presence / absence of ART lottery winning in association with the current mode. The CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 29B defines lottery value information on the presence or absence of ART lottery winning in association with the current point. With reference to the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ1) and the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ2), it is understood that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART random determination.

  The ART random determination table during CZ (CZ1, CZ2 common during the latter half battle) shown in FIG. 29 (C) defines the information of the random determination value regarding the presence or absence of the ART random determination in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ (common for the latter half battle during CZ1 and CZ2), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, a predetermined It can be understood that the ART lottery is won with a probability.

  The ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 30 (D) defines the information of the random determination value regarding the presence or absence of the ART random determination in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ3), it can be understood that during the CZ3, whenever the ART random determination is won, the CT is also won.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described with reference to FIG. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7), and sets a chance zone during the CT to be added. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during normal ART, a game is performed with the aim of shifting to CT. FIG. 31A is a diagram showing the flow of a lottery transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT random determination state as states that affect various types of random determination performed during the normal ART. The ART level is provided in four levels from level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. The ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the later-described flag conversion lottery during the normal ART. The CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and super high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during the normal ART. The CT lottery state affects CT lottery performed during normal ART and flag conversion lottery performed during normal ART, which will be described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state), the hand “F_Sure Clip Lip”, “F_1 Sure Clip Lip”, “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye” If any of "Lip D" is independently determined as the internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an increase in the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given in accordance with the lottery result. FIG. 31B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, during the normal ART, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs the flag conversion random determination with reference to the ART level and the CT random determination state. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of "triple lip" and a combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" (for example, forward order) (Notification of aiming at a predetermined symbol by pushing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Replay” (for example, a notification of the pressing order other than the sequential pressing) is performed. The player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification, and thereby, a combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, a symbol combination of "triple chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. Are displayed, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table usually used during ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 32 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for normal ART flag conversion random determination. In the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion random determination during the normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Rip” is converted to “3 consecutive Chill Lips”, and the first-stage flag conversion lottery or the second-stage flag conversion lottery Is not won, the combination "F_Sure Chill Lip" and "F_1 Chill Chill Lip" are handled as "Replay" without being converted to "Triple Chill Lip".

  FIG. 32A is an ART flag conversion lottery table used in the first-stage flag conversion random determination, and FIG. 32B is an ART flag conversion lottery table used in the second-stage flag conversion random determination. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (A) defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the combination “F_Probable Lip” and “F_1 Probable Lip”, and for the combination “F_Reach Rep A” to “F_Reach Rep D”. Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The ART-in-flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 32B defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the second-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. Until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "First time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, the random number values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. In order to perform the flag conversion lottery, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as the lottery performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it is required that the main side performs lottery (eg, ART lottery) on payouts, which has conventionally been performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the game capacity while reducing the capacity.

  In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be randomly selected, so that the capacity can be reduced. Also, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, the flag conversion lottery can be performed according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination. It is possible to carry out a flag conversion lottery.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 33 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of the ART winning in which the transition to the ART gaming state is determined, and during the normal ART. FIG. 33A is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of ART winning, and FIG. 33B is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table illustrated in FIG. 33A defines information on a lottery value for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred during the ART winning (see FIG. 27 and the like), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B) defines the information of the lottery value for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during the normal ART. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B) defines information on a lottery value for the ART level at the transition destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during the normal ART at the time of entering the CT. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts at a timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for randomly determining the CT lottery state during the normal ART. The normal medium-high-probability lottery table defines lottery value information for the transition destination CT lottery state in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. When referring to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “triple chili lip (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the role“ F_ sure chili lip ”or“ F_1 certain chili lip ”)” or the role “reaching eye lip (role“ F_reaching eye lip ”) In the case of “A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) is determined, and it is understood that the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to “low probability”. In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, the fact that the CT lottery state is likely to fall seems to be contrary to the above description. As will be described later, the combination "triple lip" and "reach lip" always win the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special benefit of CT winning is still provided.

<CT random lottery table during ART>
FIG. 35 is a CT random determination table during ART used for CT random determination during normal ART. The ART during lottery table defines information on a lottery value of the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the ART during CT lottery table, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “triple lip”, “reach lip”, and “BB” are determined as the internal winning combination, the probability denominator 256 CT random determination is performed using a random number value. On the other hand, when another combination (for example, replay, common bell, pressing order bell, etc.) is determined as the internal winning combination, CT random determination is performed using a random number in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

  Note that the pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” as CTs. The “normal CT” and the “high-accuracy CT” have different expectations for the number of ART games added in the CT (additional chance zone), and the “high-accuracy CT” has a larger number of ART games than the “normal CT”. Are easily added (see FIG. 40).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 36 is a normal ART additional lottery table used for additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during the normal ART. In the normal ART addition lottery table, information on the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the additional lottery is defined in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by eight games per set. During the CT, the additional lottery is performed based on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination. When the additional lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is reduced only when the additional lottery is not won. Is done. Therefore, during CT, a game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game ends when eight games in which the number of ART games is not added are performed in the same set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, if the winning combination “Triple Chililip” is won during the CT (that is, if the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination “F_Probable Chililip” or “F_1 Probable Chililip”), ) The game is reset eight times in one set. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed seven times in the same set, and if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed one more time, the CT ends, but the role "3 consecutive chili lip" , The CT is reset, and as a result, the CT does not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added eight times is performed thereafter. Therefore, the CT is more likely to be continued as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Conversion of flag during CT)
FIG. 37 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the role “F_Sure Chililip” and “F_1 Sure Chililip” are always converted to the role “Triple Chililip”. As described above, if the winning combination "Tri-ChiliLip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, if the winning combination "F_SureliLip" or "F_1SureliLip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is re-established. Will be set.

  On the other hand, the winning combinations “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” are controlled based on a three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “Reach-Lip”, Table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “Reach-Lip”, and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". Note that, if the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during the CT, a CT is newly given as shown in FIG. 41 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 37C, in the normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. In the high probability CT, the table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Next, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS.

<CT table lottery table>
FIG. 38 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table used for flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The during-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information about a table used for flag conversion lottery in association with states such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed. The during-CT table lottery table is referred to when it is determined that the CT lottery is won and the transition to CT is performed or when the CT is started, and a table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT is determined.

<CT conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 39 is a CT flag conversion random determination table used for flag conversion random determination during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the during-CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Chill Lip” are always converted to the combination “3 consecutive Chill Lip”.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 40 is a CT additional lottery table used for additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that, for a combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 40, there is no case where the additional lottery during CT is won.

  In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games differs according to the number of times of winning the combination “3 consecutive chili lip”. More specifically, if the number of wins of the role “triple chili lip” during the same CT is “1 to 8”, “10 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT, If the number of wins for the role "3 consecutive Chili Lips" is "9-16 times", "20 games" is likely to be determined as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "3 consecutive Chili Lips" is won during the same CT Is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and if the number of wins for the role "triple chili lip" during the same CT is "25 or more times", It is easy to determine “50 games” as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of wins of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of wins of the role “triple chili lip” during the same CT becomes “9 or more”, the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extreme height” of the role “triple chili lip” in the figure is “ 20 games ". Further, when the number of wins of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” during the same CT becomes “17 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “extreme high” and “extremely low” of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” in FIG. The number of additional games is promoted to “30 games”. Similarly, when the number of wins of the role "triple chili lip" during the same CT becomes "25 or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extreme high" and "extreme low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games to be promoted to “50 games”.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased in accordance with the number of times of winning the combination "3 consecutive chili lip" during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT does not end and the CT is reset when the role of "triple chili lip" is won. Can be expected to increase as the amount of addition increases per time, and the interest during CT improves. In addition, the number of times that the amount of addition per game is increased is a number of times (9 or more) greater than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT, so that an excessive profit is provided to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 41 is a CT number addition lottery table used in CT for adding a new CT during CT. The set number addition lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the set number addition lottery in association with the type of the CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 41, when the role “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given along with the set number added lottery, a new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed ends.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings in the above-mentioned combination “3 consecutive chili lip” is counted only during the same CT. However, this “during the same CT” means that the number of sets performed during the CT is added to the lottery. May be included or may not be included.

[Game flow during bonus state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a game in a case where a transition is made to a bonus state during a normal game state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 42 (B) is a diagram showing a case where a transition is made to a bonus state during a normal ART. FIG. 42 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case where the game has shifted to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) to 42 (C), the pachislo machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as the types of bonuses, and determines the type of the bonus when shifting to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, the process shifts to the CT after the preparation for the ART after the completion of the bonus state. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow differs depending on the state before shifting to the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (A), when the normal game state is shifted to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If this ART lottery is won, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to the normal ART via preparation for ART. After winning the ART lottery, an additional lottery of the ART game is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (B), when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, the CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. The CT lottery is won with a probability of 50%, and if it is won, the routine goes to CT via the preparation for ART after completion of the bonus state, and if not won, the routine goes to normal ART via the preparation for ART after completion of the bonus state. I do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, an additional lottery is also performed for the number of ART games.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (C), when the transition from the CT to the normal BB or the special BB is made, the transition is made to the CT via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, an additional lottery is also performed for the number of ART games.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Next, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 43 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines information on a lottery value for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Additional lottery table for ART games during bonus>
FIG. 44 is a bonus lottery table for the number of ART games during bonus used for the ART lottery and the additional lottery performed in the bonus state. The bonus ART game number addition lottery table defines the information of the ART lottery result and the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The bonus lottery table for the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the ART lottery in the state where the ART is not won (until the player wins the ART lottery in the normal BB shifted from the general game state). That is, if one or more (actually, at least 50 games) is determined as the number of additional games in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding game number is given. On the other hand, in the state after the ART winning, the additional number of ART games during bonus game is used for the additional number of ART games.

<CT Lottery Table at Bonus End>
FIG. 45 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus end-time CT lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before shifting to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 45, it can be seen that, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 46, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal game state is shifted to the CZ during the general game state, and the ART game state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, the pachislot machine 1 realizes the ART gaming state by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and controls the RT gaming state according to the combination of the displayed symbols as shown in FIG. are doing. As shown in FIG. 21, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) of the player, so even if the notification is not performed. In some cases, the game may shift to the RT4 game state by chance.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the combination “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” may be determined as an internal winning combination, so that even in the general gaming state (non-ART), A reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the game machine accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), it is possible to display a symbol combination of “reach eye lip”. In this state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without passing through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is determined as the internal winning combination during the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, the flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is issued and an ART right is granted. Conversely, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the symbol combination of “Replay” is issued, and control is performed so that the symbol combination of “Reach eye lip” is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 47 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed in the normal gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, information of the stop operation (push order and the like) is reported under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, it has been required that the main (main control board 71) that manages the profits of the player perform the notification in order to affect so-called balls. Therefore, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the main side. I'm supposed to.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the notification (navi) performed on the main side and the notification (navi) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation reported by each, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of the reels performing the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3" Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, “4” to “9” indicate the pressing order to be notified, “4” means that the pressing order is “left, middle, right”, and “5” indicates that the pressing order is “ "6" means that the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the pressing order is "middle, right, left" "8" means that the pressing order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the pressing order is "right, middle, left".

  Also, “10” and “11” are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and “10” means a symbol combination “C_BB1” consisting of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, and “11”. Means a symbol combination "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

  Here, the numerical values of “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, but not all players can clearly understand the contents of the notification. Absent. In other words, there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be grasped by some players simply by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the contents of the stop operation are also notified on the sub side in addition to the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by the sub-control board 72, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. "1" is displayed at the top to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when the push order “middle, left, right” is notified, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. "," 2 "above the left reel 3L, and" 3 "above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is" middle, left, right ". When “F_BB1” is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (A), during the ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT3 Transition Lip Navi” and “RT4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. "Bell Navi" notifies the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of "bell" for the combination of "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". The “maintenance lip navigator” notifies the combination “F_maintenance lip — 1st” to “F_maintenance lip — 3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “replay”. The “RT3 transition lip navi” notifies the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 1st” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “RT3 transition lip”. The “RT4 shift lip navigation” notifies the combination “F_RT4 shift lip — 123rd” to “F_RT4 shift lip — 3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “RT4 shift lip”.

  The timing at which the notification is performed on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the notification of the main side may be performed at the timing of receiving the start operation, or the notification of the main side may be performed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when any one of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of the notification on the sub side be at least the timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, a notification is issued on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is received or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, the information of the stop operation is reported on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT3 Shift Lip Navi” and “RT4 Shift Lip Navi” are performed under control of the main side. During the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, a push for displaying a combination of symbols of "triple lip", "reach lip" or "replay" is performed. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

  As described above, since the combination of the symbols “triple lip” and “reach eye lip” is related to the grant of a special privilege, the presence or absence of the notification may affect the profit (payout) of the player. It is also possible. However, the pachislot machine 1 actually gives a special privilege based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the privilege to be given. In other words, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if the combination of the symbols “triple lip” and “reach lip” can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this manner does not affect the profit (payout) of the player, the main monitor is not notified on the instruction monitor, and The notification on the display unit 100 is performed only on the side.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), a notification is made to aim at a combination of symbols corresponding to the role of the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), when the role “F_BB1” is carried over, “white 7 navi” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the role “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, "blue 7 navigation" is performed. “White 7 Navi” informs the combination “F_BB1” of the stop operation information for displaying the combination of the symbols “C_BB1”, and “Blue 7 Navi” provides the combination “F_BB2” The information of the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination of “C_BB2” is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, the role related to the bonus and any one of “losing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. In this case, the combination of the symbols of BB can be displayed, and if the other combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination relating to the bonus, the combination of the symbols of BB cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and (D), when the main control board 71 performs control on the main side, the role related to the carried-over bonus and “losing”, “F_special role 1”, “F_special role” Only when one of “2” and “F_special combination 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” is performed. Thus, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after notifying that the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed by, for example, displaying a bonus confirmation screen, turning on a bonus confirmation lamp, or the like.

  As an example, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen is displayed according to the result of the continuous effect. Generally done. If “Main 7 Navi” or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, and the interest may be spoiled. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is performed. Note that a method of enabling the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is performed is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after the number of games is consumed, the “white 7 navigation” or the “blue 7 Navigating "can be considered. More specifically, after determining the number of games required until the bonus is announced, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the main side can grasp the timing at which the bonus is notified. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the role related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the role related to the bonus is not carried over, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the winning combination and any of "Loose", "F_Special Combination 1", "F_Special Combination 2", and "F_Special Combination 3" are determined as internal winning combinations. I do.

  As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, the main control board 71 determines the effect to be executed on the display unit 100 (at least the number of games required for the effect) when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the role related to the bonus is not carried over. Determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. The sub-control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, so that it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus is notified on the main side.

  Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed by another method may be grasped on the main side. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive a signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is performed based on the signal that the main control board 71 can receive. . For example, since the main control board 71 can accept a signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than the forward push) is performed in a state where the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In such a case, a bonus notification may be performed. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information about the internal winning combination and information about the stop operation from the main control board 71, and a combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “role related to bonus”). If the stop operation is “other than the forward push”, a bonus notification is performed. Such a bonus notification can also be grasped on the main control board 71 at the timing, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is performed on the main side can be grasped.

[Description of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main processing of pachislot under control of main CPU>
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area in which data must be deleted for each single unit game (game), such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 and 14) corresponding to the current gaming state and randomly selects a role determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of roles. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” has been determined as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Subsequent to the processing in S6, or if it is determined in S5 that the combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 proceeds to state determination in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a main navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets the navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in a start command and notified to the sub control board 72. The notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initialization process described later with reference to FIG. 60 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control processing in S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits the data to the sub control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an effect such as an internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated until the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed by interruption processing executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Control is performed so that the constant speed is maintained.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later with reference to FIG. 61 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed. You.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In the winning determination medal payout process, as a result of stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line, the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of the replay is performed. Grant profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates winning operation command data and transmits the data to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 62 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an RT check process described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs control for shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a process at the end of CZ / ART described later with reference to FIG. 65 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pull-back lottery. When the processing at the end of the CZ / ART is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) has ended.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the state-specific control processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current game state is the RT4 game state (S31). If the game is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 51 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the game is not in the RT4 game state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current game state is in the normal game state (S33). ). If it is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal start process described later with reference to FIG. 52 (S34), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is during CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start time process during CZ described later with reference to FIG. 53 (S36), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is during normal ART (S37). If the normal ART is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process described later with reference to FIG. 57 (S38), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CT (S39). When the CT is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during a CT start, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 58 (S40), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a BB start processing described later with reference to FIG. 59 (S42), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43), and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion processing>
Next, the flag conversion processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is time to start CT (S50). If it is time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the flag conversion table during CT lottery table (FIG. 38) to randomly determine the table number used for the flag conversion during CT, and sets it. (S51).

  Subsequent to the process of S51, or if it is not at the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is the non-ART RT4 gaming state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set, and if the current state is the normal ART RT4 gaming state. , The flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 32) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the flag conversion lottery table during CT is set (FIG. 39).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not a winning has been achieved (S54). When the flag conversion lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 probable chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the combination "F_1 probable chili lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is during the non-ART state (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number (S57), and then sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and sets a flag. The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current game state is not the non-ART state (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

  In S54, when the flag conversion lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs a flag maintaining process (S59), and ends the flag conversion process. In the flag maintaining process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed such that the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Process during normal start>
Next, the normal start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26A and performs the CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not this CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ that has won the next game (S63), and then sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that has won in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter for counting the duration of the CZ. When the CZ1 has been won, the CZ game number counter (first half) is set to the first game number (for example, 12). If the CZ2 has been won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If the CZ3 has been won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. The transfer lottery of the CZ lottery state is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the CZ lottery state is updated based on the result of the transfer lottery (S66), and the normal start process ends.

<Start processing during CZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the process at the time of starting during CZ will be described. In the process during start during CZ, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 (S72), and ends the processing at the time of start during CZ.

  On the other hand, when it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is during CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 (S74), and ends the processing at the start during CZ. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) at which the degree of expectation for winning the ART lottery differs, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing in CZ1 (CZ2) in one processing.

  On the other hand, when it is not during CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ3, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 56 (S75), and ends the processing during start during CZ.

<CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the middle processing of CZ1 (CZ2), first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If it is the first half (YES), the main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S82. If it is not the first half (the second half) (NO), the main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S91 in FIG.

  If it is the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 mode up lottery table (FIG. 27) to perform mode up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, if it is the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 medium point lottery table (FIG. 28) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze has been won in the lottery in S82 (S84). If the freeze has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ, sets the preparation for ART in the next game (S86), and terminates the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing.

  On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by one (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). I do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 55, when the game is the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART random determination is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIGS. 29A and 29B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not this ART lottery has been won (S93).

  If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the ART set number and randomly determines the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). Is set (S94). Subsequent to the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value to the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and sets “3” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. Is set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S95, or if the game is not the second half game in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIG. 29 (C)) to obtain an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the ART set number and randomly selects the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently terminates CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and terminates processing during CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the CZ3 middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing during CZ3, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIG. 30 (D)) to perform the ART random determination based on the internal winning combination (S121), and determines whether the ART random determination has been won. It is determined whether or not it is (S122).

  If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze has been won in the ART lottery in S121 (S124). When the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

  Subsequent to the processing of S125, or when the freeze is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently selects the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and terminates the CZ3 middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the ART lottery has not been won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CZ game number counter by one (S128). Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and randomly selects and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and terminates the CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing during normal ART start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a description will be given of the processing at the start during the normal ART. In the normal ART start-time process, first, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which the normal ART is continued. In this embodiment, in addition to the ART continued game number counter, an ART finished game number counter for counting the number of games for which the normal ART can be continued is provided. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuation game number counter with the value of the ART ending game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter, changes the ART gaming state. finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the during-CT CT lottery table (FIG. 35) to perform CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not this CT lottery has been won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets and sets 8 to the number of CT games counter (S144), and then determines the type of the type that has won the next game. The CT is set (S145).

  Subsequent to the processing of S145, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33B) and sets the ART continuous game number counter. The ART level is determined by lottery based on the value of and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium-high-probability lottery table (FIG. 34) and randomly selects and sets the transition destination CT lottery state based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Next, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART additional lottery table (FIG. 36), performs an additional lottery based on the internal winning combination, based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. A determination is made (S149). If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery has not been won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S151). If the value of the ART continued game number counter has not reached the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal start during ART process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continued game number counter has reached the value of the ART finished game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 decrements the ART set number by 1 (S152). It is set (S153), and the processing at the start during the normal ART ends.

<Start processing during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the processing at the start during CT will be described. In the processing during the start during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 40) and performs an additional lottery based on the internal winning combination based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved (S162).

  If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional amount per one time increases as the number of times of winning the combination "triple chili lip" during the same CT increases.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “3 consecutive chips” (that is, whether or not the internal winning combination has been converted to the combination “3 consecutive copies” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 51) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination "3 consecutive chili lip" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and ends the processing during the CT start. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during the start during CT.

  In S162, if the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT set number additional lottery table (FIG. 41) to determine the CT set number based on the internal winning combination. The additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S167). When the additional lottery has been won for the number of CT sets (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing during the start during CT.

  On the other hand, if the additional lottery has not been won in the number of CT sets (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CT game number counter by one (S169). Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT start-time process.

  If the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether the number of CT sets is one or more (S172). If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 to the number-of-CT-games counter (S173), and ends the during-CT start process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT, sets the normal ART to the next game (S174), and ends the processing during the start during the CT.

<Start processing during BB>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the process at the start during BB will be described. In the process during the start during BB, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART game number addition lottery table during bonus (FIG. 44) and performs the ART game number addition lottery based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not an additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process.

  On the other hand, when the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the ART set number is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start-time processing. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the start-up processing during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initialization processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a spinner stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires a spinner stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the turning body stop initial setting table, and obtains each information based on the turning body stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 obtains various information associated with the turning stop number, for example, determination data according to the pressing order.

  Next, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in a symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initialization processing. The stop button inactivity counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R for which the player has not performed a stop operation, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control processing>
Subsequently, the reel stop control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal has been output from the stop switch 7S. When determining that the effective stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 stores a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 updates the operation stop button storage area to manage the type of the pressed stop button and updates the pressed order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and the order thereof. Manages the order (push order) of stop operations.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S203). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the relevant reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

  Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). The number-of-slide-pieces determination processing determines the number of slide pieces specified at the stop start position based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the spinning drum stop initialization table based on the internal winning combination. Processing.

  Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. A generation process is performed (S167). The reel stop command data indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding frames (or the expected stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines an expected stop position based on the stop start position and the number-of-slide-pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The expected stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 31 sets the expected stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storing process (S210). In this symbol code storing process, the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change processing, when the vehicle is at a specific stop position, the stop information group used for stopping the reels is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes a pull-in priority order storage process (S216), and executes a process of step S201. In this draw-in priority storing process, the draw-in priority of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control processing.

<BB check processing>
Subsequently, the BB check processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a bonus state is being made (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 49). The number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the payout number counter during BB is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the payout number counter during BB is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 proceeds to A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 gaming state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 45), performs the CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). When the CT lottery has been won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the number of the ART sets is 0 and the CT lottery is won, in step S227, one is added to the number of the CT sets and one is also added to the number of the ART sets.

  Subsequent to the processing of S227, or when the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). If the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently terminates the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs BB check processing. finish.

  On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25B), determines the lottery state of the CZ, sets it (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  If it is not in the bonus state in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). When the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type random determination table (FIG. 43) and randomly selects and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs a bonus start process (S235), and ends the BB check process. In the bonus start-time process, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processes such as setting the bonus state for the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the game is in the RT5 game state (S241). If it is in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if it is not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to perform the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  If it is determined in S242 that the game is in the RT0 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S243). If “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 proceeds to Subsequently, the RT2 game state flag is set to ON, the game state is shifted from the RT0 game state to the RT2 game state (S244), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the RT0 game state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the game is in the RT1 game state (S245). When the game is in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. (S247), and terminates the RT check processing.

  On the other hand, if “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game state flag and sets the RT1. The game state is shifted to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the RT1 game state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the game is in the RT2 game state (S250). If the game is in the RT2 game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of “RT3 shift lip” is displayed (S251). If “RT3 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to ON and the RT2 game state flag is turned OFF, and the state is shifted from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S250 that the game is not in the RT2 game state (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the game is in the RT3 game state (S261). If the game is in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the symbol combination of “bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 shift lip” is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag on, turns off the RT3 gaming state flag, and switches from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. The state is shifted to the state (S263), and the RT check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of “RT4 transition lip” is displayed. (S264). If “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to ON, and the RT3 game state flag is turned OFF, thereby shifting from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the number of CT sets. Is greater than or equal to 1 (S267).

  If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT to the next game, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value to the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check processing. I do.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), since the game is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 shift lip". It is determined whether or not it has been (S270). If neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while “bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is not displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and executes the RT check process. finish.

<End of CZ / ART processing>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART termination processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the CZ / ART termination processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether the CZ has failed or the ART has terminated (S281). If neither the CZ failure nor the ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ / ART termination processing, while if the CZ failure or the ART termination (YES), Next, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 26 (B)), performs the CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not this pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

  When the pull-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type that has won the next game (S284), and sets a value corresponding to the CZ of the type that has won in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the process at the end of CZ • ART is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the pull-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state to the next game (S286). Next, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 25B), determines the lottery state of the CZ, sets it (S287), and ends the process at the end of the CZ ART.

[Description of operation of sub-control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Sub side navigation control processing>
First, the sub navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub side navigation control processing, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the processing of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the received start command data includes navigation data.

  If the navigation data has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 48, for example, when navigation data “4” is acquired, sub CPU 81 sets navigation data for notifying the pressing order “left, middle, right” as sub-side navigation data. I do. Thereby, the contents of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the navigation (notification of the stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to navigate, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine from the various information included in the start command data whether navigation is necessary. .

  If it is determined that there is no need for navigation (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub navigation control processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub navigation control processing. For example, the sub CPU 81 determines that the combination “F_Surelilip” is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the symbol combination of “triple chililip” (E.g., navigation data for aiming at a Chile symbol by pushing forward) is set, and if the role "F_Sure Chile Lip" is determined as an internal winning combination, and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol "Replay" The navigation data for displaying the combination (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than the forward pressing) is set. Thus, even when the main side does not report the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can report the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a registration operation has been received (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is received on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is received on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been received. I do.

  If the registration operation has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets a player registration state (S312). As will be described later, when the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 allows the first sub display device 201 to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29). The display screen 201 is controlled.

  On the other hand, when the registration operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a registration deletion operation has been received (S313). For example, when a specific operation is received on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that a registration deletion operation has been received. If the registration deletion operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

  On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state has been cleared, the sub CPU 81 disables the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen of the device 201 is controlled.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322), and ends the history management process. The sub CPU 81 can recognize, for example, the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and furthermore, the combination of the symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, the combination determined as the internal winning combination). The winning of the role) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition state of the gaming state from the start command data, for example. From the game results obtained from the various command data, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, various information such as the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (the number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of winnings of each combination, and the winning probability. Game history can be managed.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachislot machine 1 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted. The features of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment described below can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
A control system provided in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

The pachislot machine 1 includes a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachislot machine 1 includes a reel relay terminal plate 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet side relay substrate 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachislot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal plate 73 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 440, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442.
Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 410 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio indicator 422 and a changeover switch 423 connected to the ratio display board 421. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on a signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display device 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio display 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and details of various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting key type switch 430 is used to set any one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit given to the player, or to set the pachislot machine 1 Used to check the set values that have been set. When receiving an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a set value according to the content of the operation from among a plurality of set values.

  The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal plate 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether a medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used to reset (initialize) various data of the pachislot machine 1.

  The power supply device 450 includes a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71, and a power switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed to supply necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachislot machine 1 has a door relay terminal plate 460 and a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and a sub relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub-relay board 75 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and the shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion detecting means) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on a path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

  The door opening / closing monitor switch 462 outputs a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1 to notify the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the spinning reel and a circuit for displaying the reel that can be stopped by an LED or the like. Further, a stop switch is provided on the stop switch substrate 463. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed (stop operation) by the player.

  The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14, and is inserted when receiving insertion of a medal, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable, and when performing a re-game. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the information display 14. The game operation display board 470 is connected to an LED group 471. The LED group 471 is, for example, a mark for displaying a game start or a mark for performing a re-game based on a signal input from the game operation display board 470. Lights up.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub relay board 75. Further, the pachislot machine 1 includes speakers 9L and 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 82 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 480 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge board 82 and the liquid crystal relay board 480 are housed in a sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 82 is a substrate for managing effect images (video), sound, light, and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the sub-control circuit mounted on the sub-control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a main control circuit of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, the main control circuit mainly includes a microcomputer 30 mounted on a main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 includes a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to a sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. The main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times relating to unit games.

  The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

  The main CPU 31 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 422 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 69, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the ratio display 422 for displaying various ratios. FIG. 71A shows an example of mounting the ratio display 422, and FIG. 71B shows the content displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Structure of percentage display)
As shown in FIG. 71, the ratio display 422 is configured by a 4-digit 7-segment LED. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 (B), the upper 2 digits indicate the type of the displayed ratio, and the lower 2 digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachislot machine 1 because it is used when a manager (a clerk of a game store or the like) checks the pachislot machine 1 for unauthorized modification. At this time, it is preferable that the ratio indicator 422 be provided inside a main control board case that covers the main control board 71 in order to prevent improper manipulation of the ratio indicator 422 itself.

  As a specific example of attachment, as shown in FIG. 71 (A-1), the ratio display 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or as shown in FIG. 71 (A-2). Thus, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), it is preferable to be provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Usually, a seal is attached to the main control board case. However, when the ratio indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the ratio indicator 422 may be impaired by the seal. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so as not to cause the problem. Further, a caulking recording seal is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking recording seal is a seal in which a person in charge of opening the caulking record and a date entry field, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a seal of a two-dimensional code used at the time of manufacturing may be further attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the arrangement is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired even by such a sticking member such as a seal.
The front door (the upper door 62a or the lower door 62a or the lower door) may also be provided by a caulking member or a harness that is assembled to the main control board, or another board having a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in a superimposed manner, or another member in the housing. When the door 62b) is opened, it is preferable that the design is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired, so that the efficiency of the administrator's work of checking the ratio indicator is improved.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the ratio indicator 422 displays the total specific section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio between the latest 6000 games, the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the bonus ratio, and the like. Is displayed. When displaying the total specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the continuous character ratio between the latest 6,000 games is displayed. In the upper two digits, “= r” is displayed, and when displaying the ratio of bonuses between the last 6,000 games, in the upper two digits, “= b” is displayed, and the total continuous bonus ratio is displayed. In this case, “Ar” is displayed in the upper two digits, and “Ab” is displayed in the upper two digits when displaying the cumulative accessory ratio. In addition, in the lower 2 digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, the corresponding ratio is displayed in percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to a ratio of the number of games in the gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all the gaming states (ie, the total number of games). In this case, the game state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high degree of expectation of transition to the ART game state in addition to the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART game state (see FIG. 7). ).

The main control board 71 counts, by a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, the total number of games indicating the number of games in all the game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in the game state advantageous to the player. In advance, the specific section ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Specific section ratio = Specific number of games / Total number of games × 100

  In addition, the “continuous bonus ratio” refers to a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus against the total number of medals paid out in all game states (ie, the total number of payouts). It refers to the ratio of the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

The main control board 71, in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, the total number of payouts indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states, the first special specialty, or the first special specialty The number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to the first aspect of the invention is counted and the number of medals paid out during the first specific game is counted, and the ratio of the continuous bonus medals is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive bonuses ratio = Payout number during first specific game / Total payout number × 100

  Further, the “principal ratio” refers to the total number of medals paid out during the operation of any one of the medals with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (ie, the total number of payouts). It means the ratio of the occupancy. In addition, any of the special items is a special kind of special type, a continuous operation device for the special type of special type, a continuous operation of the special type, and a continuous operation of the special type. Refers to a device or an ordinary character. Also, during the ART gaming state or during the CZ, since it is an advantageous state for the player, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71, at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, indicates the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states and the medals paid out while any of the accessories is operating. The number of payouts during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of payouts, is counted in advance, and the accessory ratio is calculated by the following equation.
Characters ratio = Payout number during the second specific game / Total payout number × 100

  Further, “total” refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and “the most recent 6,000 games” refers to the period from the game before the 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of “total”, the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in all periods, and when calculating the ratio of “between the latest 6000 games”, The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted from the game before the 6000 game to the present.

  Note that the pachislot machine 1 is configured so that none of the count items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased due to power interruption. Specifically, the data is saved in a backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power failure, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of restoration. Thus, even when the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be accumulated continuously from the time of installation.

  In addition, the right to replay a game in accordance with the winning of the replay can be considered as payout of the same number of medals as the medal used for the game, or can be considered as payout of 0 medals. In the above-described calculation of the ratio, the calculation result may be different between a calculation method A in which the right to replay is regarded as payout of medals and a calculation method B in which the right to replay is not regarded as payout of medals. For example, in the calculation of the ratio to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (total payout number), such as the ratio of consecutive bonuses and the ratio of bonuses, a calculation method A in which the right to replay is regarded as the payout of medals. In this case, the total number of payouts increases by the number of times the replay wins, and as a result, the ratio decreases. On the other hand, in the calculation method B in which the right to the replay is not considered to be the payout of the medal, the prize of the replay does not affect the total payout number, and as a result, the ratio increases. Such a separation between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of wins in the replay increases, and thus increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, the ratio display unit 422 may switchably display the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, when there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added and both may be displayed simultaneously.
Also, in the case of displaying a continuous accessory ratio or an accessory ratio on a setting screen (a so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by a store manager, similarly, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed. Good.

(Display contents of the ratio display (switch display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and may be changed according to the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 69). Various ratios may be switched manually by hand, or the various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Contents of the percentage display (when an error occurs))
In pachislot machines, rules are established in the industry so as not to unnecessarily increase gambling, for example, that the ratio of advantageous gaming states to the player for all games does not become too high, In order to be able to play a game in a normal game state with peace of mind, medals are paid out not less than a predetermined value not only in an advantageous game state but also in a normal game state, thereby lowering a normal base (so-called coin holding). There are regulations that should not be too long. The above-described various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 are used to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although the regulation value may temporarily exceed the regulation value due to accidental succession of bonuses, etc., from a statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display as the number of games increases increases It converges as it approaches the created design values. For this reason, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 games, and a value that deviates from the design value is displayed, it can be inferred that an illegal act has been performed. Further, when a value having a large discrepancy with the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific platform, the administrator can infer that an illegal act has been performed on the specific platform, such as hanging an unauthorized board. As described above, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect the misconduct.

  Therefore, when the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified values, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately understand that fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or greater than a specified value set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is made different between a certain case and a case where the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio indicator 422 blinks the ratio when the ratio is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights the ratio when the value is smaller than the specified value. Thereby, the administrator can grasp at a glance whether or not the various ratios satisfy the specified values.

  Further, when there is a ratio that is equal to or more than the specified value, an external device (for example, a hall computer) may be notified to that effect (for example, notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, when the calculated ratio has a ratio equal to or greater than a specified value, the main control board 71 notifies the external device via the external centralized terminal board 73 of the fact. If the number of output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited, a notification (that is, an error output) is given to an external device by using the output pin currently used as an error output. Is also good.

  It should be noted that the fact that there is a ratio that is equal to or higher than the specified value does not mean that the act is immediately fraudulent. Therefore, in the case of a model that has a first error output that is output when an abnormality that is highly suspected of wrongdoing is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, abnormalities that are highly suspected of misconduct include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write failure, RAM software abnormalities, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormalities, internal voltage abnormalities, and internal winning combinations. In which the symbol related to the payout is displayed on the activated line, when the payout is detected at a timing at which the payout cannot be performed, or when the set value indicates a value other than six levels. In addition, abnormalities that occur in the normal game include, for example, a hopper empty where the medal of the hopper device 40 runs out, a medal clogging detection of a payout of the hopper device 40, a medal overflow that causes the medal auxiliary storage to become full, and a medal. If the medal block at the time of insertion is detected or a medal backflow is detected, or if the number of inserted medals is detected as an abnormal number such as four, the door is opened when the hall clerk opens the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) to supply medals or the like. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper has been disconnected at the time of opening error or supply of medals, and the like.

  By giving a predetermined notification to the external device when there is a ratio that is equal to or greater than the specified value, the administrator can view various ratios without looking at the ratio display 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to determine whether the ratio satisfies the prescribed value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Contents of percentage display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number of times, such as immediately after the installation of the pachislot machine 1, various proportions have large blur widths and move largely up and down. Therefore, until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number, the display mode of the various ratios may be made different. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be made different depending on the type of the ratio to be calculated. For example, the cumulative ratio is displayed in a different manner (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches “17500”, and after the total number of games reaches “17500”, While the display is performed in a normal manner (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a different manner until the total number of games reaches “6000”. After the number of times reaches “6000”, the information may be displayed in a normal mode.

  Also, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches the predetermined number of times, even if the various ratios are equal to or greater than the specified value. Also in this case, the predetermined number of times may be made different depending on the type of the ratio to be calculated.

(Modified example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have the ratio indicator, in the example of mounting the ratio indicator shown in FIG. 71A, it is necessary to make a large modification to the existing pachislot machine. Therefore, a display provided in an existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) for displaying the number of stored medals (the number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in the current game (payout number). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachi-slot machine, a display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) for displaying the number of credits is displayed, and a display unit (described later) for displaying the number of payouts is displayed. The display of the display may be switchable so that the percentage of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

  The special operation is optional, but is preferably an operation using a switch provided inside the housing 60. This can prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a configuration of the information display 14 including an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information of the main control board 71 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 72, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, And a limit lamp 148.

  The insert lamp 141 is lit (or blinks (hereinafter abbreviated)) to inform the player that medals can be inserted, and the start lamp 142 is lit to allow the player to operate the start lever 6 in accordance with the operation of the start lever 6. Is started, and the replay lamp 143 is lit to inform the player that medals have been automatically inserted by the replay operation. The bet number lamp 144 turns on to notify the player of the number of medals bet, and the credit lamp 145 turns on to display the number of medals stored in the pachislot machine 1 (the number of credits). Is turned on, and the number-of-payouts lamp 146 lights up to notify the number of medals paid out (payout number) as a result of the game to the player.

The instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and is lit in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, thereby notifying the player of necessary stop operation information. The state indicator 147b, when lit, informs the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state) that informs a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player. .
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146. However, without providing the notification lamp 147a, either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is turned on when a gaming state advantageous to the player has continued for a long period of time. If the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a possibility that gambling may be instigated. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the continuation of the ART gaming state. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 is turned on when the ART game state is ended by the limit processing, and notifies the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may be blinked when the limit process is almost started, and may be turned on when the limit process is actually performed.
The details of the limit processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

  The insert lamp 141 to the limit lamp 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED, thereby notifying the player of various information related to the game.

<Status display>
Next, the status display 147b provided in the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of lighting timing of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 73, timing T1 is at the start of the game, timing T2 is at the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is at the time of the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. At the time of operation, timing T5 is at the time of the third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is at the time of stopping all reels of the game, timing T7 is at the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game. It is time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, at timing T1 (that is, at the time of starting the game), a lottery transition to a specific section (for example, an ART gaming state) is won. In the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery for shifting to the specific section is won, the status display 147b is turned on during the won game. For example, in the first lighting pattern, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the start of the game that has won the lottery transition to the specific section (timing T1). Further, in the second lighting pattern, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the time of starting the rotation of the reels (timing T2) of the game that has won the lottery transition to the specific section, and in the third lighting pattern, the lottery transition to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on at the time of the first stop operation of the game (timing T3), and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is displayed at the time of stopping all the reels (timing T6) of the game that has won the lottery transition to the specific section. In the lighting pattern example 5, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game that has won the lottery transition to the specific section (timing T7).

  The lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 73 is merely an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state display 147b may be turned on during the game in which the lottery to shift to the specific section is won. Is optional.

  By lighting the status display 147b during the game in which the lottery to the specific section has been won in this way, the player can know that the lottery to the specific section has been won. It is hopeful and suitable.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence / absence of winning is simply notified by turning on / off one lamp, the presence / absence of winning is immediately recognized, but the player feels that the lamp only needs to be lit. This may be interesting, and as a result, the interest in other effects on a liquid crystal display device or the like may be lost. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery transition to the specific section has been won can be reported during the game without becoming monotonous by the following method.

(Contrivance for status indicator 1)
FIG. 72B and FIG. 72C show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b illustrated in FIG. 72B has a plurality of lamps “a” to “i” that are turned on, blinking, and turned off, respectively, and are based on the lighting, blinking, and turning off patterns of the plurality of lamps. Inform the user that the lottery for shifting to the specific section has been won.

  As an example, when the lottery transition to the specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, “a”, “c”, “d”, “h”, and “i” are lit), When no winning has been achieved, a plurality of lamps are lit in a pattern other than the specific pattern. Note that the specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to provide a deeper notification than in the case where a single lamp is simply turned on to inform the player of the winning. For example, as the player repeats the game and learns the lighting pattern at the time of the winning, the detection of the winning becomes faster. Such a playability can be realized.

  It should be noted that the presence / absence of the transfer lottery may not be reported based on the lighting pattern, but may be reported based on the number of lit lamps. For example, when the transfer lottery has been won, a specific number of lamps out of the plurality of lamps are turned on. The lamp may be turned on. Further, for example, when the transition lottery is won, a specified number or more (or a specific number or less) of the plurality of lamps are turned on, and when the transition lottery is not won, a plurality of lamps are turned on. Less than (or more than) a specific number of lamps may be turned on.

  Further, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps in accordance with the progress of the game, it is possible to use the plurality of lamps to perform an effect indicating the expected degree of winning of the shift lottery. For example, when the lighting pattern for notifying that the transfer lottery has been won is “all lamps are turned on”, the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) , When all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the expected degree of winning of the shift lottery in accordance with the progress of the game by increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are turned on.

(Contrivance for status indicator 2)
A status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72C is similar to the status indicator 147b in FIG. 72B in that it has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off. The status indicator 147b differs from the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72C in that the plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. That is, in the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name which is the motif of the pachislot machine 1 or the maker, the shape of the character, etc. Characters and shapes that the player wants to impress are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly memorized by the player, which leads to improvement in brand power.

  Also in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the winning of the shift lottery has been won, and to control the lighting pattern of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Thus, an effect indicating the expected degree of winning of the shift lottery can be performed.

  It should be noted that some pachislot machines may have, as a specific section, a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and may transition to any one of the specific sections based on the result of the shift lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART game state and a CZ, a pachislot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or CZ based on the result of the shift lottery, or the ART game state and the initial game in which the initial game number is 50 games A pachislot machine or the like that has an ART gaming state in which the number is 100 games and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state of the initial number of games determined in accordance with the shift lottery is conceivable.

  Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-described devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status display 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns depending on the type of the specific section won by the shift lottery. It may be made to do. As an example, when the initial game number wins the ART game state of 50 games, the state indicator 147b is turned on in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial game number wins the ART game state of 100 games, Alternatively, the status indicator 147b may be turned on with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

  Thus, since the lighting pattern is different depending on the type of the specific section, the variation of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b can be increased. For the player, it is difficult to accurately grasp the contents of each lighting pattern by increasing the variations of the lighting patterns, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

  Conversely, a plurality of lamps (status display 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transfer lottery. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the won specific section, the type of the won specific section cannot be grasped from the lighting pattern. Some skilled players may memorize the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long ART game state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not so advantageous to the player (for example, an ART game state in which one game ends) are considered. By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the won specific section.

  Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a commonly introduced design does not display the contents of the lighting pattern, but instead of the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is shipped mainly to beginners, such as low-cost ball stores. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchase store may be able to order a desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer class. This makes it possible to report or not report the content of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game store.

  Since the design change of the lumbar panel 25 does not require a test by a testing organization and does not impose a large burden on manufacturing and development costs, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. Can be suitable. Instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, it may be possible to switch between reporting or not reporting the content of the lighting pattern by using a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is pasted or that can be replaced. The place where the contents of the lighting pattern are displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as the place can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Contrivance for status indicator 3)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of winning from being determined based on whether or not one lamp is turned on, the status indicator 147b may be disposed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the winning. The position that is difficult to visually recognize may be, for example, an arbitrary location such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, and the back of the medal insertion slot 22. Further, the status indicator 147b is covered with an opaque cover, and the status indicator 147b can be visually recognized only through a hole (a peephole) formed in the cover, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the status indicator 147b. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a clip of a parking lot use service ticket may be provided in the pachislot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Contrivance for status indicator 4)
In addition, when the status display 147b for notifying the success or failure of the lottery transition to the specific section is at the same position, it can be immediately known only by looking at that location. Therefore, the position of the status display 147b may be switched. Good. As a specific method, it is conceivable that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) at a plurality of positions of the pachislot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and the lamps that notify the success or failure of the shift lottery are changed every time. Can be Thus, for example, at a certain timing, the upper right lamp performs the function of the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lower left lamp performs the function of the status indicator 147b. As a result, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the shift lottery is appropriate only from the lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in another effect on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity based on playability)
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of a method based on game characteristics regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that a lottery to transition to a specific section has been won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, “F_3 choice bell — 1st”, “F_3 choice bell — 2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell — 3rd” are provided as the pushing order, and nine medals are paid out when the pushing order is correct (bell time). A combination of symbols is displayed), and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pushing order, zero or one medal is paid out (a combination of symbols with a spilled bell or the first one is displayed). In the ART gaming state, when the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer according to the pressing combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART gaming state, by playing the game in accordance with the notification, more medals (for example, 9) than the medals (for example, 3) used for the game are paid out.

As a device based on the playability, first, a pushing sequence in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even when the pushing sequence is correctly answered is further provided. In the example illustrated in FIG. 74, as illustrated in FIG. 74A, the pressing sequence of “F_3 alternative one-course_1st”, “F_3 alternative one-copies_2nd”, and “F_3 alternative one-copies_3rd” is provided. When the answer is correct in the order of pushing, the combination of the first symbol is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the order of the pushing is incorrect. When the answer is correct, the combination of the missing symbols is displayed, and 0 medals are paid out.
It is sufficient that the newly provided push sequence does not increase the number of medals even at the time of the correct answer of the push sequence, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game at the time of the correct push sequence is paid out. Then, the number of medals (fourth quantity) smaller than the number (third quantity) at the time of the incorrect answer in the pushing order or a medal in which no medal is paid out (ie, zero) may be used.

  In addition, in terms of game characteristics, at least two types of ART gaming states are provided as ART gaming states. More specifically, all of the pressing combinations (“F_3 alternative one-course_1st” to “F_3 alternative one-course_3rd” and “F_3 alternative one-part_1st” to “F_3 optional one-part_3rd”) are determined as internal winning combinations. The ART gaming state that informs the pressing order of the correct answer when it is performed, and the correct answer when the “F_3 optional 1-copies_1st” to “F_3 optional 1-copies_3rd” among the pressing combinations are determined as the internal winning combination. When the pressing order is notified and “F_3 selection bell — 1st” to “F_3 selection bell — 3rd” are determined as the internal winning combination, there is provided a one-sheet winning combination ART gaming state in which the correct pressing order is not notified.

  Then, in the device based on the playability, the state display 147b is turned on regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the single-piece combination ART gaming state. It should be noted that the lighting pattern of the status display 147b may be different between the ART gaming state and the single-piece ART gaming state, or may be the same.

  With such a contrivance, the status indicator 147b can inform the player that the current gaming status is a gaming status informing of the pressing role, but from the status indicator 147b alone, it is truly advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the player is in the ART gaming state or the one-piece winning combination ART gaming state.

  The transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-copies ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous to the player is performed. Can be performed arbitrarily.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all games other than the ART gaming state are set to the single-coining ART gaming state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the eleventh game, a transition lottery to a specific section (that is, a transition lottery to an ART gaming state) is won, so that the eleventh and subsequent games are executed. Is in the ART gaming state. During this ART gaming state, three-choice one-copies (“F_3-choice one-copies_1st” to “F_3-choice one-copies_3rd”) and three-choice bells (“F_3-choice-bell_1st” to “F_3-choice bell_3rd”) Is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state are set to the one-sheet winning ART gaming state. In the one-piece combination ART gaming state, in the game in which the three-choice one-piece combination is determined as the internal winning combination (the first game), the pressing order of the correct answer is notified while the three-choice bell is internally won. In the game determined as the combination (the second game), the pressing order of the correct answer is not notified.

  When all of the games other than the ART gaming state are set to the single-player ART gaming state, the state indicator 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery transition to the ART gaming state has been won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the shift lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games other than the ART gaming state, only the game in which the three-choice one-part winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-part-part ART gaming state, and the other games are played. , An ART game state and a single-coin ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the eleventh game, a transition lottery to a specific section (that is, a transition lottery to an ART gaming state) is won, so that the eleventh and subsequent games are executed. Is in the ART gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among the games before winning the transition lottery to the ART gaming state, only the game in which the three-choice one-prize combination is determined as the internal winning combination is replaced with the one-prize combination ART. The game state is set, and other games are set to the normal game state. More specifically, in the first game, the three-choice one-prize combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the game state of the first game is set to the one-prize combination ART gaming state, and the notification of the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-coin combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, the game is in the normal gaming state and the pressing order of the correct answer is not notified.

  As described above, even when only the game in which the three-choice one-coupling combination out of the games other than the ART gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-coupling ART gaming state, the status display 147b displays the three-choice one-part combination. In a game in which one winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the game is turned on regardless of whether or not the lottery transition to the ART gaming state has been won. It will not be possible to grasp that the transfer lottery has been won. Even in the single-player ART gaming state, a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and if the single-player ART gaming state is always set as shown in FIG. 74 (B), The notification game state in which the notification of the pressing order is performed may be continued for a long time, and the gambling of the game may be unnecessarily enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), only the game in which the three-choice one-of-a-kind combination among the games other than the ART gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-piece-apart ART gaming state, whereby the notification gaming is achieved. The period of the state can be limited, and the gambling can be prevented from increasing unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, a basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the notification in the pachislot machine 1. In FIG. 75, only the game state related to the presence or absence of the notification is shown, and the transition flow of the game state related to the presence or absence of the bonus is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section in which a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is not reported and a specific section in which a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is reported. Note that the normal section corresponds to, for example, a normal game state in the general game state of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, a general game of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART game states in the state correspond to the state (see FIG. 7).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is achieved by winning the lottery transition to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed based on information having no difference in the set values. “Information with no difference in set values” refers to a role determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process (setting unquestioned role), and a set of all set values when all reels are stopped. This includes at least a combination of symbols to be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols having no setting difference).

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a setting unquestionable combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed, and a combination having a setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is not performed. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a symbol combination without a setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed, and a symbol combination with a setting difference is displayed. In this case, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is not performed.

  The lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed based on a complete probability that is predetermined and does not change at all. The “complete probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all” means a probability that does not fluctuate based on at least the set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

  In this manner, by performing the transfer lottery performed based on “information having no difference in the set value” with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment can The expected degree of transfer can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in payout performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of a set difference with a set difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transfer lottery)
Here, FIG. 77 shows an example of a lottery table used for shifting to a specific section. FIG. 77 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 77 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a shift lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table sets the probability denominator to 32768, and the transition lottery table sets the probability denominator to 256.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the internal lottery table defines information on lottery values corresponding to each combination. Here, the hand determined by the lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference hand having a different lottery value depending on a set value, and a setting-unknown hand having the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the combinations “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance lip A”, etc. are set difference combinations having different lottery values depending on the set values. "And the like are the same settings regardless of the set value. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the setting difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestionable combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed. be able to. Note that not performing the transfer lottery to the specific section includes not only not performing the transfer lottery itself, but also performing the transfer lottery but always making it non-winning. In addition, the transfer lottery to the specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the setting inquiries is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting in which the transfer lottery is not performed and the setting in which the transfer lottery is not performed are not necessarily performed. A role may be provided.

  Subsequently, as in the example shown in FIG. 77 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value of the transition lottery lottery result for each setting unknown role determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the shift lottery to the specific section is performed based on the complete probability that is predetermined and does not change at all, the information of the lottery value specified in the shift lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. Value.

  The “complete probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all” may further include a probability uniquely determined for “information having no difference in set value”. In recent pachislot machines, there are cases where a state where it is easy to win the shift lottery and a state where it is difficult to win are provided. In such a case, in the case of performing the transfer lottery with “probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value”, for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned combination, regardless of the gaming state, The shift lottery in which the winning is performed with the same probability is performed. Conversely, in the case of performing the transfer lottery with the “probability that is not uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value (that is, the probability of fluctuating)”, for example, Transition lottery to win with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, perform transition lottery to win with a high probability, and the current gaming state is a low probability state In this case, a shift lottery in which the winning is achieved with a low probability is performed.

(CZ realization method when transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, in the case of performing the transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability as described above, the transfer lottery of winning with the same probability is performed in any gaming state, and therefore, as in the case of CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state where it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to take measures. Subsequently, an example of a method of implementing CZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 78A is a diagram illustrating an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, the push order of the correct answer of the push sequence having no difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination during the CZ is notified, and the lottery transition to the ART gaming state is performed when the push sequence without the set difference is won. It is determined based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, as shown in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the combination of the symbols of the bell is displayed when all the reels are stopped, the transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and the bell is spilled. When the combination of the symbols on the sheet is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is not performed.

  When the normal section and the CZ are compared, although the winning probability of the pressing order is the same, the pressing order of the correct answer is not reported in the normal section, so that it is difficult to display the symbol combination in which the shift lottery is performed. On the other hand, during the CZ, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified, so that the combination of the symbols for which the transfer lottery is performed is easily displayed. As a result, during the CZ, the frequency at which the transfer lottery is performed is higher than in the normal section, and even when the transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ (chance) that easily transitions to the ART gaming state is performed. Zone) can be realized.

  FIG. 78B is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachislot machine 1, by shifting the RT gaming state, it is possible to change the winning probability of the hand (replay) related to the replay. Therefore, by changing the winning probabilities of some combinations having no setting difference among the combinations (replays) related to the replay in the RT game state, the ART game can be performed in one RT game state and another RT game state. The frequency at which the transition to the state is determined can be made different.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the combination “F_Chililip” is a setting-independent combination without a setting difference, and as in the transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B). When “F_Chililip” is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the winning combination “F_Chililip” has no setting difference, but the winning probability differs depending on the RT gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state has a higher winning probability than the RT1 gaming state. It is determined with a high probability as an internal winning combination.

  Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of performing the transfer lottery is higher than in the RT1 gaming state, and even when performing the transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability, it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as CZ.

(Another example of a method of realizing CZ when the transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Next, FIG. 78C is a diagram illustrating another example of a method for implementing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 78 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (cassette continuous actuation device according to the second special bonus). The pachislot machine 1 according to this method has a single bonus (hereinafter, “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, “RB”) as the bonuses to be randomly drawn during the MB. (B) SB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination, Or a prize) must be satisfied. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the end of the MB according to the satisfied end condition. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of the RB, the state shifts to the ART game state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends under other conditions, the state changes to the ART game state after the MB ends. Has decided not to move.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the MB is completed (so-called puncture) due to the SB being established, or when the RB is established before receiving the payout of the specified number of medals, the transition to the ART gaming state is made. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) for winning.
As a reel stop control during MB, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols with payout of medals even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination. And the game in which RB is determined as the internal winning combination may be the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state assuming that the termination condition (C) is satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), (1) when the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is CZ. Then, (2) when medals exceeding the specified number are paid out during MB or when SB is established, MB as CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, if RB is determined as an internal winning combination during (3) MB, the MB which is CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to between RB flags. Then, (4) when an RB is won between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at a high RT generated when the RB ends. . When an RB wins in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB has ended without passing between RB flags.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (which functions as CZ) during the normal section and the winning probability of RB (which triggers the transition to the ART gaming state) during MB are common to all set values. However, the winning probability of the SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in the MB may be a common probability for all set values or a different probability depending on the set value. For example, when the winning probability of the SB in the MB is made different according to the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the winning probability of the SB and the longer the MB is likely to continue, so that the ART gaming state in the CZ (MB) is maintained. The expectation of the shift to へ can be increased, and the variation of the payout specification can be enriched.
Further, the winning probability of the RB, which is a trigger for shifting to the ART gaming state, can be arbitrarily set according to the relationship with other end conditions. Therefore, it is preferable that the prescribed number is set to a small number such as 10 to 30 and the RB is determined as the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability in the MB.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed in the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, when performing the shift lottery in addition to the internal lottery, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous. Therefore, a method of improving the main control board 71 will be described below.

  FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 70B, the main control circuit includes a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication can be performed by serial communication or the like. Note that the configuration of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 70, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and a plurality of second main control boards 71b are provided as main control boards. For example, internal lottery using an internal lottery table is performed on the first main control board 71a, and second main control By performing the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table on the board 71b, the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery can be sufficiently ensured, and the lottery with various variations can be performed.

  In FIG. 70B, the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The upstream and second main control boards 71b may be set to be downstream, and communication may be performed only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b). By using only one-way communication, the communication load can be reduced as compared with the case of using two-way communication.

  When the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed on different boards (the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b), the order of performing the internal lottery and the transfer lottery is arbitrary. For example, the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate after the transfer random determination is first performed on one substrate, and conversely, the transfer random determination may be performed on the other substrate after the internal random determination is first performed on the one substrate. It may be good. In this case, if the transfer lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transfer lottery, so that the transfer lottery is performed without being affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, such a configuration may be adopted in a case where the transfer lottery is performed at a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination. As a result, even if an illegal act of illegally inputting winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is performed, the result of the transition lottery is not affected, and therefore, an illegal act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result is performed. Can be suppressed. When the transfer lottery is performed first, the lottery based on the information having the same set value can be performed only by performing the lottery having the same set value because the internal winning combination is not related.

  Conversely, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transfer lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal lottery determined as the result of the internal lottery may be performed. The transfer lottery may be performed without referring to the combination. When performing the transfer lottery with reference to the internal winning combination, by performing the transfer lottery based on the setting unaffected combination as described above, it is possible to perform the lottery based on information having no difference in the set value. When performing the transfer lottery without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having the same set value can be performed by performing the lottery having the same set value.

  FIG. 70C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. What is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM). Therefore, in FIG. 70 (C), one main control board 71 like the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b is used. A plurality of main ROMs are provided above. In this case, for example, various tables used for internal lottery are stored in the first main ROM 32a, and various tables used for transitional lottery are stored in the second main ROM 32b. A sufficient capacity can be ensured, and lottery with various variations can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 75, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. Note that, as the end condition of the specific section, any conditions such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigation performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, and the difference number can be used. . The end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section. For example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

  As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied. However, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. If the navigation is shifted from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the guaranteed number of navigations has not been performed, then the guaranteed number of times Until the navigation is performed, the specific section is continued without ending, and the navigation is performed from the specific section to the normal section according to the guaranteed number of navigations (navi guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a flow of a limit process in the specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as a CZ or an ART game state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit obtained by the player during the specific section increases, and the overall profit is balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profit obtained by the player during the normal section, and the gambling of the game is increased. Therefore, in recent years, it has been demanded that the duration of the state advantageous to the player be suppressed to a certain period. The limit process is a process of suppressing the duration of a specific section advantageous to the player to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count limit games)
First, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing the limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 79 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of games that have been continued (the number of limit games). For example, when the ART gaming state is continuing, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by one for each game. In addition, for example, when the game shifts to the ART game state after shifting from the normal section to the CZ, since the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART game state as described above, the main control board 71 sets the CZ continuation game. Then, the sum of the number and the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed is counted as the limit game number.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), a standby section may be inserted without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine that makes the RT game state different between the normal section and the specific section, the specific section needs to be started after transitioning the RT game state, so that the standby section may be once inserted. As a specific case, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a standby section may be interposed at the time of transition from the normal section to the specific section, and a bonus (accessory) may be provided during the specific section. When activated, a standby section may be inserted when returning to a specific section after the bonus has ended.

  In such a standby section, the main control board 71 may count as the limit game number, or may not count. That is, the main control board 71 may count the number of games “A1” to “An” in FIG. 79B as the number of limit games, or may not count the number of games as the number of limit games. Good.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may determine whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of the standby section. For example, when a lottery transition to a specific section is won, a specific section sandwiched when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section is not counted as the limit game number, and a bonus (accessory) operates during the specific section. In such a case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the bonus ends may be counted as the limit game number assuming that the whole is in a series of advantageous states.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a standby section is provided to transition the RT gaming state, during the standby section, at least a notification for transitioning the RT gaming state needs to be performed, but the notification about the pressing role related to the increase or decrease of the medal is not necessarily performed. No need to do. In the pachislo machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes causes the transition of the RT gaming state, so it is necessary to notify the pushing sequence "Pushing sequence bell" related to the increase or decrease of the medals. When the combination of the symbols of the bell spills is controlled so as not to transition the RT gaming state, the pressing sequence "pushing sequence bell" related to the increase / decrease of the medals does not necessarily need to be notified during the standby section.

  Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as the waiting section in which the notification of the pushing sequence related to the increase / decrease of medals is in the advantageous state for the player, and counts the number of pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. The standby section in which the notification of the winning combination is not performed may not be counted as the limit game number.

  Further, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), if the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the flag of the bonus is determined during the specific section. There may be a period and a bonus state. The main control board 71 may count the game between these flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games, or may not count it. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of games “C1” to “Cn” and the number of games “D1” to “Dn” in FIG. 79C as the limit game number. Alternatively, it may not be counted as the limit game number.

  In this case, the main control board 71 may count the game between the flags as the number of limit games, while not counting the game during the bonus state as the number of limit games. The game in the middle may not be counted as the limit game number, while the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number. In addition, both the game between the flags and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number, and conversely, both may not be counted as the limit game number.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts as the limit game number between the flags for notifying the pushing sequence related to the increase / decrease of medals as being in an advantageous state for the player, and counts the number of medals. It is good also as not counting as a limit game number between the flags which are not notified about the pushing sequence regarding increase / decrease.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the limit game number according to the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, even in the bonus state, the pressing order (that is, the role in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the pressing order) may be possible. In such a pachi-slot machine, the player can get more profit by notifying the pushing sequence during the bonus state. Therefore, when notifying the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state, the main control board 71 counts the game during the bonus state as the limit game number, and is advantageous to the player during the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the game in the bonus state may not be counted as the limit game number.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of the limit process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the above-described counting method reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the game state from a specific section to a normal section. Let it. That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the number of games, the number of navigations, and the like still remain (the end condition is not satisfied). .

  Then, with the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process of initializing the value of a variable related to generation of a notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is, or may be initialized to RT0 which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT gaming state for the ART gaming state, the transition to the RT gaming state by a combination of symbols such as a bell spilling eye and a falling replay is not performed, and the RT gaming state in which the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won is ended. In the case of, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, a state in which the player has a high RT, which is advantageous to the player, continues, so that the latter specification is desirably a gaming state with a low replay probability. In particular, in the case of an RT gaming state in which the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and substantially continues to the next bonus, the gambling is appropriately suppressed by dropping the RT gaming state by the limit processing. it can.

  When the limit processing is performed in this manner, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the state indicator 147b until the limit game number reaches the fixed game number, the limit game number reaches the fixed game number, and ends the specific section. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. When the specific section is ended by the limit processing, the main control board 71 turns on the limit lamp 148 for a predetermined period thereafter. When the limit process is performed at the end of a game in which the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games, the predetermined period may be, for example, a game following the game in which the limit process has been performed. Also, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit processing is about to be activated, and notify the player that the limit processing is about to be activated.

  Here, for example, when a game in the bonus state is also counted as the limit game number, the limit game number may reach a certain game number in the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), even during the bonus state, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit processing during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80 (B), the game state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the limit game number reaches the fixed number of games. In the example shown in FIG. The gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state ends after the timing when the number of games reaches the certain number of games.

  Of course, when counting the number of limit games during the standby game in the specific section or during the flag of the bonus, the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games in the standby section or during the flag. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the standby section or between the flags, and the timing at which the transition from the standby section to the specific section after the limit game number reaches the certain number of games, or the limit game number is reached. After reaching a certain number of games, the limit process may be performed at a timing when a transition is made to a specific section through a bonus state from between the flags.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
In addition, when the specific section is ended by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating the end to an external device (a data counter or a hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped conventionally.
If the limit game number has reached the certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 outputs the external device at the timing when the limit game number reaches the certain number of games (that is, during the bonus state). May be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs the bonus state during the specific section). If the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the game, a predetermined signal may be output to an external device when the bonus state ends.

  Further, when the limit processing has been performed a number of times exceeding the number of times normally assumed in one pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 provides not only a signal indicating that the limit processing has been performed (limit signal) but also a signal indicating that the limit processing has been performed. Alternatively, a signal (error signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed more times than expected may be output to the external device. Specifically, when the number of times that the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games within a specific period (that is, the number of times limit processing has been performed) reaches a predetermined number, the main control board 71 sends a specific number of Output a signal. As an example, when the limit processing is performed more times than expected between the time when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 sends the error signal together with the limit signal to the external device. Output. Thereby, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times, such as 10 times in one day, the fact can be grasped on the hall side.

(Navigation guarantee processing)
Next, a navigation assurance process in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the flow of the navigation guarantee process at the end of the specific section.
In the case of a pachi-slot machine that manages the end condition of a specific section by the number of games, if the number of combinations to be notified (for example, a pressing order bell or the like) is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section, if the number of times is determined to be small, the combination of There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a transition is made to a specific section, the minimum number of navigations is guaranteed, and the navigation is continued without ending the specific section until the guaranteed number of navigations is performed.

  Here, in FIG. 81, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (C), at the end of 50 games, the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. It is assumed that In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), when the specific section has continued 50 games (that is, the termination condition is satisfied), the notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the termination condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), after that, in the fifty-fourth game, the combination to be notified (for example, the pressing order bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the combination to be notified is notified. The main control board 71 ends the specific section when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed following this notification. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been made yet by the notification after the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

  By the way, in the pachi-slot machine, a plurality of types of pushing sequences having different payout numbers of medals at the time of the correct answer of the pushing sequence are provided as the pushing sequence, and the main control board 71 controls these pushing sequences during the specific section. May inform you of the order of correct answers. As a plurality of types of pushing order, for example, even if the answer is correct in the pushing order, the medal does not increase (that is, the payout number is equal to or less than the inserted number), or the medal increase is extremely small (for example, payout at the time of 3-bet). A pushing sequence in which the number of medals is increased (for example, the number of payouts when 3-bet is 9) can be considered. Regardless of the pushing sequence, it is common that when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order, the payout number of medals is smaller than when the answer is correct in the pushing order, or the payout number of medals is 0.

  From a player's point of view, even if the medal does not increase or the increase in the push medal is extremely small when the push order is correct, the total number of medals obtained during the specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigation times during a specific section. On the other hand, for a pushing sequence in which the number of medals increases when the pushing sequence is correct, the number of medals obtained during the specific section is affected. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the number of navigations is guaranteed during the specific section. Is preferred.

  Therefore, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of pushing sequences in which the number of payouts of medals at the time of pushing order is different, only the pushing sequence whose payout number at the time of pushing order is larger than the number of inserted coins is The number of times of navigation may be guaranteed, and the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed for the pressing combination in which the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer of the pressing order is equal to or less than the number of insertions. In addition, among a plurality of types of pushing roles having different payout numbers of medals at the time of pushing order correct answer, only the pushing order with the largest payout number at the time of pushing order correct answer guarantees the number of navigation times, and other pushing sequences For, the number of navigation times may not be guaranteed.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 determines that if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the pushing sequence that guarantees the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, the navigation number is reduced. Regardless of the number of times of notification for the pushing sequence that is not guaranteed, the specific section is ended on condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, in a situation where the notification to the pushing sequence that guarantees the number of navigation times is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section and the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, the main control board 71 Is continued without ending, and thereafter, the specific section is ended at the timing when the notification for the pushing sequence for guaranteeing the number of navigation times is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

  By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) of the pushing sequence that affects the total number of medals obtained during the specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. .

  Subsequently, a case will be described in which the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notifying the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state. FIGS. 81 (B) and 81 (C) show that, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been made yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example is shown in which the state has once shifted to the bonus state.

  Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when viewing the specific section as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), when the termination condition of the specific section is satisfied, the main control board 71 does not notify the guaranteed number of times even during the specific section. If the transition to the bonus state has been made at least once, the specific section may be ended when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the notification of the number of guarantees has not yet been performed, the main control board 71 performs the operation during this specific section. Regardless of whether or not the bonus state has been reached, the specific section may be continued until the notification of the number of guarantees is performed, and then the specific section may be ended at the timing of the notification of the number of guarantees. Good.

  Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without notification of the number of guarantees will be described. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches the certain number of games, it can be considered that a certain profit has been given to the player. As shown in the figure, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be ended even if the number of guaranteed times has not been notified yet. Conversely, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), even if the limit game number in the specific section has reached a certain game number, the main control board 71 does not notify the guaranteed number of games yet. The specific section may be continued until the notification of the guaranteed number is performed, and thereafter, the specific section may be ended at the timing of the notification of the guaranteed number.

  Note that, in the case where the specific section is continued until the number of times of guarantee is notified by the navigation guarantee processing, whether or not so-called additional lottery is performed during the specific section after satisfying the end condition is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, but may not perform the additional lottery even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. Conversely, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery during the period from when the termination condition is satisfied to when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  When the specific section is continued by the navigation guarantee processing until the number of times of guarantee is notified, on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, the normal screen is returned at a timing satisfying the end condition of the specific section. If the pressing order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order may be notified (navigated) on the normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notifying the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 continues to light the status indicator 147b, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen during the specific section. The display screen is switched from to the display screen in the normal section. Then, after that, when the pressing order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the pressing order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 , And informs the pressing order on the normal screen. Then, when the number of guarantees is notified, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Overview of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 76, an outline of each game state of the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment roughly includes a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the standby section is a state after the lottery transition to the specific section is won and before the transition from the normal section to the specific section.

  In the normal section, the standby section, and the specific section, the role related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination according to the presence or absence of the winning of the role related to the bonus or the activation of the bonus, and the bonus operates. "Bonus not activated (between non-flag)" and the combination related to the bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, and the probability that the bonus is not activated and "between the flags" and the internal winning combination is determined. "Bonus state (no setting difference)" in which the bonus according to the bonus combination having no difference is activated, and "Bonus corresponding to the bonus combination having the setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination" Bonus state (with setting difference) ".

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the “non-operating bonus (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 In addition, the status display 147b is turned off, and when the combination related to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub control board 72. Specifically, when any of the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these combinations. Assuming that the role “push order bell” has been determined as the internal winning combination, the information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72.

  Further, in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)” and the “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 performs the lottery for shifting to the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. On the other hand, in the “inter-flag” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the lottery for shifting to the specific section. Further, in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification at the time of winning the pressing order is performed.

  In the “non-operating bonus (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 displays the state display 147b. Lights up. Note that the main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and during the specific section.

  In the “non-operating bonus (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 presses the winning combination. The pressing order of the correct answer at the time may be reported, or may not be reported. In the case of informing the pressing order of the correct answer, the main control board 71 transmits to the sub-control board 72 without grouping the roles related to the informing. Specifically, when any of the combination “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually determines the internal winning combination. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the roles related to the notification and transmits the group to the sub-control board 72.

  In the “non-operating bonus (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)”, and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 is won. The shift lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the shift lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the winning specific section). Further, in the “non-operating bonus (between non-flags)”, “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform additional lottery for the duration of the specific section. In the “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section based on information having no difference in the set value. It may not be.

  Further, in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the specific section, the main control board 71 displays the state display 147b. Is turned on, and the pressing order of the correct answer at the time of pressing the winning combination is notified. Therefore, the main control board 71 plays a role related to the notification in “bonus non-operation (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Are transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

  Further, the main control board 71 wins in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the specific section. The shift lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the shift lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the winning specific section). Further, the main control board 71 adds the continuation period of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value in the “bonus non-operation (between non-flag)” and the “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the specific section. While the lottery is performed, in the “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” of the specific section, no additional lottery is performed for the duration of the specific section.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to a specific section only at the time of three bets or an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section, and may not perform these lotteries at the time of one bet or two bets.

<Output of transfer lottery result to external device>
82 to 84, a flow when the result of the lottery for shifting to the specific section is output from the pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

In a game store, external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer are installed in addition to a pachislot machine, for example, when a bonus state starts in the pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter, and data is output. A counter counts the number of bonuses. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the lottery for shifting to the specific section is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, the main control board 71 recognizes an event (for example, the RT state) that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side. A lottery result is estimated from a transition or a plurality of stop operations performed in a specific pressing order, and a signal is output to an external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the shift lottery is delayed by several games from the timing of the actual winning, and a specific pressing order is accidentally repeated by the stop operation of the player. In such a case, it is presumed that the transfer lottery has been won even though the transfer lottery has not been won. As a result, an erroneous signal may be output.
Further, in the specification of outputting a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, if a bonus is drawn during the ART, the signal is also output when returning from the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus to the RT gaming state for the ART after the bonus is consumed. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the correct number of winnings of ART and the number of digested sets, and it is difficult for the player to grasp accurate information when guessing a setting or selecting a platform. Had occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery to the specific section is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result. Can be output.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of signal output timing to an external device. In FIG. 82, the timing T1 is the start of a game that has won the lottery transition to a specific section (for example, the ART gaming state), the period P1 is a period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is This is a period between one game of the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 82, at timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for shifting to the specific section is won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the shift lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, so that the main control board 71 can recognize that the shift lottery has been won from the timing T1. .

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the period P1 of the game in which the transfer lottery has been won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the game that has won the transfer lottery to the specific section (that is, at the time of operating the start lever 6). are doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the shift lottery to the external device at the start of the reel rotation of the game, and in the output pattern example C, the main control board 71 outputs the external lottery at the time of the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transfer lottery is output to the device, and in output pattern example D, the result of the transfer random determination is output to the external device when all reels of the game are stopped.

  In addition, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transfer lottery to the external device in a game after the game that has won the transfer lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device when inserting a medal for a game next to the game that has won the transfer lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 performs the random lottery to the external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games are further performed thereafter (for example, at the start of the game in which the specific section starts). The result is output.

  Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 82 is merely an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery to the external device is determined at an arbitrary timing after the transfer lottery to the specific section is won. Can be output.

  Also, by combining the lighting pattern example of the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 73 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 82 arbitrarily, it is possible to realize a novel fun that has never been seen before. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won may be output to the external device prior to the lighting of the status display 147b. Conversely, the external device may be output after the status display 147b is turned on. A signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won may be output to the external device simultaneously with the lighting of the status display 147b. Good.

  For example, by outputting a signal to an external device before the status indicator 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status indicator 147b is turned on. The transition of the specific section can be detected from an external device other than 1. In addition, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output slightly before the lighting of the status indicator 147b, so that the status indicator 147b is turned on (notification in the pachislot machine 1). The timing can be matched with the update of the external device (notification other than the pachislot machine 1), and the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there are only a limited number of output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 such as when there is no free output pin on an 8-pin signal line for outputting a signal to an external device, The main control board 71 may not output a signal to the external device even when the transfer lottery is won.

  In the above-described embodiment, a signal is output when a transfer lottery is won. However, a signal may be output when a specific section such as an ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which the number of ART game states is set to one set of 30 games and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the shift lottery is won (so-called first hit), and after the first set of 30 games is consumed, two sets are set. An external signal may be output at the timing when the eye is started. By outputting a signal in this manner, the exact number of sets can be grasped. In addition, the initial hit signal and the signal at the time of continuation may be different signals so that the number of initial hits and the number of continuations can be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. .

In such a gaming machine that manages the number of sets, when the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART gaming state, after the end of the bonus, the pachislot machine that restarts the game from the remaining number of games since the bonus winning in the set, Some pachislot machines start a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, if a bonus is won when 25 out of 30 games in one set of the ART game state are consumed and the bonus state is started, the number of remaining games is 5 after the bonus is over (the remaining time when the bonus is won). The ART gaming state is restarted from (number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted since one set is simply divided on the way. On the other hand, in the latter case, since one set of ART is substantially added as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART gaming state, it is desirable to output a signal when ART is resumed. Note that the same signal output processing can be applied to not only the type of ART where the predetermined number of games is one set but also the type of managing the number of sets of ART based on the difference number or the number of times of navigation.

  It should be noted that a pachislot machine having both a pattern in which the game is restarted from the number of games remaining after the bonus is won in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern in which a new set is started from the beginning after the end of the bonus is also conceivable. For example, if a bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, one set is added as a rescue measure, and if the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the remaining after the bonus is over. A specification such as restarting the game from the number of games can be considered.

In such a pachislo machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output depending on whether or not the ART is added at the time of winning the bonus. That is, when an ART is added when the bonus is won, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus is ended, and when the ART is not added when the bonus is won. In the meantime, the main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus ends. More specifically, when the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 determines that an ART has been added and outputs a signal when the ART is restarted after the bonus is over. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, no signal is output when the ART is restarted after the bonus is over, assuming that no ART addition has occurred.
In other words, when the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than the predetermined value, the main control board 71 sets the ART gaming state of a set different from the set executed at the time of the bonus winning after the bonus ends. Is restarted and a signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, when the bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the main control board 71 restarts the ART gaming state of the same set as the set executed at the time of the bonus winning after the bonus ends. In addition, no signal is output to the outside.

  Further, the presence or absence of the signal output may be determined according to the presence or absence of the ART addition from the winning of the bonus to the start of the ART as well as the presence or absence of the addition of the ART at the time of the bonus winning.

Note that the signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by one for one output. However, when starting a high value ART game state, the data counter is set in accordance with the magnitude of the value. May be a signal whose value increases by a plurality of values. For example, when a set of 90 games is normally started with 30 games in a set of premiums, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3 when a long ART consisting of 90 games in one set is started due to a premium or the like. .
In addition, in the case of ART of 30 games per set, when starting ART to continue until the next bonus, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases according to the average number of games until the bonus is won. Is also good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150 games, which is equivalent to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continuous games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. And outputs a signal corresponding to. By doing so, even a pachislot machine having a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the time of starting can easily determine, from a data counter or the like, how much profit is obtained afterward. Note that a signal that increases the value of the data counter by a plurality of values may be a signal that increases the value by one, and that is transmitted a plurality of times at intervals so that the external device can identify the signal. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with external equipment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device when a lottery transition to a specific section is won will be described. FIG. 83 shows an example of an effect when a signal is output to an external device during a game in which a lottery to a specific section has been won. FIG. 84 shows an example of an effect in a game after the lottery to a specific section has been won. An example of an effect when a signal is output to a device will be described.

(Direction example 1)
In the effect example 1 shown in FIG. 83, in the game in which the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in reverse before starting the reel rotation, and thereafter, rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward. The game is progressing by letting it go. In the effect example 1, the timing T1 is a timing for starting the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the timing T2 is a timing for starting the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, at the start of the reel rotation). ), And timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b at the timing of the lighting pattern example 4 (when all the reels are stopped), and indicates at the timing of the output pattern example B (at the start of reel rotation) that the transfer lottery has been won. Output to the device.

  As shown in the timing T1, in a game in which the lottery for shifting to the specific section is won, the main control board 71 starts rotating the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction. In addition, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display a notice to pay attention to the data counter installed above the pachislot machine 1, and displays a 5-second countdown. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R refers to the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R from bottom to top, and therefore, for the player, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Accordingly, the line of sight is guided upward from below. In addition to the guidance of the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the display unit 100 also draws attention to the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

  At the timing T1 to the timing T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to progress the countdown. Thereafter, at timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal indicating that the lottery has been won to the data counter. Upon receiving this signal, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" and the like.

  As described above, in the first production example, the line of sight is guided to the data counter using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and thereafter, a signal is output to the data counter. It informs that the player has won a lottery transition to a specific section on a data counter that has gathered the player's eyes. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect in cooperation with not only the pachislot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter).

  In the first production example, at the timing T3, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that a specific section has been won on the display unit 100 in accordance with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b. As described above, in the effect example 1, various effects can be performed in conjunction with each other by performing the effect in accordance with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Can be.

(Example 2)
Subsequently, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the transfer lottery to the specific section, but is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the transfer lottery has been won. During the predetermined number of games, a so-called precursor effect may be performed. By the way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is. Also, even in a game that has won the transfer lottery, the result of the transfer lottery can be output to the external device. Here, when the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device in the game in which the transfer lottery has been won, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device). The effect result (that is, whether or not the shift lottery is determined) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is reduced.

  Therefore, in the effect example 2 shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the shift lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game that has won the shift lottery in the specific section. I do. Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 perform an indication effect during the 32 games as shown in the effect example A. Thus, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the indication effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the indication effect.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition lottery in the specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery is displayed from the status indicator 147b during the indication effect. It is preferable that the result of the shift lottery is difficult to understand from the status display 147b because the interest can be lost if it can be grasped. The method of making it difficult to understand the result of the shift lottery from the status display 147b is as described above.

  In addition, when a registration operation is received from a player, a period in which a precursor effect is performed may be customizable. In the example illustrated in FIG. 84, in the effect example A, the indication effect is performed for 32 games, but in the effect example B, the indication effect is performed for 16 games, and thereafter, the winning in the specific section is determined. A standby effect will be performed later. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachislot machine 1 or an introduction of a story, or an effect indicating a set value. Even in the case where the period of the indication effect can be customized as described above, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, in both the case of performing the effect example A and the case of performing the effect example B, the main control board 71 executes the game 32 games after the game in which the shift lottery in the specific section is won. During the game, the result of the shift lottery is output to the external device.

<How to secure navigation during a specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment prevents a situation in which a game in a specific section becomes monotonous by creating a state where navigation is easily performed during the specific section.

  Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while the timing of starting the specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, during this bonus state, the pushing sequence (reporting target role) has a higher probability than in the non-operation of the bonus. Is determined as the internal winning combination. If the specific section also starts at the start of the bonus state, the push order of the correct answer is notified to the pressing sequence won during the bonus state, and if the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not report the pressing order during the bonus state. As a result, a situation in which navigation is not performed during the specific section can be avoided, and as a result, the interest in the game during the specific section can be increased.

  In particular, since the timing of starting the specific section is set at the start of the bonus state, the state is never set to the bonus state during the specific section, that is, once the situation where the navigation is easily performed during the specific section (bonus state). It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player does not get lost, and as a result, the player can receive a certain number of navigations during the specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of the bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing to start the specific section as the start of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to a determination that a role related to a bonus which is a setting-independent role during a normal section is determined as an internal winning combination (ie, a bonus winning). Then, a transfer lottery is performed. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination relating to the bonus is displayed in a state where the shift lottery has been won, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state, and the main control board 71 The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing sequence of the correct answer to the pressing sequence determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination relating to the bonus is displayed in a state where the transfer lottery has not been won, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section, and The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine that the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, but the combination relating to the bonus which is a setting unrelated combination during the normal section. The shift lottery may be performed in response to the display of the corresponding symbol combination (that is, the bonus winning).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform the shift lottery during the normal section regardless of the role related to the bonus. More specifically, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to a specific section based on information having no difference in the set value during a normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the right to transition to the specific section is granted. Is given. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination relating to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state if the right to shift is granted, and The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer to the pressing order determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transfer right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are pushed during the bonus state. Is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

(Example of data)
FIG. 85B is an example of a data configuration for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), during the bonus state, the pushing sequence (“F_3 selection_1st”, “F_3 selection_2nd”, “F_3 selection_3rd”) has a higher probability than in the state other than the bonus state. ) Is determined as the internal winning combination. For example, in the case of a correct answer in the pushing order, a symbol combination in which nine medals are paid out is displayed, and in a case of an incorrect answer in the pushing order, a symbol combination in which five medals are paid out is displayed. What is displayed. The bonus state ends when, for example, ten or more medals are paid out.

  According to such a data example, when notifying the pushing sequence of the correct answer to the pushing sequence during the bonus state, the player has 18 (= 9 × 2) medals during the bonus state. In the bonus state, if the push order of the correct answer is not notified to the pushing sequence during the bonus state, the player will receive 10 (= 5 × 2) sheets during the bonus state. In some cases, medals may not be paid out or received.

<Method for realizing precursor using specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, a description will be given of a method of realizing the precursor effect in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a lottery transition to a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the lottery has been won, so that an effect is performed over a plurality of games. It is not suitable for notifying the result of the shift lottery by using. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment uses a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) to report the success or failure, and gives a precursor effect during this first specific section. I am going to do.

(Precursor method 1 for transition to specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of a method of a precursor realization method regarding the shift to the second specific section. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations of a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section) are provided, and a game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game relating to the transition to the long ART. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86A, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a short ART that continues for a first period (for example, three games) and a second ART that exceeds the first period (for example, A long ART that continues for 53 games (3 + 50) is provided, and a lottery for shifting to the short ART or the long ART is performed during the normal section. FIG. 86 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer lottery table used for transfer random determination. The main control board 71 performs the lottery for shifting to the short ART or the long ART based on information (internal winning combination) having no difference in the set value with a probability that does not fluctuate due to the set value.

  In this transfer lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a sign effect to notify whether or not the long ART has been won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, when the short ART is won, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs a precursor effect to notify that the long ART has not been won during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start of the long ART to the first period which is the duration of the short ART. In addition to performing an indication effect that informs the fact, after this indication effect, an effect unique to the long ART is performed.

  When performing the indication effect using the short ART, since both the short ART and the long ART are in the specific section, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b. That is, as shown in FIG. 86A, when the short ART is won in the shift lottery, the main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. When the long ART is won in the transfer lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period, which is the duration of the long ART. The main control board 71 may turn on the status indicator 147b in a different manner for the short ART and the long ART, or may turn on the same in the same manner.

  In addition, in the case where the indication effect is performed using the short ART, a signal output method to an external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the short ART is won in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device, and outputs a signal to the external device only when the long ART is won in the transfer lottery. May be output. In addition, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when the short ART and the long ART are won in the transfer lottery.

  In addition, as conditions for ending the short ART and the long ART, arbitrary conditions such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section, and the number of differences are set. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be of the same type or different types. Note that the same type means that, for example, when the number of games is used as the end condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the end condition of the long ART, and the different type is, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (C), an example of an effect in the case of performing a precursor game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of, for example, “entering a blast chance” on the display unit 100. This “blow-up chance” effect is an effect of notifying the winning in the long ART based on whether the bomb can be blown up during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 86, it is assumed that the duration of the short ART is between three games.

  If the short ART has been won in the transfer lottery (that is, if the long ART has not been won), the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without exploding the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transfer lottery. If it has, a production that succeeds in blasting the bomb in the “blast chance” production is executed. Note that the timing at which the bomb is successfully blown up when the long ART is won is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is three games, the bomb may be successfully blown up in the first and second games, the bomb may be successfully blown out in the third game, and The bomb may be successfully blown up at the start of the fourth game.

  Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 can notify a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player during the indication effect. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (C), since the pressing role has been won during the “Blast Chance” effect, which is a precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 become the pressing order. On the other hand, the order of the correct answer is reported. As described above, the pachislo machine 1 can notify the player of a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the sign production, and thus gives the player a sense of loss during the sign production that should increase the interest of the game. I won't.

(Precursor method 2 for transition to specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 87, another method of the precursor realization method regarding the shift to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned precursor method 1, since the result of the shift lottery has already been determined at the start of the “blast chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been determined at the start of the precursor game. In another method described subsequently, the result of the sign effect can be determined during the sign game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART gaming state (second specific section) are provided, and a game in CZ is treated as a precursor game regarding transition to the ART gaming state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87A, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs a lottery transition to the CZ during the normal section and performs a lottery transition to the ART during the CZ. FIG. 87B is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer lottery table used for transfer random determination. The main control board 71 performs the lottery transition to the CZ based on the internal winning combination, and performs the lottery transition to the ART gaming state based on a combination of symbols. Specifically, the main control board 71 does not perform a lottery transition to the ART game state when the combination of symbols of the bell spilled eyes or the first appearance is displayed, and displays the combination of the symbols of the bell. , A lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Then, by informing the pressing order of the correct order to the pressing order bell during the CZ, it is possible to make the state easy to shift to the ART gaming state during the CZ.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the CZ is won in the shift lottery performed during the normal section, a “blast chance” effect shown in FIG. 87 (C) is performed. For example, this “blow-up chance” effect is continued for three games, and if the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination during the three games, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified, and the state shifts to the ART gaming state. You can receive lottery. When the CZ ends without winning the lottery transition to the ART gaming state, the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without exploding the bomb, and shifts to the ART gaming state before the CZ ends. When the lottery is won, an effect that succeeds in blasting the bomb in the “explosion chance” effect is executed.

  The main control board 71 turns on the status indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting mode of the status indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in a different manner between the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light the same in the same manner.

  The method of outputting a signal to an external device is also arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device when the transfer lottery is CZ, and outputs a signal to the external device only when the ART game state is won in the transfer lottery. May be output. In addition, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when the CZ is won in the transfer lottery and when the ART gaming state is won.

  The termination conditions for the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of termination conditions may be used, or the same type of termination condition may be used.

As a modification of the above-described example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of a so-called gap MB may be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals in which the end condition of the MB exceeds 14 and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out during MB. Is displayed in the MB where is displayed, in the first game in the MB, a pressing order in which a combination of symbols for which 14 medals are paid out is displayed is notified, and in the next game, By notifying the pressing order in which the combination of symbols for which 15 medals are paid out is displayed, payout of 29 medals can be obtained, but if no notification is made, 15 medals will be displayed. In many cases, a combination of symbols to be paid out is displayed, and it means an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

  In the above-described example, although it is necessary to wait until the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the short ART starting game and the next game are pressed. Since the forward navigation is generated, it is not necessary to wait until the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the game is not postponed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Further, even if the game is ended in the short ART, the game is not delayed by the gap MB, so that there are more medals obtained than using the number of times of bell navigation in a normal game. Is reduced, and the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

<How to save navigation times>
In a so-called navigation frequency management pachislot machine that uses the number of times of navigation performed during a specific section as an end condition of the duration of the specific section, if the navigation target combination (reporting combination) is concentrated and won, The navigation is performed in a concentrated manner, and as a result, the specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, this may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Hereinafter, a method of saving the number of times of navigation will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the number of times of navigation is used as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A required bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and changes the MB2 gaming state where the symbol combination according to MB2 is displayed. Start.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (B), during the MB1 gaming state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols having different payout numbers according to the pressing order, “F_maintenance lip_1st + all small combinations”, “F_maintenance” While “Lip_2nd + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance lip_3rd + all small combinations” are determined as internal winning combinations, only the combination in which the combination of symbols with the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pressing order is internally set during the MB2 gaming state. Determined as a winning combination. During the MB1 game state, the payout number may be different depending on the pressing order. Therefore, when these combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 determine the correct pressing order. (The pressing order in which the nine-segment combination is displayed) is notified.

  By doing in this way, if the MB1 game state starts during the specific section, the game is performed while consuming the number of navigations, but if the MB2 game state can be started during the specific section. Can play the game without consuming the number of navigation times, and can reduce the speed of consuming the number of navigation times.

  In the MB1 gaming state, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers are displayed in accordance with the order of pressing is determined as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, in the MB2 gaming state, the same number of symbols is paid out regardless of the pressing order. A method of determining only the combination in which the combination is displayed as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 gaming state, only the lottery relating to the replay is individually determined by lottery. The stop control is made different depending on the type of replay performed. Thus, during the MB1 gaming state, it is possible to determine, as an internal winning combination, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed in accordance with the pressing order. On the other hand, the MB2 gaming state is a gaming state exclusively for 2-bet, and in the case of 2-bet, the winning combination is such that the payout number of medals is the same for all small wins. Thereby, during the MB2 gaming state, only the combination in which the combination of the symbols having the same payout number is displayed regardless of the pressing order can be determined as the internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Next, a method for individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation during a specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. In a conventional pachislot machine, it is general to perform both a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state and a notification for increasing the number of medals during a specific section. By individually managing, it is possible to realize a new gaming property that has not been available in the past.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91, a game example 1 in a case where the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, such as Lip Navi AT and Bell Navi AT, as specific sections. In the lip navi AT, while the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed, the notification for increasing the number of medals is not performed. In addition, the bell navigator AT performs at least notification for increasing the number of medals, and performs notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state as necessary.

  FIG. 89 (A) shows a game flow in game example 1. As shown in FIG. 89 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 provides three types of RT gaming states, RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and their winning probabilities are different from each other. . The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of a winning combination relating to replay being determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, after initialization processing, after a setting change, and the like. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the combination relating to replay is determined as the internal winning combination has a low probability, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. In addition, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of determining the role related to the replay as the internal winning combination is a high probability. Is a game state treated as a normal game. The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of determining a winning combination relating to replay as an internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the bell navi AT.

  From the RT0 gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT0 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of bell spilled eyes is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), the combination of the symbols spilled on the bell is a combination of the combination of the pressing order combination of “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_1rd” Is displayed in the game determined as the internal winning combination when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In a game in which the combination of "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_1rd" is determined as an internal winning combination, if the answer is correct in the order of pressing, a combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out.

  Further, there is a possibility that the game mode shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT1 gaming state, the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321”, which are the pushing sequence, is set as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order is correct. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 shift lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answers, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the game state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of the bell spilled eyes or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_maintenance_lip_123” to “F_maintenance_lip_321” are set as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combination “F_maintenance_lip_123” to “F_maintenance_lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing is correct. In the case of, the symbol combination of the replay is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer, the symbol combination of the RT1 shift lip is displayed in the order of pressing. When the combination of the replay symbols is displayed by the correct answer of the pressing order, the main control board 71 maintains the game state as the RT2 gaming state, and displays the combination of the symbols of the RT1 shift lip by the incorrect answer of the pressing order. In this case, the game state is shifted from the RT2 game state to the RT1 game state.

  Further, in the RT2 gaming state, when the symbol combination of the RT3 shift lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321”, which are the pushing sequence, is set as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing is correct. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answers, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. When the symbol combination of the RT3 shift lip is displayed by the correct answer of the pressing order, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the combination of the symbols of the replay by the incorrect answer of the pushing order is changed. When displayed, the game state is maintained as the RT2 game state.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the game mode shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT3 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of the bell spilled eyes or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in a game in which the combination of “F_3 choice bell — 1st” to “F_3 choice bell — 3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols by a correct push order. While paying out 9 medals, the gaming state is maintained in the RT3 gaming state, and when a combination of symbols of the bell spilled pattern is displayed due to an incorrect answer in the pushing order, a number smaller than 9 (or 0). The game state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state while paying out medals.

  Further, as shown in the transfer lottery table of FIG. 90 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the Lip Navi AT based on the internal winning combination. The transfer lottery table indicates that the transfer lottery to the lip navi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of the combination for which the transfer lottery is performed is merely an example.

  Further, as shown in the transfer lottery table of FIG. 90 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the bell navi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 performs the lottery transition to the Bell Navi AT only when the symbol combination of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and displays the symbol combination of the RT3 transition lip. , The player must win the Bell Navi AT.

  In the illustrated example, the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the lottery transition to the bell navi AT, that is, the combination of “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination. In the played game, it is assumed that the answer is correct in the order of pushing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply includes the combination of “F_RT3 shift lip — 123” to “F_RT3 shift lip — 321”. If the winning combination is determined, a lottery transition to the Bell Navi AT may be performed.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” as the internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the combination “ F_RT3 transition lip — 123 ”to“ F_RT3 transition lip — 321 ”are not determined as internal winning combinations, or the combinations“ F_RT3 transition lip — 123 ”to“ F_RT3 transition lip — 321 ”have a lower probability than the RT2 gaming state during other RT gaming states. Is determined as the internal winning combination. For this reason, in the RT2 game state, the frequency of performing the lottery transition to the bell navigator AT is higher than in the other RT game states, and the main control board 71 displays the other RT game states (particularly, the RT1 game state) during the RT2 game state. ), The lottery for shifting to the bell navi AT is performed.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 (the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72) notifies the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (the order in which correct answers are pushed) when neither the Lip Navi AT nor the Bell Navi AT has been won. do not do. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the lip navi AT has been won, the notification accompanying the lip navi AT is performed, and when the prize navigation AT has been won, the notification accompanying the bell navi AT is performed.

  Specifically, when the lip navi AT has been won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to When one of “F_RT3 shift lip_321” and the combination “F_maintenance lip_123” is determined as an internal winning combination, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified. On the other hand, even when the lip navi AT is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 determine any of the combinations “F_3 alternative bell — 1st” to “F_3 alternative bell — 3rd” as the internal winning combination. Even if it is done, it does not notify the order of pushing the correct answer.

  In addition, when the bell navigation AT is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 determine that any of the combinations “F_3 alternative bell_1st” to “F_3 alternative bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination. , To inform the order of the correct answer. In the case where the bell navigation AT has been won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 form the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition”. If any one of “Rip — 321” and the combination “F_Maintenance Lip — 123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order of the correct answer may be reported, or the notification may not be given.

  In this manner, the lip navigation AT can be treated as a specific section for performing notification for maintaining the RT2 gaming state in which the frequency of the lottery transition to the bell navigation AT is high. It can be treated as a specific section for performing notification for increasing. As described above, in the game example 1, since the roles of the lip navi AT and the bell navi AT have different specific sections, the meaning of the notification differs for the player depending on the type of the specific section. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing without the notification becoming monotonous.

  In addition, during the lip navigation AT, the notification for increasing the medals is not performed, so that the increase of the medals is suppressed. In pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period of medal increase is long, the profit obtained by the player will be excessive, making it difficult to shift to a specific section, etc. There is a need to balance profits elsewhere. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the gaming example 1, the specific section, which is the Lip Navi AT that does not perform the notification for increasing the medals, separately from the Bell Navi AT that performs the notification for increasing the medals, It is possible to balance the profits of the player and the amusement store while realizing the gaming property that is easy to shift to.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the transfer lottery based on information having no difference in the set values, the degree of expectation regarding the transfer to the specific section is made the same for each set value. . In this regard, the shift lottery itself may be performed based on information having no difference in the set value, and the expectation regarding the shift to the specific section may be different for each set value. The specific method is described below.

  In the above-described gaming example 1, in response to the combination of “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” being determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer is determined when the internal winning combination is determined. In response to the stop operation in the pressing order), the lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is performed. Since the transfer lottery is performed based on the information having no difference in the set value, the combination “F_RT3 transfer lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transfer lip — 321” has an internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Need to be determined as Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” as an internal winning combination at a predetermined probability during the RT2 gaming state regardless of the set value. As described above, in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the combination of “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the main control The board 71 has a lower probability than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during an RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), and the combination of “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321”. Is determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the lottery transition to the specific section regardless of the set value is performed with the same probability, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are internally stored. In accordance with being determined as the winning combination (more specifically, in response to the stop operation being performed in the correct pushing order when determined as the internal winning combination), the same probability is won regardless of the set value. Must be performed. Therefore, when performing the lottery for shifting to the bell navi AT, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value.

  In this way, the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321”, which is a trigger for performing the lottery transition to the Bell Navi AT, is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for shifting to the bell navi AT is won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT is the same for each setting value. The degree of expectation differs for each set value.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state at a probability according to the set value. As described above, during the RT2 gaming state, the transfer lottery to the bell navigator AT is performed at a higher frequency than in the other RT gaming states. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT can be different for each setting value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 89 (B), the probability (information of lottery value) for determining the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” as the internal winning combination is determined. By making the setting values different for each setting value, a setting difference can be provided for the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, a set value that has a high probability of determining the combination of “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” as the internal winning combination becomes easy to transition to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT , The feature for each set value can be obtained regarding the shift to the Bell Navi AT.

(Direction example in game example 1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an effect example in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of a game in the case of performing the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (A), the first game is a game in which the player is in the RT1 game state and has not won any of the lip navigation AT and the bell navigation AT. In the first game, neither the Lip Navi AT nor the Bell Navi AT has been won, so that the status display 147b is turned off, and both the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi remain at 0. It should be noted that the number of times of the lip navigation means that any of the roles “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321”, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321”, and the role “F_maintenance lip — 123” are inside. When the winning combination is determined, this is the number of times of notifying the pressing order of the correct answer, and the bell navigating number is one of the combinations "F_3 alternative bell_1st" to "F_3 alternative_3rd" determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the number of times that the correct answer is pressed is notified.

  Subsequently, in the second game, a lottery transition to the Lip Navi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1, and five times are given as the number of times of the lip navigation. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect illustrated in FIG. 91B (a) on the display unit 100. In other words, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of lip navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and also displays that the “search challenge” effect starts. The “search challenge” effect is an effect of searching for treasures performed during the Lip Navi AT. If the treasure can be found while the number of times of the Lip Navi remains, the effect is a success (Bernavi AT). It is.

  Subsequently, in the third game, one of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the lip navigation AT is being performed, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer and urge the shift to the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the third game, the number of lip navigation times has been reduced from five to four. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect illustrated in FIG. 91B (b) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the pressing order for shifting from standby (RT1 game state) to treasure (RT2 game state). When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notification, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. A display indicating that the vehicle has arrived between the treasures during the waiting period is performed.

  Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state has been performed in the third game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. In the fourth game, any of the combinations “F_maintenance_lip_123” to “F_maintenance_lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is during the Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pushing order of the correct answer and urge to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of lip navigation times has been reduced from four to three. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91B (c) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the pressing order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notification, the RT2 game state is maintained, and the search between treasures is continued.

  Subsequently, in the fifth game, any of the combination of “F_3 choice bell — 1st” to “F_3 choice bell — 3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, but since the lip navigation AT is being performed, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the pressing order of the correct answer. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 performs a display indicating that the pressing order is unknown on the display unit 100 as shown in (d) of FIG. 91 (B). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 91, it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, so that the combination of the symbols with the bell spilled is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state with the display of the symbol combination of the bell spilling eyes. In addition, the sub-control board 72 performs a display on the display unit 100 indicating that it has fallen from a treasure (RT2 game state) to a standby state (RT1 game state).

  Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 game state has been performed in the fifth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1. In the sixth game, one of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the lip navigation AT is being performed, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer and urge the shift to the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of lip navigation times has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 the pressing order for shifting from standby (RT1 game state) to treasure (RT2 game state). Thereafter, when the symbol combination of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, a display indicating that the player has arrived between the treasures during the waiting period is displayed on the display unit 100.

  Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state has been performed in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. In the seventh game, one of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is during the Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order of the correct answer. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of lip navigation times has been reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 91 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

  Here, if any of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” is determined as the internal winning combination, if the answer is correct in the order of pressing, the transition to the bell navigation AT is performed and the bell navigation AT is won. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 performs a display on the display unit 100 indicating that the bell navigation AT has been won. In addition, an initial value (10) is added to each of the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation in accordance with the winning of the bell navigation AT. It should be noted that the number of lip navigation times at the time of winning the Bell Navi AT is 11, since one time remains as the number of lip navigation times when the Bell Navi AT is won.

  Thereafter, the game state becomes the bell navi AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 turns on the state indicator 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition” as long as the number of lip navigation times remains. The push order of the correct answer is notified to the “Lip — 321” and the role “F_Maintenance Lip — 123”, and the correct push for the role “F_3 Choice Bell — 1st” to “F_3 Choice — 3rd” as long as the number of times of bell navigation remains. Announce the order.

(Game example 2)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, a description will be given of a game example 2 in a case where the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed. In this game example 2, both the lip navigation and the bell navigation are performed during the specific section, but the number of times of notification of both is managed individually. That is, in the game example 2, the number of times of both the lip navigation and the bell navigation is used as the end condition of the specific section. Note that lip navigation refers to notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state, and bell navigation refers to notification for increasing medals.

  FIG. 92 (A) shows a game flow in game example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (A), in the game example 2, a normal section and a specific section are provided, and during the specific section, a lip high probability is high in which the probability of determining a replay-related hand as an internal winning hand is high. (For example, the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state in the gaming example 1) and a low lip probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the gaming example 1) having a low probability that the combination relating to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the game example 2, the main control board 71 performs the lottery for shifting to the specific section during the normal section, and when the shift lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. . Note that in the game example 2, the lottery for shifting to the specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

  Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the game example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 perform notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state by the number of times of the lip navigation, and medals by the number of times of the bell navigation. Notification to increase. Then, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the game state from the specific section to the normal section.

  When the combination of the symbols of the falling replay is displayed during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the high lip state to the low lip state, and the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. The combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but according to the expression of the game example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the transition of the RT2. The combination of the symbols of the lip and the RT3 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

  It should be noted that the symbol combination of the RT1 transition lip is displayed at the time of incorrect answer of the pressing order when the combination “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is correct when the combination “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” and the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are determined as the internal winning combination. Sometimes displayed. Therefore, the lip navigation in the game example 2 means that when the combination of “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order of the correct answer is notified, and the symbol combination of the fall replay is changed. To avoid being displayed, and when the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as internal winning combinations This includes notifying the pressing order of the correct answer and prompting the display of the symbol combination of the promotion replay.

  In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of the correct answer when the combination “F_maintenance_lip_123” to “F_maintenance_lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and the RT gaming state Are maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination of “F_maintained lip_123” to “F_maintained lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination during the high lip state, when the combination of the replay symbols is displayed (pressed). While the RT game state is maintained in the high lip state, when the combination of the symbols of the falling replay is displayed (push order incorrect), the RT game state is shifted from the high lip state to the low lip state. .

  Next, FIG. 92 (B) is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a specific section of the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), in the second game example, a specific section has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state. Comparing the normal ART and the special state, the normal ART is a state in which the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation is faster than the special state. In addition, in the second game example, the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation are added during the specific section. When the normal ART is compared with the special state, the amount of addition of the number of times of bell navigation during the special state is smaller than that of the normal ART. On the other hand, the additional amount of the lip navigation is increased. That is, during the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation is suppressed, the number of times of lip navigation is added prior to the number of times of bell navigation.

(How to achieve special status)
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of a method of realizing a special state in which the consumption speed of the bell navigation times can be suppressed. In the pachislot machine 1, as the roles to be subjected to the bell navigation, the roles “F_3 alternative bell A_1st”, “F_3 alternative bell A_2nd”, “F_3 alternative bell A_3rd”, and the roles “F_3 alternative bell B_12t”, “F_3 alternative bell B_2nd”, “F_3 alternative” Bell B_3rd ”. Note that, in the following, the roles “F_3 choice bell A_1st” to “F_3 choice bell A_3rd” are simply called the role “F_3 choice bell A”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell B_1st” to “F_3 choice bell B_3rd” are simply the role “F_3. It may be called "selection bell B".

  As shown in FIG. 93 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the combination relating to the bonus is not carried over as the internal winning combination, either the combination of the combination “F_3 choice bell A” or the combination “F_3 choice bell B” is performed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is also different. Specifically, in both of the role "F_3 choice bell A" and the role "F_3 choice bell B", when the pushing order is correct, a combination of bell symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, and the pushing order is incorrect. At the time of correct answer, a combination of symbols of the spilled bell is displayed, and a number of medals less than nine (or zero) is paid out.

  Therefore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 determine that one of the combination “F_3 choice bell A” and the combination “F_3 choice bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section when the bonus is not won. Perform bell navigation (notification of the pressing order of the correct answer) for the number of times of bell navigation. In other words, during a specific section at the time of bonus non-winning, the number of times of bell navigation is reduced even if either the combination “F_3 choice bell A” or the combination “F_3 choice bell B” is determined as an internal winning combination. Become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), in the middle of the flag, that is, in the state where the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is displayed according to the pressing order. Although the combination of symbols is a different combination, the combination of symbols displayed for the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same combination regardless of the pressing order. Specifically, for the combination "F_3 selection bell B", a combination of bell symbols is displayed when the pressing order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and when the pressing order is incorrect, a combination of symbols of the bell spilling eyes is displayed. Is displayed, and medals less than nine (or zero) are paid out. On the other hand, in the combination "F_3 selected bell A", a combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the pressing order, and nine medals are paid out.

  Therefore, when the hand combination “F_3 choice bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the pressing order, and When the combination "F_3 Choice Bell B" is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section of the above, the bell navigation (notification of the pressing order of the correct answer) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 choice bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of times of bell navigation is not reduced, and the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, the number of times of bell navigation is reduced.

  In this way, a special state can be realized in which the normal ART and the special state can be distinguished depending on whether or not the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, thereby reducing the consumption speed of the bell navigating times. can do. That is, in the case of the above-described example, the special section in which the bonus non-winning is performed is set to the normal ART, and the specific section between the flags is set to the special state, thereby realizing the special state in which the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation can be suppressed. can do.

(Additional example)
Subsequently, a method of adding the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation will be described with reference to FIG. The additional lottery table of FIG. 94 (A) defines the information of the lottery value for the additional amount of the bell navigation frequency and the lip navigation frequency for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 adds the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations with reference to the additional lottery table shown in FIG. FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the expected degree of addition in accordance with the additional lottery table in FIG. 94 (A).

Referring to FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B), it can be seen that the expected degree of addition of the number of times of bell navigation and the degree of expected addition of the number of times of lip navigation are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in addition based on cacti and weak cherries, the number of times of bell navigation is more likely to be added during normal ART, while the number of times of lip navigation is more likely to be added during special conditions. More specifically, during the special state, the added amount of the number of times of bell navigation is smaller than that during the normal ART, and conversely, the added amount of the number of times of lip navigation is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 94, the addition based on the strong cherry has the same expected addition degree during the normal ART and during the special state.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of such a game example 2, the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed during the specific section, the lip navigation is performed by the number of lip navigations, and the bell navigation is performed by the number of the bell navigations. As a result, even when either the role targeted by lip navigation or the role targeted by bell navigation is concentrated and determined as an internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. Since the other navigation frequency is not consumed, the consumption speed of the navigation frequency can be reduced.

  In the pachislo machine 1 of the game example 2, the normal ART and the special state are provided as the specific section, and the expected degree of addition is made different according to the current state. Specifically, during the normal ART in which the consumption speed of the bell navigator count is high, the bell navigator count is easily added, and conversely, in the special state where the consumption speed of the bell navigator count is suppressed, the additional amount of the bell navigator count is reduced. , Increase the added amount of lip navigation times. Thereby, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be reduced, and as a result, interest in the specific section is not spoiled.

<How to select CZs with different end periods>
Next, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). In addition, since the specific section includes the CZ in addition to the ART game state, when the limit processing is performed, the ART game state continuously performed from the CZ is such that the game period is equal to the number of games in which the CZ continues. It will be shorter. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select a CZ to be executed from CZs having different end periods, and can easily select a CZ that is considered preferable for the player at the time of selection. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. More specifically, the CZ “short-term battle” shown in FIG. 95 (A) is a CZ of 0 game with an end period, and the CZ “game” shown in FIG. 95 (B) is a CZ of 1 game with an end period. The CZ “stable” shown in FIG. 95 (C) is a CZ of the end game of 10 games, and the CZ “turbulence” shown in FIG. 95 (D) is a CZ of the end game of 10 games. The CZ “long battle” shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the termination period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 terminates the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery transition to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the ending period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

  Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 95A to 95E are selection screens for selecting CZ. The selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting CZ. In FIG. 95, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 95 (A), points to the CZ “game” in FIG. 95 (B), and points to the CZ “stable” in FIG. 95 (C). In FIG. 95 (D), it indicates CZ “turbulence”, and in FIG. 95 (E), it indicates CZ “long-term battle”. This selection cursor switches, for example, the CZ to be selected over time.

  On the selection screen, a player's operation on a chance button (not shown) is received, and the main control board 71 executes the operation by selecting the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor at the timing when the chance button is operated. The CZ selection is accepted, and then the selected CZ is started. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing of FIG. 95 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting the CZ “short term battle”, and thereafter, the CZ “short term game”. Battle ”starts. The method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 counts the interval at which the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be specified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” having the shortest end period in the initial state, and then points to other CZs in order of shorter end period as time elapses. . For example, the selection cursor indicates the CZ in the order of CZ “short-term game”, CZ “game”, CZ “stable”, CZ “turbulence”, and CZ “long-term game” over time.

  Here, when the limit processing is performed as described above, the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of games in which the CZ is continued, so the CZ “short-term game” having the shortest end period is a game period. Is considered to be favorable for the elderly. In the pachislot machine 1, the selection of the CZ is performed based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by indicating the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ that is kind to the player is A selection method can be realized.

  Some players may proceed with the game without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the game is started by operating the start lever 6 without receiving an operation on the chance button on the selection screen (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed), the selection by the player is not performed. become. When the game is started without receiving the selection of the CZ as described above, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among a plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 executes the CZ “short-term battle” having the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. The selection is made automatically, and then the CZ “short-term battle” starts. This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

  Note that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to transfer to CZ has been granted. In other words, the main control board 71 grants the right to transfer to the CZ for performing the transfer lottery to determine whether or not to transfer to the ART gaming state, and in a state where the right to transfer to the CZ is provided, a plurality of types of CZs are provided. The selection of one CZ from among is accepted.

<Reel control at start of specific section>
Next, reel control when starting a specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting a specific section, reel stop control is performed so that a specific symbol combination such as “7-7-7” (hereinafter referred to as “AT start appearance”) can be displayed. I do. Specifically, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery for shifting to the specific section, it grants the right to shift to the specific section. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, when the condition for transition to the specific section (for example, the AT start roll is displayed) is satisfied in a state where the transition right is granted, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the specific section and sets the transition right. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted and when the transfer right is not granted (that is, the reel stop control). Different).

  FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 are diagrams illustrating an example of a spinning drum stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in steps S9 and S12 in FIG. 49 described above. The spinner stop initialization table is referred to when determining reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The turning body stop initial setting table is used when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section. Specifies the reel stop control information. The main control board 71 acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the gaming state, and the presence or absence of the transition right with reference to the spinner stop initial setting table, and uses the reel stop control information to obtain the reels 3L, Stop 3C and 3R.

  The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the gaming state, and the presence / absence of the transfer right includes a turning drum stop number, determination data for each pressing order (drawing priority table number, drawing priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), first cylinder first stop table change data, first cylinder stop data table selection data (left first stop table), first cylinder first stop This is information including a table change initial data selection value (change status, table number), and a search order data table number.

  The “determination data for each pressing sequence” includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The “draw-in priority table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). The “draw-in priority order selection table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority order selection table (not shown).

  “Table number selection data” is a value referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

  The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table that is referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The “change status” is data for changing a line status for each game representing a line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is an initial line status in the present embodiment. The state is the A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed, and when the change status is “2”, if the line status is the A line, the line status is changed to the B line.

  The first cylinder first stop table change data, the first cylinder stop data table selection data, and the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value are as follows. That is, the data is referred to in the case of the left reel 3L.

  The "first cylinder first stop table change data" indicates whether to use or change the same left first post-stop table after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. Is the data indicating If there is a value (a value other than 0) in the first cylinder first stop table change data, a change data search table is selected based on the expected stop position, data is searched, and the second and subsequent stops are performed. Select the stop table of.

  The “first body stop data table selection data” is a number for selecting a first body stop data table (not shown) that is referred to when stopping the first body.

  The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The “table number” is a number for selecting the first cylinder first stop after-stop data table that is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the first-stop first-stop-after-stop data table selected based on the table number. When the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, the line status is changed to the B line if the line status is A line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

  The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding pieces.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B), in the pachislo machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the spine stop initial setting table in FIG. 96A, which is referred to when the winning combination relating to the bonus is not won, the spinning stop number “17” for the winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” 96B, the reel stop control information is defined, and in the turning body stop initial setting table of FIG. 96B which is referred to when a winning combination relating to a bonus is won, the same winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” is obtained. The reel stop control information of the turning drum stop number "31" is defined. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence or absence of the winning of the role related to the bonus, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the reel stop control is different. Can be made.

  Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 97 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the turning body stop initialization table of FIG. 96A which is referred to when the transfer right is not granted, the turning body stop number “17” is assigned to the combination “F_3 alternative bell_1st”. In the spinner stop initialization table of FIG. 97 (C) which is referred to when the reel stop control information is defined and the transfer right is granted, the spinner for the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” is displayed. The reel stop control information of the stop number “41” is defined. In this way, in the pachislo machine 1, by making the reel stop control information different depending on the presence or absence of the transfer right, the reel stop control can be made different when the lottery transfer to the specific section is won.

  Next, FIG. 98 shows a correspondence relationship between a winning combination and a stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the spinning drum stop initial setting tables shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal section in which the right to shift to the specific section is not granted, when the internal winning combination is “losing”, a combination of “losing” symbols is displayed. Is a combination of "F_3 Choice Bell_1st" to "F_3 Choice Bell_1rd", a combination of bell symbols is displayed if the answer is correct in the order of pressing, and if the answer is incorrect in the order of pushing, the combination of the bell spilled eye or the first symbol is displayed. The combination is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the standby section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is “losing”, if the pressing operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols at the start of the AT start Is displayed, and when the eye-pressing operation is inaccurate, a combination of symbols of "out" is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is a combination of “F_3 selection bell — 1st” to “F_3 selection bell — 3rd”, if the pressing operation is accurate, a combination of symbols at the start of the AT is displayed, and the pressing operation is not performed. If it is correct, the combination of the bell, the bell spilled eye, or the first symbol is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to make the reel stop control different depending on whether or not the user has the right to shift to the specific section, at the start of the specific section, the combination of symbols at the start of the AT in accordance with the stop operation of the player is changed. The rotation of the reel can be stopped to display.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the reel stop control may be made different depending on the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. That is, the pachislot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 determines whether the right to transfer to one specific section is granted, The control for stopping the reels may be different depending on whether the right to transfer to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the same combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a case where the right to shift to one specific section is granted and a case where the right to shift to another specific section is granted. It is sufficient to provide a spinning drum stop initial setting table so that the reel stop control information used is different.

Thereby, the reel stop control can be made different depending on the type of the specific section of the transition destination. For example, the case where the transition to the specific section which is more advantageous for the player and the case where the transition to the other specific section is performed Thus, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section can be made different. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game is different depending on the combination of the symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, so the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section, The interest of the game is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, although the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state or the RT gaming state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

  Here, in recent years, a pachislot machine that provides another reel (hereinafter, “second main reel”) in addition to a reel (hereinafter, “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of the internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachislot machine having three reels of the above-described reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as a first main reel and a reel provided in a single row to the right of the reel 3R as a second main reel is known. . The reel for which the stop control is made different depending on the result of the transfer lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

  In the case where the stop control of the second main reel is made different according to the result of the shift lottery, the main control board 71 sets the first main reel in accordance with the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. Before starting the rotation of the second reel, the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the shift lottery to the specific section. More specifically, when the lottery transition to the specific section has been won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed otherwise can be displayed. When the rotation of the second main reel is stopped in accordance with the result of the shift lottery to the specific section in this way, the main control board 71 thereafter starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R. Good. Further, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
By separating the stop operation for the result of the shift lottery in the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery in this manner, both eyes can be enjoyed and the player can easily grasp the game characteristics.

<Control when changing settings>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, control at the time of setting change will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between control contents when setting is changed and when main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a new set value is set (at the time of setting change), the main control board 71 sets the role related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination even during the period between the flags. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transfer lottery is maintained even during the standby section in which the transfer lottery of the specific section has been won. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even when a new set value is set during the flag, during the specific section, or during the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. .
Note that the case where a new set value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to the case where the set value is changed to a different set value such as setting 1 to setting 6, but the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1. The case where the value is reset (so-called re-setting to the same setting) is also included.

  On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all game states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the role of the carried over bonus when the RAM is cleared between the flags, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. The game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the shift lottery is cleared.

  As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the amusement shop side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear the specific section while changing the set value, and thus it is possible to give the amusement shop various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

  The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 69), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 69). It can be carried out.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a pachislot machine 1 according to a third embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the configuration and control of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, which are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 of the first or second embodiment, will be omitted. Further, the “specific section” described in the second embodiment is referred to as an “advantageous section” in the third embodiment, and a game state taking into account a so-called navigation or staging mode is referred to as a “payout state”. In addition, when different terms are used for the same or similar elements as those described in the first to third embodiments, the terms used in the first to third embodiments are added in parentheses at the end of the terms. The features of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment described below can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments.

[Game Flow of Pachislot Machine of Third Embodiment]
First, a game flow of the pachislo machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a transition flow of a payout state of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing processing during MB operation in the payout state. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a summary of the payout state and the game state in a list. 101 and FIG. 102 are controlled by the main control board 71.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the payout state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control board 71. Is done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he is not staying in the advantageous section by turning off the light, and notifies the player that he is staying in the advantageous section by turning on the light. However, in the present embodiment, even when the vehicle stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is suppressed that the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player by the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There is a (non-permissible) state and an allowable state. As shown in FIG. 101, the MB operates in accordance with the winning of the MB in both the normal section and the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, a short MB (abbreviated to “SMB”) which always wins in any pressing order at the time of winning and ends with 1G under the condition of paying out more than one medal is basically a winning. There is a long MB (abbreviated to “LMB”) that is completed by completing a plurality of games under the condition of paying out medals of more than 81 coins as an end condition. LMB has no setting difference in winning probability, and SMB has a setting difference in winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 controls the payout state by performing various kinds of lottery processing. However, the various kinds of lottery processing for controlling such a payout state are roughly classified into a normal processing and a common processing. Divided. Note that the main control board 71 performs only the normal processing during the normal section and does not perform the common processing, and can perform both the normal processing and the common processing during the advantageous section.

  The normal process is a process performed in accordance with the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol combination. In the present embodiment, when determining the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines various lotteries in accordance with the determined internal winning combination. The processing is performed to control the payout state. This normal process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when a winning combination having no setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 102, during the operation of the LMB, various normal processes are performed according to the internal winning combination, but the normal processing based on the internal winning combination is not performed during the operation of the SMB. This is because the LMB has no setting difference in the winning probability and therefore has no setting difference in the probability of staying in the state of LMB operation, but the SMB has the setting difference in the winning probability and stays in the state of SMB operating. There is a setting difference in the probability of performing. Since the normal process is a process performed without a setting difference, the setting difference appears at a time when the probability of staying in the state is different. Therefore, the main control board 71 does not perform the normal process during the operation of the SMB.

  The common process is a process performed when the bonus is activated. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs various lottery processes when the MB is activated, and controls the payout state. This common process is a lottery process performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when the MB is activated. It should be noted that “when the MB is activated” means the timing at which the MB (bonus) is activated when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (see S235 in FIG. 62 of the first embodiment). Note that, unlike the above-described common processing, the main control board 71 can execute various kinds of lottery processing by the common processing during both the operation of the SMB and the operation of the LMB.

  In the normal section, “normal” is executed as a payout state. As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “Normal” is an initial state after the power is turned on or after a setting change. Transition to the state. In the “normal”, the navigation is not performed, and the advantageous section shift lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If a win is made in the advantageous section shift lottery, an advantageous section is won. The advantageous section winning includes “normal winning” and “ART winning”. In the case of "normal winning", the game shifts from the next game to a payout state to "normal advantage" described later. On the other hand, in the case of "ART winning", the state shifts to "ART sign" described later as a payout state. Note that the advantageous section shift lottery will be described later.

  In the advantageous section, “normal advantage”, “SCZ”, “ART sign”, “MB_HCZ”, “additional special zone”, “ART”, and “ending” can be executed as main payout states. The advantageous section is a state in which a navigation (bell navigator) capable of winning the push order small combination (in the present embodiment, “push order bell” or “batting order bell”) of the maximum payout number can be generated. It cannot be terminated until the benefit is granted. In the present embodiment, the privilege according to the advantageous section refers to generation of a bell navigation (winning of a bell in a pressing order) or activation of a bonus (MB). In other words, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section can be ended until at least one of the end conditions, such as generation of a bell navigation (winning of the bell in the order of pressing) or activation of the bonus (MB), is satisfied. Can not. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, an advantageous section end lottery, which will be described later, is executed, and a transition is made to “normal” according to the lottery result. The advantageous section may be continued depending on the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery. However, in the present embodiment, except for the case where the MB is activated, the bell navigation is not generated even if the push order bell is won until the elapse of, for example, 100G from the start of the advantageous section (the notification suppression state). State, also referred to as a “standby section”). That is, in the present embodiment, in principle, the first bell navigator can be generated in accordance with the winning of the pushing order bell on condition that a predetermined number of games (100G) has elapsed without the MB being activated from the start of the advantageous section ( (The state in which the bell navigation can be generated, the notification allowed state). As an exception, even if the predetermined number of games (100G) has not elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, if the MB is won, the bell navigation is enabled (notification allowed state). Note that, regardless of the number of games, the winning of the pressing order bell may be managed with a flag, and the bell navigation non-occurrence state and the bell navigable state may be controlled according to the presence or absence and the number of the flags. Further, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is set even before the end conditions of the advantageous section (push order bell winning, bonus (MB) operation) are satisfied. A limit process is performed such that the process is forcibly terminated and shifts to a normal section ("normal" state). For example, when the game is in the ART state and reaches 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section, the limit processing is executed even if the remaining number of games in the ART remains. Thereby, the advantageous section is terminated together with the ART, and the normal section is shifted.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, the “normal advantage” shifts when the “normal” becomes “normal winning” by the advantageous section lottery in the “normal”. In addition, the “normal advantage” shifts to a case where a lottery result that continues in the advantageous section end lottery at the end of “ART” is obtained, and also a case where the remaining non-winning is 0G in “SCZ” to be described later. I do. In the “normal advantage”, the SCZ random determination and the ART random determination described later are executed. When the SCZ lottery is won, the state shifts from “normal advantage” to the state of “SCZ” described later. When the ART lottery is won, the state shifts from the “normal advantage” to the state of the “ART sign” described later.

  The “ordinary advantage” includes a normal mode having different “ART” winning probabilities of ART lottery, such as “low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, and “next sign”. The type of the normal mode is initially determined by a later-described advantageous section initial normal mode lottery when the “normal” has been obtained by the advantageous section lottery in “normal”. In the normal mode in the “normal advantage”, the normal mode shift lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and the mode is basically promoted to the mode in which the ART lottery winning probability is high or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result.

  The “normal advantage” includes SCZ modes having different winning probabilities of “SCZ” such as “low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, and “high accuracy D”. . The type of the SCZ mode is initially “low-precision”, and is promoted, dropped, or maintained by SCZ mode shift lottery performed during “normal advantage”. In the present embodiment, the SCZ mode shift lottery performed during the “normal advantage” includes the SCZ mode shift lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode shift lottery performed when the MB is activated, and the progress during the “normal advantage”. There is a SCZ mode shift lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games when the number of games reaches the specified number of games. Here, in the SCZ mode shift lottery performed according to the winning combination, basically, the SCZ mode falls or is maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of “SCZ” is low. In general, the SCZ mode is promoted or maintained to a mode in which the winning probability of “SCZ” is high.

  In addition, the SCZ mode shift lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games is executed when the number of elapsed games during “normally advantageous” reaches 20G, 40G, 80G, for example, and is promoted or maintained in a mode in which the winning probability of “SCZ” is high. Is done. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage” reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated lottery mode (high-accuracy D), and the winning probability in the SCZ random determination and the ART random determination increases from the beginning. Note that, after the special lottery mode (high-precision D) is set to “Chambered ceiling”, a later-described advantageous section end lottery (see FIG. 122) that triggers a transition from “normal advantage” to “normal” is performed. It is desirable that the “ART” winning be substantially determined. By performing such a rescue procedure, it is possible to give a benefit to a player who has reduced the number of medals by advancing the game for about 120 games without substantially winning the pushing order bell or MB, Even if it is not possible to draw the bell or MB in the pushing order in the "usually advantageous" state (winning), it is possible to proceed with the game with a sense of expectation to reach the "harry ceiling". It is possible to suppress the interest of the user from decreasing. Note that the number of elapsed games during “normal advantage” refers to the number of games that have elapsed from the transition from “normal” to “normal advantage” until the transition to “ART” or “normal”. At this time, the game may shift to “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ” before shifting to “ART” or “normal”. However, the number of elapsed games in “SCZ” or the number of elapsed games in “MB_HCZ” is It may be included in the number of elapsed games during the “ordinary advantage”, or may not be included. When the number of elapsed games in “SCZ” and the number of elapsed games in “MB_HCZ” are not included, “SCZ” and “MB_HCZ” are not included in “normal advantage” after “SCZ” and “MB_HCZ” are completed. The number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" may be counted by taking over the number of elapsed games that had been counted up to the transition, or as the number of elapsed games during "normal advantage" from the beginning. Good.

  In addition, in the mode of the “ceiling ceiling” (high accuracy D), only “ART” may be randomly selected, or only “SCZ” may be randomly selected. In addition, the probability of winning “ART” or “SCZ” is higher than in each of the normal mode and SCZ mode, and it is difficult to win “ART” or “SCZ” by reaching the “harry ceiling”. It is desirable to prevent the game from occurring in order to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, even if the player wins the “SCZ” and fails in the “SCZ”, the mode is returned to the “harry ceiling” mode (high-precision D), so that the benefits over the “ART” winning, which is the medal increase section, are obtained. It is desirable to guarantee. In addition, when “SCZ” is won in the mode of “Hamari ceiling” (high-accuracy D) in which the benefit of “ART” or more is determined, the number of games until “ART”, which is a medal increase section, is consequently increased. However, if the "ART" is won via the "SCZ", the ART is started from the "additional specialization zone" described later, so that the "ART" is consumed during the "SCZ" of about five games. Even if the medals are considered, the expected value of the medals that can be obtained is higher than in the case where the "ART" is directly won. Therefore, even if the "ART" is determined, the medal is reduced by an extra chance game. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, in the “normal advantage”, the winning probability of the MB described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning the MB is high by the time the game reaches 100G. Then, when the MB is won, the bell navigation is enabled, and after the MB operation is completed, an advantageous section end lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In short, if the game mode shifts to "normal advantage" and exceeds the predetermined number of games (100G), a state in which a bell navigation can be generated is achieved, but there is a possibility that a prize will be won in a game in which an MB is established by the time the game reaches 100G or through an inter-flag state. Since it becomes higher, the average number of stay games that are “normally advantageous” is about 25G. As will be described in detail later, the symbol combination of MB is set to the pull-in 1 (in all pushing orders, so that the player does not intentionally delay the winning of the MB, thereby increasing the payout rate). It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and the reel stop control so that a win can be achieved even if the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are stopped at the timing.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “SCZ” shifts when “normally advantageous” is SCZ lottery and SCZ is won. “SCZ” is a chance zone (CZ) where it is relatively easy to win “ART” described later. “SCZ” includes types such as “normal” and “legend” having different ART lottery winning probabilities depending on the SCZ mode. For example, when the SCZ mode is “high-accuracy A” and the type is “legend”, the ART winning probability is higher than when the SCZ mode is “high-accuracy A” and the type is “normal”. Basically, the ART winning probability is higher when the type is “Legend” than when the type is “Normal”. The type of SCZ is determined by lottery for any role. If the ART lottery is won during “SCZ”, the state shifts from “SCZ” to a state of “additional specialization zone” described later. If the specified number of games (5G) of “SCZ” has been completed without winning in the ART lottery, the routine shifts to “normal advantage”. In the case of “SCZ”, navigation of the winning pressing order bell is basically not performed. Further, the type of “SCZ” may be determined with reference to the internal winning combination of the unit game (game) that has won the SCZ lottery. For example, when "SCZ" is won when the "strong bell" is won, "Legend" may be more easily selected than when the other role is won. The type of “SCZ” may refer to the SCZ mode at the time of “SCZ” winning. “Low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy” The selectivity of “Legend” may be different for each SCZ mode such as “D” or a part thereof. Also, in the above-mentioned “Hari ceiling” mode (high accuracy D), by providing a privilege such as the “legend” being determined and providing a remedy for a player who has reduced the number of medals, the player's willingness to play is provided. It is good also as a specification which suppresses a fall. In addition, during the “SCZ”, the ART lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination for 5 games, but the ART random determination is not performed at the time of the loss because it is considered that the internal winning combination is not won. It may be. Also, the ART lottery may be performed with reference to at least one of the internal winning combination and the stop appearance. When performing the ART lottery based on the stop appearance, the player can enjoy the appearance on the reel, and when performing the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination, the control load of the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, the “ART precursor” shifts to “normal” or “normal advantage” by being ART winning by ART lottery. “ART precursor” shifts to “ART” through the ART preparation state after the specified number of games has been consumed. However, when the normal mode stays at “special” and the ART has been selected and the mode has shifted to the “ART precursor”, the mode shifts to the “ART” via the “additional special zone” described later. In the “ART precursor”, a rank-up lottery of an initial mode of various modes used during the ART from the start is executed. Since the various modes used during the ART are basically advantageous to the player as the rank is higher, if the rank can be raised in the rank-up lottery during the “ART sign”, immediately after the start of the “ART” Are various modes (initial modes) which are advantageous modes for the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “MB_HCZ” shifts by winning the LMB regardless of the normal section or the advantageous section. In “MB_HCZ”, HCZ mode promotion lottery and ART lottery with no role are executed. In the HCZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player is. When the ART lottery is won and the operation of the LMB is completed, the state shifts from “MB_HCZ” to “ART” through a state of “additional specialization zone” described later. When the operation of the LMB ends without winning the ART lottery, the state shifts from “MB_HCZ” to the original payout state (for example, “normal” or “normal advantage”).

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the “additional specialization zone” is a period in which ART is more likely to be added, and is a winning number of ART in “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ”, or the prescribed number of games of “ART precursor”. Move after the end. Although details are omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of “additional specialization zones” are provided, and in the “additional specialization zones”, an additional lottery of the number of ART games is executed according to the additional specialization zone type. The manner of making the type of “additional specialization zone” is arbitrary.For example, a plurality of additional specialization zones with different average additions may be provided. It may be provided. After the specified number of games in the “additional specialization zone” have been exhausted, when the end lottery is won, if there is stock in the additional specialization zone, the state becomes the “additional specialization zone”. If there is no stock in the additional specialization zone, “ART” Move to

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “ART” is a so-called ART state, and shifts from “additional specialization zone” or “ART precursor”. "ART" includes modes having different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery such as an ART mode, a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode, in which additional lottery and various mode shift lotteries are executed. For “ART”, for example, 100G is given as the initial number of games, and the number of games is added according to the result of the additional lottery. At the end of the "ART" game number, an advantageous section lottery regardless of the winning combination is executed. If the lottery result is "continue", the routine shifts to "normally advantageous". I do.

  The ART mode includes a plurality of modes, such as “mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B” and “mode C”, which have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery in ART, and basically “mode 0”. Is the most unfavorable ART mode, and additional lottery in ART is advantageous in the order of "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" ("mode C" is most advantageous). During the ART, the ART mode shift lottery is executed, and the ART mode shifts according to the result of the shift lottery. The transition to the ART mode is basically that the current ART mode is maintained, or the ART mode is shifted to an ART mode lower than the current ART mode (the mode is changed from “mode C” to “mode B”, “ A fall from "mode B" to "mode A", or a fall from "mode A" to "mode 0" (note that a fall of two or more stages may be included). Then, when the ART mode falls to the lowest “mode 0”, additional lottery and the like during the ART are suppressed. On the other hand, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0” (“mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”), additional lottery or the like is performed at a normal probability without suppressing additional lottery. Is won. In this embodiment, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0”, the winning in the additional lottery and the like are all the same, but the ease of falling down to “mode 0” where the additional lottery and the like are suppressed is reduced. Since each ART mode is different, the degree of advantage such as additional lottery during the ART differs. The ART mode is maintained or dropped in the transition lottery by the normal processing, but may be promoted by the transition lottery by the common processing at the time of the MB operation.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART mode “mode 0”, the additional lottery during the ART is suppressed, but the additional lottery during the ART may be prohibited instead of being suppressed. In a normal pachislot, the addition during the ART is performed with a so-called rare role as an opportunity, but a weak rare role and a strong rare role may be provided as a rare role as an opportunity for addition. Here, when the additional lottery or the like is prohibited, the additional is not performed even when the strong rare combination is won, and the player easily feels dissatisfaction. In this regard, by suppressing the extra lottery and the like as in the present embodiment, the extra can be performed at the time of winning the "strong bell" which is the strong rare combination, so that the player does not feel dissatisfied.

  In the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, a plurality of “normal”, “high-accuracy preparation”, “high-accuracy”, and “ultra-high-accuracy” with different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery in ART are provided. Basically, "Normal" is the most disadvantageous mode, and additional lottery during ART in the order of "High-accuracy preparation", "High-accuracy", and "Ultra-high-accuracy" is advantageous (" "Ultra high accuracy" is the most advantageous.) The chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are individually managed. For example, each mode may be a different mode in a certain game (chance A mode “high accuracy”, chance B mode “super” Some modes are common (Chance A, Chance C mode "Normal"), some modes are common (Chance A mode "High accuracy", Chance B mode "High accuracy", Chance C mode "Normal"), and all modes May be common (chance A mode “high accuracy”, chance B mode “high accuracy”, chance C mode “high accuracy”). During the ART, the shift lottery is executed for each mode, and each mode shifts individually according to the result of the shift lottery.

  In the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, the timing of the addition during the managed ART is different. In the present embodiment, the chance B mode is a mode for managing an additional lottery based on “SP lip A2” described later (see FIG. 134), and the chance C mode is an additional lottery based on “SP lip A1” described later. The chance A mode is a mode for managing additional lottery based on other combinations (see FIG. 133). The present invention is characterized in that individual modes are managed for each additional opportunity, and the additional opportunity managed by each mode is not limited to the above. As an example, a mode for managing the addition based on the internal winning combination, a mode for managing the addition when the cycle is reached, a mode for managing the addition when the bonus is activated, a mode for managing the addition during the bonus activation, and the addition during the preparation of the ART. A separate mode can be managed for each additional trigger, such as a management mode, a mode for managing additional during standby for ART termination, and the like.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the payout state may shift to “ending” during “ART”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when, for example, 1500 G has been reached after the start of the advantageous section, limit processing for terminating the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains. Although the limit processing itself is performed when the game reaches 1500, the pachislot 1 internally manages the number of remaining games, so that it is possible to know beforehand whether or not the game will reach 1500 in the future before the game reaches 1500. . Therefore, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending” when the total value of the number of games consumed in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games becomes equal to or greater than the specified value. When the process shifts to “ending”, the main control board 71 does not perform all the lotteries related to the addition, since it is determined that the limit processing will be performed in the future. In addition, the threshold value of the sum of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that triggers the transition to “ending” can be set arbitrarily. As an example, the threshold may be set to 1500 games because the limit processing is performed when the 1500 games are reached. In the present embodiment, when the limit processing is performed, the ending effect for 100 games is performed. And Then, when the sum of the number of games consumed and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches 1400 games, an ending effect of 100 games is performed after the 1400 games are consumed, and limit processing is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “MB” is a so-called bonus state, and can be generated in accordance with the winning in any of the normal section and the advantageous section except during the LMB operation. In “MB”, normal mode transition lottery, SCZ mode transition lottery, ART mode transition lottery, additional game lottery, and the like are executed.

[Game state controlled by main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a gaming state under the control of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming state includes RT0 and RT1 having relatively low replay winning probabilities, and RT2 and RT3 having relatively high replay winning probabilities. RT0 is the initial state after the setting change or the gaming state after the end of the LMB, and is a state in which the player stays when the payout state is “normal”. Move to RT1 is a state of staying mainly when the payout state is “normal”, and when the RT2 transition lip is displayed, transition to RT2 is made. RT2 is in the middle of transition to RT3, and when RT3 transition lip is displayed, transition to RT3 is made. RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the payout state corresponds to "ART" or "additional specialization zone", and shifts to RT1 via display of an RT1 transition symbol or an RT1 transition lip.

  The initial state after the setting change is always "normal" at RT0, while the initial state after power-on without setting change is the game state (generally RT1) before the power-off. As it is, it will be in the “normal” state. In the initial state after the setting change, if an advantageous section is won in the "normal" state of RT0, an advantageous section is relatively more advantageous than if the advantageous section is won in the initial state after power-on without setting change. . This will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 represents, by data, an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions "0" to "20" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "20" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are "black BAR", "red BAR", "red 7", "replay A", "replay B", "replay C", "bell A", "bell B", "bell C". And "Bell D".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 assigns a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0” and the reel 3L. , 3C, and 3R, in the order in which the symbols move in the rotation direction, symbol positions "0" to "20" are assigned to each of the 21 symbols.

  As described above, by using the middle of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 104, each symbol arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 104 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “black BAR”, “red BAR”, “red 7”, “replay A”, “replay B”, “replay C”, “bell A” as described above. , "Bell B", "Bell C" and "Bell D".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “black BAR” symbol (symbol code 1), and similarly, each symbol from “red BAR” to “bell D” (symbol codes 2 to 10) , “00000010” to “000000101” are assigned as data.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination) determined in advance according to the type of privilege, data to be stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a symbol combination when the symbol combination is displayed. (The number of medals to be paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined to be a winning. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a bonus such as payout of a medal, operation of a replay (replay), and operation of a bonus game (casual action device) is given to the player. If the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called "losing". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item "out" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "out".

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the number of medals provided for the unit game is “2” (at the time of 2 BET), the left column of the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4 Two lines are valid: the bottom line connecting the lower row of the middle row and the lower row of the right row, and the hill line connecting the lower row of the left row, the middle row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right row. When the number of medals provided for a unit game is "3" (at the time of 3BET), the middle row of the 3 × 3 symbols displayed in the display window 4 and the middle row of the left column, One center line connecting the middle row of the row and the middle row of the right row is an effective line. During the operation of the SMB, only the 2-BET game is possible, and during the operation of the LMB and the non-operation of the MB, only the 3-BET game is possible.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored, and a “data (bit corresponding to the symbol combination in one-byte data) stored in the storage area”. Data for designating ")."

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of the symbol constituting the combination.

  The payout number specified in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. The contents column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination.

  With reference to FIG. 105, for example, the combination names “S_red CL lip — 01” to “S red CL lip — 18” are combinations of symbols related to “W aligned lip”. More specifically, the combination names “S_red CL lip — 01” to “S_red CL lip —18” can be displayed with three symbols “red BAR” and three symbols “red 7” arranged in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

  It should be noted that, among the combinations of symbols related to the combination name “S_red CL lip — 01” of “W aligned lip”, both the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” are displayed in a straight line. In other combinations of symbols, both the symbol "red BAR" and the symbol "red 7" are not displayed in a straight line. This is because the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” may not be able to be stopped and displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation due to the arrangement of the symbols arranged on the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Symbol combinations other than “S_red CL lip — 01” indicate symbol combinations that are displayed instead when a so-called pressing operation is not appropriate. This is the same for other symbol combinations such as “red BAR lip”.

  The combination names “S_red XU lip” to “S_red XD lip_06” are combinations of symbols related to “red BAR lip”, and symbols in which three “red BAR” symbols can be displayed in a straight line. It is a combination of The combination names “S_red 7CL lip — 01” and “S_red 7CL lip —02” are combinations of symbols related to “W aligned lip”, and both the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” are linear. Is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. The combination names “S_red 7XU lip — 01” to “S_red 7XD lip — 04” are combinations of symbols related to “red 7 lip”, and three “red 7” symbols may be displayed in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

  Referring to FIG. 106 and FIG. 107, the combination names “S_common lip 1_01” to “S_common lip 3_04” are combinations of symbols related to “red BAR fanning”, and the symbol “red BAR” is linear. Can be displayed side by side, but three are combinations of symbols that do not line up. Similarly, the combination names "S_common lip 4_01" to "S_common lip 6_03" are combinations of symbols related to "red 7 fan", and two symbols "red 7" can be displayed in a straight line. 3 are combinations of symbols that do not line up.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that can be displayed with three symbols “red BAR” arranged in a straight line is called “red BAR lip”, and two symbols “red BAR” are displayed in a straight line. A combination of symbols that can be obtained but are not lined up is called "red BAR fanning". Similarly, a combination of symbols in which three symbols “Red 7” can be displayed in a line in a straight line is called “Red 7 Lip”, and although two symbols “Red 7” can be displayed in a straight line, A combination of symbols that do not line up is called "Red 7 Fan". In addition, a combination of symbols in which both the symbol “Red BAR” and the symbol “Red 7” can be displayed in a line in a straight line is called “W-aligned lip”.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines information of a lottery value corresponding to each combination. FIG. 109 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of RT0 to RT3, MB inside, and MB (operation).

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0-65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by making a determination as to whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the greater the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role assigned to this is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 109, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities related to replays determined as internal winning combinations are different in each gaming state. By the way, in RT0 to RT3 or inside the MB, the pressing order bells (“F_4 alternative bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_4 alternative bell 4B (No. 41)”) are internally won with a probability of about ４. Determined as a role.

  Note that SMB is a bonus combination having a setting difference, and can be determined as a single winning combination of “SMB (No. 48)”. On the other hand, the LMB is a bonus combination having no setting difference, and can be determined as an overlapping winning combination of “LMB + F_Flip Lip B (No. 49)” or “LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50)”. Here, FIG. 109 shows only the internal lottery table for setting 1, but an SMB having a setting difference between RT0 and RT3 is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/18 in setting 1, In 6, the internal winning combination is determined with a probability of about 1/15. In addition, when the SMB and the LMB are added, the MB (“SMB (No. 48)” to “LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)”) is internally won with a probability of about 1/17 in setting 1 at RT0 to RT3. In the setting 6, the internal winning combination is determined with a probability of about 1/15.

  Also, “SMB” is a single winning only, and a symbol combination corresponding to “SMB” is a draw-in 1 (even if the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is stopped at any timing in all the pressing orders, it can be used for another role). The symbol arrangement and the reel stop control are designed so that the winnings can be made as long as they are not hindered. Since the winnings are always made in the established game (the game won for the first time instead of being carried over from the non-bonus winning state), the carry-over may be performed. Absent. In the established game, “LMB” is internally won in duplication with the replaying role (replay), and the replaying role wins in preference to “LMB”. The state moves to the inside of the MB, which is the state. Since the symbol combination corresponding to "LMB" is also the pull-in 1, the winning combination is always made unless the small winning combination or the replaying winning combination which wins over the bonus in the inter-flag state is simultaneously established. By adopting such a combination structure, the player can intentionally avoid winning a MB with his / her eyes and delay the satisfaction of the condition for ending the advantageous section, thereby increasing the arrival rate to the “harry ceiling”. It is possible to prevent a capture method and suppress unexpected damage to the hall side.

  In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109, the lottery values of “F_RT1 middle lip 1 (No. 1)” to “F_common lip (No. 24)” during the inside of the MB and during the MB (operation) are omitted. However, in the inside of the MB and during the MB, a lottery value according to the RT state at that time is defined. In addition, during the MB, the lottery values of “F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_1 sheet combination (No. 47)” are omitted, but during the operation of the MB, regardless of the internal lottery process. All the small winning combinations (“F — 4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F — 1 sheet winning (No. 47)”) are won.

  As described above, in the MB, for the replay combination, the winning probability of the current RT state (that is, the lottery value shown in FIG. 109) is taken over and the lottery is performed, while the small combination is not performed. , All small wins can be determined as internal wins. As illustrated in FIG. 102, the LMB takes over the internal middle RT state, which is shifted by the internal winning of the LMB combination (No. 49, 50 in FIG. 109), during the LMB operation, and the SMB performs the SMB combination (No. 49 in FIG. 109). .48), any one of the RT states RT0 to RT3, which is the RT state in the internally won game, is taken over during the SMB operation. As shown in FIG. 103, after the operation of the LMB ends, the state transits to RT0 (low RT). However, the SBM does not change the RT state in any of the internal winning, operation start, and operation end. By avoiding the transition from the high RT to the low RT in response to the small winning number and the SMB having a high winning probability, it is easy to maintain the high RT, so that the increasing speed of the payout by “ART” is not reduced. .

  Further, the method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB is not limited to the above. For example, in the MB, the internal lottery table corresponding to the current RT state is referred to (that is, the internal lottery table for the MB is not defined), and all the above-mentioned winning numbers (“F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34) )) To “F_1 sheet combination (No. 47)” so that it can be determined whether or not a winning is achieved based on a specified lottery value. Thereafter, all small combinations (“F_4 selection bell”) are performed. 1A (No. 34) ”to“ F_1 sheet combination (No. 47) ”) may be further determined as an internal winning combination. As a result, the data capacity related to the internal lottery table can be reduced.

  Further, as a method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB, without performing the lottery using the internal random determination table shown in FIG. Combination (No. 47) ") may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the data capacity and the processing load can be further reduced.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 110 to FIG. 111 are tables each showing a correspondence relationship with a symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on an active line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination.

  FIG. 110 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the normal state (that is, when the game state of the main control board 71 is other than the inside of the MB and the MB (operation) state (see FIG. 102)). FIG. After determining the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays the reels 3L, 3C, 3R such that the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 110 is displayed based on the determined internal winning combination and the order of the stop operation (the pressing order). Control.

  For example, when “F_Normal lip B (No. 14)” is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is “left 1st”, which is an operation on the left reel 3L (middle left or middle left and right). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, a combination of symbols related to “replay” (see the content column in FIG. 106) is displayed, and the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C (middle left / right or middle right / left). When a stop operation is performed in a certain “middle 1st” pressing order, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR fanning” is displayed, and the first stop operation is an operation on the right reel 3L (right middle left or right middle left). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “Right 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Fan” is displayed.

  If “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st”, a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed, and “ When the stop operation is performed in the middle 1st pressing order, a symbol combination related to “red BAR lip” is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the “right 1st” pressing order, the symbol combination pertains to “red 7 fan”. The combination of symbols is displayed. Similarly, when “F_SP lip A2 (No. 21)” is determined as the internal winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st”, a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed, When the stop operation is performed in the “middle 1st” pressing order, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR fanning” is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the “right 1st” pressing order, “red 7 lip” is displayed. The combination of such symbols is displayed.

  As described above, during the ART, the additional lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is managed in the chance B mode, and the additional lottery based on “SP Lip A1” is managed in the chance C mode. The additional lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is performed when “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)” is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the main control board The 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 notifies (instructs) the pressing order of the “middle 1st” and displays the combination of the symbols related to “red BAR lip”. Similarly, the additional lottery based on “SP lip A1” is performed when “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination. The main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 notifies (instructs) the pressing order of “1st right” and displays a combination of symbols related to “red 7 lip”.

  On the other hand, if there is an instruction of a symbol to be aimed, if the symbols are always aligned, the gameplay becomes monotonous. Therefore, when “F_Normal Lip B (No. 14)” is determined as the internal winning combination, Alternatively, when the additional lottery based on “SP Lip A1” or the additional lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is not won, the main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 of the pachislot 1 has a predetermined probability of “red”. The pressing order in which the combination of the symbols related to "BAR swaying" and "Red 7 swaying" is displayed is informed (instructed), and the matching of the patterns is performed. In addition, when the symbol alignment is not performed, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot 1 notifies (instructs) the pressing order of “left 1st” and performs the symbol related to “replay”. Is displayed.

  Also, when “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)” are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and “left 1st” When a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "", a combination of symbols related to "Replay" is displayed. The combination (“red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, “W-matched lip”) is displayed without displaying the combination (“red BAR fan”, “red 7 fan”). As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when an additional lottery is won during an ART, the additional information may be notified after holding temporarily rather than immediately notifying the additional information. )) To “F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)” are used when additional information is notified later. For example, when the main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot 1 notifies of the addition of the 50 games held, “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP” are used as internal winning combinations. When "Lip B3 (No. 24)" is determined, the pressing order in which the symbol combination related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed is instructed (instructed), and the additional 100 games held are notified. When the pressing order in which the symbol combination related to “Red BAR Rip” is displayed is informed (instructed), and the addition of the held 150 games is notified, the symbol combination related to “W Align Rip” is displayed. The push order is notified (instructed).

  It should be noted that combinations of symbols that can be displayed when other winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations in a normal state are as shown in FIG. The correspondence with the displayed symbol combination is as shown in FIG.

[Game flow during non-ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112, the flow of a game during non-ART ("normal" or "normally advantageous") will be described. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the pachislot 1 basically has a playability of playing a game from a non-ART to an ART. As shown in FIG. 112 (A) and FIG. 100, in the pachislot 1, the transition route from the non-ART to the ART includes an ART direct hit route directly transitioning from the non-ART to the ART, and an ART from the non-ART via the SCZ. And a route via the MB_HCZ from the non-ART to the ART via the MB_HCZ. Hereinafter, the flow of the ART direct hit route and the SCZ route will be described.

  FIG. 112 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the game on the ART direct hit route. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an advantageous section shift lottery during “normal” (normal section), and shifts from “normal” to an advantageous section when the shift lottery is won. I do. In this advantageous section shift lottery, the main control board 71 performs a lottery along with the type of the advantageous section of the transfer destination. For example, when the ART is determined as the transfer destination, the main control board 71 directly changes the “normal” to the ART of the advantageous section. Transition.

  On the other hand, when the normal advantage is determined as the transfer destination in the advantageous section shift lottery, the transition from “normal” to the normal advantage of the advantageous section is made. As shown in FIG. 100, in this embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery during the normal advantage, and shifts from the normal advantage to the ART when the transition lottery is won. In the present embodiment, when the ART is determined as the transfer destination in the advantageous section shift lottery performed during “normal”, or when the ART lottery performed during normal advantage is won, the non-ART switches directly from the ART to the ART. Transfer (ART direct hit route).

  Note that the ART lottery during the normal advantage is performed based on the normal mode. The normal mode includes a plurality of modes such as "low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next sign", and each has a different ART lottery winning probability. Specifically, the winning probability of the ART lottery is “super heaven” among the normal modes, “heaven” and “special” are the next highest, “heaven preparation” is the next highest, and “low probability” is the highest. Lowest. Note that “next sign” is a normal mode in which it is determined to win the ART lottery. The normal mode during the normal advantage can be arbitrarily shifted. For example, the main control board 71 performs the normal mode shift lottery according to the winning combination during the normal advantage, and shifts the normal mode according to the lottery result. be able to.

  Further, when the winning probability of the ART random determination based on the normal mode is compared with the probability that the ART is determined in the “normal” advantageous section shift lottery, the probability that the ART is determined in the “normal” advantageous section shift lottery is determined. Is slightly higher than the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode “heaven preparation”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, depending on the normal mode, there is a case where the probability of the ART lottery in the advantageous section is lower than the probability of the ART being determined in the advantageous section shift lottery during the “normal” (for example, Normal mode "Low accuracy" "Heaven preparation").

  Note that, as described above, when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120 games (the ceiling ceiling), the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high-accuracy D). Here, during the normal operation after the ceiling, the main control board 71 performs the ART operation during the normal operation based on the SCZ mode “high accuracy D” regardless of the normal mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 described later, the ART lottery based on the SCZ mode “high accuracy D” has a higher winning probability than the normal mode “super heaven”.

  FIG. 112 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game on the SCZ route. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 normally performs the SCZ lottery during an advantageous operation, and shifts to the SCZ when the SCZ lottery is won. The main control board 71 performs the ART lottery during the SCZ, and shifts to the ART when the ART lottery is won. As described above, when the SCZ lottery performed during the normal advantage is won, and then the ART lottery performed during the SCZ is won, the non-ART is transferred to the ART via the SCZ (the SCZ route). On the other hand, when the SCZ is completed without winning the ART lottery performed during the SCZ, the process is advantageously shifted from the SCZ. Note that SCZ ends when the specified number of games (5G) has elapsed without winning the ART lottery.

  The SCZ random determination during the normal advantage and the ART random determination during the SCZ are performed based on the SCZ mode. The SCZ mode has a plurality of modes such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", "high accuracy C", and "high accuracy D". The winning probabilities are different. Specifically, the winning probabilities of the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery are as follows. Among the SCZ modes, “Highly accurate D” is the highest, “Highly accurate C” is the next highest, and “Highly accurate B” is the next highest. “High accuracy A” is the next highest, and “Low accuracy” is the lowest. The SCZ mode can be arbitrarily shifted, but in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the SCZ mode shift lottery in accordance with the number of normally advantageous elapsed elapsed games and the normally advantageous winning combination. Then, the SCZ mode is shifted according to the result of the lottery.

[Various data tables used in ART direct hit route]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in the ART direct hit route will be described. The various data tables described below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to the various data tables.

<Normal_Advantaged Section Shift Lottery Table>
First, the normal_advantaged-section shift lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal_advantageous-section shift lottery table is a table referred to when performing an advantageous section shift lottery based on an internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the “normal” state (normal section). As shown in the drawing, in the normal_advantageous-section shift lottery table, as reference items, “battery order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance”, “medium chance, fanning” “Lip”, “Strong Bell”, “Fixed Combination”, and “LMB” are defined, and the lottery values of “Non-Win”, “Normal Advantage”, “Specific Combination”, and “LMB” indicating the lottery result for each reference item are set. Stipulated. As the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 109, “stroke order bell” corresponds to “F_4 alternative bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_4 alternative bell 4B (No. 41)”, and “common bell, one sheet” , “F_Common Bell A (No. 45) to F_Common Bell B (No. 46)” and “F_1 Sheet Combination (No. 47)”, and “Common Lip, Chance Lip, Weak Chance” “F_Common Lip (No. 25)”, “F_Chance Lip (No. 26)”, and “F_Low Chance Role (No. 44)”, and “Medium Chance, Fanning Lip” are “F_ Medium Chance Role”. (No. 43) "," F_Fan lip A (No. 31) "to" F_Fan lip B (No. 32) ", and" strong bell "is" F_strong bell (No. 42) ". , And “determined role” is “F_black BAR lip (No. 37)”, “F_red BAR lip” No. 28) "," F_red 7 lip A (No. 29) "to" F_red 7 lip B (No. 30) ", and" LMB "is" LMB + F_fan lip B (No. 49) ". To LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50). The “specific combination” as a result of the lottery is a trigger of a specific process as a “fixed combination”. In other lottery tables, “stroke order lip”, “SP lip A1”, “SP lip A2”, “SP lip B1”, and “SP lip B2” may be used as reference items. Corresponds to “F_RT1 lip 1 (No. 1)” to “F_maintenance lip 5 (No. 19)”, “SP lip A1” corresponds to “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)”, “SP lip A2” corresponds to “F_SP lip A2 (No. 21)”, “SP lip B1” corresponds to “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)”, and “SP lip B2” F_SP lip B2 (No. 23) "and" F_SP lip B3 (No. 24) ".

  According to such an advantageous section shift lottery using the normal_advantageous section shift lottery table, if, for example, “stroke order bell” is won in the “normal” state, the lottery result of “normally advantageous” with a probability of 1/256 is obtained. Based on the obtained lottery result, the next game is set to the “normally advantageous” state. Further, for example, when the “medium chance” or the “fanning lip” is won, a lottery result of “normally advantageous” is obtained with a probability of 248/256, and based on the lottery result, a “normally advantageous” state is set from the next game. In addition, a lottery result of “ART” may be obtained with a probability of 8/256. In this case, the state of “ART sign” is set from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such an “ART” is about 3.2% when the “medium chance, fanning lip” is won, and is about 12.5% when the “strong bell” is won, and the “advantage section” is won. Lower than the probability of doing.

<Normal_Advantaged Section Initial Normal Mode Lottery Table>
Next, the normal_advantageous-section initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal_advantageous-section initial normal mode lottery table, in the first game (unit game) immediately after shifting to “advantageous section” by winning from “normal” to the advantageous section shift lottery, the normal mode of the first game is changed to the advantageous section. This is a table that is referred to when determining by initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous-section initial normal mode lottery table, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance”, and “medium chance” , "Fan lip", "Strong bell", "Determining hand", "LMB" are defined, and as the types of the normal mode indicating the lottery result for each reference item, "Low accuracy", "Heaven preparation", "Heaven", Lottery values of “super heaven”, “special”, and “next sign” are defined.

  According to such an advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, if the “batting order bell” is won in the first game of “normally advantageous”, for example, the probability of 248/256 is “low”. Is obtained, and in the first game, the low-probability normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, when the “bat order” is won, a lottery result of “heaven preparation” is obtained with a probability of 6/256. In this case, in the first game of “normal advantage”, “ It becomes the normal mode of "heaven preparation". After the first game of “normal advantage”, the normal mode may be promoted according to the lottery result of the normal mode shift lottery. The normal mode is promoted in the order of "low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next warning" (including promotion of two or more levels), and is basically promoted. The winning probability of “ART” (see FIG. 115) is higher, but in the case of “special” which can also be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of “ART” is “super heaven”. It is not necessarily higher than the case (see FIG. 115). In addition, the winning probability of “ART” in the case of “low accuracy” or “heaven preparation” in the “normal advantage” state is lower than the winning probability of “ART” in the “normal” state. (See FIGS. 113 and 115). As a result, immediately after the transition from “normal” to “normal advantage”, it becomes easier to win “ART” than in the “normal” state. This will be described in detail with reference to a later-described normal advantageous_ART lottery table.

<Normal advantage_ART lottery table>
Next, the normal advantage_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal advantageous_ART lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode (“low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, “next sign”) and SCZ mode “high accuracy D”. This table is provided and is referred to when determining transition to “ART” (“ART winning”) based on an internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantageous_ART lottery table corresponding to each mode, as reference items, “battery order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “ "Chance lip", "medium chance", and "strong bell" are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the ART lottery using such a normal advantage_ART lottery table, in the “normal advantage” state, for example, in the “low-probability” normal mode, if a “weak chance” is won, 1/256 A lottery result of “ART” winning is obtained with a probability, and thereafter, the state transitions to “ART” via “ART precursor”.

  Here, when the normal mode is “low probability” or “heaven preparation”, the “ART” winning probability is “ART” winning probability (“low accuracy” or “heaven”) in consideration of the winning probability of the internal winning combination. Preparation ”) = 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81% On the other hand, referring to FIG. 113, when the "ART" winning probability is determined by the advantage section shift lottery at the "normal" time, the "ART" winning probability (normal time) = 2. It is about 5%. That is, in the present embodiment, in the initial normal mode (mainly “low accuracy” or “heaven preparation”) at the time of transition to “normal advantage”, the probability of winning “ART” is lower than in the “normal” state. It is more difficult to shift to “ART” immediately after shifting to “normally advantageous” than to “normal”. As a result, even in the “normal” state, the degree of expectation that the game may shift to “ART” without going through “normal advantage” is increased, and the interest of the game can be increased. Further, even if the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) goes out, it is not necessarily the most disadvantageous situation, so let's stop the game when the lamp goes out. It is possible to motivate a player who thinks that the game will continue. In addition, in a game arcade other than immediately after opening, the predecessor selects an empty stand from a situation where the game has been left in a state of stopping the game. Even with the above measures, there is a tendency for more stands to be left in a situation where the advantageous zone lamp is turned off, and the situation where the advantageous zone lamp is turned off is the most disadvantageous situation for that model. If this is confirmed, the player may hesitate to start the game, not necessarily starting the game from the most disadvantageous situation. It can be said that the player has a very high desire to play when he visits the amusement arcade and comes to see the model, but if such a player loses his motivation, the utilization rate will decrease. As described above, by setting specifications in which the lighting of the advantageous section lamp is not necessarily the most disadvantageous in the gaming state of the model, it is impossible to say that the situation is not the most disadvantageous for the time being. It is also possible to expect the effect of suppressing the decrease in the occupancy rate by allowing the player to have a feeling of trying to go.

[Various data tables used for SCZ route]
Subsequently, configurations of various data tables used in the SCZ route will be described. The various data tables described below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to the various data tables.

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode shift lottery table when the specified game is reached>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a description will be given of the normal advantageous_specified game arrival SCZ mode transition lottery table. The normal advantageous_specified game arrival SCZ mode shift lottery table is provided for each normally advantageous elapsed game number (“20G elapsed”, “40G elapsed”, “80G elapsed”), and is currently (before shifting). 4) is a table that is referred to when determining the destination SCZ mode from the SCZ mode of FIG. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantageous_specified game arrival SCZ mode transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transition destination SCZ mode) is defined for each current SCZ mode.

  According to the SCZ mode shift lottery using the normal advantage_specified game arrival SCZ mode shift lottery table, in the SCZ mode shift lottery when the specified game arrives, as the number of games passed during the normal advantage increases, the It is easy to shift to a higher SCZ mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of elapsed games during the normal advantage reaches 120 G, the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated lottery mode (high-accuracy D), and thereafter, the “high-accuracy D” is set until the transition to ART. There is no transition from. The shift to “high-accuracy D” is performed without performing the shift lottery, and the main control board 71 shifts the SCZ mode to “high-accuracy D” when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120G. .

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode shift lottery table>
Next, the normal advantageous_SCZ mode shift lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal advantageous_SCZ mode shift lottery table is provided for each type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”), It is a table that is referred to when determining a destination SCZ mode based on an internal winning combination for each mode. In the normal advantageous_SCZ mode shift lottery table corresponding to each mode, reference items such as “battery order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “chance lip”, Medium chance ”and“ strong bell ”are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (the destination SCZ mode) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the SC-mode shift lottery using the normal advantage_SCZ mode shift lottery table, the SCZ mode shifts based on the internal winning combination during the normal advantage. In the example shown in FIG. 117, in the shift lottery based on the internal winning combination, the SCZ mode is only dropped or maintained, and is not promoted. In this regard, the SCZ mode may be promoted also in the shift lottery based on the internal winning combination.

<Normal advantage_SCZ lottery table>
Next, the normal advantage_SCZ lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal advantage_SCZ lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining transition to “SCZ” (“SCZ winning”) based on the SCZ mode in each game during normal advantage. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantageous_SCZ lottery table, the current SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”) is used as a reference item. "), And a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the SCZ lottery using such a normal advantage_SCZ lottery table, in the “normal advantage” state, for example, in the “high-accuracy A” SCZ mode, the “SCZ” winning with a probability of 24/256 is achieved. The lottery result is obtained, and thereafter, the state shifts to the “SCZ” state. In the example shown in FIG. 118, in the normally advantageous SCZ lottery, the transition to “SCZ” is determined by uniform lottery regardless of the internal winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, in addition to the uniform lottery, the SCZ random determination based on the internal winning combination and the SCZ mode may be performed. Further, when a lottery result of “SCZ” winning is obtained in the SCZ lottery, the type of “SCZ” (“normal” or “legend”) may be determined by lottery. The lottery result of the type “SCZ” may be different depending on the internal winning combination when the lottery result of “SCZ” winning is obtained. For example, when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy D”, the “legend” may be easily determined, or the “legend” may always be determined.

<SCZ_ART lottery table>
Next, the SCZ_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The SCZ_ART lottery table is provided for each type of “SCZ” and each type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”). This table is referred to when determining transition to “ART” (“ART winning”) based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ_ART lottery table, the type of SCZ (“normal”, “legend”) and the type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”) are reference items. , “High-accuracy C”, “High-accuracy D”), internal winning combinations (“Battery order bell”, “Common bell, 1 sheet”, “Common lip, Fake lip”, “Weak chance”, “Chance lip”, “Medium” "Chance" and "strong bell"), and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is specified for each reference item.

  According to the ART lottery using such an SCZ_ART lottery table, for example, in the case of “normal” “SCZ”, if the SCZ mode is “high-accuracy D”, if the “medium chance” is won, 128/256 The lottery result of the "ART" winning is obtained with the probability of, and then the state shifts to the "ART" state via the "additional specialization zone".

<SCZ_SCZ end SCZ mode lottery table>
Next, the SCZ mode random determination table at the end of SCZ_SCZ will be described with reference to FIG. The SCZ_SCZ end-time SCZ mode lottery table is a table that is referred to when the SCZ mode to be shifted to is determined for each current SCZ mode when “SCZ” ends without being won for shifting to “ART”. is there. As shown in the drawing, in the SCZ_SCZ end-time SCZ mode lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (the shift destination SCZ mode) is defined for each current SCZ mode.

  According to the SCZ mode random determination using the SCZ mode random determination table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, for example, when the SCZ mode is “highly accurate D”, the SCZ mode is maintained as “highly accurate D”.

<Normal advantage_Advantage section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of a normal advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table. The normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode (“low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”). It is a table that is referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is "next sign", there is no advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to "next sign" in order not to end the advantageous section. Also, as described above, the advantageous section is not ended even when the SCZ mode is “highly accurate D”. Therefore, when the SCZ mode is “highly accurate D”, the main control board 71 has an advantage regardless of the type of the normal mode. The end lottery of the section is not performed. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantageous_advantageous-section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as reference items, “battery order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, fake clip”, “weak” A "chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", and "strong bell" are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the advantage section end lottery using the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table, for example, after reaching 100 G from the start of the advantage section, in the “normal advantage” state, for example, the “low-probability” normal mode In the case of, when the "batting order bell" is won, a lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a high probability of 252/256, and the state of "normal advantage" of the advantageous section from the next game becomes "normal" of the ordinary section. To the state of. On the other hand, even when, for example, the “strike order bell” is won in the “low-probability” normal mode, a lottery result of the advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being ended. After the predetermined number of games elapses after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, the state may shift to the “normal” state in the normal section. Further, after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, a transition wait state of a predetermined number of games is provided until the transition to the “normal” state of the normal section, so that the predetermined number of games is won and the advantageous section is continued or And / or ART winning, defeat and end of an advantageous section may be performed in a continuous manner over a plurality of games, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the continuous production and the defeat is confirmed in the middle of the continuous production. In the continuous effect, a basic decision is made with a game number that is one or more games shorter than the predetermined number of games waiting for the transition, so that a pattern of resuming in the next game in which the defeat effect as the basic result has occurred is provided. It may be. For example, if the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of the third stop of the game in which the defeat-determined effect is generated, there is no possibility that the advantageous effect will be continued or the ART win will be achieved in the resurrection effect, and the willingness to continue the game of the next game will be reduced. Therefore, care should be taken to avoid such situations. As a specific example, a case where the predetermined number of games is 5 games, the content up to the conclusion of the continuous effect excluding one game for the resurrection effect is composed of up to four games, and the resurrection effect is performed in one game. By turning off the advantageous section lamp after the player confirms that the resurrection effect does not occur, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered on the way. When the limiter (limit processing) is activated, a transition waiting state cannot be provided before transition from “normal advantage” to “normal” in the ordinary section. It is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the continuous production related to the continuation and prevent the continuous production from being terminated by the limiter.

[Game flow during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a flow of a game during “ART” (more specifically, a flow of a game related to adding during ART) will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 adds a game number that extends the number of games that can continue “ART” and a specialization that grants the right of “additional specialization zone”. Two types of addition, that is, addition of a zone stock, are performed during “ART”. Here, as described above, during “ART”, the addition is controlled based on a plurality of modes, such as the ART mode, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode. Hereinafter, the relationship between the mode in “ART” and the addition will be described.

  FIG. 122 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the ART mode and the addition. As described above, the ART mode includes a plurality of modes, such as “mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C”, which have different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery in ART. The initial state of the ART mode at the time of transition to “ART” is basically “mode A”. However, when the transition to “ART” is triggered by the “fixed combination”, the “mode B” or “mode C” ". More specifically, when the mode is shifted to “ART” triggered by “determined hand 1”, the ART mode starts from “mode B”, and when the mode is shifted to “ART” triggered by “determined hand 2”, ART The mode starts from “mode C”. Note that the “fixed hand 1” corresponds to “F_red BAR lip (No. 28)”, “F_red 7 lip A (No. 29)”, and “F_red 7 lip B (No. 30)”. , “Determined combination 2” corresponds to “F_black BAR lip (No. 37)”.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the ART mode has a different expected degree of addition. Basically, “mode 0” has almost no expected degree of addition, and “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode In the mode C ", addition is performed with a predetermined probability. As described above, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0”, the expected degree of addition is all the same, but the ease of falling down to “mode 0” is different in each ART mode. , "ART", the degree of advantage regarding addition is different in "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C". Of course, by changing the probability itself of winning in an additional lottery or the like in “Mode A”, “Mode B”, and “Mode C”, the degree of advantage regarding the additional in “ART” may be changed. The degree of advantage regarding addition may be made different from both the probability of winning an additional lottery and the like and the ease of falling down to “mode 0”. At this time, the ART mode that is harder to fall down to “mode 0” may have a higher probability of winning in the extra lottery or the like (for example, “Mode C” may have the highest probability of winning the extra lottery or the like). It is also possible to mix and adjust the ease of falling down to mode 0 "and the probability of winning in an additional lottery or the like. As an example, the probability of winning an additional lottery in “Mode A”, which is most likely to fall into “Mode 0”, may be set higher than the probability of winning an additional lottery in “Mode B”. By doing so, if the ART mode falls to just before “mode 0”, it becomes rather easy to carry on.

  Further, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode shift lottery during “ART”, and shifts the ART mode according to a result of the shift lottery. The shift lottery in the ART mode is performed by a lottery (normal process) based on an internal winning combination, and is also performed by a common process at the time of MB operation. In the present embodiment, in the transition lottery based on the normal processing, the ART mode is basically maintained or dropped, but in the transition lottery based on the common processing, the ART mode is basically maintained or promoted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ART mode may be promoted in the transfer lottery based on the normal processing, and the ART mode may be dropped in the transfer lottery based on the common processing.

  Next, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the chance mode and the addition. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of modes such as a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode, which have different triggers for additional management. Specifically, the chance B mode manages an addition based on “SP lip A2”, and the chance C mode manages an addition based on “SP lip A1”. As for “SP Lip A2”, a symbol combination related to “Red 7 Lip” in which three symbols “Red 7” are displayed side by side by performing a stop operation in the pressing order of “Right 1st” is displayed. , “SP lip A1” displays a combination of symbols related to “red BAR lip” in which three symbols “red BAR” are displayed side by side by performing a stop operation in the pressing order of “middle 1st”. Therefore, it can be said that the chance B mode manages the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the red BAR alignment. In addition, the chance A mode manages additions based on winning combinations other than “SP Lip A1” and “SP Lip A2”.

  In the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, there are a plurality of “normal”, “high-accuracy preparation”, “high-accuracy”, and “ultra-high-accuracy” with different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery in ART. Mode. The main control board 71 performs individual mode shift lottery for each of the chance A mode, chance B mode, and chance C mode during “ART”, and shifts the mode of each chance mode according to the result of the shift lottery. . Therefore, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are individually managed during “ART”. For example, in a certain game, each mode may be a separate mode, or some modes may be common. In some cases, all modes are common.

  Next, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the last freeze which is a special addition in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a random determination as to whether or not to generate a last freeze at a timing when the number of remaining games of “ART” is reduced from 1 to 0. When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached (= 1500−the number of games in the completed advantageous section) to the remaining game number of the ART, and performs a predetermined freeze process. . As an example, when the number of games played during the advantageous section is 200, and the lottery of the last freeze is won, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the remaining game number of the ART. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a predetermined process at the time of terminating the ART. In addition, when the lottery of the last freeze is won, since it is determined that the limit process is performed, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending”, and thereafter does not perform any additional lottery.

  Further, the timing of performing the lottery of the last freeze may be any timing of the final game of “ART”, for example, may be at the start of the game of the final game of “ART”, or may be the timing of the “ART” final game. During the first stop operation to the third stop operation. The stop operation may be when the stop switch 7S is turned on or when the stop switch 7S is turned off.

[Various data tables used during ART]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used for additional lottery in “ART” will be described. The various data tables described below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to the various data tables.

  FIGS. 123 to 128 shown below are data tables used for control relating to the ART mode. Specifically, FIG. 123 and FIG. 124 are data tables used for the ART mode transition lottery, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are data tables used for the additional number of games based on the ART mode. FIG. 127 and FIG. 128 are data tables used for adding lottery in the special zone based on the ART mode.

  129 to 135 are data tables used for control related to the chance mode. Specifically, FIG. 129 is a data table used to randomly select a chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) at the time of transition to “ART”, and FIGS. FIGS. 133 to 135 are data tables used for the additional lottery of the number of games based on each chance mode.

  FIG. 136 is a data table used for additional lottery when adding more than 100 games, and FIG. 137 is a data table used for random determination of whether or not to generate a last freeze.

<ART_ART mode shift lottery table>
First, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_ART mode shift lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the ART mode shift destination based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, an ART_ART mode shift lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) and as a reference item. , "Battery order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" A lottery value corresponding to (the destination ART mode) is defined.

  According to the ART mode transition lottery using the ART_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs the ART mode transition lottery (normal processing) based on the internal winning combination during “ART”. The ART mode is shifted based on the lottery result. For example, when the current ART mode is “mode B” and a “batting order bell” is won, a lottery result of transition (fall) to “mode A” is obtained with a probability of 12/256, and the ART mode is set to “mode B”. B ”to“ mode A ”.

<MB operation_ART mode shift lottery table>
Next, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table is used in common processing at the time of MB operation, and is a table that is referred to when determining a transition destination of the ART mode. As shown in the drawing, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table includes a lottery result (transition destination) for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”). (ART mode) is determined.

  According to the ART mode transition lottery using the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs the ART mode transition lottery (common processing) at the time of MB operation during “ART”. The ART mode is shifted based on the result. For example, when the current ART mode is “mode 0”, a lottery result of transition (promotion) to “mode A” is obtained with a probability of 63/256, and the ART mode changes from “mode 0” to “mode A”. And migrate.

<ART_Normal addition lottery table>
Next, the ART_normally added lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_normal additional lottery table is used in the additional lottery based on the ART mode performed during “ART”, and determines the number of additional games based on the internal winning combination (that is, the number of games that extend the period in which “ART” can be continued). This is a table that is referred to when performing the operation. As shown in the figure, the ART_normal addition lottery table is provided for each type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) and as a reference item. , "Battery order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", "Strong bell" A lottery value corresponding to (number of additional games) is defined.

  According to such additional lottery using the ART_normal additional lottery table, the main control board 71 performs a lottery of the number of additional games based on the internal winning combination and the ART mode during “ART”, and based on the lottery result. To extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. For example, if the current ART mode is “mode A” and the “medium chance” is won, a lottery result of “30G” is obtained as the number of additional games with a probability of 28/256, and “ART” can be continued. Is extended by 30 games.

  Here, referring to the ART_normal additional lottery table, in the present embodiment, “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” may be determined as the lottery result of the number of additional games. These “100A” to “100C” are the lottery results that determine the number of additional games of at least 100 games, and when “100A” to “100C” are determined, the main control board 71 The number of games to be actually added is randomly determined with reference to a common_higher-ranked game number random determination table shown in FIG. 136 described later.

  When comparing the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART mode “mode 0” and the ART_normal addition lottery table corresponding to the ART modes “mode A” to “mode C”, the ART mode “mode 0” shows that It can be seen that additional lottery during ART is suppressed. Specifically, when the ART mode is “mode 0”, the addition is performed only when the strong rare combination “strong bell” is won, and the addition is not performed when the other combination is won.

  When determining the number of additional games that extends the period during which “ART” can be continued (the number of remaining games), the main control board 71 updates the value of a predetermined counter managed by itself (ie, adds the number of remaining games). By adding the number of games), the period in which “ART” can be continued is extended. At this time, the sub-control board 72 may notify the player of the number of added games, triggered by the main control board 71 determining the number of added games. The number of added games may be temporarily held, and the number of games held may be notified to a player at a predetermined timing thereafter. For this reason, the sub-control board 72 serves as a counter for counting a period (the number of remaining games) in which “ART” can be continued (a notified counter) for counting a period (the number of notified games) that has been notified to the player. ) And a counter (unreported counter) that counts a period (number of unreported games) that has not been reported to the player. The value of the counter that counts the period during which “ART” managed by the main (main control board 71) can be continued depends on the value of the notified counter managed by the sub (sub control board 72) and the value of the unreported counter. Matches the sum with the value.

  Here, notifying that the number of added games is informed that the main control board 71 has determined the number of added games is not limited to the game in which the main control board 71 determines the number of added games, This includes notifying after a predetermined number of games from the game. That is, in the pachislot, the determined number of additional games may be notified by the result of the continuous production performed over a plurality of games, and the main control board 71 may notify the result as such a result of the continuous production. The determination may be included as a "trigger" in reporting the number of additional games.

  Further, the "predetermined opportunity" for notifying the number of additional games temporarily held can be set arbitrarily. For example, the apparent remaining number of games (notified counter) becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. This may be the case, and in spite of the fact that a so-called rare role (in the present embodiment, for example, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”, etc.) is determined as an internal winning combination, The main control board 71 may determine the number of additional games after the predetermined number of games has elapsed, or the main control board 71 may determine the number of additional games. May be determined after elapse of a predetermined time.

  Note that the notification of the number of added games by the sub-control board 72 triggered by the main control board 71 determining the number of added games may be hereinafter referred to as “immediate notification”. The temporary holding of the determined number of additional games by the sub-control board 72 may be referred to as “latency” below. In addition, in the present embodiment, the additional lottery is performed in response to various conditions. However, the immediate notification of the number of additional games and the hiding are described in ART_Normal Additional Lottery Lottery Result Using the Additional Lottery Table. In addition, the same applies to the lottery results of other additional lotteries.

<MB operation_ART game number added lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table will be described. The MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table is a table used in the common processing at the time of the MB operation and referred to when determining the number of additional games based on the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the type of the current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) is defined as a reference item in the MB operation_ART game number addition lottery table. Then, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (the number of additional games) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the additional lottery using the MB operation_ART game number additional lottery table, the main control board 71 performs the additional game number lottery based on the ART mode during “ART”, and based on the lottery result. Extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. Specifically, when the ART mode is in “mode 0”, the main control board 71 does not determine the number of additional games in the common processing at the time of MB operation (“0G” is always determined). In the state other than "", in the common processing at the time of MB operation, for example, "50G" is determined as the number of additional games with a probability of 12/256, and the period during which "ART" can be continued is extended by 50 games.

<ART_History Type Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_history type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_history type lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to a highly accurate history based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the drawing, the ART_history type lottery table includes, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium "Chance" and "Strong Bell" are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the transfer lottery to the high history using the ART_history type lottery table, the main control board 71 performs the transfer lottery to the high record accuracy based on the internal winning combination during “ART”. When the lottery is won, a history-high-accuracy state for five games is set. During the history-high-accuracy state between the five games, a stock lottery of “additional specialization zone” is performed with reference to an ART_additional specialization zone lottery table described later with reference to FIG. 128. One additional "specialized zone" stock is awarded. For example, when the "medium chance" is won, a lottery result of winning with high history is obtained with a probability of 32/256, and the history is highly accurate for the subsequent five games.

<ART_Additional Specialized Zone Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_additional specialization zone lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_additional-specialization zone lottery table is a table that is referred to when deciding whether or not to add the stock of the “additional specialization zone” based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the drawing, the ART_additional specialization zone lottery table includes, as reference items, “battery order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”. , “Medium chance”, and “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (non-winning, gasse 1, gaseous 2, win) is specified for each reference item. Note that the lottery result “non-winning, gaseous 1, gaseous 2” means that the lottery result is “non-winning” in the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone”. On the side of the sub-control board 72), a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that is not a winning but intensifies the winning) is executed.

  The main control board 71 performs the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” with reference to the ART_additional specialization zone lottery table only when the history is high during “ART”, and when this lottery is won, the “additional specialization zone” The type of “specialized zone” is determined by lottery, and the state is shifted from “ART” to “additional specialized zone”. According to the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” using such an ART_additional specialization zone lottery table, if, for example, the “medium chance” is won while the history is highly accurate, the “additional specialization zone” has a probability of 128/256. A lottery result of winning the stock lottery of the “zone” is obtained.

  Here, when comparing the ART_history type lottery table shown in FIG. 127 with the ART_additional specialization zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128, both tables show the lottery result when the “stroke order bell” and “common bell, one sheet” are won. It is understood that only “non-winning” is determined. Similarly, when "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", and "strong bell" are won, "winning" may be determined with a predetermined probability in both tables. I understand. For this reason, in the present embodiment, a winning combination that can be shifted to a highly accurate history wins the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” with a predetermined probability if the winning is performed during the highly accurate history. In other words, in the present embodiment, the rare role (“common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”) is played twice during the five games during “ART”. When the lottery is won, there is a possibility that the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” will be won. In this embodiment, it is possible to control the addition of “ART” based on the game result between the five games without having the history data (for example, the history of the winning combination between the five games). Points will be described later.

  Also, comparing the two tables, in the ART_history type lottery table, the probability of winning in the transition to lottery history is different according to the type of rare combination won, whereas in the ART_additional special zone lottery table, It can be seen that regardless of the type of the winning rare combination, the stock lottery of the “additional special zone” is won with a uniform probability (for example, 50%). As a result, in the present embodiment, if the history can be transferred with high accuracy, stock of the “additional specialization zone” can be expected regardless of the type of rare combination (even when a so-called weak rare combination is won). become.

  Note that the lottery transition to the high-accuracy history with reference to the ART_history type lottery table is performed when the ART mode is other than “mode 0” and is not performed when the ART mode is “mode 0”. Therefore, during “mode 0”, the history does not shift with high accuracy. Since the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” with reference to the ART_additional specialization zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128 is performed only while the history is highly accurate, the ART mode “mode 0” has a low degree of expectation of addition from this point as well. You can see that.

<ART_Initial high-precision lottery table>
Next, the ART_initial high-accuracy lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_initial high-precision lottery table is a table that is referred to when the initial state of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode is determined at the start of “ART”. As shown in the drawing, in the ART_initial high-precision lottery table, the timing of transition to “ART” is defined as a reference item, and the lottery results (ALL normal, chance A, chance B, chance A + B, chance A C, chance A + C, chance B + C, ALL high accuracy) are determined.

  As described above, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode include a plurality of modes such as “normal”, “high-accuracy preparation”, “high-accuracy”, and “ultra-high-accuracy”. The lottery result determined by the lottery with reference to the ART_initial high-precision lottery table indicates the type of chance mode in which “high-precision” is set as the initial state at the start of “ART”. For example, when the main control board 71 determines “Chance A” as the lottery result, the chance A mode “High accuracy”, the chance B mode “Normal”, and the chance C mode “Normal” as an initial state at the start of “ART”. Is set, and if "Chance B + C" is determined as a lottery result, the chance A mode "normal", the chance B mode "high accuracy", and the chance C mode "high accuracy" are set as the initial state at the start of "ART". If "ALL normal" is determined as a lottery result, chance A mode "normal", chance B mode "normal", and chance C mode "normal" are set as initial states at the start of "ART".

  The transition trigger to “ART” provided as a reference item can be set arbitrarily. In the present embodiment, the following transition trigger is used as an example. For example, when the main control board 71 shifts to “ART” via “SCZ” of “Legend”, a lottery is performed using the reference item of “Opportunity B”, and “F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29) ”and“ F_red 7 lip B (No. 30) ”, when the game shifts to“ ART ”, lottery is performed using the reference item of“ opportunity C ”and“ F_red BAR lip (No. .28) ”, the lottery is performed using the reference item of“ Trigger D ”, and“ ART ”is triggered by the win of“ F_Black BAR Lip (No. 37) ”. In the case of shifting to, the lottery is performed using the reference item of “Opportunity E”, and when the transition to “ART” is triggered by other conditions, the lottery is performed using the reference item of “Trigger A”.

  According to such a lottery using the ART_initial high-precision lottery table, when “Opportunity C (“ F_red 7 lip A ”,“ F_red 7 lip B ”)” is triggered and the process shifts to “ART”, chance B If the initial state of the mode always becomes “highly accurate”, and if the transition to “ART” is triggered by “the opportunity D (“ F_red BAR lip ”)”, the initial state of the chance C mode is always “highly accurate”. become. Here, as described above, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red BAR alignment. For this reason, when the transition to “ART” is triggered by red 7 (“F_red 7 lip A” and “F_red 7 lip B”), the addition of the initial state of “ART” based on the alignment of red 7 is preferential. When the state is changed to “ART” triggered by the red BAR (“F_red BAR lip”), the initial state of “ART” becomes a state in which the addition based on the alignment of the red BAR is preferentially performed.

<ART_Chance Mode Shift Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_chance mode shift lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The ART_chance mode shift lottery table is referred to in the chance mode shift lottery. FIG. 130 is a table referred to in the chance A mode shift lottery. FIG. 131 is a table referred to in the chance B mode shift lottery. FIG. 132 is a table referred to in a chance C mode shift lottery. The ART_chance mode shift lottery table includes the type of chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode (“normal”, “high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy”, “ultra high accuracy”). ), And the reference items are "Battery order bell", "Common bell, 1 sheet", "Common lip, Fake lip", "Weak chance", "Chance lip", "Medium chance", and "Strong bell". A prescribed lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transition destination mode) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the shift lottery using the ART_chance mode shift lottery table, when the main control board 71 wins “chance lip” while “chance A mode” is “normal” during “ART”, 32 / With a probability of 256, a lottery result of transition to "high-accuracy preparation" is obtained, and the chance A mode transitions from "normal" to "high-accuracy preparation". As described above, the main control board 71 individually manages the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode. That is, when determining the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 individually performs the transfer lottery of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode based on the internal winning combination.

<ART_Chance mode additional lottery table>
Next, the ART_CHANCE mode additional lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The ART_Chance mode additional lottery table is referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance mode, FIG. 133 is a table referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance A mode, and FIG. 134 is the additional lottery based on the chance B mode. FIG. 135 is a table referred to in the additional lottery based on the chance C mode. The ART_CHANCE mode additional lottery table includes the type of chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode (“normal”, “high-accuracy preparation”, “high-accuracy”, “ultra-high-accuracy”). )), And reference items such as “batting order bell”, “common bell, one sheet”, “batting order lip”, “SP lip A1”, “SP lip A2”, “SP lip B1”, “SP lip” B2 "," weak chance, common lip "," chance lip "," medium chance, fake lip "," strong bell "are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of additional games) is defined for each reference item. You.

  According to the additional lottery using the ART_chance mode additional lottery table, the main control board 71 sets the internal winning combination and the chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) during “ART”. Based on the lottery result, the period in which “ART” can be continued is extended. The main control board 71 performs an additional lottery based on the chance A mode, an additional lottery based on the chance B mode, and an additional lottery based on the chance C mode in the unit game during “ART”. However, as can be seen by comparing the figures, since the winning combination that may be added to the lottery is different for each chance mode, the addition based on the chance A mode, the addition based on the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are performed. There is no overlap with the base addition.

  In the present embodiment, the additional lottery based on the ART mode is performed during the “ART”. However, the additional based on the ART mode and the additional based on the chance mode may overlap. For example, when “Strong Bell” is won, “30G” is determined as the number of additional games based on the ART mode (see FIG. 125), and “50G” is determined as the number of additional games based on the chance A mode. (See FIG. 133), an additional "80G (= 30 + 50)" is performed in the game.

  Here, with reference to the ART_CHANCE MODE additional lottery table for the chance B mode shown in FIG. 134, the additional lottery based on the chance B mode may determine the number of additional games when "SP Lip A2" is won. . As described above with reference to FIG. 110, at the time of winning the “SP lip A2”, if a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st”, a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed, and pressing of “middle 1st” is performed. When the stop operation is performed in the order, the combination of the symbols related to “Red BAR Invoking” is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “Right 1st”, the combination of the symbols related to “Red 7 Lip” is displayed. Is done. The fact that the specific symbols that are usually difficult to be aligned when the additional game is performed is related to the addition of the symbols, so that the interest of the game can be improved. When the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is won when the “SP Lip A2” is won (that is, when a value other than “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 As the first stop operation, it is preferable to stop the right reel 3R and perform an effect to promote aiming at the symbol "Red 7" (as a result, a combination of symbols related to "Red 7 Lip" is displayed). On the other hand, when the additional lottery based on the chance B mode is not won when the “SP Lip A2” is won (ie, when “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board An effect 72 prompts the user to stop the left reel 3L as a first stop operation (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed), and stops the middle reel 3C as a first stop operation. An effect that prompts the user to aim for “red BAR” (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR fanning” is displayed) may be performed.

  The same applies to the chance C mode. When the “SP lip A1” is won and an additional lottery based on the chance C mode is won (that is, when a result other than “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and the main control board 71 (Or) The sub-control board 72 stops the middle reel 3C as the first stop operation and prompts the player to aim at the symbol “red BAR” (as a result, the symbol combination related to “red BAR lip” is displayed). When the “SP Lip A2” is won and the additional lottery based on the chance C mode is not won (that is, when “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board An effect 72 prompts the user to stop the left reel 3L as a first stop operation (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed), and a first stop operation. To stop the right of the reel 3R Te, (as a result of a combination of symbols relating to the "red 7 tilt" display) production which urge that the aim of the design "red 7", it is also possible to carry out.

<Common_Higher-ranking game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the common_higher-rank added game number lottery table. The common_higher-rank added game number lottery table is a table that is referred to when any of “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” is determined as the lottery result in the additional lottery in “ART”. In the common_higher-rank added game number lottery table, “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” are defined as reference items, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of added games) is defined for each reference item.

  When the main control board 71 determines any of “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” in the additional lottery based on the ART mode and the additional lottery based on the chance mode performed during “ART”, the common Referring to the lottery table, the number of additional games is determined by lottery. For example, when “100A” is determined by an additional lottery based on the ART mode, the main control board 71 determines “100G” as the additional game number with a probability of 246/256, and determines the additional game number with a probability of 8/256. “200G” is determined, and “300G” is determined as the number of additional games with a probability of 2/256.

<ART_Last Freeze Lottery Table>
Next, the ART_Last Freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_last freeze lottery table is a table that is referred to when ending “ART” and determining whether or not to perform a last freeze regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the drawing, the ART_Last Freeze lottery table defines a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (non-winning, winning).

  When the value of the counter for counting the number of remaining games of “ART” managed by the main control board 71 becomes 0, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the ART_last-freeze lottery table. A value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached is added to the remaining game number of "ART", and a predetermined freeze process is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a lottery with reference to the next common_end advantageous section end lottery table shown in FIG. 138.

<Common_End time advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a description will be given of a common_end-time advantageous section end lottery table. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is, for example, a table that is referred to when ending “ART” and determining the end of the advantageous section regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the drawing, in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined.

  According to the end advantageous section end lottery using the common_end advantageous section end lottery table, for example, at the end time when the number of games of “ART” has been exhausted, 243/256 irrespective of the internal winning combination is achieved. The lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with the probability, and the state shifts from the next game to the “normal” state of the normal section. On the other hand, for example, when the number of games of “ART” is completed, a lottery result of the advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by shifting from “ART” to the “normally advantageous” state without terminating the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, a common table is used for all of the settings 1 to 6 in the processing related to the ART (AT). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased due to an extremely large setting difference of the ART (AT), and to reduce the data capacity required for the ART (AT) lottery in the main control board 71. Can be.

[About the flow in the advantageous section]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 139 to 141 illustrate a specification example 1 in which bell navigation is generated from the beginning of the advantageous section. It is a figure for explaining. FIG. 142 is a diagram for describing the flow of the advantageous section according to Example 1 of the third embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the first embodiment, the bell navigation is suppressed (the bell navigation is not generated) immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 143 is a diagram for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section between the specification example 1 and the embodiment 1, and shows the effect of the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining a flow at the end of an advantageous section according to the specification example 2, and FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining a flow at the end of an advantageous section according to Example 2 of the third embodiment. It is. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating, as Example 3 of the third embodiment, after power is turned on when there is no setting change and after power is turned on when setting is changed. Note that the specification examples are specifications exemplified to explain the effect of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technology, and exhibits an effect according to each specification when adopted. It is a specification that can be appropriately adopted as a means for solving the problem depending on the playability intended by the planner. In the following description, since “MB” corresponds to both “SMB” and “LMB” shown in FIG. 109, these are collectively referred to as “MB”. It is assumed that the state between the flags is not shown.

<Termination conditions for advantageous sections>
The end conditions of the advantageous section in the specification example 1 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 and the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 142 are as follows.
Condition 1: at least one or more occurrences of notification of the pressing order by winning of the batting order bell. Condition 2: at least one or more winning or operation of MB (because it is activated by winning, it may be determined based on either).
Condition 3: Predetermined end condition is satisfied on condition that at least one of Condition 1 or Condition 2 is satisfied. When the predetermined end condition in Condition 3 is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended. There is no difference between Example 1 and Example 1.
Note that a predetermined period (e.g., 20 games or more) has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section or the end lottery of each advantageous section has been performed from the start of the advantageous section, and the end lottery has been performed before the satisfaction of Condition 1 or Condition 2 described above. In the case of winning, the end flag is set, and it is considered that the condition 3 is satisfied in the game that satisfies the condition 1 due to the occurrence of the bell navigation or the game that satisfies the condition 2 by the MB operation. Good. In addition, a transition waiting state of at least a predetermined number of games or more may be provided between the time when the condition 3 is satisfied and the end of the advantageous section. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the term “MB” is used, but the operation of a predetermined bonus other than MB may be set as the end condition. As a modified example, in a model without a bonus, or in a model having only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for one game as a bonus, the navigation is generated by setting the batting order bell without setting the condition 2. There is no problem if only the precondition for terminating the advantageous section is set.

<Specification example 1>
The specification example 1 is characterized in that the bell navigator is in a determined state from the start of the advantageous section until the first batting order is won. According to this specification, the bell navigation (push order notification) is performed as soon as possible after the batting order bell is won in the advantageous section, and the bell navigator is determined immediately after the start of the advantageous section. Is generated, and thereafter, the advantageous section is terminated according to the result of the lottery. The purpose of this specification is to shift the advantageous section to a state in which the advantageous section can be ended as soon as possible when the "ART" which is an ART state in which medals actually increase uniformly does not win. For example, when an advantage section of “normal advantage” is won, an excessively long number of games is notified as an advantage section even though the ART is not won as a result. When forced to continue, a player who feels that he / she has been shown to be extremely long-lasting in the event that he / she did not hit in the end may significantly reduce interest in the gaming machine, and appropriately suppress such cases. It is a specification that can be.
As a flow until the end of the advantageous section, three patterns of FIGS. 139 to 141 will be described below in the order of the drawings.
First, FIG. 139 shows a case where the batting order bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, since the batting order bell is acquired by the player by the navigation, the "payout by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high-precision)" shown in FIG. 143 occurs. Since the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4 and there is a difference in the winning probability of the MB but about 1/15 to 1/17, this pattern in which the batting order bell wins before the MB, High frequency of occurrence. Note that a case may occur where an MB is won before the end of the advantageous section after the hit order bell has been won and one or more push order navigations have occurred. It is not affected by the occurrence of the forward navigation, and does not affect the "payout by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 143. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. As will be described together, the MBs in the present specification example and the present embodiment have the same specifications, in which the payout of the correct position of the press position is nine, and the payout of the incorrect position of the press position is eight. In order to guarantee the minimum skill intervention, there are cases where 8 prizes will be won, but for example, if you stop the red BAR symbol on at least one of the reels with your eyes, you can acquire 9 cards etc. It is designed so that even beginners can play games with peace of mind as those that can be easily won.

  Next, FIG. 140 shows a pattern in a case where the MB is won before the batting order bell in the specification example 1 and the advantageous section ends afterwards without winning the batting order bell. As described above, this pattern does not cause the “payout by bell navigation of the advantageous section (for CZ / high accuracy)” shown in FIG. 143. However, since the MB has a lower winning probability than the batting order bell, FIG. The frequency of occurrence is lower than that of the pattern shown in FIG. If only the winning probability is taken into consideration, it is considered that if the MB winning probability is higher than the batting order bell, the frequency of occurrence of bell navigation can be reduced. There is a possibility of non-conformity in the item ratio in the ball test (reason of non-conformity based on the ratio of the payout due to the bonus to the total payout being too high), and a solution to increase the MB winning probability from the batting order bell is adopted. In this case, the degree of freedom of the payout design becomes extremely low.

  Next, FIG. 141 shows a pattern in which, in the specification example 1, the batting order bell is won before the MB and bell navigation occurs, but the MB is won before the end of the subsequent advantageous section. In this case, as a result, the condition for terminating the advantageous section can be satisfied by satisfying the above condition 2 by the winning and operation of the MB, so that the ball out by the navigation in the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section is suppressed. It is desired to increase the number of balls to be obtained in the ART (this may be described as the real AT) and to obtain enough balls in the "ART" which is a "hit" that the player is waiting for, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. According to the ball design concept, it can be said that the specification allowing the occurrence of the batting order bell navigation immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an unfavorable direction. This phenomenon can be suppressed by a method of immediately terminating the advantageous section when the first bell navigation occurs, but since the batting order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, immediately after the advantageous section lamp is turned on. In the meantime, if the bell navigation occurs once and the advantageous section ends in about four games on average, a state of “normal advantage” is provided, and it is determined whether or not to win the ART for an appropriate number of games. Since there is also the aspect that it is difficult to entertain, the adoption of this method will greatly reduce the degree of freedom in ball design and staging design.

<Example 1>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
First condition: Until 100G has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, even if the batting order bell is won, the bell navigation is not generated, and the bell navigation is not generated.
Second condition: The winning probability of MB is set to about 1/17, which is relatively high (see FIG. 109).
Third condition: After the MB operation ends, the advantageous section is ended according to the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, even if the batting order bell is won from the start of the advantageous section to 100G, even if the batting order bell is won, the advantageous section cannot be ended (no bell-navigating state), whereas the MB winning probability is relatively high. By the time, the MB is easily won, and thereafter, the end of the advantageous section is determined by lottery for each game (unit game) as a state in which the advantageous section can be ended (a bell navigable state), and the MB is activated by winning the end of the advantageous section. After the end, the advantageous section ends. According to the first embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of balls by navigation in the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section, thereby increasing the number of balls to be acquired in the ART (sometimes described as the real AT), and According to the payout design philosophy of increasing the interest of the game by acquiring enough payouts at “ART”, which is the “hit” that the player is looking for, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. It is possible to suppress an undesired event that a bell is won by occurrence and a payout is obtained. Since the medal acquisition by the MB operation is not affected by the navigation, by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in the “normal advantage”, the base value of the “normal” and “normal advantage” in the normal section (insertion) (The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts) can be suppressed to a substantially close value, and the corresponding payouts can be sorted to “ART”.

  In the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, the occurrence of the pushing order navigation in the advantageous section can be appropriately suppressed, and the degree of freedom of the payout design can be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, the payout amount indicated by a white arrow can be allocated to payouts such as "ART" without increasing the payout in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the ball.

  In the description so far, the MB has been illustrated and described as “SMB” which always wins in the established game. On the other hand, in the case of “LMB”, winning is hindered by replay in the established game, and a state between bonus flags (during carryover) occurs. Here, in the state between the flags of the bonuses, the specification may be such that the pressing order navigation is generated or not. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of the bell navigation in the above-described “normally advantageous” state, it is effective to adopt a specification in which the pressing order navigation is not generated. In addition, based on the fact that the LMB has been won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 109, and a winning probability of 146/65536) during the advantageous section, “ART” is won. In such a case, the game proceeds in the flow of “ART” during the inter-flag state, the LMB winning, and the LMB operation, and the inter-flag state also becomes a gaming state that can be regarded as an ART winning state by the player. Is desirable. In the case of the first embodiment, there is only one type of bonus that can be carried over. However, in the case of a model equipped with a plurality of types of bonuses that can be carried over, such as LMB1 and LMB2, the push order navigation is performed according to the type of bonus being carried over. May or may not be generated, so that the player can guess the type of bonus based on the presence or absence of the navigation, and in the batting order bell winning game being carried over, the specification is such that the navigation is always generated. Alternatively, the game may be uniformly processed as a specification not to generate at all, and it may be difficult to narrow down the bonus type based on the presence or absence of the navigation, so that the bonus type may be narrowed down at the stop appearance of the main reel (so-called reach eye).

<Specification example 2>
Next, a flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. As shown in the drawing, in the specification example 2, when the ART finishes after finishing the predetermined number of games (for example, 100G), the advantageous section also ends and the initialization process is performed accordingly. As a result, after the end of the ART, the game shifts from the next game to the normal section (non-advantageous section). According to such a flow at the end of the advantageous section, although it is possible to play a game while expecting to obtain a certain number of balls during the ART, the routine shifts to the normal section after the end of the ART. Since it is determined that the game ends, the player tends to end the game without fail at the end of the ART. In other words, if the specification is such that the advantageous section ends with the end of the ART, not only the interest in the game cannot be increased, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine tends to decrease.

<Example 2>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART finishes after finishing a predetermined number of games (for example, 100G), the above-mentioned end-time advantageous section end lottery is performed. If the result of the end-time advantageous section end lottery becomes “end”, as in the case of the specification example 2, after the ART is completed, the game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section) from the next game.

  On the other hand, if “continuation” is won as a result of the end-time advantageous section end lottery at the end of the ART, the normal mode is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to the “normal” of the normal section, and “ It shifts to "usually advantageous." At this time, in the “normally advantageous” state, since the predetermined number of games (100G) has basically been exceeded from the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game. , A transition is made to the “normal” state of the normal section through the initialization processing of the advantageous section.

  In the “normal advantage” state, when the rank of the normal mode is promoted and increased (for example, in the case of “super heaven” or “next sign”), it becomes easy to win the ART lottery. , "ART sign", etc., and the operation is switched to ART again.

  According to the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment, an expectation that the advantageous section may continue to the ART again after the end of the ART is increased, thereby increasing the interest of the game. This can contribute to an increase in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

<Example 3>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the drawing, in the third embodiment, for example, the mode displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening a store may be different.

  For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on immediately before the store is opened without changing the settings, a general display corresponding to the “normal” state as shown in FIG. The mode is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, generally, the gaming state is RT1.

  On the other hand, in an initial state after a setting change (for example, re-setting to the same setting, such as determining setting 1 again from setting 1 for a setting change operation, the setting is changed before the opening of the store), (b) in FIG. As shown in ()), a display mode such as “Early rising is a three-story virtue stage” is suggested in the display unit 100 to indicate that it is at RT0 different from RT1 which will generally stay as a gaming state when the store is opened. Will be displayed. That is, in the initial state at the time of opening the store after the setting change, the gaming state is RT0, and the display unit 100 indicates that this is the "normal" state of RT0.

When an advantageous section is won in the “normal” state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), there is a difference in advantage in any of the first to third patterns as described below. .
(First pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: It is easy to win the ART when the navigation is performed twice or more in the push order and there is a ball.
In the case of winning an advantageous section at another RT: It is easy to win the CZ with one push order navi without a payout.
(Second pattern)
In the case of an advantageous section win at RT0: ART win is determined.
In the case of an advantageous section win at another RT: Either AR or CZ can be won.
(Third pattern)
In the case of an advantageous section win at RT0: The ART win rate is relatively high among ART and CZ. Note that “relatively high” may include a case where the rate of winning the ART is 100% and the rate of winning the CZ is 0%.
In a case of winning an advantageous section at another RT: Among the ART and CZ, the ratio of winning the ART is relatively low. Note that “relatively low” may include a case where the rate of winning the ART is 0% and the rate of winning the CZ is 100%.

  According to such an initial state of the third embodiment, it is possible to determine a state in which an advantage can be expected even in the “normal” state according to the display mode at the time of opening the store, and when the player selects a gaming machine in the morning, It can be used effectively as a guide for.

  In addition, with the above-mentioned specification, there is a demerit that the setting change is easy to be changed for the game arcade. Performing the same setting again can make it difficult for the player to guess whether the setting value has changed from the previous day, but if there are a large number of installations, it will be enormous to change the settings for all units It takes effort. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the same screen as that shown in FIG. 146 (a) may be displayed after the power is turned on, provided that a predetermined time has elapsed since the last power interruption. In this case, the predetermined time is, for example, about 2 hours or 4 hours so that a suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) is not displayed due to a temporary power interruption during business hours. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

  When the player performs an operation of turning on the mobile terminal interlocking function on the gaming machine so that the user can actively use the service provided by the manufacturer such as the mobile terminal interlocking function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). Only the advantageous screen at the time of opening the store as shown in FIG. 146 (a) may be displayed. A common customer waiting screen (demo screen) may be displayed on the customer waiting screen in which the player has not inserted any medals so that it is not possible to determine whether or not the setting is changed. . By doing so, it is possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing medals and actually inserting medals, so from the motivation to sit down on the player and borrow medals and from the opening of the store Can be motivated to visit. However, in a store where the number of players at the time of opening the store is extremely small, a player who tries to monopolize the advantageous RT0 by walking over a plurality of tables with the borrowed medals may appear. As a countermeasure against such a player, the staff of the game hall can arbitrarily set whether or not to display a setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 may be provided with a function that enables a setting for displaying a normal screen as shown in FIG. 146 (b) even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Function as a control unit, a mode control unit, and an RT control unit. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub-control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification unit. These functions will be described in the following supplementary notes, and the corresponding ones in the embodiments will be appended with parentheses.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may have, for example, functions described below.

  For example, in the case where the winning at the end of the ART at the end of the advantageous section end lottery is won (continued), a state of a guaranteed section in which the stay in the "normally advantageous" advantageous section is guaranteed over a predetermined number of games may be provided. . In the case where the guaranteed section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ends in one game or two games, for example, even if the advantageous section end lottery at the end is won. It can suppress that the person feels stress.

  A fixed period such as, for example, 20 games may be provided as the security section. In the case of a fixed period, the load due to the lottery processing by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game characteristics become clear. On the other hand, the number of games provided as a security section may be determined by lottery based on conditions regarding continuation and termination of the security section. The provision of the security section itself may be determined. Further, the number of games in the security zone may be determined in a lump along with the continuation of winning in the end-time advantageous zone end lottery. In such a case, data required for the lottery process can be reduced. If the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by lottery separate from the end advantageous section end lottery, various game characteristics can be realized.

  Further, the above-mentioned guaranteed section may be continued until a predetermined combination (for example, bell, replay, MB, etc.) is won or won a predetermined number of times without managing the number of games.

  The advantageous section end lottery in the "normal advantage" may not be performed until the above-described guaranteed section ends, or may be performed during the guaranteed section. When a win (end) is made in the advantageous section end lottery in the guaranteed section, the winning result is stored as, for example, a flag, and the game is shifted to the normal section ("normal") at the end of the guaranteed section or in the next game at the end of the guaranteed section. May be transferred.

  You may be made to suggest or notify that the security section is in progress or that the termination condition of the security section is satisfied. In such a case, it becomes easy to understand that the chance is a chance after the end of the ART, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player to play the game, and to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. For example, the display unit 100 may display a message such as "20 games remaining to continue the chance state continuation" or the like, or perform an effect to display a stage or the like indicating that the ART is likely to win. It may be. Further, the effect may be executed in an effect mode dedicated to the security section by the effect execution means such as a video, a sound, and a lamp.

  Regarding the availability of the security zone, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage in determining the security zone may be varied based on the setting value. For example, when the number of games in the security zone is determined by lottery, setting 1 is set to 20 games on average, and setting 6 is set to 50 games on average. (It is possible to win the ART again immediately after completion). In such a case, the player can reliably detect the end of the advantageous section by checking whether the state indicator 147b is turned off, and can surely grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the ART is completed. Further, the player can guess the set value according to the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of the ART that has been grasped. By having a game while holding the game, the interest of the game is enhanced.

[Another control specific to pachislot]
Subsequently, another control unique to the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Relationship between the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous and the benefits>
First, with reference to FIG. 147, a relationship between the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” and the privilege will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the termination condition in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Specifically, as the first condition, a condition that "until 100G elapses from the start of the advantageous section, the bell navigator is not generated even if the batting order bell is won, and no bell navigator is generated" is adopted. Of course, also in the following description, the termination condition in the above-described specification example 1 may be adopted.

  As described above, the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a playability of performing a game from “normal (normal section)” to “ART (advantage section)”, and the main control board 71 is in the “normal” state. An advantageous section shift lottery is being performed. When "ART" is won in the transfer lottery, the player can directly shift from "normal" to "ART", but in many cases, "ART" from "normal" via "normally advantageous (advantaged section)". Move to As shown in FIG. 102, the content of the notification (push order instruction) is restricted during “normally advantageous” as compared with during “ART”, and for example, a transition to a high RT (RT3) or a notification for maintaining the high RT Is not performed, which is disadvantageous compared to “ART”. In the present embodiment, the section is designed as a section where the payout rate does not exceed 1. Therefore, even if the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made, if the transition is made to “normal advantage” instead of “ART”, the medal will be consumed as a result, and the benefit is small, There is a risk that the willingness to play is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 gives a predetermined privilege to the player according to the number of elapsed games during “normally advantageous”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 147, when the number of elapsed games during “normally advantageous” reaches “20G”, the main control board 71 gives the first privilege (privilege 1) to “40G”. When it reaches, a second privilege (privilege 2) is given, and when it reaches “80G”, a third privilege (privilege 3) is given. The first privilege, the second privilege, and the third privilege are transitions (promotion) of the SCZ mode, and the greater the number of elapsed games in the “normal advantage”, the easier the transition to the higher SCZ mode (FIG. 116).

  As described above, although there is a setting difference, the MB is won with a probability of about 1/15 to 1/17, and it is realistic that the number of elapsed games during “normally advantageous” reaches “20G” and “40G”. , And can rarely reach “80G”. However, the privilege given at this time is a promotion lottery in the SCZ mode, and when the SCZ mode is promoted, it is easy to shift to the “ART” chance zone of “SCZ”, and immediately the “ART” Does not mean that Therefore, even if the privilege of promotion of the SCZ mode is given in accordance with the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage”, an excessive privilege is not given to the player, and the gambling property can be increased without difficulty. Absent. On the other hand, for the player, as the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage” increases, it becomes easier to shift to the state of “SCZ”, which is different from the “normal advantage”, so that the game property changes in various ways. And the interest of the game is improved.

  When the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage” reaches “120G”, the main control board 71 gives a fourth privilege (privilege 4). The fourth privilege is “height ceiling”, and the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated mode “high accuracy”, so that the SCZ mode does not fall until shifting to “ART”. As described above, in the pachi-slot 1, when the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage” reaches “120G”, the subsequent shift to “ART” is determined. Here, the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and even if the first condition in the first embodiment described above is adopted, neither the batting order bell nor MB is won, It is extremely rare for 120 games to elapse. In addition, if “normal advantage” has elapsed after 120 games, a predetermined amount of medals may have been consumed during “normal advantage”, so “ART” is determined in such an extremely rare case. Even if it is a “summer ceiling”, an excessive privilege is not given to the player.

  Since “normally advantageous” is an advantageous section, the number of elapsed games during “normally advantageous” is included in the number of games for which the limit process is performed. Therefore, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying for a long time at “normal advantage”, an advantageous section (“ART”) that informs the player of an advantageous stop operation mode continues unnecessarily. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being unnecessarily increased without being lost.

  Note that the main control board 71 is only required to be able to grant some privilege when “normal advantage” is continued for a predetermined period, and is not limited to the one that grants a greater privilege as the stay is longer. Absent.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. It functions as control means and state control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of a predetermined pressing order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to control the predetermined pressing order to the player. In order to notify the order, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as operation mode notification means.

  Further, the main control board 71 counts the number of elapsed games during the “normal advantage” and gives a privilege (promotion of the SCZ mode) to the player according to the number of elapsed games. Function as counting means and privilege giving means.

  The main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter for managing the number of remaining games of "ART". Basically, when the number of remaining games becomes 0, "ART" is terminated. (For example, the sum of the number of elapsed games during "ART" and the number of elapsed games during "normally advantageous") reaches 1500 times, regardless of the number of remaining games in "ART". The main control board 71 functions as a state control means for performing the limit processing for ending the processing.

<Pseudo history lottery>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148 and FIG. 149, a description will be given of a pseudo-history lottery in “ART”. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an outline of pseudo history lottery in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an outline of another example of pseudo history lottery.

  In a conventional pachislot, history data on past games is held, and various lotteries may be performed based on the history data. In such a conventional pachislot, there was no problem since various lotteries were performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side having a sufficient capacity, but in recent pachislots, lottery relating to payout is mainly performed. If the main control board 71) has to hold the history data on the main side, which has a limited capacity, or if various lotteries are performed based on the history data, the data capacity and the processing load are reduced. Will increase. On the other hand, since lottery can be realized by taking into account the history of past games, a variety of playability can be realized, thereby increasing the interest and, from the player's perspective, rare roles and the like are consecutively won. In this case, the player does not feel a so-called losing feeling, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, pseudo history lottery is realized by performing the control shown in FIGS. 148 and 149. Specifically, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, pseudo history lottery is realized by combining the control by the main control board 71 and the control by the sub control board 72.

  Here, FIG. 148 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery specification of the pseudo history lottery, and shows an example of control by the main control board 71. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs the shift lottery to the high-precision history during the “ART”, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the high-precision history for five games. . Then, the main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” during the high history of the five games, and gives a privilege (stock of the “additional specialization zone”) when the winning is achieved. When 5 games have elapsed with the winning, the history high accuracy is terminated. Thereby, in the present embodiment, a privilege can be provided when a rare combination is continuously won in a short period (for 5 games).

  Next, FIG. 148 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect of pseudo history lottery. The sub-control board 72 displays a history display window and a history icon in a predetermined display area of the display unit 100 in order to give the player an illusion that the past history is being referred to. The history display window is a display area for displaying a history of past games, and includes, for example, five display areas corresponding to five games (note that the history display window has predetermined effect information (described later). The history icon is only required to be a display area that is displayed in correspondence with a predetermined number of games, and is not necessarily limited to the area of the window frame. Even if it is not, it is preferable in that the player can identify that the area is the area where the predetermined effect information is displayed, but in consideration of overlapping with other effects, the display area of the history is considered. It is also possible to display only predetermined effect information when a rare combination is won or won, without providing a window frame or the like that clearly indicates that the combination is a special combination. Each of the five display areas is provided corresponding to each of the games for the five games from the current game to the game a plurality of times earlier. For example, the leftmost display area (window) is the last display area (window). The game history is displayed. The second display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game two games before, and the third display area (window) from the left is the game history of the three games before. The fourth display area (window) from the left displays the history of the game four games before, and the rightmost display area (window) displays the history of the game five games before ( In detail, from the start operation of the current game to the third stop operation, the history of the previous game is displayed in the leftmost display area, and the third stop operation of the current game to the start operation of the next game are performed. Until the game is performed, the history of the current game is displayed in the leftmost display area (the same applies to other display areas). A)).

  Then, the sub control board 72 has rare roles (“common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, and “strong bell”) that can be won in the lottery transition to the history high accuracy. When determined as the internal winning combination, predetermined effect information (history icon) is displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window. As shown in FIG. 148 (B), the history icon includes a “red icon” and a “green icon”, and the sub-control board 72 displays the “red icon” "Or" green icon "is displayed with a predetermined probability, and in the case where the lottery for shifting to high-precision history is not won, the" green icon "is always displayed. As a result, the "red icon" is not displayed in the case of non-winning in the lottery transition to the high-accuracy history, and the "red icon" has a role of reporting that the high-accuracy history has been won. Will be.

  The sub-control board 72 may display the history icon on the condition that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or on the condition that the combination of the symbols according to the rare combination is displayed. A history icon may be displayed. Here, the combination of the symbols according to the rare combination is not displayed unless the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Accordingly, it can be said that a "history icon" is displayed. This is the same for another example of the pseudo-history lottery shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 displays the corresponding display on the display window when “stroke order bell” and “common bell, one sheet” that are not won in the lottery transition to the high-precision history are determined as the internal winning combination. Neither “red icon” nor “green icon” is displayed in the area. As a result, the winning history of the rare combination between the five games is displayed using the “red icon” and the “green icon” in the display windows for the five games. The position of the display area for displaying the history icon slides according to the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (B), the “red icon” displayed in the leftmost display area has been slid to the next right display area at the end of the next game. As a result, the history icon disappears from the display window five games after the rare combination is won, so that the history icon is displayed in the display window while the history is highly accurate.

  Thereafter, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination again while the history is highly accurate, the sub-control board 72 displays the history icon in the display area corresponding to the display window. The determination of the type of the history icon to be displayed at this time may be performed based on the shift lottery of the history high accuracy based on the rare role won this time, and the “additional specialization zone” in the history high accuracy may be determined. It may be performed based on the result of the stock lottery, or may be performed in consideration of both. As a result, when the rare combination is won while the history is highly accurate, at least two history icons are displayed in the display windows for five games.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), internally, the lottery of the “additional specialization zone” is internally performed based only on the result of the game of the rare role having a high history, and the past history is referred to. Although not performed, the sub-control board 72 performs effects such as causing the plurality of history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself to emit light. From the player's point of view, the display window for displaying the past history and the history icon indicating the past history emit light, so that the player feels as if the history lottery has been performed. On the other hand, as the control on the main side, the main control board 71 only needs to be able to grasp that the history is highly accurate only when certain conditions are satisfied. Since it is not necessary to update and keep the data every game, the data capacity and the processing load do not increase.

  Here, the case where the display of the history icon is updated every time one game progresses is described, but the update condition of the display of the history icon is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. As an example, the sub-control board 72 may update the display of the history icon every time an internal winning combination corresponding to the history icon is established, and may update the history every time an internal winning combination other than the replaying combination is established. The display of the icon may be updated. In this way, by updating the display of the history icon each time the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the state in which the pseudo history lottery effect is performed can be continued for a predetermined period without being set to the fixed number of games. it can. Further, the sub-control board 72 sets the history-high-accuracy termination condition such as ending the history-high-accuracy when the loss (internal-winning-combination non-winning) is determined as the internal winning combination five times and ending when the batting order is established five times. You may link with conditions other than game number digestion. It should be noted that the fact that the batting order is established five times may mean that the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination five times, and when the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop is performed in the correct pushing order. As a result of the operation, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the batting order is not established five times, that is, when the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub control board 72 performs the stop operation in the pushing order of incorrect answers, and as a result, When a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is stopped and displayed, the history may be ended with high accuracy. In this case, the display rule and update timing of the history icon may be appropriately determined so that a plurality of icons are not displayed in one history display window. For example, in the case where the history is highly accurate after five losses, an update rule may be adopted such that the history icon is updated by one each time a loss or rare combination is won.

  The sub-control board 72 may change the mode of the effect using the display window and the history icon according to the result of the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone”. For example, when the stock lottery in the “additional specialization zone” has been won, at least one of the display window and the history icon performs an effect associated with the stock lottery (for example, a large light emission around the display window). When the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” has not been won, at least one of the display window and the history icon performs an effect associated with the success or failure of the stock lottery (for example, a small area around the display window emits light). It may be good.

  Next, FIG. 148 (C) is an effect example 2 in pseudo history lottery. FIG. 148 (B) shows an example of an effect in the case where the rare combination is won again while the history is highly accurate. After that, an example of an effect in the case where the rare combination is won again within five games is shown. In this case, since the history is not high during the second rare role winning, the stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” is not performed on the main side. In the same manner as at the time, effects such as causing a plurality of history icons displayed in the display window or the display window itself to emit light are performed. In this way, even when the history is not highly accurate, it is possible to make the user feel as if the history lottery has been performed.

  Since the sub-side has less restrictions than the main-side, the sub-control board 72 can perform the same effect in the middle of the highly accurate history and the middle of the highly accurate history by an arbitrary method. As an example, by holding the history data, the sub-control board 72 may perform the same effect in the high-history state and the non-high-history state, and the history icon may be displayed in the display window. Based on the information indicating that a plurality of pieces of information have been displayed, a similar effect may be performed in the case where the history is highly probable and other than the case where the history is highly probable.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 148, as an example of the pseudo-history lottery, a case where the rare combination is won a plurality of times (two times) during the predetermined number of games (five games) has been described. In addition to such a history lottery, a history lottery performed when the predetermined combination is won “continuously” is also included. Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a description will be given of a pseudo-history lottery method in the case where predetermined combinations are continuously won. FIG. 149 illustrates a method of giving a predetermined privilege when a bell is won four times in a row.

  FIGS. 149 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of internal lottery specifications of pseudo history lottery, showing an example of control by the main control board 71. FIG. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the main control board 71 has “non-highly accurate”, “highly accurate history A”, “highly accurate history B”, and “highly accurate history C” as the highly accurate history. . As shown in FIGS. 149 (A) and (B), when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in “non-high accuracy”, the main control board 71 ends the high accuracy history state in one game. It moves to sure A ". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during the “high-accuracy history A” (ie, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the state of the high-accuracy history to “high-accuracy history B”. If the bell is not determined as the internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy A", "History High Accuracy A" is ended and the state of the high history accuracy is shifted to "Non-High Accuracy".

  In addition, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during “high-accuracy history B” (ie, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the state of high-accuracy history to “high-accuracy history C”, If the bell is not determined as the internal winning combination during "History High Accuracy B", "History High Accuracy B" is ended, and the state of the high accuracy history is changed to "Non High Accuracy". Then, when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during “high-precision history C” (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 gives a privilege such as extending the period in which “ART” can be continued. If the bell is not determined as the internal winning combination during the "high-accuracy history", the "high-accuracy history" is ended and the state of the high-accuracy history is shifted to "non-accurate". When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination during the “history high accuracy C”, the main control board 71 may maintain the state of the history high accuracy as “history high accuracy C”. The transition to "non-accurate" may be made.

  Next, FIG. 149 (C) is an example of an effect in pseudo-history lottery in a case where bells are successively won. When the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 displays a “bell icon” indicating the bell winning or winning in the corresponding display area of the display window, and conversely, the bell serves as the internal winning combination. If not determined, the "bell icon" is not displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window.

  Then, when four “bell icons” are successively displayed on the display window, the sub-control board 72 produces a plurality of “bell icons” displayed in the display window and effects such as causing the display window itself to emit light. I do. Thereby, it is possible to make the user feel as if a privilege has been granted based on the continuous winning of the bell without having history data on the main side.

  In the example shown in FIG. 149, when the bell is won, the state of the high-accuracy record is always promoted by one, and when the state of the high-accuracy record is the highest state (“high-accuracy record C”), the bell is added to the bell. When winning, a privilege is always given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 71 may promote a state of high history with a certain probability at the time of winning a bell. Also, for example, the main control board 71 may be capable of promoting the state of high-precision history at a plurality of steps at a time when a bell is won (for example, one state is promoted at a probability of 95%, and two states are promoted at a probability of 5%). And so on). In these cases, the probability may be made different for each current state of high-accuracy history. Further, the main control board 71 may grant a privilege with a predetermined probability when a bell is won in a case where the state of high history is the highest state.

  Although the case where the pseudo-history lottery is performed by combining the processing of the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 has been described above, the main control board 71 is further controlled to reduce the processing load. The pseudo history lottery effect may be performed only by the effect display controlled by the sub-control substrate 72 without having the history highly accurate state on the board 71.

  In this case, the main control board 71 may determine the grant of the privilege based on the winning of the predetermined combination, and may not have the history highly accurate state equivalent to five games. The sub control board 72 displays a first history icon corresponding to a case where the predetermined combination is won. Thereafter, when a bonus is given by the main control board 71 according to the internal winning combination within five games, the sub-control board 72 displays a second history icon in a display area corresponding to the game, The effect may be performed by referring to the history using the first and second history icons and the history display window and as if hitting. In this way, the process of the main control board 71 can be further reduced while giving the player an impression as if the history lottery was performed.

  Note that the internal winning combination in the display game of the first history icon and the second history icon may be the same combination or different combinations. For example, the display game of the first history icon may be a role of cherry, which is one type of rare role, and the display game of the second history icon may be a role of watermelon, which is another rare role.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  The sub-control board 72 has five display areas provided for each of the five games from the current game to the game several times before when performing the pseudo-history lottery. To display the display window on the display unit 100, the pachislo 1 has a display window.

  Further, when the main control board 71 wins a lottery transition to high-accuracy history, which is triggered by a rare combination win during “ART”, high-accuracy history is started, and during this high-accuracy history, five games are played. When this is done, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to end the history high accuracy. When the main control board 71 wins the rare role while the history is high, the main control board 71 can function as a privilege providing means because it can provide a privilege of providing a stock in the “additional specialization zone”.

  Then, in response to the rare combination being determined as the internal winning combination during “ART”, the sub-control board 72 determines whether the rare combination among the plurality of display areas of the display window displayed on the display unit 100 is present. When the history icon is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game determined as the winning combination, and when the main control board 71 gives the privilege according to the rare combination winning with the high history (that is, the history icon is displayed on the display window). When two or more are displayed), the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect executing means in order to execute an effect in at least one of the display window and the history icon in association with the success or failure of the stock lottery.

<Additional notification during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 150, an additional notification (addition effect) in “ART” will be described. In the pachislot, it is generally practiced to perform a lottery during a ART (AT) with a rare role that is easily noticed by a player such as a watermelon or a cherry, and to inform the player of the winning addition when the additional lottery is won. However, if the addition is not performed frequently even if the rare role is won, the discouragement of the player is invited and the interest of the game is reduced. In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as described below, the frequency of the notification of the addition at the time of winning the rare combination that is easy for the player to pay attention is increased. In the following, a rare combination means a combination that can be won in an additional lottery during an ART. For example, in the case of an additional lottery based on the ART mode, “low chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong” "Bell" (see FIG. 125).

  FIG. 150 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of additional notification by the sub-control board 72. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games to be added, the sub-control board 72 may immediately notify the addition or may be hidden. As shown in FIG. 150 (A), in the state where the number of added games is hidden, the sub control board 72 is, for example, in the case of non-winning in the added lottery performed by the main control board 71 thereafter, the hidden added. The number of games is reported instead. On the other hand, even if the number of additional games is hidden, if the main control board 71 subsequently wins the additional lottery, the sub-control board 72 , The number of additional games determined as a result of the additional lottery is notified. Thereby, in a state where the number of additional games is hidden, the additional information is performed regardless of the result of the additional lottery, so that the frequency of the additional information can be increased.

  Here, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery (see FIG. 125) based on the normal processing when the rare combination is won, and also displays the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB when the MB is activated (that is, the combination of symbols according to the MB). (When the operation is performed), the additional lottery is performed based on the common processing (see FIG. 126). When the additional lottery is won in the MB operation, the sub control board 72 basically immediately notifies the number of additional games. And keep it unannounced (hidden). Then, at the time of additional lottery triggered by the winning of the rare role, the sub-control board 72 notifies instead of the number of additional games that are hidden when the MB is activated. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of notification of addition when a rare combination that is easily noticed by the player is won. On the other hand, although the addition notification is not performed when the MB is activated, the player only feels that the additional lottery itself is not performed in the first place when the MB is activated, and the frequency of the additional notification when the MB is activated varies. It does not mean that the player will not be discouraged.

  Next, FIG. 150 (B) is a diagram illustrating a control example 1 when the sub-control board 72 gives an additional notification. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), first, in the additional lottery at the time of MB operation, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of “50G”. The sub-control board 72 holds the number of additional games at the time of the MB operation without notifying, and at this time, the sub-control board 72 adds “50G” as the number of games for the latency.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150B, subsequently, as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery and determines the number of additional games of “10G”. At this time, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of games for the latent, but has won the additional lottery triggered by the rare role, so the sub-control board 72 holds it. While maintaining “50G”, the number of added games of “10G” determined this time is notified. Therefore, the player is notified that 10 games have been added in accordance with the winning of the rare combination. Since the sub-control board 72 keeps the number of games for the latency, at this point, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of games for the latency.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), subsequently, as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery, but does not win the additional lottery. At this point, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of games for the latency, so the sub-control board 72 reports the number of added games within the range of “50G” being held. More specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of games that may be added by the rare combination that triggered the additional lottery within the range of the number of games held as the number of hidden games. With reference to FIG. 125, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by “weak chance”, “10G”, “20G”, and “30G” may be determined as the number of additional games, and the number of hidden games Is not determined. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies any one of “10G”, “20G”, and “30G”. Further, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by “strong bell”, “30G”, “50G”, and “100A (100G or more)” may be determined as the number of additional games, but the number of hidden games And only "50G" held as "." Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 reports either “30G” or “50G”, and does not report “100G or more” that exceeds the number of games held for the latency. It should be noted that the sub-control board 72 only needs to report within the range of the number of hidden games, and it is necessary to report the maximum number of games among the number of games that may be added by the rare combination that triggered the additional lottery. However, some or all of the hidden games can be properly notified within the range of the number of hidden games.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub control board 72 may be added by the rare combination which triggered the additional lottery from the range of the number of games held as the latent game number. "50G" is determined as the number of games having a certain number of games, and the number of added games of "50G" is notified. As a result, the player is notified as if the extra 50 games were added in accordance with the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of latent games, at this time, the number of latent games held by the sub-control board 72 is “0G”.

  Subsequently, FIG. 150 (C) is a diagram illustrating a control example 2 when the sub-control board 72 notifies of the addition. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub control board 72 notifies the number of games to be added in the latent portion instead, when the additional lottery at the time of the rare combination is not won. In the control example 2 shown in (C), when the additional lottery at the time of winning a rare combination is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games won by adding the number of additional games for the latent to the number of additional games won.

  Specifically, in the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), first, in the additional lottery at the time of the MB operation, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games of “50G”. The sub-control board 72 holds the number of additional games at the time of the MB operation without notifying, and at this time, the sub-control board 72 adds “50G” as the number of games for the latency.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (C), subsequently, as a result of winning the rare combination, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery and determines the number of additional games of “10G”. At this time, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of games for the latent, so the sub-control board 72 informs by adding the number of additional games for the latent to “10G” won in the additional lottery. I do. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 holds the number of games that may be added by the rare combination that triggered the additional lottery as the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of games for the latent. Notify in the range of the sum with the number of additional games. In control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), the sum of the number of additional games won in the additional lottery and the number of additional games held as the number of latent games is “60G”, but the timing of the additional lottery is It is assumed that there is not "60G" but "50G" as the number of games that can be added by the rare role. Thus, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games of “50G”. As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games were added even though only 10 games were added in accordance with the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of latent games, at this time, the number of latent games held by the sub-control board 72 is “10G”.

  In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery as a result of winning the rare combination, but since the additional lottery has not been won, the sub control board 72 , The number of additional games held by “10G”. As a result, the number of hidden games held by the sub-control board 72 is “0G”.

  Note that the sub-control board 72 may also notify the number of additional games that are held by the hidden portion when the number of additional games is held and the additional lottery based on the rare combination is not won. It is also possible to notify the number of added games held at a certain probability with the latency.

<Additional notification and setting suggestion during ART>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 increases the frequency of the notification of the addition at the time of the rare role winning by turning the number of the additional games for the latent time at the time of the winning of the rare role, and is notified at once. The number of additional games is increasing. According to the control using such a latency, the following setting suggestion control is also possible.

  In recent pachislots, it is required to perform a lottery (normal process) for ART (AT) based on an internal winning combination or the like with a common probability regardless of a set value. As a result, fluctuations in the profit balance can be suppressed, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. However, there is a problem in that the number of setting estimation elements is reduced. Therefore, in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment, a new setting inference element is realized by concealing the lottery result using the common process while eliminating the setting difference from the lottery based on the normal process for the ART (AT). .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150D, in the pachislot 1, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in order to completely eliminate the setting difference from the additional lottery based on the normal processing triggered by the rare combination. Both the probability and the extra lottery at the time of winning the rare combination are performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination is about 1/60 for all the settings, and is determined in the additional lottery when the rare combination is won. The degree of expectation per additional game that can be performed is about “10G” for all settings.

  In the additional lottery based on the common processing at the time of the SMB operation, although the additional lottery probability itself is common to all the settings, a difference is set in the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination. For the sake of simplicity, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the SMB is determined as the internal winning combination is about 1/18 in the setting 1, about 1/15 in the setting 6, and The expectation per additional game number that can be determined in the additional lottery is about “5G” for all settings.

  In such a case, for example, if the game is played 180 times, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination three times, regardless of the set value, and the addition of “30G” can be expected with the rare combination. On the other hand, with respect to the SMB, in the setting 1, the SMB operates 10 times, and the addition of “50G” can be expected due to the operation of the SMB. In the setting 6, the SMB operates 12 times, and the operation of the SMB triggers We can expect an additional "60G".

  At this time, as described above, the sub control board 72 hides the added amount when the MB is activated and turns it to the additional information when the rare role is won. In setting 6, the total number of additional games of "90G" is notified. By hiding the added portion during the MB operation, the player feels that the additional portion has not been performed during the MB operation, so that the setting difference is completely eliminated from the lottery regarding ART (AT) based on the normal processing. In addition, it is possible to provide a setting guess element to the player.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols according to the MB, and when the MB is operated, determines the number of additional games of “ART” and determines that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination. , "ART", the main control board 71 functions as a first additional determination unit and a second additional determination unit. At this time, when the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games, the main control board 71 functions as additional control means in order to extend the period in which “ART” can be continued by the determined number of additional games.

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 functions as an add-in concealment unit, since the sub-control board 72 keeps the number of added games by the extra lottery at the time of MB operation unreported. Then, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, and informs the player of the number of additional games at the time of rare combination winning in the case of non-winning. The sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as a notifying unit in order to notify the number of additional games held as they are.

<Direction stage during ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 151 and FIG. 152, a description will be given of an effect stage during “ART”. First, with reference to FIGS. 151 (A) and (B), a control example different from that in FIG. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden games that have been added to the game by matching the symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)” are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbols displayed according to the pressing order are displayed. If the combination is different and a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “middle 1st” or “right 1st”, a combination of symbols with matching symbols (“red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, “W aligned lip”) is displayed. You. In the pachislot 1, when there is a number of additional games hidden, a combination of symbols such as "red BAR lip", "red 7 lip", and "W aligned lip" is displayed to notify the number of additional games hidden. Specifically, when the number of hidden additional games is not present or when the number of hidden additional games is not notified, the pressing order of “left 1st” is notified, and a combination of symbols related to “replay” is performed. Urges the display of In addition, the notification of the pressing order in this case is performed at least by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100, but the main control board 71 together with the sub control board 72 may be notified via the notification lamp 147a. .

  On the other hand, when the auxiliary control board 72 notifies the number of hidden games to be added for 50 games, the sub control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “red 7 lip”, and adds the 50 games. Perform an additional notification effect indicating that the event has been performed. Similarly, when notifying the number of hidden games to be added for 100 games, the sub control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “red BAR lip”, and adds the 100 games. Is performed, and when the number of hidden games to be hidden is notified for 150 games, the pressing order for prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “W aligned lip” is notified, An additional notification effect indicating that the additional 150 games have been performed is performed.

  Next, FIG. 151 (B) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of additional games that the sub-control board 72 keeps unreported and the pressing order notified by the sub-control board 72. In FIG. 151, in addition to “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)”, “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” and “F_SP lip A2 (No. 21)” )). Here, “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” and “F_SP lip A2 (No. 21)” are roles used in additional lottery based on the chance C mode and the chance B mode, as shown in FIG. 151. In addition, since it may be used for notifying the number of added games for the latent portion, the description is also made.

  First, “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” can display “red BAR lip” used for “100G notification” as a combination of symbols having the same symbols. Therefore, when the number of additional games hidden is “0 to 49G” or “50 to 99G”, the sub control board 72 notifies the pressing order of “left 1st”, and displays the symbol related to “replay”. The effect of prompting the display of the combination or the aim of aiming at the symbol "Red 7" together with the pressing order of "Right 1st" is performed, and the display of the symbol combination relating to "Red 7 Fan" is prompted. When the number of additional games hidden is “100 to 149G” or “150G or more”, the sub-control board 72 directs the player to aim for the symbol “Red BAR” together with the pressing order of “Middle 1st”. To display a combination of symbols related to “red BAR lip” and perform an additional notification effect indicating that the additional 100 games have been performed.

  The same applies to “F_SP lip A1 (No. 20)” to “F_SP lip B3 (No. 24)”. As shown in FIG. In accordance with the number of added games that are hidden, a predetermined pressing order and a symbol to be aimed are notified, and an additional notification effect indicating that the predetermined number of games has been added is performed. For example, when the “F_SP lip B1 (No. 22)” is won, the sub control board 72 sets “1st left” when the number of additional games hidden is “0 to 49G” and “50 to 99G”. Is notified, the display of the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is urged, and when the number of additional games hidden is “100 to 149G”, the symbol “Middle 1st” and the symbol “ In addition to the effect of prompting the aim of "Red BAR", the display of the combination of the symbols related to "Red BAR Rip" is promoted, and the additional information effect indicating that the additional of 100 games has been performed is performed, and the information is hidden. When the number of added games is “150G or more”, an effect is made to prompt the player to aim for the symbol “Red BAR” together with the pressing order of “Right 1st”, and to prompt the display of the symbol combination relating to “W aligned lip”. With , It performs a plus notification effect indicating that the 150 game plus were made. In the present embodiment, since the symbol "Red 7" is arranged next to the symbol "Red BAR" on all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the combination of symbols related to the "W matching lip" is displayed. When prompting, an effect may be performed to prompt the player to aim for the symbol "red BAR".

  In this way, the sub-control board 72 associates the number of additional games to be notified for each combination of symbols in which the symbols are aligned, and the number of hidden additional games can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination. When the number of added games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols is equal to or greater than the number of added games to be notified, notification such as a pushing order for prompting the display of the combination of symbols is performed, and the number of added games associated with the combination of symbols is Notify the addition. This makes it possible to increase the number of additional games that are notified in a single additional effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, the sub control board 72, when the number of hidden additional games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination, The notification for the additional effect may be performed, or the information for the additional effect may be performed at a predetermined probability.

  In addition, there is also a hand that can stop and display a plurality of symbol combinations associated with the number of additional games to be notified, and hides more than any of the number of additional games to be notified associated with the plurality of symbol combinations. There may be many additional games. As an example, “F_SP lip B1 (No. 20)” can stop display “red BAR lip” associated with “100G” and “W aligned lip” associated with “150G”. This corresponds to the case where the number of additional games hidden is “150G or more” when “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the sub-control board 72 may perform any notification, for example, may determine the type of notification according to the effect stage described below.

  Next, the production stage during “ART” will be described. The pachislo 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of effect stages as effect stages during “ART”, and the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of additional notification according to the effect stage that is staying. The effect stage is a type of effect state, and is determined according to the game state. As the effect stage, for example, besides the background and the scene (scene), the type of character to be displayed or the motion of the character, or a combination thereof can be used. Here, the sub-control board 72 uses, for example, various modes (additional mode A, opportunity B mode, and opportunity C mode) relating to addition during “ART” as a game state for determining the effect stage. In addition to the mode, the number of additional games hidden is also taken into account.

  FIG. 151 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the correspondence between the number of hidden additional games and the production stage. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (C), for example, “stage A”, “stage B”, “stage C”, and “stage C” are provided as the production stages in “ART”. For example, “Stage A” is a basic production stage, and “Stage B” is a production in which the player is aimed at the symbol “Red 7” and is prompted to display “Red 7 Lip” relatively easily. The stage. “Stage C” is an effect stage in which the player is aimed at the symbol “Red BAR”, and the effect of prompting the display of “Red BAR lip” is relatively easy to perform. “Stage D” is the symbol “Red BAR”. Is aimed at the player, and the effect of prompting the display of “W aligned lip” is relatively easily performed.

  The sub-control board 72 determines an effect stage according to the number of hidden additional games, and (part of) the number of additional games hidden by the additional notification effect corresponding to the determined effect stage to the player. To inform. For example, the sub-control board 72 determines the “stage D” as the production stage more easily as the number of additional games hidden is greater, and the “stage A” as the production stage is smaller as the number of additional games hidden is smaller. Easy to decide. From the viewpoint of the player, when the stage shifts to a higher-level production stage, the player can have an expectation for the subsequent game, and the interest is improved. Also, since there are many additional games hidden, it is possible to realize various effect controls, such as performing a more lively effect on the upper effect stage.

  In addition, if the production stage is determined only from the number of additional games that are hidden, only the notification of the latent is performed even if it is a higher production stage, and from a skilled player who understands the specifications, , The interest is reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 determines an effect stage based on various modes (additional mode A, chance B mode, and opportunity C mode) relating to addition during “ART” and the number of additional games hidden. I do. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the notification is an additional information of the latent amount or an additional information as a result of the additional lottery based on the various modes, so that the player's interest in the additional information production is reduced. Nothing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the chance B mode manages addition based on “red 7 lip (red 7 aligned)”, and the chance C mode manages addition based on “red BAR lip (red BAR aligned)”. In addition, since the notification of the addition of the latent portion is also performed based on “red 7 lip” and “red BAR lip”, the chance B mode and the chance C mode and the number of additional games hidden are added. By determining the production stage, it is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the timing of the additional information, and to attract the player's interest in the additional information production.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an effect stage during “ART” in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 152 (A), the types of effect stages during “ART” in the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachislot 1 has five production stages of “ART stage 1”, “ART stage 2”, “ART stage 3”, “ART stage 4”, and “ART stage 5” as production stages in “ART”. In addition, in detail, as an effect stage during “ART”, there is an effect stage called “ending stage”. This “ending stage” is a special effect stage corresponding to the ball appearance state “ending”. Since the transition is performed according to the exclusive transition condition, the description of FIG. 152 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), “ART stage 1” is a basic staging stage in “ART”, and “ART stage 2” has a chance A mode of “highly accurate” or more (“highly accurate”). "," Ultra-high accuracy ") or an effect stage that indicates that the number of additional games hidden is" small "(0-49G). In the “ART stage 3”, the chance B mode is “high accuracy” or more (“high accuracy” or “ultra high accuracy”), or the number of additional games hidden is “medium” (50 to 99G). The “ART stage 4” indicates that the chance C mode is “highly accurate” or more (“highly accurate” or “ultra-highly accurate”), or the number of additional games hidden is “ This is a production stage that suggests that it is "large" (100-149G). In the “ART stage 5”, a plurality of modes among the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are “highly accurate” or more (“highly accurate”, “ultrahighly accurate”) or hidden. This is an effect stage that indicates that the number of additional games to be added is “extra large” (150 G or more).

  By doing in this way, the frequency at which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional effect is different in the five effect stages, and the “ART stage 1” is the effect in which the additional control substrate 72 performs the additional effect at the lowest frequency. The “ART stage 2” corresponds to an effect stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect with the second lowest frequency, and the “ART stage 3” corresponds to an effect in which the sub-control substrate 72 performs an additional effect. The “ART stage 4” corresponds to a stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs the effect with the next lowest frequency, and the “ART stage 5” corresponds to the stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional stage. Corresponds to the production stage where the frequency of performing is the highest.

  FIG. 152 (B) is a sub_effect stage shift lottery table referred to when the sub control board 72 shifts the effect stage. The sub_production stage transition lottery table is provided for each current production stage (note that in FIG. 152 (B), the sub_production stage transition lottery referred to when the current production stage is “ART stage 1”). Only the table is shown, and the table referred to when staying at another stage is omitted.)

  In the sub_production stage transition lottery table, as reference items, “chance C + chance B high accuracy or more”, “chance C high accuracy or more”, “chance B high accuracy or more”, “chance A high accuracy or more”, “hidden” "Large extra large", "large latent", "under latent", and "small latent" are defined, and a lottery value for the lottery result (the stage of the stage to be transferred) is defined for each reference item. According to such a sub_production stage shift lottery table, for example, when “chance C is highly accurate”, the production stage is maintained as “ART1 stage” with a probability of 16384/32768, and 16384/32768. The production stage shifts from the “ART1 stage” to the “ART4 stage” with probability.

  The reference item “chance C + chance B high accuracy or more” means that the chance C mode and the chance B mode are “high accuracy” or more, and “chance C high accuracy or more” means the chance C The mode is “high accuracy” or more, “chance B high accuracy or more” means that the chance B mode is “high accuracy” or more, and “chance A high accuracy or more” is It means that the chance A mode is “high accuracy” or more. Further, “hidden extra large” means that the number of additional games hidden is “extra large” (150 G or more), and “large latent” means that the number of extra games hidden is “large” ( 100 to 149G), "hidden" means that the number of additional games hidden is "medium" (50 to 99G), and "small latent" means Means that the number of additional games is "small" (0 to 49G).

  These conditions specified by the reference item may be satisfied in duplicate. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 searches for the condition specified by the reference item in accordance with the search order shown in FIG. 152 (C), and performs the lottery of the effect stage by using the condition that is satisfied first as the reference item. As described above, the effect stage is determined based on the various modes (additional mode A, chance B mode, and opportunity C mode) relating to the addition during the “ART” and the number of additional games hidden, so that the addition of the hidden portion is notified. However, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the notification is an addition as a result of the additional lottery based on various modes.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a game control unit and a stop control unit.

  When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the main control board 71 determines the number of added games of “ART” and extends the period in which “ART” can be continued by the determined number of added games. Function as additional determining means and additional controlling means.

  Further, since the sub-control board 72 can hold the number of added games without notifying, the sub-control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Then, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as a notifying unit in order to notify the player of the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100. .

  Further, the sub-control board 72 can determine one production stage from among a plurality of production stages according to the number of additional games hidden (the number of additional games that have not been notified), and the number of additional games hidden. Can be performed, an additional notification effect can be executed to promote the matching of symbols according to the effect stage, and the sub-control board 72 functions as effect stage determination means.

<Ending control during ART>
Subsequently, the ending control during “ART” will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, if the number of games reaches 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, limit processing for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but it is determined that limit processing will be performed in the future. (At the stage when the sum of the number of completed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or greater than the specified value), the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending”. On the other hand, even when the ball-out state has shifted to “ending” on the main side, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub-side to “ending (END)”, The production state is shifted to “ending” on condition. In the following, in particular, the details of the control for causing the sub-control board 72 to shift the effect state to “ending” will be described. In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section includes “ART” and “ordinary advantage”, the advantageous section and “ART” do not completely match, but in the following control, the advantageous section and “ART” are used. The following description is based on the assumption that the advantageous section and the "ART" are in exactly the same gaming state.

  First, FIG. 153 (A) shows the relationship between the main counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and the sub counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side in relation to the advantageous section. FIG. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games that have elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of completed games), and uses the second counter to determine the number of games that can continue the advantageous section (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches “1500”, the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and changes the value of the first counter to “1500”. If the value of the second counter reaches “0” before reaching the time, the advantageous section ends.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games) and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous section ( The period (number of notified games) notified to the player in the (number of remaining games) is counted, and the game in the period (number of remaining games) in which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The number of unreported periods (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden games added)) is counted. In addition, when the number of additional games hidden is notified, the sub-control board 72 adds the number of notified games and the number of unreported games by the notified number of games.

  Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and the sub basically matches, the value of the first counter on the main side matches the value of the third counter on the sub side (the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, since the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, there is no need to count the number of completed games in the advantageous section on the sub side. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but have no relation to the control described below.)

  In addition, the sub-side separately counts the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that have not been notified, so that the value of the second counter on the main side and the number of the fourth counter on the sub side are counted. And the value of the second counter on the main side does not match the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that have been kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side is The sum of the value of the fourth counter and the value of the fifth counter on the side is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), the main control board 71 controls the transition to “ending” based on the sum of the number of completed games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games. As a result of the addition, the payout state is shifted to “ending” when the sum of the number of consumed games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or greater than a specified value.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 changes the effect state of the sub-side to “Ending (Ending ( END) ”. Here, FIG. 153 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the “ending” transition control on the sub side, and FIG. 153 (D) is referred to when the sub control board 72 transitions the effect state to “ending”. It is a sub_ending transition lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (D), the sub_ending shift lottery table defines the sum of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and determines whether to shift to “ending” for each sum. The information of the lottery value for the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined. According to such a sub_ending shift lottery table, for example, if the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is “1000 to 1199G”, the probability of “24576/32768” is changed to “ending”. The transfer lottery is not won, and the transfer lottery to “ending” is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

  As shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and (D), the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” with a higher probability as the sum of the number of completed games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. . Then, when the sub-control board 72 shifts the production state to “ending”, the sub-control board 72 shifts the production stage to the dedicated “ending stage” and maintains the “ending stage” until the advantageous section ends. If the main ball has not shifted to “ending” on the main side, the sub-control board 72 does not need to perform the lottery transition to “ending” on the sub side. Only when the game has shifted to the “ending” (ie, when the total value of the number of played games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the counter managed by the main side is equal to or greater than a specified value), A lottery may be performed to determine whether to shift the state to “ending”.

  In this way, by shifting to the special effect stage when shifting to “ending”, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. It should be noted that since it is determined that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the “ending stage”, there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform an additional notification effect after shifting to the “ending stage”.

  The transition to the “ending stage” is performed with a higher probability as the total value of the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases in a state where the total value of the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the transition probability to the “ending stage” becomes higher as the number of added games held as unannounced (the number of unannounced games) decreases, and as the number of added games held as unannounced increases. Low probability. The transition control of the production stage during “ART” described above with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152 is similarly performed even when the transition to the “ending stage” is not performed despite the state in which the total value on the main side has reached or exceeded the specified value. When the number of additional games held as unreported is large, the sub-control board 72 shifts to an effect stage where the frequency of performing additional information effects with a high probability is relatively high. From the standpoint of the player, when the additional notification effect is performed, the interest of the game is improved. Therefore, by controlling the effect mode in accordance with the notification status of the number of remaining games, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, after shifting to the “ending stage”, in principle, the effect of the “ending stage” is continued until the end of the advantageous section. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage is shifted to the effect stage corresponding to the normal section.

  Also, during the stay of the “ending stage”, it is desirable to maintain the “ending stage” because the limit processing is still performed soon even if a bonus such as an LMB is activated. Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is “1499”), a bonus such as LMB required to complete a predetermined number of games is won, and the bonus is activated. During the operation of the bonus, the first counter reaches “1500”, the limit process is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the “ending stage” is ended and the stage is shifted to another effecting stage (an effecting stage corresponding to a normal section or an effecting stage in which the bonus operation is being performed), even though the bonus operation in which the number of balls is increased is in progress. , The player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage with the “ending stage” until the end of the bonus. It is also possible to shift to the effect stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing an end notification, display of prevention of immersion, etc.).

  Further, even when the value of the first counter is “1498” to “1500”, the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated, and the bonus combination is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 also sets It is preferable to continue the “ending stage” and perform a delay process of terminating the ending state in which the “ending stage” is terminated after the bonus that has been carried over and the bonus that has been activated is completed. In this case, the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even when the advantageous section ends by the limit process and the notification of the pressing order or the like is not performed (normal section). It is preferable that the effect of the “ending stage” in such a non-advantageous section be different from that of the “ending stage” in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that there is no machine failure. Also, in the “ending stage” of the non-advantage section, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus combination in a game in which a bonus combination can be won (a game that has not been won in a role that hinders the bonus combination such as replay). May be notified to notify the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, when the advantageous section ends by the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub control board 72 is different from the other bonus operation. An effect (for example, an effect celebrating mass acquisition or an effect including some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, during, or at the end of the bonus.

  In addition, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an automatic re-insertion operation by a medal insertion operation of the next game or an operation of a re-game, a start operation) for a predetermined time after stopping all reels. , Etc.) may be performed at the end of the advantageous section in which the free zone is not accepted. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information about the advantageous section, such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. May be displayed, or the immersion prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 generates a freeze at the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing so as not to prevent the bonus from being consumed. Instead, a freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. Regardless of the end of the advantageous section, a predetermined time is set at the end of the bonus for the purpose of securing a display time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. When the freezing is provided, if the end of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section nor at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information on the advantageous section, a display for preventing the sinking, and the like. By suppressing the occurrence of a plurality of game delays due to a freeze, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. Note that the contents described so far may be applied to the case where the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation by another example of the limit processing described later, and the specification designer depends on the type of the limiter to be activated. Whether the processing is applied or not applied can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the flow of the effect.

<Variable limiter>
So far, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the assumption that the execution conditions of the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and if the advantageous section does not continue beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section), the excessive gambling property is sufficiently increased. Can be exhibited. Therefore, when the first counter (number of completed games) satisfies a predetermined termination condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (number of completed games) exceeds the upper limit. A limit process for terminating the process may be performed.

  For example, in a pachislot of a set number management type in which “ART” is fixed at 50 G per set, a halfway timing (for example, due to a “normally advantageous” period or a bonus during “ART”) with respect to the number of games in one set (for example, At this time, “ART” of the current set may end at 1480G, which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit. In such a case, it is not possible to perform all of the next set of “ART” (50 G), and the limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. The player may feel dissatisfied if the game is forcibly terminated immediately even though the next set of “ART” has been started. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the “ART” of the current set, which has not yet reached the upper limit value but has a good separation. Thus, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a timing that is well-divided, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

  Further, depending on the pachislot, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing. Therefore, a case in which such ending control is performed will be described. For example, in a pachislot of a set number management type in which “ART” is fixed to 50 G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (the predetermined end condition). (Set range), the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50 G as one set for ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for ending is set. At the end of the process, the limit process may be executed assuming that a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit process is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450 G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed at the time of 1450 to 1500 G. In this way, by allowing the execution timing of the limit processing to have a certain width, it is possible to appropriately suppress the gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of incongruity. . In addition, even if the number of games per "ART" set is fixed, the timing at which one set for ending is determined due to the addition of a bonus operation or additional specialization state different from the basic set during the process. Since it is not always exactly the 1400 game which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable that the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit process can be reserved) has a certain width.

  In addition, as described later, the limit process can be performed based on not only the number of games but also the difference number of medals obtained by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of the navigation (the number limiter, the payout number limiter described later, Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of the limit processing. In other words, the main control board 71 sets the execution timing of the limit process not only when the counter for activating the limit process (game number counter, payout number counter, navigating counter, etc.) reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value). When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the limit processing may be performed before the limiter activation threshold is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary. For example, in the case of “ART” of the set number management type, if the “ART” of the next set is started, the limiter is activated in the middle of the “ART” of the next set. (In the case of a pachislot, the increase in the number of medals per game during “ART” and the winning probability of each combination can be grasped from the design specifications.) Even if a later-described number limiter, payout number limiter, or navigation number limiter is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated during the "ART" of the next set.)

The technical ideas on this point are summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games in which the advantageous section can be continued, the difference number, the number of navigations) indicating the remaining period in which the specific gaming state (the advantageous section) can be continued is set to the end threshold (0 games, 0, 0 times). When the count reaches, the specific game state is ended, and at least the first numerical value (the number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is set to a predetermined end condition (for example, an advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, if the execution timing of the limit processing has a width as in the modified example, any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, or the like. Specific state ending means (main control board 71) for ending the specific game state even when the threshold has not been reached.
The specific state ending means collectively describes both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero, such as “ART”, and the case of ending the advantageous section by limit processing. Alternatively, the program may be provided as another process.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 starts the advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of completed games in the advantageous section reaches 1500, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process has a certain range, the advantageous section ends when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that it functions as a specific state start unit and a specific state end unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are provided with numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of completed games in the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and the number of notified games in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section). Alternatively, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 function as counting means for counting the number of unreported games).

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section and manage the number as the notified number of games. It functions as the remaining period notification means. Then, the sub-control board 72 functions as a remaining-period concealment unit, because the sub-control board 72 keeps the unreported remaining game number of the remaining game numbers in the advantageous section as unreported. Then, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the number of unreported games held as unreported as the number of added games, and to provide a notification according to the reported number of added games. In order to update the number of completed games and the number of unreported games, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as additional reporting means. Then, the sub-control board 72 functions as a production stage determination unit because the sub-control board 72 determines one production stage from among the plurality of production stages.

<Last freeze during ART>
Next, the last freeze performed by the main control board 71 at the end of “ART” will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs a random determination as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the number of remaining games of “ART” is subtracted from 1 to 0. When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached (= 1500-the number of games in the completed advantageous section) to the remaining game number of the ART, and performs a predetermined freeze process. . As an example, when the lottery of the last freeze is won when the number of games played during the advantageous section is 200, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the remaining game number of the ART. Note that the limit process is performed when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches 1500, so that, for example, a game during “normal advantage” is performed 50 times, and thereafter, the process proceeds to “ART”, and the process during “ART” is performed. When the lottery of the last freeze is won after playing the game 100 times, the number of games consumed during the advantageous section is 150 (= 50 + 100), and 1300 is added to the number of remaining games of the ART. In addition, when the lottery of the last freeze is won, the main control board 71 may permit the continuation of “ART” until the limit process is performed, and the value until the limit of the number of remaining games of the ART reaches the advantageous section is reached. It is not always necessary to perform the addition process of adding. For example, the main control board 71 may prohibit the end of the advantageous section other than the limit processing, thereby allowing continuation of “ART” until the limit processing is performed. By adding a value (9999) exceeding the limiter to the number of remaining games in the ART regardless of the number of games in the advantageous section that has been exhausted so far, the continuation of “ART” is permitted until the limit processing is performed. Is also good.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of completed games in the advantageous section reaches 1500, or in a case where the execution timing of the limit processing has a certain width, an example is given. When the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as “1” is reached, the advantageous section ends, so that it functions as a specific state start unit and a specific state end unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit to count numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of completed games in the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section). When the number of remaining games of “ART” becomes 0, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the last freeze, and when it is determined to perform the last freeze, the number of remaining games of “ART” is limited. When the number of games until the processing is performed is added, and when it is determined that the last freeze is not performed, the “ART” is ended. Function as

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
Further, as a modification of the third embodiment, for example, a flow of a game state as shown in FIG. 154 may be used, and a payout state as shown in FIG. 100 may be applied to such a game state. .

  In the third embodiment, the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous section lamp (the status indicator 147b) corresponds to the advantageous section and the non- advantageous section (normal section). As described above, a standby section related to a bonus (such as a BB with no setting difference) may be set as a section on the way from a non-advantageous section (normal section) to an advantageous section.

  The standby section refers to a section in which the advantageous section lamp (the status display 147b) is not turned on until the bonus is won even if the advantageous section is won at the time of the bonus winning with no setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to the winning, the standby section is in the standby state with the advantageous section lamp not lit, and the advantageous section lamp is lit at the time of the bonus prize and the advantageous section proceeds.

  For such a standby section, for example, the standby section flag is set by winning “BB1 + watermelon”, and the standby section proceeds until the winning of BB1. In such a case, the presence or absence of a standby section may be determined for each flag such that the advantageous section is started without passing through the standby section. However, it is desirable that the same flag is not used to determine whether a standby section is set. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the standby section, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off as the standby section during the carryover of the bonus even if the advantageous section is won simultaneously with the winning of the bonus.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, another control example unique to the pachislot 1 different from the above-described unique control will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Additional control during advantageous section>
First, with reference to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, additional control in the advantageous section of the pachislot 1 will be described. Depending on the pachislot, there is a case where a role (hereinafter, referred to as a specific role), such as a so-called fixed role or a premium role, that is easy to give a privilege to a player when it is determined as an internal winning combination is provided. Usually, such a specific combination (fixed combination or premier combination) has a lower probability of being determined as an internal winning combination than other combinations, while a probability of giving a privilege to a player is another combination. The privilege is preferentially given, for example, higher (for example, 100%) or the privilege to be granted is larger than the privilege to be granted at another opportunity.

  By the way, in the case of a pachislot where limit processing is performed as described above for a game in an advantageous section, if a specific combination in which a privilege is preferentially provided is determined as an internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is performed. However, even if a large privilege is given along with the specific role, the limit process is started, so that the large privilege given with the specific role is wasted, and there is a possibility that the willingness to play is spoiled. On the other hand, if a bonus is given without restriction during a game state advantageous to the player such as the advantageous section (ART), the gambling of the player is unnecessarily increased, and the gambling is felt to be too high. There is also a problem that some players are shunned.

  In this regard, as described below, in the pachislo 1 according to the present invention, additional control is performed in an advantageous section without losing the desire to play while balancing the gambling performance by the limit processing. Although the details will be described later, in the pachislot 1, the main control board 71 restricts the grant of the privilege according to the timing when the specific combination is won. Here, in a normal pachislot, a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific combination is won, so that the player can understand the winning of the specific combination. The winning of the specific combination can be known from the combination of the symbols. In this regard, in the pachislo 1, when giving a great privilege based on the specific combination, the main control board 71 performs stop control so that a unique combination of symbols is displayed, and gives the privilege based on the specific combination. In the case of restriction, stop control is performed so that a general combination of symbols that can be displayed in other combinations is displayed. From the viewpoint of the player, it is not possible to know that the specific combination has been won, so that even if the grant of the privilege is restricted, the player does not feel a sense of loss.

  First, with reference to FIG. 156 (A), a description will be given of a combination of a winning combination and a symbol used for describing the additional control of the advantageous section. Hereinafter, additional control in the advantageous section will be described with reference to the combination of symbols described in the first embodiment. In the description of the additional control in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), as the specific combination (fixed combination or premier combination), “F_single lip”, “F_2 double lip”, and “F_3 triple lip” Three types of roles are used. It is to be noted that the winning probability of each specific winning combination has no relation in the present control, and is thus omitted.

  “F_single lip”, “F_2 tie lip” and “F_triple lip” have different combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation. Are displayed along the activated line, and when a stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode, a general-purpose pattern combination is displayed along the activated line.

  Specifically, when a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st” at the time of winning “F_single lip” when the “F_single lip” is won, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols related to “single lip” along the activated line. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st", a combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along the activated line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st” at the time of winning the “F — 2 consecutive chips”, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the symbols related to “2 consecutive chips” along the activated line, and “ When a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “middle 1st” or “right 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed along an activated line. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st” at the time of winning “F_3 consecutive chips”, the main control board 71 displays a combination of the symbols related to “3 consecutive chips” along the activated line, and “ When a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “middle 1st” or “right 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed along an activated line.

  As described in the first embodiment, the combination of the symbols related to the “single chili lip” is such that the chile symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. This is a combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols related to “Two consecutive Chili Lips” is a combination of symbols where Chile symbols are displayed on two reels, and the combination of symbols related to “Three consecutive Chili Lips” is assigned to all reels. This is a combination of symbols for which a Chile symbol is displayed. However, in the first embodiment, “single chili lip”, “dual chili lip”, and “triple chili lip” are not combinations of symbols unique to a certain role, but in the following description, “single chili lip” "Is a combination of symbols unique to" F_Single Chillip "," Dual Chilllip "is a combination of symbols unique to" F_2 Chilllip ", and" Triple Chilllip "is a symbol combination unique to" F_3 Chilllip ". It is assumed to be a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, a symbol related to "Replay" displayed when a stop operation is performed on "single chili lip", "dual chili lip", "triple chili lip" in the pressing order of "middle 1st" or "right 1st" Is a general-purpose symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation at the time of "F_Replay" winning. In addition, the mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the symbol combination unique to the specific combination is arbitrary, and is not limited to the pressing order. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156 (A), the form of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the unique symbol combination is common to all the special combinations. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of operation may be used, or only some of the specified roles may be set to another stop operation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (B), an outline of an additional lottery when each specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination will be described. In this control, the grant of the privilege is restricted at the time of winning the specific combination. However, in order to simplify the explanation, an example in which the privilege is not granted will be described as the privilege grant. Of course, restricting the grant of a privilege is not limited to invalidating, but includes lowering the probability of granting a privilege when restricting than when not restricting. Here, lowering the probability includes setting the probability to 0%.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (B), the additional lottery based on the specific combination differs depending on whether it is a valid section or an invalid section. Here, the valid section is a section in which additional lottery based on the specific combination is performed, and the invalid section is a section in which additional lottery based on the specific combination is not performed. In the case of the valid section, the main control board 71 gives a “small privilege” when “F_single lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the “F_2 double chili lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “ When the “F_3 consecutive chili lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, a “big privilege” is provided. In this description, “small privilege”, “medium privilege”, and “large privilege” are for comparison, and “medium privilege” is larger than “small privilege” and larger than “large privilege”. It means that it is small, and "small privilege" does not mean that it is an absolutely small privilege. The type of privilege to be granted is arbitrary, and depends on the method of managing the duration of the advantageous section. As an example, when the duration is managed by the number of games, the number of additional games that extend the duration and the right (stock) of the additional specialization zone in which the number of additional games can be easily obtained correspond to the number of games.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (C), an outline of the push order navigation in the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination will be described. In FIG. 156 (C), only the case of winning the “F_3 consecutive lip” will be described, but the same applies to “F_single lip” and “F_2 consecutive lip”. As shown in the figure, when “F_3 consecutive chips” is determined as an internal winning combination in the valid section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 send “left 1st” via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. "And the symbols to be aimed at. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notification, the combination of the symbols related to “3 consecutive chili lip” is displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, when “F_3 consecutive chips” is determined as the internal winning combination in the invalid section, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, for example, output “middle 1st” via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed on the activated line. It should be noted that whether or not to grant a benefit is determined regardless of the order in which the information is pushed, so that the notification in this case is performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100 and not performed by the main control board 71. Is also good.

  During the valid section, a “big privilege” is given in accordance with the fact that “F_3 Chile Lip” has been determined as the internal winning combination. , It can be grasped that a “big privilege” has been given, and the privilege can be enjoyed. On the other hand, during the invalid section, no benefit is given, but since the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed, the player is determined to have “F_3 consecutive chili lip” as the internal winning combination. It is not possible to grasp that, and it does not spoil the interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of a method of setting an effective section and an invalid section of additional lottery based on a specific combination will be described. FIG. 157 (D) is a diagram illustrating a first method of setting a valid section and an invalid section. In the first method, based on the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed (in other words, the period elapsed from the start of the advantageous section), the effective section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination are determined. Set. Note that, as described above, since the size of the privilege to be given differs for each specific combination, in the first method, the period set as an effective section or an invalid section is made different for each specific combination.

  As an example, “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which the “large privilege” is given is performed until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “1000G” (in other words, “500G after the advantageous section starts and 500 G ) Is set as an effective section, and subsequent sections are set as invalid sections (note that during a normal section, the section is set as an effective section regardless of the type of specific combination). In addition, the “F_2 consecutive chili lip” to which the “mid privilege” is given is performed until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “800G” (in other words, “700G after the advantageous section starts, ) Is set as a valid section and the succeeding sections are set as invalid sections. The “F_single lip” to which the “small privilege” is given remains until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “600G” (in other words, “900G” after the advantageous section starts. Until the elapse) is set as a valid section, and the subsequent sections are set as invalid sections. Of course, the setting method shown in FIG. 157 (D) is merely an example, and an effective section and an invalid section can be set according to the size of the privilege to be provided.

  When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the active section (until the specified number of games elapses from the start of the advantageous section), the main control board 71 may award a privilege corresponding to the specific combination. On the other hand, if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the invalid section (after the specified number of games has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section), no benefit is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 use the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 to change the combination of the symbols unique to the specific combination. The mode of the stop operation necessary for the stop display is notified (notifying the pressing order of "left 1st" and the symbol to be aimed at), and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the specific role inside during the invalid section. When the winning combination is determined, the mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the general-purpose symbol combination is notified via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 (the pressing order of the "middle 1st" is notified). I do.

  Note that in this control, the grant of the privilege is restricted at the time of winning the specific combination. Includes lowering the probability of granting. Here, the control processing of the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 in the case of reducing the probability of giving a privilege will be described. The following description is similarly applied to a case where an effective section and an invalid section are set as shown in FIGS. 157 (E) and (F) described later. In the following description, the invalid section will be re-read as the “reduced section”. The reduced section is a section in which the probability of giving a privilege at the time of winning a specific combination is reduced.

  When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the active section (until the specified number of games elapses from the start of the advantageous section), the main control board 71 sets the first probability (may include 100%). In the meantime, it is determined that the privilege corresponding to the specific combination is to be given, while the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the reduced section (after the specified number of games has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section). It is determined that the privilege corresponding to the specific combination is to be granted with a second probability (which may include 0%) lower than the probability of the special combination. Then, when the main control board 71 determines to grant the privilege in accordance with the determination of the specific combination as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 communicate via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100, The mode of the stop operation necessary to stop and display the combination of the symbols unique to the specific combination is notified (notifying the pressing order of the “left 1st” and the target design), and the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Nevertheless, if the main control board 71 decides not to grant the privilege, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 stop and display the general symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Of the stop operation necessary for this (notifying the pressing order of “middle 1st”). Note that the second probability of giving a privilege during the reduced section may be varied, for example, during a period that has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section (in other words, a remaining period until the limit processing is performed). The longer the second probability, the lower the second probability may be, and the greater the specific role of the privilege to be granted, the lower the second probability may be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (E), a description will be given of a second method of setting an effective section and an invalid section of additional lottery based on a specific combination. In the second method, a special section in the advantageous section is defined as an invalid section, and the other sections are defined as valid sections. Note that a special section refers to, for example, a state in which a plurality of stocks in an additional specialization zone are owned. In some pachislots, if the player wins the premier role during the normal section, the section shifts to the advantageous section (ART), and the advantageous section (ART) starts with a plurality of stocks in the additional specialization zone from the beginning. is there. In such a state, if the player wins further the premier combination, an excessive profit will be given to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (E), in the second method, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in such a state, the grant of the privilege is limited. Specifically, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can give the privilege corresponding to the specific combination, If the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the invalid section (that is, during the special section), no benefit is given. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section (in other words, when the main control substrate 71 determines to give the privilege), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the notification lamp 147a and the display lamp 147a. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of the symbols specific to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 provide the special combination during the invalid section. Is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, if the main control board 71 determines not to give the privilege), the stop of the general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 is performed. The mode of the necessary stop operation is notified.

  Note that the special section can be set arbitrarily, and may be in a state where a predetermined number or more of stock in the additional special zone is possessed as described above, and the advantageous section (ART) can be continued. It may be in a state in which an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period is held in a predetermined amount or more without being notified. Further, during the special section, the player may be caused to stay at the dedicated effect stage so that the player can recognize that the player is in the special section.

  Further, in FIG. 157 (E), the range of the special section is common to each of the plurality of specific combinations having different privilege sizes, but may be different. For example, “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which a “large privilege” is given is a special section in which a state in which stock of the additional specialization zone is equal to or more than a first predetermined number is set to “F_2” to which “mid privilege” is given. The “Ten-Chili-Lip” is a special section in which the stock of the additional specialization zone is at least a second predetermined number, which is greater than the first predetermined number, and “F_Single Chili-lip” to which “small privilege” is given is added. A state where the stock of the specialization zone is at least a third predetermined number greater than the second predetermined number may be defined as a special section.

  Next, FIG. 157 (F) is a diagram illustrating a third method of setting the valid section and the invalid section of the additional lottery based on the specific combination. In the third method, a valid section and an invalid section are set by combining the first method and the second method. That is, in the third method, the special section in the advantageous section is set as the invalid section regardless of the type of the special combination, and the “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which the “large privilege” is given is an advantageous section other than the special section. Of the sections, a section until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “1000G” (in other words, until “500G” elapses from the start of the advantageous section), and the subsequent section is invalid. Set as a section. Similarly, for the “F_2 consecutive chili lip” to which the “mid privilege” is given, of the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “800 G” (in other words, And until the elapse of “700G” from the start of the advantageous section) is set as an effective section, and the subsequent sections are set as invalid sections. For “F_Single Lip” to which “small privilege” is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “600G” (in other words, The period from the start of the advantageous section until “900G” elapses) is set as an effective section, and the subsequent sections are set as invalid sections.

  Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can give the privilege corresponding to the specific combination, while the main combination is in the invalid section. If the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, no special benefit is given. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the valid section (in other words, when the main control substrate 71 determines to give the privilege), the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display the notification lamp 147a and the display lamp 147a. Through the unit 100, the mode of the stop operation required to stop and display the combination of the symbols specific to the specific combination is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 provide the special combination during the invalid section. Is determined as the internal winning combination (in other words, if the main control board 71 determines not to give the privilege), the stop of the general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 is performed. The mode of the necessary stop operation is notified.

  In this way, the advantageous section is divided into an effective section in which the privilege based on the specific combination can be given and an invalid section (reduced section) in which the grant of the benefit is restricted, and the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed in each section is different. By notifying, the profit given to the player is not excessive, and not only can the balance of appropriate gambling be maintained, but also the player does not feel lost, There is no loss of the player's willingness to play.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. Therefore, the main control board 71 includes a fluctuation control unit, an internal winning combination determination unit, and a stop. Functions as control means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 starts the advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0, when the number of completed games in the advantageous section reaches 1500, or when the limit is reached. In the case where the execution timing of the process has a certain range, when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, the advantageous section is ended, so that it functions as state control means.

  In addition, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 can provide a benefit relating to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability, and the main control board 71 determines that the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In order to change the probability that the privilege can be given in accordance with the state (effective section or reduced section) at the time of being performed, it functions as a probability changing unit. When the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition during the advantageous section, the state satisfying the condition can be set as a special section (special state). Function.

  Further, at the time of winning the specific combination, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of the predetermined pressing order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to control the player. The main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub-control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means for notifying the user of the predetermined pressing order.

<Privilege grant at ART transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a description will be given of a privilege grant at the time of shifting to ART in the pachislot 1. First, the transition flow of the game state in the present control will be described with reference to FIG. 158 (A). As shown in the figure, the pachislot 1 of this control has a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into a ball-out state of "normally advantageous" and "ART". The normal section is a non-notification state in which the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 does not notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section is the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board. This is a notification state in which the control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation. Further, “normally advantageous” and “ART” mean that although the main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, “ART” is better than “normally advantageous”. Is a state where the frequency (possibility) of notifying the mode of the stop operation is higher. This is the same as the relationship between “normally advantageous” and “ART” in the third embodiment (see FIG. 102). In this control, the normal section and “normal advantage” are sections where the payout rate does not exceed 1, and “ART” is a section where the payout rate is higher than the normal section and “normal advantage” (for example, the payout rate). Is more than 1).

  As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (1) the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section. The transition condition is arbitrary, and may be, for example, a transition lottery win, a predetermined number of games may have elapsed, or a specific combination may be determined as an internal combination. Alternatively, a specific symbol combination may be displayed along the payline. In this control, the transition from the normal section (1) to “normal advantage” is performed with a relatively high probability, for example, with a probability of about 1/30.

  In this control, the main control board 71 can shift the advantageous state from (2) “normally advantageous” to “ART”. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, but in this control, the transition from “normally advantageous” to “ART” in (2) is performed with a lower probability than the transition from the ordinary section to “normally advantageous”. , For example, with a probability of about 1/100. In addition, the main control board 71 may shift from “normally advantageous” to “ART” as the ceiling when the predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) has elapsed with “normally advantageous”.

  Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) “ART” to the normal section. The transition condition is that “ART” ends, for example, when the period during which “ART” can be continued reaches the end threshold, or when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold. When the limit processing has been performed, the main control board 71 ends “ART” and shifts the gaming state to a normal section.

  As shown in the figure, in the present control, the main control board 71 may shift the game state from (4) “normally advantageous” to a normal section. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, and the transition probability is also arbitrary. For example, the probability of the transition from the normal section of (1) to “normally advantageous” may be substantially the same, the probability of the transition may be higher than the transition probability of (1), and The transition probability may be a probability between the transition probability and the transition probability from “normal advantage” to “ART” in (2), may be substantially the same as the transition probability in (2), and ( The transition probability may be lower than the transition probability of 2). In the example shown in the figure, it is assumed that, as in the case of the transition probability of (2), the transition from “normally advantageous” to the normal section is performed at a probability of, for example, about 1/100.

  In the pachislot 1 having such a game state transition flow, the transition to the first stage advantageous section (“normal advantage”) is performed at a high frequency. Because the gender is diversified, it is an element to continue the game even during non-ART. On the other hand, the transition to the second-stage advantageous section (“ART”) has a lower probability than the transition probability to the first-stage advantageous section, so that it is difficult to transition to the second-stage advantageous section. I have. In this control, the main control board 71 determines, in the advantageous section of the first stage (“normally advantageous”), the length of a period that has elapsed without shifting to the advantageous section of the second stage (“ART”). At the time of "ART" transition, a privilege is given. Specifically, the main control board 71 sets the initial number of games of “ART” (that is, the number of games set at the start of “ART”, the greater the number of games that have been “normally advantageous” without shifting to “ART”. A large number of games is given as a period during which “ART” can be continued.

  Here, FIG. 158 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a privilege granted at the time of shifting to “ART” in the present control. As shown in the figure, when shifting from “normally advantageous” to “ART”, the main control board 71 sets “ART” when the number of games that have passed in “normally advantageous” is “0 to 99G”. "50G" is given as the initial game number, and when the game number is "100 to 199G", "100G" is given as the initial game number of "ART" and the game number is "200 to 299G". In some cases, “200G” is given as the initial game number of “ART”, and when the game number is “300 to 399G”, “300G” is given as the initial game number of “ART”. If the number is “400 to 499G”, “500G” is given as the initial game number of “ART”, and if the number is “500G”, “1000G” is given as the initial game number of “ART”. To It is given to. Note that if 500 games have elapsed for “normal advantage” and 1000 games for “ART” have elapsed since then, the advantageous section will continue for 1500 games, and the limit process will start. Therefore, the “ART” initial game provided when the number of games is “500G” is the same as the number of remaining games until the limit process regarding the advantageous section is performed.

  According to such control, the duration of “ART” is determined according to the period from “normal advantage” to “ART”, and the longer the duration, the longer the duration of “ART”. . Thereby, even when the “normal advantage” has been continued for a long time, not only medals are consumed but also the “ART” can be expected to continue for a long time thereafter. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play. On the other hand, also in the present control, the main control board 71 performs the limit processing of the advantageous section, so that the "ART" does not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the ambition from being increased unnecessarily. .

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  Further, when the transition condition (first start condition) is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to “normally advantageous”, and shifts the game state to “normally advantageous” (second start condition). When the condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from “normal advantage” to “ART”, and when the shift condition (end condition) is satisfied in “normal advantage”, the game state is shifted from “normal advantage” to the normal section. The control board 71 functions as a first state control unit, a second state control unit, and a third state control unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 assigns a larger number of games as the initial number of games of “ART” as the number of games that have passed “normally advantageous” without shifting to “ART” is increased. Function as

<Re-recognition of status reset>
Next, re-recognition of the state reset in the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot 1, the main control board 71 initializes (resets) all information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. For example, the main control board 71 determines what advantageous section has passed in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. There is a risk that the game cannot be grasped and the subsequent game will be monotonous. Therefore, in the present control, the main control board 71 bypasses the initialization of the information by the reset through the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of the reset (the result), and recognizes again after the reset.

  FIG. 159 (A) is a diagram showing the concept of the present control (reset re-recognition). In this control, a particular state is associated in advance with a symbol combination (roll) displayed when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. Then, as shown in the figure, after returning from the initialization of the information by the reset, the main control board 71 reads out the associated specific state from the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed, and reads the specific state. Is recognized again after the reset.

  Next, FIG. 159 (B) is a diagram showing the flow of the present control (reset re-recognition). In the example shown in the figure, when the predetermined symbol combination “replay right down” is stopped and displayed, the main control board 71 ends the predetermined game state and shifts to another game state, and At the end of the gaming state, all information relating to the predetermined gaming state is initialized (reset). Then, the state of the end of the predetermined gaming state is associated with the predetermined symbol combination “replay right down”.

  As shown in the figure, when the symbol combination "replay right down" is displayed, the main control board 71 ends the predetermined gaming state and resets various information. Here, until the next game is started, the symbol combination of “replay right down” is still displayed, and the reset control by the main control board 71 is performed in a very short time. Even after returning from, the symbol combination of “replay to the right” is still displayed, and the main control board 71 can read the symbol combination of “replay to the right”. Therefore, in the present control, after returning from the initialization of the information by the reset, the main control board 71 uses the read combination of the symbols “replay right down” and associates the symbol combination in advance with the symbol combination. The state "end of predetermined game state" is read, and it is recognized again that the predetermined game state is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 159 (C) and (D), the gaming property of the pachislot 1 using this control will be described. FIG. 159 (C) is an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a case where the present control is suitably used. The details of each game state are the same as those described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (1) the normal section to the “normally advantageous” of the advantageous section, and (2) the gaming state from the “normally advantageous” to the “ART”. (3) The gaming state can be shifted from "ART" to the normal section, and (4) the gaming state can be shifted from "normally advantageous" to the normal section. The description of the transition conditions and the transition probabilities will be omitted, except for those related to the playability using the present control.

  Referring to the figure, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the advantageous section to the normal section, shifts from “ART” to the normal section as shown in (3), and changes to “ There is a case where the transition is made from the “normal advantage” to the normal section. When this control is used, a specific symbol combination (end result) is displayed as one of the transition condition from “ART” to the normal section or the transition condition from “normal advantage” to the normal section. Is set, and the end of the corresponding gaming state is associated with the specific symbol combination. In the example shown in FIG. 159, the ending condition of “ART” is used as the display of a specific symbol combination, and the ending condition of “ART” is specified for the specific symbol combination. Correspond.

  In this way, even when the game state is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section, even if the information about the advantageous section is reset, it is possible to grasp what kind of advantageous section has passed to the normal section. Can be. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), since “normally advantageous” ends regardless of the combination of the symbols associated with the specific state, the “normally advantageous” advantageous section is changed to the normal section. In a case where the main control board 71 has shifted from the reset state, the main control board 71 does not recognize again the specific state from the combination of the displayed symbols. On the other hand, since “ART” ends when the combination of symbols associated with the specific state is displayed, the main control board 71 returns from the reset when the transition from the advantageous section of “ART” to the normal section is performed. After that, it is possible to recognize again the end of “ART” from the combination of the displayed symbols.

  That is, the information about the advantageous section is initialized at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of “normally advantageous” and “ART”. It is not possible to know whether “ART” has ended. On the other hand, according to this control, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states “normally advantageous” and “ART”. Is re-recognized, it is possible to know what advantageous section (“normally advantageous” or “ART”) has ended after the end of the advantageous section.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as stop control means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 ends “ART” in response to the specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed, and performs reset control at the end of “ART”. Then, after returning from the reset control, the main control board 71 re-recognizes “it is the end of ART” from the combination of the specific symbols displayed. It functions as a termination unit and an initialization unit.

<Optional reset of advantageous section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 160, the arbitrary reset control of the advantageous section in the pachislo 1 will be described. In a pachislot having a normal section and an advantageous section, and having "ART" and a state other than ART (for example, "normally advantageous") as the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the end of "ART" and shifts to the normal section. It is possible to do. However, during the normal section, it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section, so that it is not possible to expect a return after the “ART” ends (= after the end of the advantageous section), and the timing at which the “ART” ends It is easy to stop the game, and the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachi-slot 1 of the third embodiment, it is possible to shift to the “normal advantage” without terminating the advantageous section after the “ART” ends (see FIG. 138), but since the advantageous section has a limit, For example, if "ART" ends immediately before the limit and then remains in the advantageous section, even if it is possible to return to "ART" immediately after the end of the "ART", the limit processing is performed. The "ART" pulled back ends immediately.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160 (A), the pachislot 1 allows the player to arbitrarily reset the advantageous section. Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when the player performs a reset operation. The method by which the main control board 71 accepts a reset operation is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can accept a reset operation by a player in response to an operation of an arbitrary operation unit or the like. Also, the timing at which the player can reset the advantageous section may be any timing during the advantageous section. However, in the following description, the player performs the advantageous section reset operation at the end of “ART”. Can be done.

  As shown in the drawing, the main control board 71 determines whether or not a reset operation has been received from the player at the end of “ART”. When the reset operation is received, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from “ART” to the normal section. On the other hand, when the reset operation is not received, the main control board 71 continues the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from “ART” to “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section.

  Next, FIG. 160 (B) is an example of a transition flow of a game state in a case where the present control is suitably used. The details of each game state are the same as those described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. The description of the transition conditions and the transition probabilities will be omitted, except for those related to the playability using the present control.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (1) the normal section to the "ART" of the advantageous section. Note that this control is characterized in that it is possible to shift to “normally advantageous” without terminating the advantageous section after the “ART” ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a transition from the normal section to “ART” via “normally advantageous” may be performed.

  Further, when the “ART” ends, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from “ART” to the normal section when (2) a reset operation is received from the player, and (3) resets the game state from the player. If no operation has been received, the gaming state is shifted from "ART" to "normally advantageous" in the advantageous section. The correspondence between the main control board 71 accepting the reset operation and the player performing the reset operation is arbitrary. That is, when the player performs an intentional operation, the main control board 71 may accept the reset operation. When the player does not perform any operation, the main control board 71 accepts the reset operation. It may be good.

  In addition, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (4) “normal advantage” to “ART”, and (5) can shift the gaming state from “normal advantage” to a normal section. . As shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to “ART” is higher for “normally advantageous” than for normal sections. In other words, the probability that the condition for transition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in the normal section and the probability that the condition for transition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in “normal advantage” Then, the latter has a higher probability.

  According to such control, after the "ART" is completed, a chance zone ("usually advantageous") for returning the "ART" can be set as a chance zone ("normal advantage"), and a decrease in operation after the "ART" is completed can be suppressed. . In addition, when the end of “ART” is close to the limit of the advantageous section, the player can clear the advantageous section by his own intention and reset the period up to the limit. As a result, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to perform the reset operation in consideration of merits and demerits. And the range of playability can be expanded.

  The “normal advantage” after the “ART” ends is to be continued for a maximum of 100 games, and if the “ART” cannot be shifted during the 100 games, the main control board 71 The section may be ended and the gaming state may be shifted to the normal section.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The main control board 71 performs a limit process when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold, and can accept a reset operation from the player at the end of the “ART”. Reference numeral 71 functions as an operation receiving unit.

  Further, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to “ART” when the transition condition to “ART” is satisfied, and changes the gaming state to the normal section after the “ART” ends if a reset operation is received. When the reset operation has not been received, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means to shift the game state to “normally advantageous” after the “ART” ends.

<Game ceiling using advantageous sections>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the game number ceiling using the advantageous section in the pachislot 1 will be described. FIG. 161 (A) is an example of a transition flow of a game state in a case where the present control is suitably used. In this control, the main control board 71 manages an RT state and a state relating to notification. The RT state is a state in which the type of “Replay” related to the operation of the replay and the probability that “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination are different. In the following description, “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination. There is a “low RT” with a low probability and a “high RT” with a high probability that “replay” is determined as an internal winning combination. The state relating to the notification is a state in which the probability of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation is different, and in the following description, the state includes a normal section and an advantageous section. Note that, in the normal section, basically, the state of the stop operation is not notified to the player. In the advantageous section, the state of the stop operation can be notified to the player, but as described later. The state of the stop operation is not reported until the game reaches the ceiling.

  As shown in the figure, when a combination of symbols related to “7 replays” described later in “1. The RT state is shifted to “High RT”. Further, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “high RT” to “low RT” when a predetermined condition (arbitrary first condition) is satisfied in “high RT”. Note that the predetermined condition that triggers the transition from “high RT” to “low RT” is arbitrary. And the operation of the bonus is terminated.

  Further, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to the notification from the normal section to the advantageous section when the specific condition (arbitrary second condition) is satisfied in the (3) normal section. Note that the specific condition that triggers the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is not related to the present control, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the combination of the symbols related to “7 aligned replays” is displayed along the activated line in the (4) advantageous section, the main control board 71 shifts the state of the notification from the advantageous section to the normal section. The main control board 71 also performs the limit processing even when the number of times reached the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, and shifts the state related to the notification from the advantageous section to the normal section.

  As described above, in the present control, when the symbol combination related to “7-set replay” is displayed along the activated line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “low RT” to “high RT” and Then, the state relating to the notification is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. As will be described later, in this control, the RT state during the advantageous section is set to “low RT”, and the RT state during the normal section is set to “high RT”. Therefore, when the advantageous section (“low RT”) and the normal section (“high RT”) are compared, the normal section is more advantageous.

  Next, FIG. 161 (B) is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between a winning combination used in the present control and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. In the present control, the combination to be notified in the advantageous section includes “choice number lip” (“F_choice number lip — 01” to “F_choice number lip —?”). In addition, “selection number lip” is a combination (replay) of a combination of symbols stopped and displayed according to the mode of the stop operation, and when the stop operation is performed in a form that is the correct answer for each “selection number lip” Shows a combination of symbols related to "7 replays" along an activated line, and when a stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, a combination of symbols related to "replay" is displayed along an activated line. Is displayed.

  During the advantageous section (“low RT”), the notification is not performed until the game reaches the ceiling of the number of games. Therefore, the “selection number lip” is determined as the internal winning combination of the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72). However, while not informing the mode of the stop operation, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) sets the mode of the stop operation that is correct for each “choice number rip” after reaching the game ceiling. Notify. As a result, after reaching the ceiling of the number of games, the combination of the symbols related to “7 replays” is displayed along the activated line at the time of winning the “selection number lip”, and the routine shifts to the normal section (“high RT”). Will be. In addition, even when the notification is not performed, the player may accidentally perform the stop operation in a manner that gives a correct answer, and in this case, the combination of the symbols related to the “seven replays” is set along the activated line. And the display shifts to the normal section (“high RT”). In order to avoid such a case, it is preferable to increase the number of alternatives of the “alternative number rip” as much as possible. For example, when the number of choices is provided only in the pushing order of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the number of choices is limited to six at the maximum. Can be increased.

  Next, FIG. 161 (C) is a diagram showing an outline of a game flow in this control. As shown in the drawing, in the present control, the low-RT is set in the advantageous section, and the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) in the advantageous section (“low RT”) reaches the ceiling of the number of games. No notification is made until then. Thereafter, when the game number ceiling is reached during the advantageous section ("low RT"), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) releases the notification, and thereafter, the "choice number lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. When this is done, the mode of the stop operation that becomes the correct answer for each “selection number lip” is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to “7 matching replays” is displayed along the activated line, so that the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) shift the gaming state to the normal section (“high RT”). I do. Thereafter, for example, the game is played with "high RT" until the bonus is won. That is, according to this control, when a predetermined number of games elapse without winning a bonus in the state of “low RT” (advantageous section), the state becomes a ceiling state, and thereafter, the game until the bonus is won is set to “high RT”. (Normal section).

  Note that the number of games on the ceiling can be appropriately set according to the period (number of games) during which no notification is made during the advantageous section. Therefore, the main control board 71 may determine, by lottery, a period during which the notification is not performed at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and set the period. As a result, the period during which notification is not performed during the advantageous section changes each time, and as a result, the number of games before reaching the ceiling also changes. In the description shown in FIG. 161, the ceiling is described as an example of the ceiling as the number of games, but the ceiling can be realized in any manner. For example, the ceiling is realized according to the number of times the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It may be good. Specifically, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) does not perform the notification until the number of times the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number, and reaches the predetermined number. The notification may be performed later.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 is provided with a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  Further, when the combination of the symbols related to the “seven-matched replay” is displayed along the activated line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “low RT” to “high RT” and changes the RT state from the advantageous section to the normal state. The state relating to the notification is shifted to the section. Further, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to the notification from the normal section to the advantageous section, so that the main control board 71 includes an RT state control unit, a state end unit, Functions as state start means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 counts the number of games that have elapsed during the advantageous section, and when the number of elapsed games reaches the number corresponding to the ceiling of the number of games, when the “selection number lip” is won, “7 alignment” is achieved. The main control board 71 functions as a counting unit and a notifying unit in order to notify the stop operation mode required to stop and display the symbol combination related to “Replay”. Further, since the main control board 71 can determine the number of times corresponding to the number of games at the start of the advantageous section (that is, a period during which the notification is not performed during the advantageous section), the main control board 71 is provided with the predetermined value setting means. Function as

<Playability using advantageous sections>
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, a description will be given of a method for realizing a new game property using the advantageous section in the pachislot 1. In a pachislot having a normal section and an advantageous section, it is difficult to change the transition probability to the advantageous section during the normal section, but it is possible to perform lottery with various probabilities during the advantageous section. Therefore, "normal advantage" and "ART" are provided as advantageous sections to enable transition from "normal advantage" to "ART", and the probability of transition from the normal section to "ART" of the advantageous section and "normal advantage" ”To“ ART ”, a plurality of states having different transition probabilities to“ ART ”are realized (for example,“ normal ”in the third embodiment and“ normal ” Normal mode "low accuracy""heaven" etc.).

  By the way, since the upper limit (limit) is provided in the advantageous section, if the transition from “normal advantage” is set as the main transition route as the transition route to “ART”, the limit process is performed. The period of “ART” in which a game can be played only for the game in “normally advantageous” (advantaged section) is impaired. Therefore, in this control, the transition from the normal section to “ART” is set as a main transition route to “ART”, and even when the limit processing is performed, the period of “ART” in which the game can be played is set. Prevent waste.

  FIG. 162 (A) is an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a case where the present control is suitably used. The details of each game state are the same as those described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. The description of the transition conditions and the transition probabilities will be omitted, except for those related to the playability using the present control.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (1) the normal section to the “normal advantage” of the advantageous section, and (2) the “ART” of the advantageous section from the normal section. The game state can be shifted to. In addition, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) “normal advantage” in the advantageous section to the normal section, and (4) “ART” in the advantageous section from “normal advantage” in the advantageous section. The game state can be shifted to. Here, as shown in the figure, the degree of expectation of transition to “ART” is higher in the normal section than in “normally advantageous”. In other words, the probability that the condition for transition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in the normal section and the probability that the condition for transition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in “normal advantage” Then, the former has a higher probability.

  By controlling the gaming state in this way, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), during non-ART, the expected degree of transition to “ART” is changed from “normally advantageous” to “ART”. The game is played for the normal section where the game is high. In other words, during non-ART, there is a game ability of how to pass through the advantageous section (“normally advantageous”) and shift to the normal section. Then, since the process directly shifts to the “ART” from the normal section, according to this control, even when the limit processing is performed, the “ART” period in which the game can be performed is not wasted. .

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 performs limit processing when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the progress of the game shown in FIG. The main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to “normally advantageous” when the first condition is satisfied in the normal section, and shifts the gaming state to “ART” when the second condition is satisfied in the normal section, When the third condition is satisfied in "normally advantageous", the gaming state is shifted to the normal section, and when the fourth condition is satisfied in "normally advantageous", the gaming state is shifted to "ART". Then, the main control board 71 functions as a state control unit because it is easier to shift to “ART” from a normal section than from “normally advantageous”.

<Playability using bonus combination without setting difference during normal section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, a description will be given of the control using the bonus combination with no setting difference during the normal section in the pachislot 1. In a pachislot having an advantageous section, various benefits can be given in response to the bonus combination. For example, when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section and the bonus is operated thereafter, the main control is performed. The board 71 can provide a privilege when the bonus is activated (common processing). The award of the bonus accompanying the bonus operation during the advantageous section can be performed in common for a plurality of bonus roles, and even if the bonus role has a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, Can be granted when the is activated. The common process is performed when the bonus is activated during the advantageous section. However, the bonus operation is not performed unless the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It can be said that this is a process to be performed.

  Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, the main control board 71 can provide the privilege (normal processing). Granting of a bonus accompanying a bonus win in the normal section can be performed individually for each of the plurality of bonus wins, but can be performed for a bonus win having a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal win. Instead, it can be performed only at the time of winning a bonus combination having no setting difference.

  In this control, the following gameplay is realized by using such a difference between the normal processing and the common processing. First, with reference to FIG. 163 (A), the configuration of the bonus combination that can be suitably used in this control will be described. In this control as shown in the figure, BB1 and BB2 are provided as bonuses, and these bonuses can be determined as an internal winning combination by overlapping with other combinations. Specifically, in this control, the role of “F_BB1” in which BB1 wins alone, the role of “F_BB2” in which BB2 wins alone, and the “F_BB2 + special role” in which BB2 wins together with the special role It has the role of. Then, for “F_BB1”, the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is set so that there is no setting difference, for “F_BB1”, the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is set so that there is a setting difference, and “F_BB2 + The special combination is set so that there is no setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination.

  In such a configuration of the bonus combination, during the advantageous section, even if any of “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, and “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination (at the time of the subsequent activation of the bonus). The main control board 71 performs common processing. As a result, during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 gives a common privilege regardless of the type of the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the main control board 71 can perform a unique process (normal process) in accordance with the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination. When “F_BB1” is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, processing (normal processing) specific to “F_BB1” is performed, and “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section. Then, a process (normal process) specific to “F_BB2 + special combination” is performed. On the other hand, even if “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, no processing is performed because “F_BB2” is a bonus combination having a setting difference. As a result, during the normal section, the main control board 71 gives a unique privilege according to the type of the bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

  In the present control, by providing a difference between such a common privilege in the common processing in the advantageous section and a unique privilege in the normal processing (specific processing) in the normal section, a game characteristic peculiar to the control is realized. I do. As an example, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), while the probability that “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination is set to a lower probability than other bonus combinations, “F_BB2 + special combination” in the normal section is used. The unique privilege based on the “role” is made larger than the common privilege based on the common processing in the advantageous section. More specifically, “F_BB2 + special combination” is a so-called premium bonus combination (for example, a winning of approximately 1/16384 common to the settings 1 to 6), and when it is determined as an internal winning combination during a normal section. , Giving a very big privilege according to the role of the premier. On the other hand, when it is determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section, a privilege common to other bonus combinations is given.

  By doing so, according to this control, it is possible to set a period during which the premium privilege can be received during the normal section, and a period during which the premium privilege cannot be received during the advantageous section. can do. In a pachislot having a normal section and an advantageous section, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the advantageous section to notify that the user is staying in the advantageous section. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to clearly understand whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section from the lighting state of the status indicator 147b. May be lost. In this regard, according to the present control, it is possible to receive a premium privilege when the vehicle is not in the advantageous section. Therefore, even if it is determined from the lighting state of the status display 147b that the vehicle is in the normal section, the operation of the game is continued. The reduction can be suppressed.

  In this control, when “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section, only a small privilege based on the common process is given, and the player may feel a loss. Therefore, the main control board 71 basically uses a common symbol combination as an active line when “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination and when “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination. The stop control is performed so as to be displayed along. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), when the stop operation is performed in the “first operation mode”, the main control board 71 determines that “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination. Even if there is, even if “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that a common symbol combination is displayed along the activated line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the “second operation mode”, the main control board 71 sets “F_BB2 + special combination” even when “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination. A combination of symbols different from the case of being determined as an internal winning combination (for example, a combination of a lost symbol when winning “F_BB2”, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the “special combination” when winning “F_BB2 + special combination”) is valid. Stop control is performed so as to be displayed along the line.

  At this time, the "first operation mode" in which a common combination of symbols is displayed is such that the stop operation timing is such that a small combination in which a non-special combination other than the "special combination" occurs (not the pull-in 1) is omitted. It is preferable that there is no timing (so-called “small win collection batting method”). More preferably, in the “second operation mode” in which a combination of individual symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is a timing at which a small combination other than the “special combination” occurs in which a small combination occurs. More preferably, the number of medals paid out when a combination of symbols corresponding to “special combination” is displayed along the activated line is a symbol corresponding to a small combination other than “special combination” in which a drop-out occurs. Is smaller than the number of medals paid out when the combination is displayed along the activated line.

  By doing in this way, as long as the game is played in the “first operation mode (small win collection batting method)”, whether “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination from the combination of displayed symbols, Since it is not possible to determine whether “F_BB2 + special combination” has been determined as the internal winning combination, no loss is felt. Although the example shown in FIG. 163 has the role configuration of “F_BB2” and “F_BB2 + special role”, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in this control, it is only necessary that the type of the winning combination overlapping with the bonus combination is different while the bonus combination (BB2) is common.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1. Therefore, the main control board 71 includes a fluctuation control unit, an internal winning combination determination unit, and a stop. Functions as control means.

  In addition, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous section, the main control board 71 executes a common process of giving a common privilege regardless of the determined type of the bonus combination. When “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, the function functions as a common processing unit and an individual processing unit to provide a premium privilege.

[Modification]
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachislo 1 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Separate control related to shift lottery of advantageous section>
First, with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167, a modified example regarding the shift lottery of the advantageous section will be described. FIG. 164 (A) shows, for each gaming state in the normal section, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section (the advantage section transition probability (= P (X))). Note that the reference item “when the accessory is not activated” in FIG. 164 is a state where the accessory (a first-class special accessory or the like) is not activated. The “general medium when the accessory is not operated (hereinafter,“ general medium ”)” is a state where the accessory is not operating and a state where the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination. The “inside when the role is not activated (hereinafter“ inside during ”)” is a state in which the role is not activated and the bonus role is determined as the internal winning combination (between flags). It is. Further, "BB general middle when the accessory is not operating (hereinafter," BB general middle ")" is a state in which the bonus is in the bonus state but the accessory is not operating. Further, the reference item “when the accessory is activated” is a state in which the accessory is activated. Further, "during RB operation at the time of operating the accessory (hereinafter," during RB operation ")" is a state in which the first-class special accessory (RB) among the accessories is operating. Further, "during CB operation at the time of operating the accessory (hereinafter," during CB operation ")" is a state in which the second type special accessory (CB) among the accessories is operating.

  In the pachislot 1, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery transition to the advantageous section, but it is necessary to ensure that the probability of transition to the advantageous section is uniform. Therefore, when the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination (excluding the replay) varies depending on the gaming state, this transfer lottery cannot be performed except for “general medium”. The principle pattern in FIG. 164 (A) shows a pattern in which the advantage section transition probability varies depending on the gaming state. In such a principle pattern, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 can perform the lottery transition to the advantageous section only in “general medium”, and cannot perform it in other cases. .

  Here, since it is only necessary to ensure that the advantageous section transition probabilities are uniform, when the “general medium” and the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination are common, the uniformity is ensured. Because of this, the main control board 71 can exceptionally perform a lottery transition to an advantageous section.

  As an example, the exceptional pattern 1 in the figure is a lottery value used for internal lottery relating to a small combination (a winning combination with a payout) and a replay (hereinafter referred to as “advantage section lottery target combination”) in which the winning probability does not change even when the RT state changes. Indicates that the “general medium”, “internal medium”, and “BB general medium” are common (in other words, the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common). In the case of this exceptional pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the same manner as “internal” and “BB in general” as in “general in”. it can.

  Exceptional pattern 2 in the same figure indicates a case where the winning probability of the advantage section lottery target combination is also common between “under RB operation”, “under general”, “inside internal”, and “under BB general”. In the case of the exceptional pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 also selects “inside inside”, “under BB in general”, and “under RB operation” in the same manner as in “in general” by lottery. It can be performed.

  Exception pattern 3 in the same drawing shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is the same as “during CB operation”, “during general”, “during internal”, “during BB general”, and “during RB operation”. In the case of this exceptional pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 has the same advantages as “internal”, “BB in general”, “RB in operation”, “CB in operation” as well as “general in”. A shift lottery to a section can be performed.

  In addition, “inside inside”, “during RB operation”, “during BB general”, and “during CB operation” are provided according to the specification of the pachislot, and may not be partially provided depending on the specification of the pachislot. As an example, a CB (second special special agent) is not mounted, and a CB (second special special agent) is mounted (MB (second special special device) without BB (continuous actuation device related to first special special agent)). (Including a continuous differential device related to an accessory)), but with a BB or RB mounted, but with "BB in general" or "RB active", a lottery transition to the advantageous section is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section during the “CB operation” is performed in the pachislot, the main control board 71 sets “general medium” and “internal medium” as shown in the exception pattern 4 in FIG. 164 (B). The transition lottery to the advantageous section can be performed in the “CB operation”.

  In addition, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to an advantageous section based on a combination having a setting difference (setting unreliable combination) as well as a combination having a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination (setting unreliable combination). It may be performed. Further, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery transition to the advantageous section with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, or may perform the random determination according to the set value.

  Here, in FIG. 165, the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on both the setting non-competence and the set difference combination, and the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the setting value. It is an example of a shift lottery table for transition to an advantageous section suitably used in the case.

  In principle, the main control board 71 performs the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section only during “general medium” of “when the accessory is not operating”. As an exception, even in a state other than "general medium", it is possible to ensure that the result of the lottery transition to the advantageous section is uniform only when using the same configuration as "general medium" Transfer lottery can be performed. For example, in the example shown in the drawing, the internal winning probabilities of “Replay 1”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Push order bell 1” to “Push order bell 6” are “BB in general” and “RB in operation”. If it is also the same as “general medium”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section may be performed in the same manner as “general medium”. In the case where the replay is not won in the bonus state such as “BB in general” or “RB in operation”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section at the time of the replay in “general” is not performed (lottery processing). Even if it is excluded from its own target or a lottery value is set to "0" for performing the lottery process, uniformity can be ensured.

  In the figure, “Replay 1” is a replaying combination in which the winning probability does not change even when the RT state changes, and “Replay 2” is a replaying combination in which the winning probability changes when the RT state changes. As shown in (Note 1), if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed based on “Replay 2”, the advantage section transition probability differs depending on the RT state, and uniformity cannot be ensured. No. 71 does not perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section even when the “Replay 2” is won. On the other hand, since uniformity can be secured for “Replay 1”, the main control board 71 can perform a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section when “Replay 1” is won. Note that even in a replay having a different winning probability in the RT state or the like, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section only during the replay probability non-variable state (RT0) in which the RT state is inactive. Good.

  In the same drawing, "Cherry" may be determined as an internal winning combination by itself, or "Cherry (No. 3)", or may be determined as an internal winning combination with BB1 "BB1 + Cherry (No. 11)". ) ". In this case, since both of the reference lotteries are “cherry”, as shown in (Note 2), the main control board 71 uses the lottery value of the transfer lottery linked to “cherry” to enter the advantageous section. Perform a transfer lottery.

  On the other hand, regarding watermelons, the reference lots for “watermelon 1 (No. 4)” and “BB2 + watermelon 2 (No. 12)” are different between “watermelon 1” and “watermelon 2”. Therefore, as shown in (Note 3), the main control board 71 can perform the shift lottery to the advantageous section by using different lottery values in each case.

  The bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination by itself such as “RB (No. 13)” is “internal”, “BB in general”, “RB active”, “CB active”, and the internal winning combination. Varies from “general medium”. Therefore, as shown in (Note 4), the main control board 71 does not carry out the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section even when the “RB” determined as the internal winning combination by itself is won.

  Subsequently, FIG. 166 is suitably used when performing the transfer lottery to the advantageous section based on both the setting unrestricted combination and the set difference combination, and performing the transfer lottery to the advantageous section with different probabilities depending on the set value. It is an example of a shift lottery table for shifting to an advantageous section to be performed.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 may perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section with different probabilities depending on the set value. The method of providing the setting difference in the shift lottery to the advantageous section is arbitrary. For example, the winning probability of the shift lottery to the advantageous section may be made different for all set values, such as “Replay 1”. Also, some of the set values, such as “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”, may be common. Further, with respect to a combination having a different probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, such as “Cherry”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section may be performed with a different probability according to the set value. Further, like “watermelon 2”, the winning probability of the shift lottery to the advantageous section may be common for all the set values. In addition, in “Push order bell 1” to “Push order bell 6”, a winning probability of a lottery transition to an advantageous section in “Push order bell 1” to a winning probability of a shift lottery to an advantageous section in “Push order bell 6” Is common, but the winning probability may be varied depending on the type of the “push order bell”.

  Subsequently, FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a method of calculating the accessory ratio in the present modification. FIG. 167 (A) shows a method of calculating the accessory ratio in a model having no instruction function (AT) for notifying (instructing) a mode of an advantageous stop operation to the player. In the case of such a model, the main control board 71 is paid out while any of the medals is operating (during bonus operation) with respect to the total number of medals paid out (= X + Y) in all gaming states. The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as an accessory ratio.

  FIG. 167 (B) shows a first calculation method of the ratio of the accessory in the model having the instruction function, and FIG. 167 (C) shows a second calculation method of the ratio of the accessory in the model having the instruction function. is there. In the case of having the instruction function, the medals paid out to the player include (X) medals paid out during the bonus operation, (Y) medals paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation, and (Z) bonus. Medals can be paid out in a state where the instruction function is not activated.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the first calculation method, the main control board 71 is paid out during the bonus operation for the total number of medals paid out (= X + Y + Z) in all game states. The ratio of the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the accessory ratio. As shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the second calculation method, the main control board 71 pays out the total number of medals paid out in all the game states (= X + Y + Z) during the bonus operation. The ratio of the sum (= X + Y) of the total number of medals paid out and the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the operation of the bonus is calculated as the accessory ratio.

  In a model having an instruction function, the accessory ratio may be calculated using the first calculation method, or the accessory ratio may be calculated using the second calculation method. In addition, by using the second calculation method, not only the goto that operates the bonus improperly but also the goto act of improperly operating the instruction function can be easily detected and the security can be improved. it can. It should be noted that the first calculation method and the second calculation method may be switched manually or automatically after a lapse of time or the like so that they can be confirmed.

  Further, the method of calculating the accessory ratio may be made different depending on the method of the lottery transition to the advantageous section. For example, as shown in FIG. 165, when the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section is the same probability regardless of the set value as shown in FIG. 165, the main control board 71 calculates the accessory ratio by the first calculation method. , May be displayed on the ratio display 422. In addition, for example, when the main control board 71 performs the shift lottery to the advantageous section with different probabilities according to the set values as shown in FIG. 166, the main control board 71 determines the ratio of the accessory by the first calculation method and the second calculation method. May be calculated, and both may be displayed on the ratio display 422.

  If there are too many items to be displayed on the ratio display 422, the calculation load on the main (main control board 71) side becomes large. The specific section ratio (advantageous section ratio (= value indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section to the total number of games)) may not be displayed.

  Further, the method of calculating the medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the operation of the bonus (Y) is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 may add the number of medals actually paid out to the payout number counter for calculation so as not to deviate from the actual payout number. In this case, when the batting order (pushing order) is missed as a result of a stop operation different from the instruction (navi), the value of the payout number counter is maintained or the value is changed by processing +0 sheets. do not do. On the other hand, when an instruction (navigation) is performed, the main control board 71 determines that medals according to the batting order have been paid out and calculates medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function. Good. In this case, when the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 may update the value of the payout number counter by the number of medals corresponding to the batting order. This makes it possible to grasp the behavior of the gaming machine that is not affected by accidental operation mistakes by the player.

  The medal for calculating the number of payouts in (Y) may be a medal paid out while the instruction function is operating, or may be a medal paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function. You may. Here, in the pachislot, during the ART (during the operation of the instruction function), a role (for example, a pushing order bell (a batting order bell)) in which the result of the game (for example, the number of payout medals) differs depending on the mode of the stop operation is internally won. When the role is determined, the player is notified of an advantageous mode of the stop operation, while a role having a different game result regardless of the mode of the stop operation (for example, a so-called rare role such as watermelon or cherry) is internally provided. When the winning combination is determined, there is no need to notify the player, and the player is not notified of the mode of the stop operation.

When calculating the payout number of (Y) from the former (medals paid out while the instruction function is operating), the main control board 71 pays out during the ART (during the operation of the instruction function) regardless of the presence or absence of the notification. The payout number of (Y) is calculated using all the medals (including medals paid out for the rare combination). On the other hand, when calculating the number of payouts (Y) from the latter (medals paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function), the main control board 71 determines that the notification is being performed during the ART (operation of the instruction function). Only the medals paid out in (medium) are used to calculate the number of payouts of (Y), and medals paid out without notification are used to calculate the number of payouts of (Z).
In the latter case, the main control board 71 may perform the following control.

  As described above, during the operation of the instruction function, when the combination in which different combinations of symbols are displayed according to the mode of the stop operation is determined as the internal winning combination, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. I do. For example, a predetermined combination of symbols (bell-bell-bell) is displayed when the push order is correct, and a specific symbol combination (bell spilled eyes) is incorrect when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed (push order bell (strike order bell)), but depending on the pachislot, a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation (retraction 1). (Common bell) may be provided. Such a “common bell” does not need to notify the player of the mode of the stop operation. However, when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the winning combination is “push order bell”. The main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 can determine whether the common bell is an internal winning combination by determining whether the common bell is an internal winning combination. It is also possible to inform the pressing order in a staging manner.

  Here, the notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the “common bell” is a staging effect, and does not affect the result of the game (the number of medals paid out). Therefore, when calculating the number of payouts of (Y) from the latter, it is not necessary to include the number of medals paid out by the “common bell” in the number of payouts of (Y). May be included in the number of medals paid out in (Y), or may not be included.

  When the number of medals paid out by the “common bell” is included in the number of payouts in (Y), a counter for counting the number of payouts when the instruction function is activated (lighting of the notification lamp 147a) is uniformly added. Since the processing can be performed uniformly, the program capacity on the main (main control board 71) side can be reduced.

  In addition, the notification of the pressing order at the time of the “common bell” winning can be performed by the main control board 71 using the notification lamp 147a, but can also be performed by the sub-control board 72 using the display unit 100. This can be performed on both the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Here, when only the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order at the time of the “common bell” winning, and the main control board 71 does not, it is determined that the instruction function is not activated and the payout is performed by the “common bell”. The number of paid medals may not be included in the payout number of (Y).

  In addition, when the accessory ratio is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 60%) close to a predetermined value (70%), the main control board 71 instructs at the time of winning a winning combination such as “common bell”. If the activation of the function (lighting of the notification lamp 147a) is reduced or the activation is not performed, and the ratio of the accessory is less than a predetermined threshold (for example, less than 60%), the pull-in 1 is performed. The activation frequency of the instruction function may be changed at the time of winning the role of the pull-in 1 in accordance with the ratio of the bonuses, such that the activation of the instruction function is allowed when the winning combination is won.

<Another configuration example of the advantageous section>
In the embodiments and the specification examples so far, the concept that the advantageous section is only one advantageous section is premised, and a state in which the instruction of the batting order (navigation) is likely to occur and a state in which the instruction is unlikely to occur are devised. The invention has been described which enhances the interest of the game while increasing the degree of freedom of the ball design. From here, it is conceivable that the concept of the advantageous section is further subdivided, thereby organizing the game characteristics and increasing the development efficiency. In the following, as an example, as shown in FIG. 168, a description will be given of a proposal to define a section in which payouts are unlikely to increase as an “effect section” and a section in which payouts are likely to increase generally as an “increase section”, as shown in FIG. 168. .

First, each section is defined as follows.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the generation of an instruction is arbitrary), and a section in which the rate of transition to the effect section or the increase section is set at one rate.
Production section: A section where the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the generation of an instruction is arbitrary), and the transition ratio to another production section or increase section is common to the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function) Section) is different. It is included in the advantageous section. In the above description, “usual advantage” may be defined as a playability in which the “normal advantage” is defined as an effect section as in the present invention.
Increase section: A section in which the number of game medals is increased (the payout rate does not always exceed 1). Unlike the normal section and the production section, an instruction is given for each state of the increase section predetermined in the increase section. A section where processing related to functions can be performed freely. It is included in the advantageous section.
On the basis of this definition, the advantageous section lamp may be turned on when the effect section or the increase section is won, and when the payout rate becomes greater than 1, and turned off when the initialization is performed. . By doing so, a situation in which the medal does not increase even though the advantageous section lamp is lit does not occur. Therefore, a gaming machine having a specification that is easy for the player to understand by at least increasing the medal is provided.
In addition, when terminating the increase section, the parameters relating to the performance of the instruction function are initialized, and by shifting to the normal section, fairness between players can be ensured. Then, as in the case of winning in the advantageous section continuation lottery at the end of "ART" described above, the game state shifts to the production section after the increase section, and the number of balls is reduced in the gaming state in which the "ART" series is expected. Even in such a case, the specification may be such that the advantageous section lamp is maintained in the lighting state and the player does not stop the game in a state where the “hit” may be continuous.

The fact that the transfer ratio (winning probability) to another effect section or the increase section is the same and the transfer destination (contents of the process related to the instruction function) is different indicates, for example, the following game specifications.
1: Advantageous section shift lottery in normal section Winning probability of advantageous section shift lottery: 1/100
Destination distribution Direction section (CZ) 75% Increase section (ART) 25%
Transition occurrence probability Direction section (CZ) about 1/133 Increase section (ART) about 1/400
1: Advantageous section shift lottery in effect section (CZ) Winning probability of advantageous section shift lottery: 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the shift rate is the same.
Transition destination Direction section (upper CZ) 10% Increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) about 1/1000 Increase section (ART) about 1/111
As described above, by changing the distribution of the transfer destination, the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery is referred to the same value, and the advantageous section is shifted to the increasing section in which the number of medals increases, such as “ART”. Like "normal advantage" and "SCZ", increase in medals is not so much expected, but it is possible to provide a wider range of distribution of whether or not to be in the ART winning chance state, thus simplifying the overall processing flow. In addition, various game state transition variations can be created.
If the production section is too long, the player will be forced to play the game excessively in a state where an increase in medals cannot be expected, and the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, a certain number of games may be set as the upper limit. The number of games that function as an index that does not excessively restrict the player, such as when the number of consumed medals reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of hitting bells has reached a predetermined number (for example, eight). The end condition of the effect section may be referred to by referring to parameters other than the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advantage section shift lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination having no setting difference. However, in the present modification, the advantage section shifting lottery is determined based on the determination of the internal winning combination having the setting difference. It is supposed to do. Even in this case, by referring to the lottery table common to all the settings where there is no setting difference in the advantageous section-related lottery table itself, the difference in the payout rate or the ART occurrence rate is determined based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination. To make a difference. This makes it possible to create a difference in the payout rate and a difference in the ART occurrence rate without increasing the capacity of the lottery table relating to the advantageous section.

If the “effect section” is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to light the advantageous section lamp because the advantageous section, the effect section, and a state in which the number of game medals can be expected due to the bonus operation are expected. During the bonus operation, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section lamp without performing the digestion work. In this case, in the case of temporarily shifting to a production section (CZ or the like) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp is turned off when the bonus ends. When shifting to an increase section (ART or the like) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp may be kept lit as it is.
During the so-called ART preparation for shifting the RT to the high RT, it is definitely determined that the right to shift to the ART, which is very advantageous for the player, has already been granted, although the payout rate is not necessarily in a state of more than one. By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game is inadvertently stopped while leaving the right of the ART.

In addition, the lottery and determination related to the advantageous section may be performed based on not only the internal winning combination but also a display appearance (symbol combination, winning result, result display) on the activated line of the main reel. For example, there is an internal winning combination A that can win either one of the three-segment combination or the one-segment combination according to the timing of eye-pressing. In this case, when the three-part winning combination is won, no advantageous section-related lottery is performed, or when the one-part winning combination is won. Is performed under more advantageous conditions than in the case where the three-part role is won, and the batting method of intentionally avoiding the three-part role winning by pushing the player is recommended, so that the base at the normal time is improved. For a player who has selected a low hitting style, it is possible to make a specification such that the ART is easy to win.
By adopting such a specification, instead of pushing the three-part role at normal times and not reducing the medal much, enjoy the game for a long time with the game property that it is difficult to win the ART, or push the one-part role at normal times Then, instead of the speed at which the medals decrease, the player can arbitrarily select whether to enjoy the short-time playability, which is easy to win the ART, thereby expanding the range of playability.
Note that the above is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the condition of winning a small number of payouts such as a single role, but may be an RT transition to a RT with a lower degree of advantage by pushing (a small-size spillover or a fall replay). ) May be displayed, or when a small combination is missed, the advantageous section-related lottery may be performed under better conditions than when an advantageous display result is derived.
To summarize this idea, when a predetermined internal winning combination having a different display result according to the stop operation mode is determined, it is most advantageous with respect to the benefit of the winning determination in the award of the game value (medal) or the transition of the RT or the operation of the bonus. The predetermined advantageous section-related lottery is performed based on the display result that is not derived, or the lottery content of the advantageous section-related lottery is more advantageous than the case where the most advantageous display result is derived with respect to the benefit from the cost determination. It can be expressed that what is done in.

The internal winning combination is determined by overlapping so that the medals are substantially reduced during a part of the bonus operation, so that the number of bonuses per game during the ART is increased to about three for the state where the bonus is reduced. During the operation of the bonus or the bonus operation, only the non-incremental increase is established and the bonus of zero increase is obtained, so that the bonus is used in the gaming machine type test, and the speed of the increasing speed during the ART is canceled and adapted. Specifications are also conceivable. In addition, as an advantageous section-related lottery is performed inside the bonus, the normal section, the production section, and the advantageous section also stay at the RT during the bonus, and by increasing the small role probability, the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win can be contained. Such specifications may be adopted in accordance with the modified example to provide a gaming machine having an appropriate payout speed with a high demand from a player or a game arcade.
In addition, since some players may feel that the gambling is high when the payout speed is high, the number of limiter games should be shortened from 1500 games to 1200 games to appropriately suppress gambling and prevent so-called immersion. You may consider from a viewpoint.
In addition, the number of games serving as the condition for activating the limiter may start counting from the start of an advantageous section including an effect section, or may start counting from the start of an increasing section. Also, of the games of the day, starting from the difference number at the time of the largest minus point as seen from the customer's side, when the number of medals increases by 3000, the limiter is activated, and the difference other than the advantageous section is used. With reference to the situation such as the number of games, gambling may be suppressed by a limiter corresponding to an element other than the number of games.

  As an example in which the transfer ratio (winning probability) to another effect section or the increase section is the same and the transfer destination (contents of the process related to the instruction function) is different, the game specification shown in FIG. 169 may be used.

  Specifically, FIG. 169 (A) shows an example of a shift lottery table used for shift lottery to an advantageous section. As shown in the figure, in the transfer lottery table, information on a lottery value regarding a lottery result is defined for each reference item (internal winning combination). Here, the lottery result specifies a process to be performed at the time of winning (winning process). As shown in FIG. 169 (B), the winning process differs depending on the staying state when the winning process is determined. For example, even if “winning process 1” is determined, When the staying state is the “normal section”, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the effect section A, and when the staying state is the “effect section A”, The control board 71 performs a transition from the effect section A to the effect section B. By doing so, it is possible to realize control in which the transfer ratio (winning probability) is the same and the transfer destination (contents of the processing related to the instruction function) is different, and as a result, uniformity of the advantageous section transfer probability is ensured. , Realizing fair playability and reducing the data capacity.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may freely perform a lottery or the like with reference to a predetermined table or the like during the “increase section”. For example, a plurality of states (additional low accuracy, high accuracy, super high accuracy, specialization zone) and the like can be provided in the “increase section”, and additional lottery can be performed according to the current state.

<Another example of lighting timing of advantageous section lamp>
Then, referring to FIG. 170, the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) in the pachislot 1 having the "effect section" and the "increase section" as the advantageous sections, in particular, shifts to the "increase section". The relationship between the notification effect for notifying that the determination has been made and the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp will be described. In the pachislo 1 having the “effect section” and the “increase section”, the main control board 71 can turn on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of transition to the “increase section”, not at the timing of transition to the advantageous section. In the pachislot 1, the sub-control board 72 can execute an effect (a precursor effect) as to whether or not it is possible to shift to the “increase section” during the “effect section”. As described below, in the present control, when it is determined to shift to the “increase section”, the sub-control board 72 performs the precursor effect during the “render section”, and as the result of the precursor effect, “the increase section”. Is performed, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp when a transition is made from the “production section” to the “increase section”. In other words, in the present control, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous zone lamp after the notification of the result of the precursor by the sub control board 72.

  First, FIG. 170 (A) is a first pattern showing a relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of notifying the result of the precursor (timing of the notification effect). In the drawing, in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the main control board 71 determines to shift to the “increase section” after shifting to the “staging section”. With this determination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the “effect section” of the advantageous section from the timing when the shift to the “increase section” is won, but the advantageous section lamp has not been turned on yet. In order to use the “production section” as a precursor to the “increase section”, the sub-control board 72 performs, via the display unit 100, a precursor effect to encourage the transition to the “increase section” during the “production section”. Then, near the end of the precursor, the sub-control board 72 executes, via the display unit 100, a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “increase section”. In the case of the example shown in the drawing, since it is determined to shift to the “increase section” in the shift lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the sub control board 72 moves to the “increase section” in the notification effect. Notifies that a decision has been made to migrate. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the “staging section” to the “increase section”, and turns on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of shifting to the “increase section”.

  Next, FIG. 170B is a second pattern illustrating a relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of the notification effect. In the drawing, in the lottery transition to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the main control board 71 determines that the advantageous section is ended without shifting to the “increase section” after shifting to the “staging section”. . With this determination, the main control board 71 has shifted the gaming state to the “effect section” of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section lamp has not been turned on yet. The main control board 71 also performs the shift lottery during the “effect section”, and in the example shown in the figure, the shift to the “increase section” is determined as a result of the shift lottery during the “effect section”. Similarly to FIG. 170 (A), the sub-control board 72 performs, via the display unit 100, an indication effect that encourages the transition to the “increase section” during the “effect section”. Then, near the end of the precursor, the sub-control board 72 executes, via the display unit 100, a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “increase section”. In the example shown in the drawing, although the transition to the “increased section” is not determined in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, “increase” is performed in the subsequent transition lottery performed during the “production section”. Since the transition to the “section” has been determined, the sub control board 72 notifies that the decision to shift to the “increase section” has been made in the notification effect. After that, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the “staging section” to the “increase section”, and turns on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of shifting to the “increase section”.

  In this way, by performing the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp after the notification effect, according to the present control, at the time of performing the indication effect or the notification effect in the “effect section”, the player moves to the “increase section”. There is no way to know whether or not the player has won the transition, and the interest in the effect is not lost.

  Next, FIG. 170 (C) is another example of the lottery result (winning process) of the shift lottery to the advantageous section. As shown in the drawing, when the “winning process 1” is determined in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the “production section”, and After the elapse of 15 games in, the advantageous section ends, and the processing shifts to the normal section. When the main control board 71 determines “winning process 2” in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the “effect section”, and 15 games have elapsed in the “effect section”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to ART (“increase section”) in which the initial game number is set to 50 games.

  In this way, the length of the “effect section (precursor)” in the transition lottery during the normal section depends on whether the transition to the “increase section (ART)” has been won or not. Can be the same. From the viewpoint of the player, since the subsequent development cannot be predicted during the “staging section (a precursor)”, the player plays the game without losing interest to the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the main control board 71 determines that the “staging section” of the advantageous sections is a pushing order navigation when the winning combination is won, that is, a pushing order navigation that has an advantage of increasing the number of balls due to the occurrence of the navigation even once. It may be possible to end without generating. Because the `` production section '' is a section where the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player does not feel that there is no benefit even though it is lit, and there is no risk of discouraging the player. is there. In addition, the main control board 71 may notify the pressing order in the game in which the pressing order is won during the “effect section”, thereby allowing a slight increase in the number of balls or a reduction in the consumption of medals. It is desirable that the notification frequency of the pressing order in the game in which the pressing order is won is relatively low as compared with the “increase section” so that the number of payouts is not increased so much. This is because an increase in the number of medals during the “production section” may lead to a relative decrease in payouts to be paid out in the “increase section” in balance adjustment of payouts.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
In order to realize the control specific to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and sub-control boards (sub-control circuit 101, sub-CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. Has functions.

  The pachislot 1 includes a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R on which a plurality of symbols are drawn, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of stopping the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 can determine the transition of the gaming state, and also sets the gaming state to at least a normal section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous than the normal section and has an “effect section” and an “increase section”. Since control is possible, the main control board 71 functions as a transition determining unit and a state control unit.

  Further, when the gaming state is “increased section”, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp that can notify that the gaming state is “increased section”. Functions as notification means.

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 can control an effect via the display unit 100 and execute an information effect (specific effect) for notifying that the game state is determined to shift to the “increase section”. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect control unit and a notification effect execution unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player, and the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to perform the stop operation advantageous to the player. In order to notify the mode, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub-control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit.

<Another example of the advantageous section limiter (number limiter)>
Next, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. The limiter using the number of games consumed during the advantageous section (hereinafter, “game number limiter”) has been described as the limiter of the advantageous section. However, the type of the limiter of the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. Note that a limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a “number limiter”.

  FIG. 171 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis represents the difference number (= payout number−input number), which is also called a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number are values as seen from the player, and when the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), the plus and minus are opposite. In the case of, it becomes minus. The abscissa represents the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been consumed from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter forcibly terminates the advantageous section when a positive difference number of 2400 is obtained, starting from the point at which the number of medals decreases so that the player does not acquire an extremely large number of medals at once. It is to let.

  In the figure, about 100 medals have been reduced after the start of the advantageous section. This is because the number of medals has decreased during the preparation of ART or a precursor state. Then, the number of medals continues to increase from the point when the number of −100 has been reached from the start of the advantageous section, and has finally increased to about +2300. At this point, at least 2400 medals are at hand from the player's point of view. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter and forcibly ends the advantageous section. Thereby, gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

  The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 terminates the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In the present description, the number of games limiter is set to 1500 games and the number of sheets limiter is set to 2400. However, this is an example, and a smaller or larger value is adopted according to the game specification to improve gambling. May be controlled.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, the inclination value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including an increase due to the bonus operation), and the conditions for activating the game number limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C which is a condition for activating the number limiter will be described.
Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is “3”, and the number of games B, which is the condition for activating the game number limiter, is “100 games”.

  In the first specification, a specification (e.g., A (3) × B (100 games) = C (300)) having a relationship of inclination value A × game number B of game number limiter = difference number C of number limiter is given. Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

  In the second specification, a specification (eg, A (3) × B (100 games) <C (400)) in which the inclination value A × the game number B of the game number limiter <the difference number C of the number limiter is satisfied. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows considering the case where the limiter is activated.

  If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are consumed, the number limiter is activated. If 100 games are consumed before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games will be reduced. The limiter is activated. If the bonus is drawn more than expected, or if the player who pushes the net with more nets is drawn much more than expected, the number limiter will be activated. It is more likely that the limiter will be activated. Since the inclination value is “3”, as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number-of-games limiter that reaches 100G is more easily activated than the number-of-numbers limiter, and the player's awareness is higher than the difference number. You will lean to numbers.

  That is, since the inclination value is “3”, 400 medals are paid out in 133.3 games on average, and it is highly likely that the game number limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the easiness of activation is: game number limiter> number limiter. If you do not want to worry too much about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference number, it is good to adopt such a specification. For example, in the case of a type in which an end condition (not a limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 pieces per set is managed by a difference number, such a limiter specification makes it possible to suppress the frequency of activation of the limiter, and The frequency at which the advantageous section is terminated by the limiter can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In the third specification, a specification (eg, A (3) × B (100 games)> C (200)) having a relationship of inclination value A × game number B of the game number limiter> the difference number C of the number limiter is given. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows considering the case where the limiter is activated.

  If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are consumed, the number limiter is activated. If 100 games are consumed before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be reduced. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is “3”, 200 medals are paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number reaches the number limiter before 100 games are consumed. Therefore, the easiness of activation is: game number limiter <number of sheets limiter. If you do not want to worry too much about the activation of the game number limiter due to the game number digestion, such a specification may be used. For example, with respect to a specification in which the number of games continues, which is relatively low, such as a net increase of 0.1 to 1 per game, and such a specification, it is possible to suppress the activation frequency of the limiter. Thus, the frequency at which the advantageous section is terminated can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  Regardless of the specification, the rate at which the advantageous section ends is determined by the conditions for ending the advantageous section other than the limiter (eg, the number of ART games or the number of sets becomes zero) rather than the rate of ending by reaching the limiter. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to be able to use the advantageous section is eliminated by activating the limiter as a payout design with a high value.

  Next, a description will be given of a playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end effects using the display unit 100 when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each of the effects is dedicated, it will lead to a motivation to watch each effect once. In addition, the sub-control board 72 may vary the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of the limiter. For example, when the number limiter is used, the accuracy of the setting suggestion may be higher than that when the game number limiter is activated (the difference between the coefficients for each setting is large, or an effect in which a specific setting is fixed is easily performed). When specific information such as setting suggestion is obtained or a special effect is seen, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is terminated by the limiter. In addition, the effect distribution at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-described limiter specification. For example, it is assumed that the sub-control board 72 makes it easier for the player to determine an effect that is preferable (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is higher) when a limiter that is not easily activated is activated than a limiter that is easily activated in terms of specifications. Is also good.

(Ending effect according to the type of limiter)
In addition, the sub-control board 72 performs the ending effect 1 when the activation of the number limiter is rich, and the ending effect 2 when the activation of the game number limiter is rich. Although there is no large difference in the occurrence or ratio, if at least one of the occurrences becomes rich, an ending effect 3 (an effect having a branch to the ending effect 1 or 2 may be performed), At the end of the advantageous section, an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) may be provided before the limiter is activated so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity due to sudden termination. It should be noted that, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number of sheets, the “situation in which the activation of the number of sheets limiter is rich” means that the difference calculated from the remaining number of sheets and the remaining ART period is used. The sum of the number (for example, in the case of the ART for managing the number of games, “the number of remaining games × inclination value”) is equal to a threshold value (for example, a difference number triggered by the number limiter or a value slightly smaller than the difference number). For example, when the ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number thus far and the remaining number has reached a threshold value. Further, “a situation in which the activation of the number-of-games limiter is rich” means that, for example, when ART is managed based on information other than the number of games, it is calculated from the number of games that have elapsed so far and the remaining ART period. (For example, in the case of the ART of difference number management, “the remaining difference number / inclination value”) is smaller than the threshold (eg, the number of games for which the game number limiter is activated, or slightly smaller than the number of games). (For example, when ART is managed based on the number of games) when the sum of the number of games that have elapsed so far and the number of remaining games has reached a threshold value.

(Information or suggestion of the type of activated limiter on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays the type of the activated limiter or the effect (corresponding to the type of the ending effect) corresponding to the type of the limiter on the game history screen which can be browsed by the player on the menu screen. Is also good. In this case, since a large number of payouts have been acquired in the first place, it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to play at a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
In addition, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter has been activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from a different pin of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of the original payout specification, the game number limiter is mainly activated, and the number limiter is not frequently activated.If the number limiter is activated frequently, if there is any goto action, The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

  When the condition for activating the number limiter and the condition for activating the game number limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output either one of the predetermined signals or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When the signals are output in order, it is preferable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the next signal output so that the signal can be reliably received. When the condition for activating the number limiter and the condition for activating the game number limiter are satisfied in the same game, only one of the limit processes is performed, and the other process is not performed. In this case, unnecessary processing may not be generated. In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal corresponding to the type of limiter performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
If there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) or the number of pins of the terminal plate for external signal output, the external signal may be varied as described above. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter.)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and at the end by the limiter, so that the completion of the advantageous section may be detected by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further reduced.

(External signal output example when limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
When the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start outputting the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of limiters, the limiter function was not defective, but the bonus was activated near the arrival of the number limiter, and the ball was picked up by chance. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when limiter is activated during bonus operation (at the end of bonus))
If the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start outputting the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the gaming state in which the number of payouts substantially increases.

(Direction when a player misses a small role in a game that may trigger the number limiter)
For example, in a three-piece game in which the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated is six, a push order bell in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, and the push order of the correct answer is notified. First, when the player makes a mistake in the pressing order, the production at the time of starting the game may be started at the start of the game, assuming that the number limiter is activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game. In such a case, as a result of the wrong pressing order, the number limiter does not activate, but the sub-control board 72 performs the effect at the time of activation of the number limiter which has been started from the start of the game (for example, the activation of the number limiter is scheduled). Effect may be continued as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted when it is determined that the number limiter is not activated.

(Direction when the activated limiter is changed by the operation of the player)
Further, the type of the limiter that is activated due to an operation error of the player may be different. For example, in the situation where the number of remaining games until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of games remaining until the game number limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer in a 3-game game. This corresponds to the case where the order bell is won and the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. In such a case, if the player performs a stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the player does not follow the notification and misses the pressing order, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (Note that the number limiter may be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that when a plurality of limiter activation conditions are satisfied, the game number limiter is activated with priority.)
In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts an effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the pressing order bell is won, and sets any timing of the transition in which the non-activation of the number limiter is determined (first stop operation to all At the time of reel stop, at an arbitrary timing after the display of the symbol combination of missing or a small number of symbols is determined), the effect is switched to the effect at the time of activating the game number limiter, or the effect is not once corresponding to any limiter activation suggestion. It is preferable to perform a process of returning, so as to avoid inconsistency between the activated limiter and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, the end effect is delayed and the ending effect is extended due to the internal limiter being activated)
In the effects and controls performed in connection with the limit processing described above, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the timing of the effect generation corresponding to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing is set to the bonus end. By using the technique of delaying until the time or immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect to that time, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity of the player.

<Method of controlling the number of sheets limiter>
Next, a method of controlling the number-of-sheets limiter will be described with reference to FIG. In the number limiter, the point at which the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is defined as the lowest point (starting point), and a plus portion from the nearest lowest point is used as the difference number which is the trigger for activating the number limiter. . In the figure, an example is shown in which the game proceeds with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, and the increase and decrease of the medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number increases and reaches the number limiter.

  In the figure, since the point at which the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is “−9”, the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference number becomes “+2391” in the Nth game. ing. Note that the limiter counter has been reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of the bells having the correct answer in the order of pressing in the (N + 2) th game, although the difference number from the starting point exceeds “+2400”, the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. It's only temporary, no problem.

  Although FIG. 7 shows the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game, it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to win the gaming machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be won and used to indicate the acquired number to the player.

  The starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. Instead of having a starting point flag, the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter may be recognized as the lowest point by indicating that the value is 0, but whether the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has been started or not. For example, when the sub (sub-control board 72) is directed, the main (main control board) is produced by referring to a starting flag that can be determined only by ON / OFF determination without transmitting the value of the number counter to the sub-side. The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In this case, the sub-side receives the information on the number of inserted sheets and the number of sheets to be paid out transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub-side, and produces an effect as the state of the number counter (number notification until the number limiter is activated). Etc.).

  The lowest point (starting point) may be updated with either the same value as the nearest lowest point or a value smaller than the nearest lowest point. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes “−3” once and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference number becomes “−3” again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased thereafter, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is “−9” as the starting point in the number limiter.

  In FIG. 5, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the point before the end of the one game at the start of the advantageous section (the point where the absolute difference number is 0) is set. Set the first lowest point, activate the number limiter when the end of one game is the second lowest point, and when the number of minus 9 is reached is the third lowest point, and when the number of points increases by 2,400 from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. It may be. Also, in the same figure, the number counter is updated as 0 coins inserted and 0 coins paid out at the time of winning a replay. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number at the time of the replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, the payout number corresponding to the insertion number may be performed at the time of winning the replay, and the number counter may be updated to 3 in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the start operation of the next game is performed can be made to match the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter is changed to the actual increase / decrease number. , And is easily diverted to the display of the number of presentations.

  The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display unit 100 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or indicate the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Also, the sub control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated, and the first effect stage if the remaining number is 2000 or more until the number limiter is activated, the second effect stage if the remaining number is 1000 to 1999, and the remaining 999. If the number is equal to or less than the number, the effect stage such as the background may be indicated differently according to the number range up to the activation of the number limiter, as in the third effect stage.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal, and may display the value on a hall computer, a data display for game data browsing installed on an upper part of a pachislot, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintain the values of the starting point flag and the number of sheets counter without erasing them even during a power failure. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may delete the value of the starting point flag and the number of sheets counter when the setting is changed.

<Adjustment method for the number of sheets limiter>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 (C), an adjustment hitting method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification for forcibly terminating the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter is also conceivable. For example, when the pressing order is determined as the internal winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in the correct order, “9” medals are paid out, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect order, the medal is paid out. In the specification in which the payout of medals is “0”, three medals are required in one game, and therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the correct pushing order at the time of the winning of the pushing sequence, the number counter becomes “ If the stop operation is performed in the order of the incorrect answer at the time of winning the pressing combination, the number counter is set to “−3”. Therefore, for example, when the player has won three times in the pressing order, if he / she answers incorrectly twice in the pressing order and corrects the answer once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

  By adjusting the number-of-sheets limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus without leaving the ART immediately before the activation of the number-of-sheets limiter. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment hitting method has started from the Mth game, and the adjustment hitting method has been performed up to the Xth game to win the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals exceeding +2400 for which the number limiter is activated can be obtained.

  In the pachislot 1, a method of intentionally suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to deliberately defeat the notification of the pressing order is performed, and a method of hitting that can obtain the maximum benefit to the player (a stop order different from the hitting navigation). Operation). Such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display unit 100 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

  If there are a plurality of bonus combinations such as a net bonus of approximately 15 cards and a relatively high probability of winning (the 15 cards in the bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus of 120 cards, there is a number limiter. An effect that recommends the above-described adjustment hitting method may be performed on a line of a number of which the remaining difference number up to the arrival is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. In addition, as for small wins other than the push order, the payout number may not be an increase combination exceeding three and may be easily adjusted (for example, the payout number is three). In this way, by making the game characteristics that can improve the payout ratio by devising the way of hitting, the interest of the game is increased.

  In addition, in the case of emphasizing demerits such as such that the complexity of the game is avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase number, but by the net increase number when the game is played as instructed. You may do it. For example, in the case of a three-piece game, if a winning order bell in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 notifies the operating mode of the player and a winning on the condition that the pushing order of the correct answer is notified. Regardless of the result, a process of setting the number counter to +6 is performed. Such a specification may be a specification that blocks such an adjustment hitting method.

<Amusement of specification that shuts off adjustment batting>
Next, a description will be given of a playability that can be realized in a specification that blocks such an adjustment hitting method.

(No bonus)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is constituted only by the small combination and the replay without mounting the bonus combination, the player does not need the complicated batting method as described above, so that the game characteristics can be easily understood.
(With or without bonus)
Further, as another specification example for suppressing the above-mentioned batting method, the bonus may be a non-increase / decrease bonus in which only a minor role in which payout of the same number of coins is performed during operation is won, and the bonus is inserted during operation. A reduced bonus may be obtained in which only a small part in which payout of a smaller number of sheets is paid out is won. In this case, instead of increasing the medal, the bonus may be such that an advantageous process in the lottery of the advantageous section is performed at the time of the bonus operation or during the bonus operation. As long as a normal game is played, the winning of the bonus is hindered by the reel control, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(3 or less net increase during bonus operation)
Since there is no payout at the time of winning a bonus on the premise of a three-piece game, the difference number in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus is completed in one game of three pieces, the maximum number of winnings generated during the bonus operation is six or less. By doing so, the difference number from the time of the bonus operation to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the complicated hitting described above. The player does not have to perform the law.

<Playability of specification that allows adjustment batting>
Next, a description will be given of a playability that can be realized in a specification that allows such an adjustment hitting method.

(Removal of small roles during bonus operation or reduction of the number of acquired cards)
If the limiter is activated during the bonus operation in addition to the specifications that allow the above batting method, dare to reduce the number of acquired bonuses, end the bonus, and after the bonus, use the above batting method It may be most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while prolonging the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to make it possible to omit the small winning combination at the timing of pushing or the pushing order or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the hand with a small number of payouts is a number smaller than the number of thrown-in cards during the bonus operation. For example, a payout of 14 sheets when a specific point is pushed, and a payout of 15 sheets when the other points are pushed. A certain effect can be obtained even if a role of performing fine adjustment is provided.

(Normal roles other than the push sequence are only replays or roles with less than the number of cards inserted.)
For example, it is assumed that three cards are used during bonus non-operation. The pushing order bell is nine, but other roles such as a so-called watermelon, cherry, and a bell without the concept of the pushing order are configured as a replaying role or a role with three or less payouts. By doing so, even if another small part is drawn in a situation where the number limiter is activated with a net increase of the remaining few sheets, the difficulty level of the capture hitting method is reduced without the number limiter being activated and the game becomes easy to play.

(If a stop operation different from that of the navigator in the pushing order is performed, the player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of sheets (1 or 2 roles))
When a stop operation different from that of the navigation of the pushing order is performed, there is a specification in which one sheet is paid out or is missed. In this case, since the increase or decrease of the game occurs in two ways of minus two and minus three, it is difficult to calculate and the game may be confused. Compared to such specifications, when navigating is ignored, if the number is fixed, such as when one or two pieces are always aligned, the minus value when navigating at the last number of sheets is fixed to minus 2 for example Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player mistakes the calculation and hits the place where the navigation should be ignored once more as the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

  It should be noted that a certain effect can be exerted even if it is generally stabilized such that one sheet is paid out or is missed at a high frequency, not necessarily. Further, the number of payouts may be stabilized by the neglecting pattern. For example, when a batting order navigation of “1.2.3” (left, middle, and right is the correct batting order) occurs, the one-prize winning rate has a relationship of “middle 1st”> “right 1st” and three If the player wants to reduce the number of cards, the player may select the right first stop, and if he wants to reduce the number of sheets, the player may select the middle first stop. In addition, if the second stop is missed after the first correct answer in the game, if the second stop is performed in the order of “1.3.2”, one of the roles wins with a higher probability than the other neglecting batting order. In this case, it is preferable that the player can select the method of reduction by hitting.

(Change of navigation mode when navigating should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play the game according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 performs the pressing order display in the first mode (such as blue numerals), and when it is optimal to play the game against the navigation, the sub-control board 72 is displayed. Performs the pressing order display in the second mode (such as red numbers).
(Changes due to the navigating situation or direction)
The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 may be different in a situation where navigation, such as BGM, video, lamps, etc., is performed according to navigation and a situation where navigation is countered. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether navigation should be defeated when navigation occurs in the next game at a point in time before the occurrence of navigation.
(Lock or reel freeze when navigating should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may provide a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) immediately after the lever is turned on, after the reel rotation starts, or a period in which the temporary operation of the stop button is invalidated. As a result, the player can be alerted, and it is possible to prevent a case where the advantageous section is erroneously ended. In addition, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also alerts the user with sound or video.

<Another example of the advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)>
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number−insertion number), that is, based on a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform the limit process using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is referred to as a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400) have been paid out during the advantageous section.

  In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of input sheets from the number of payout sheets. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 initializes the payout number counter at the start of the advantageous section or the increase section, and updates the payout number counter each time a payout occurs due to the winning of the small role. Then, when the value of the number-of-payouts counter reaches the prescribed value for performing the limit process, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section and performs a limit process of initializing various processes and values relating to the advantageous section.

  Also in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the hand related to the replay wins is arbitrary, and may be counted as three payouts or counted as zero payouts. However, it is preferable that the main control board 71 counts as payout of 0 cards when the hand related to the replay wins. In this way, for example, in the case of a 3BET game, a payout number counter is determined for a case where a three-course role (a role in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) and a case where a role related to replay wins. Can be varied. That is, when the winning combination of the replay is won than when the winning combination of three is won, the payout number counter does not advance. It is possible to make a difference in the value of the three-prize role and the role related to the replay.

<Another example of the advantageous section limiter (Navi count limiter)>
Further, as the type of limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, a navigation frequency limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the notification (navigation) of a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) to the player during the advantageous section (that is, the number of navigation times becomes the specified value). , The limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed for the player during an advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the medal is maintained or reduced during the advantageous section. There is a navigation to control compared to inside. The former navigator, for example, is a mode of a correct answer stop operation in a 3BET game (for example, when the push order is correct), and when the winning combination of more than three medals (for example, nine) is won, the correct answer is obtained. It refers to notifying the mode of the stop operation. The latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at the high RT, or three in the case of the correct stop operation mode in the 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, the correct answer stop operation is performed at the time of winning the winning combination in which the number of medals to be paid out is less than three, but more than in the incorrect answer stop mode (for example, when the pressing order is incorrect). This means that the mode is notified. Note that the former role to be navigated can be called an increasing role for increasing medals during an advantageous section (ART) from that role. In the pachislot, which of the plurality of roles is to be increased can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

  When the number-of-navigations limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination as the object of counting the number of navigations that is a condition for generating a limit process by the navigating-number limiter. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increased combination may be included in the counting of the number of navigations. Is also good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-incremental combination from the count target, the number of medals has increased significantly, as in the case where the non-incremental combination has been accidentally established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If not, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event that is not related to the purpose of the limiter, that is, to suppress excessive payouts, and does not cause complaints to the player.

  In such a navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation frequency counter (navigation frequency counter) as a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increasing section, and a navigation to be counted is generated. Each time the value is updated, the value of the navigation counter is updated. Then, when the value of the navigation counter reaches the prescribed value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 terminates the advantageous section and performs limit processing of initializing various processes and values relating to the advantageous section. Note that the method of updating the counter in the various limiters described above may be an addition method or a subtraction method.

<Another example of the limiter period>
Further, in the above description, an example in which limiters such as the game number limiter, the number limiter, the payout number limiter, and the navigation number limiter are used only during the advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not provided during the advantageous section. It can be adopted for any period. For example, if the player continuously hits the advantageous section, the payout of medals is limited to a maximum of the number of sheets in each advantageous section at a time, but the transition to the advantageous section is performed a plurality of times. Then, a lot of medals may be paid out, and there is a possibility that gambling may be excessively inspired. Therefore, separately from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, payout rate or difference number) indicating the increasing state of the period for the latest predetermined number of games (for example, the latest 6000 games) is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided for terminating the advantageous section when the value exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets as viewed from the player). According to such a special limiter, when the condition for activating the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, even if the advantageous section has just started, the game number limiter and the number limiter are not activated at all. Even if it is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

  In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, a special (referred to as the number of AT games, the number of AT stocks, the number of obtainable difference, etc.) and the payout rate relating to the advantageous section acquired at the present time are referred to. When there is a possibility that the limiter will be activated, the main control board 71 reduces the possibility of activation of the special limiter, such as reducing the rate of addition before reaching the specified value, or at the time of activation of the special limiter. Control may be performed so that the right of the increase section (ART) to be deleted is reduced.

  In addition, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the medal increase status (for example, the payout rate or the difference number of sheets) may be based on a value other than the number of games. Determining a predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information that can determine that the player has played the game for a predetermined period, such as time or a predetermined insertion number (for example, 18,000 insertion numbers). It may be.

The configuration of a pachislot using such a special limiter is shown below.
A gaming machine capable of playing using a gaming value,
The right to set the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in a pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), or a probable change state or a time reduction state in a pachinko machine) (pachislot) (For example, the main control board 71) which can give the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc., or the right to shift to a certain change state, a time saving state, etc. in a pachinko machine. When,
Game state control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right;
Advantageous game state continuation means for continuing the advantageous game state when the right is available (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is an AT stock number in the pachislot, etc. May be a continuation of a probable change state or a time saving state))),
Increase status storage means for storing a value indicating an increase status of a game value from the predetermined unit game to the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, the difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter, Counter for monitoring the payout rate),
A gaming machine comprising: special ending means (special limiter) for ending the advantageous state even when the right exists, when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined specified value.

  In addition, the above-described special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a limiter for each day, or may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, the main control board 71 is provided with a power interruption for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power interruption during business hours such as 2 hours or 4 hours and can be estimated to be a power interruption during closing due to business closing). Or, when the power is turned on after a power cut for a predetermined period of time or more, the start of the day (start point), a value indicating the medal increase status from the start point (that is, by resetting the information for the previous day) (for example, The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout ratio and the number of difference. The main control board 71 sets the time when a predetermined time (e.g., one hour) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the start (start point) of the day and resets the information for the previous day (that is, resets the information for the previous day). ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the medal increase status (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timing method can be realized by mounting a timing means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

<Penalty for navigation mistake>
In the pachi-slot 1, the main control board 71 may give a predetermined penalty when a stop operation is performed without following a notification given to a player during an advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification of performing an additional lottery of the ART while waiting for the transition to the high RT such as during the preparation of the ART, the transition to the high RT is avoided and the preparation of the ART is extended by avoiding the transition to the high RT. Many additional lotteries can be received. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player, the main control board 71 may not perform such an ART additional lottery. Since it is not possible to determine whether the mistake is an accidental mistake or an intentional mistake, for example, the main control board 71 may change the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. It may be.

[Other Modifications]
The ART duration management method is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during the ART or the difference. The continuation period may be managed by the number of times that the notification that affects the medal payout during the ART is performed (the number of navigations), or the continuation may be performed by the continuation determination performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART. The period may be managed, and the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the objects to be added are appropriately adjusted by the ART duration management method such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, the number of differences, and the like.

  In the above-mentioned pachislo 1, the operation of the notification (ART) function is performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the side of ()).

  In the above description, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The features other than the features specific to the pachislot 1 such as the features relating to the reel control and the features relating to the setting change and confirmation of the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effects can be obtained. For example, checksum generation and determination processing, various processing using an instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 93 (address specification processing using a Q register, updating of a soft timer, 7-segment LED driving processing, generation and storage processing of communication data, etc.) Features such as various processes using the unspecified ROM area and the unspecified RAM area can also be applied to “pachinko”.

  Also, the set value may be only one step. At this time, the setting change processing may be performed or may be omitted. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be re-entered, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the setting value is only one step, a mode relating to lottery of the advantageous state (such as the ART state) (initial hit and / or addition) is provided, and the number of times the predetermined winning combination with a predetermined probability is won is counted. When the number of times reaches a specified value, the mode is switched, thereby making it possible to raise or lower the payout.

  In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is a wave of one payout. If the value is defined so as to be switched by the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of gaming machines. For example, if the business hours per day is 11 hours, 11h = 39600 sec. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is set to 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = approximately 9659 times. In addition, since it is not realistic not to put a break (meal or toilet) at all, the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000 times. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the payout can be switched in approximately one day.

  Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous are alternately switched every time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit becomes stable in a two-day cycle, We can contribute to store operation. In addition, although the case where the set value is set to one stage has been described, the present invention is not limited to one stage and can be diverted. More specifically, if adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the wave of the payout ball more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the case where the set values are reduced and become monotonous.

  If the number of setting values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set values of the six steps can be changed to the set values of one step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing a desired payout rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, if only gaming machines that are suitable for the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be reduced.

[Other expandability of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player inserts a medal (that is, inserts a medal in his or her hand into the medal slot, or operates a MAX bet button or a 1-bet button for a credited medal). In the case where the game is started by the operation of inserting the game and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the mode in which the hopper device is driven and the medal is paid out from the medal payout exit or the credit is given will be described. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a player inputs a game medium necessary for a game, a game is performed based on the medium, and a privilege is provided (for example, a medal is paid out) based on a result of the game. be able to. That is, the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself has a game medium held by the player as well as a mode in which the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical player's operation and the game medium is paid out. May be managed electromagnetically to enable games without a medal. In addition, the game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted on (connected to) the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) and managing the game medium. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is a device provided in the game machine. The game medium management device communicates with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so as to be able to lend a game medium (that is, an operation of providing a required game medium when a player performs an operation of inserting a game medium) or a prize for a role related to a payout of a game medium ( When the combination is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, the operation of obtaining the required game medium in paying out the game medium to the player) or the game medium to be used for the game. What is necessary is just to be able to perform the operation of recording electromagnetically. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachislot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a function of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, has a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game device and an external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless the player connects via the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means operable by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (E.g., an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, various other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and a game medium handling device side external connection terminal plate. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is completed, any one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on game media recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player are transmitted. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured such that a member recording medium of a game arcade can be inserted therein, stored in the member recording medium, and can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown), a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium managing device can be performed. Is also good. At this time, information that can be known only to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging unit provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  Note that, as described above, the game medium management device may enable a game only without a medal, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's operation, and May be paid out, or the game may be performed without a medal, and the game may be performed in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the above-described selector and hopper device, and these may be controlled by the main control board 71 and the control result may be transmitted. On the basis of this, it is also possible to adopt a system that enables the player to record the total number of game media that can be used for the game by using an electromagnetic method and control the display.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot 1 is described. However, the slot machine or the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball is also provided with the game medium management device, Of game media can be managed.

  In this way, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors and hopper devices inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and to reduce the cost of the game machine. Not only can manufacturing costs be reduced, but also players can be prevented from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices to reduce the consumption of gaming machines. It also reduces power. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Modification Example of "Gaming System Using Single with Different Setting in AR Machine" In the first embodiment, the AR machine equipped with the assist replay time ART has a symbol combination "white 7"-"white 7"-" BB1 which is activated when "White 7" is displayed on the activated line (the first special special character RB is always activated while BB1 is activated) and the symbol combination "Blue 7"-"Blue 7"-"Blue 7" BB2 which is activated when displayed on the activated line (although the BB2 is always activated, the first-class special accessory RB is always activated), and a continuous actuation device BB for the two types of first-class special occasions, In addition to these two types of BBs, or in place of any one or more types of BBs, a normal device belonging to the category of a special device, which is a special device for facilitating a prize related to the acquisition of a game medal, A single bonus SB may be mounted.

  Here, the ordinary accessory (single bonus SB) is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number is activated. , When the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and ends when the result of one game is obtained.

The single bonus SB defines a plurality of types with different combinations of operating symbols, for example, two types of a first single bonus SB1 (internal winning combination “F_SB1”) and a second single bonus SB2 (internal winning combination “F_SB2”). are doing.
The combination of operating symbols of SB1 (combination name "C_SB1")
For example, "Replay"-"Hat"-"Cactus 1"
The combination of SB2 operating symbols (combination name "C_SB2")
For example, "replay"-"hat"-"cactus 3".

  When SB1 or SB2 is won, the corresponding symbol “Replay” for the left reel 3L and the corresponding symbol “Hat” for the middle reel 3C are vertically interposed with four different symbols in the middle as shown in FIG. Since a large number are arranged in a dispersed manner, it is possible to reliably draw in the active line by sliding at a maximum of four frames, and the display probability is 1 (100%).

  On the other hand, the corresponding symbol for the right reel 3R is a pull-in range (for 10 frames) of the symbol positions 4 and 19, and a pull-in range (for the cactus 3) of symbol numbers 9 and 14. Frame) does not overlap with each other, and if one of them is aimed at, the other cannot be pulled in. Accordingly, both the display probability of “Cactus 1” and the display probability of “Cactus 3” are （(50%), and the player does not know whether SB1 or SB2 has been won. Neither can the symbol combination be displayed reliably, nor can the display be avoided.

  By the way, the difference between "Cactus 1" and "Cactus 3" is only a part of the whole pattern, and it is possible to distinguish them by closely comparing the two in a stationary state. It is extremely difficult to distinguish. However, a relatively easy-to-see “White 7” symbol among the symbols on the moving reel is arranged in the pull-in range (for 10 frames) of “Cactus 1” at symbol positions 4 and 19, and symbol number 9 In the pull-in range (for 10 frames) of No. 14 and No. 14 "Cactus 3", the so-called "Chile upper 1" and "Chile lower" which are relatively easy to see among the symbols on the moving reel are arranged vertically. "Deca Chile" pattern ream is arranged.

  For this reason, at the time of winning SB1, when the right stop button 7R is operated at the timing when the "white 7" symbol appears or is about to appear in the display window 4, the symbol number "cactus 1" of the right reel 3R is displayed. The stop can be displayed on the middle effective line, and SB1 can be operated. On the other hand, if the right stop button 7R is operated at the timing at which the "decatur" symbol appears or is about to appear in the display window 4, the symbol number 19 "cactus 1" of the right reel 3R can be pulled into the middle row. In other words, the SB1 cannot be operated due to the loss. At the time of this drop, the symbol number 15 "Replay" on the right reel is stopped at the middle stage, and the combination of the symbols "Replay"-"Hat"-"Replay", which corresponds to any combination, is also different from the bell dropout. Display the missing eyes.

  Further, at the time of winning of SB2, when the right stop button 7R is operated at a timing at which a “decatur” symbol series appears or is about to appear in the display window 4, the symbol number 14 “cactus 3” on the right reel is displayed in the middle row. The stop can be displayed on the activated line, and SB2 can be operated. On the other hand, if the right stop button 7R is operated at the timing when the “white 7” symbol appears or is about to appear in the display window 4, the “cactus 3” with the symbol number 9 on the right reel cannot be pulled into the middle row. However, the SB2 cannot be operated due to the loss. At the time of this drop, the symbol number 5 “Replay” on the right reel is stopped at the middle stage, and the combination of the symbols “Replay”, “Hat”, and “Replay” corresponding to any of the roles is different from the bell dropout. Display the missing eyes.

The lottery values of SB1 and SB2 (numerical value ranges to be won) are, for example,
4500 for each setting 1, the total winning probability is 9000/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.3,
4410 each in setting 2, the total winning probability is 8820/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.4,
The setting 3 is 4320 for each, the total winning probability is 8640/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.6,
In setting 4, each 4230, the total winning probability is 8460/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.7,
The setting 5 is 4140 for each, the total winning probability is 8280/65536 ≒ 1 / 7.9,
The setting 6 is 4050 for each, and the total winning probability is 8100/65536 ≒ 1 / 8.1. The lower the setting, the easier it is to win SB1, SB2, and the higher the setting, the harder it is to win SB1, SB2. Note that only one of SB1 and SB2 may be set to have a setting difference, and the other may be set to have no setting difference.

Since SB1 and SB2 are added, for example, in the internal lottery table (setting 1) in FIG.
The deviation of RT0 is 37779-9000 = 28779,
F_maintenance lip A of RT1 is 37800-9000 = 28800,
The deviation of RT2 is 37849-9000 = 28849,
Each of F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, and F_maintenance lip_3rd of RT3 is 11230-3000 = 8230,
The F_maintenance lip A of RT4 is 11800-9000 = 2800,
Each is to be changed.

In short, in this modification, instead of the internal lottery table (setting 1) of FIG.
This is changed to the internal lottery table (setting 1) in FIG.
Also in this modification, the internal lottery table (settings) in FIG. 14 during RT5 (during the inter-flag state inside BB1 or BB2) and during BB (during the bonus state during BB1 operation or BB2 operation). Same as 1).

  In the table of FIG. 174, the lottery value of the first single bonus SB1 “F_SB1” and the lottery value of the second single bonus SB2 role “F_SB2” are 4500 for setting 1, 4410 for setting 2, and 4410 for setting 3. Each of 4320, 4230 for setting 4, 4140 for setting 5, and 4050 for setting 6. In each state of RT0 to RT4, for example, the lottery value of “F_maintenance lip A” is 8900 for RT0, 28800 for RT1, 1300 for RT2, 0 for RT3, and 2800 for RT4. With respect to the values, the setting 2 is +180, the setting 3 is +360, the setting 4 is +540, the setting 5 is +720, the setting 6 is +900, and the added value is subtracted from the respective deviations of RT0 to RT4.

  When the combination of the operating symbols SB1 and SB2 related to the winning is displayed, the next one game is a game during the SB operation. In the game during the SB operation, a so-called small win all state is set in which all small wins with payout medals are won in the entire range of the random number for internal lottery that can be taken by the random number 0 to 65535.

  However, in the game in which the SB is operating, the normal number of games excluding the game in which the SB is operating is changed from the three-seat game to the two-seat game, and the prescribed number is set to two, and the payout number of any small role is two. To avoid increasing medals. If the MAX bet button 11 is pressed once during SB operation, two sheets are automatically placed. In the game in which the SB is operating, the payout number may be changed to one and the payout number of any small win may be changed to one. Instead of these, the game during the SB operation may be maintained in a state where three games are played and nine medals with a large payout may be obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 175 [A], in this modification, a game in any of the replay time states RT0 to RT4 in the bonus non-winning state, that is, a so-called ordinary game in which a bonus combination including SB1 and SB2 is randomly determined. , A predetermined specific combination from among the lottery with the same lottery value irrespective of RT0 to RT4, for example, linked to the winning of “F_common bell”, “F_sabo 1”, “F_strong chile 1”, By a two-stage lottery using a 1-byte random number (random number range 0 to 255, random number denominator 256) subsequent to the internal lottery, a predetermined probability, for example, a probability of 100% (256/256), and a predetermined game number from the next game For example, for five games, the assist replay time ART is randomly drawn at a predetermined probability, for example, about 1/15 of each game, so that the transition to the ART is higher than other occasions. Waiting can be shifted to an advantageous interval function as inter ART specific high 確区.

  The transition probability to the ART specific high-accuracy section is (1000 + 610 + 150) /65536×256/256≒1/37.2.

  Here, the advantageous section is a period in which instruction information (navigation information for specifying the operation mode of the stop button) for displaying a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player corresponding to the internal winning combination can be notified. Yes, as a trigger for shifting from a non-advantage section, which is a non-advantage section, in which notification of instruction information is not allowed, to an advantage section, in a general game, a predetermined lottery is selected from a lottery with the same lottery value regardless of the replay time state. The initial transition is allowed in association with the winning of the specific combination.

  In this modification, during RT5 (during the BB1 or BB2 flag state, inside BB1 or BB2) and during BB (during BB1 operation or BB2 operation), an advantageous section associated with the winning of the specific combination is performed. Is not performed. However, by making the lottery value of the specific combination the same between RT0 to RT4 and RT5 (during BB1 internal operation) and / or during BB (during BB1 operation, etc.), it is possible to shift to the advantageous section even during RT5 or BB. May be performed. As long as the lottery value is the same irrespective of the gaming state, whether or not to perform the shift lottery to the advantageous section can be arbitrarily determined from the roles to be randomly selected in the general game.

  Also, using the total number of tokens obtained as a denominator, the total number of tokens obtained by notifying the instruction information (navigation information) and the total number of tokens obtained by operating the bonuses (BB1 and BB2). In the ratio display (so-called position ratio monitor) as shown in FIG. 71, for example, the upper two digits of the seg Is displayed as "7P", the lower two digits of the segment are "69" or the like. The setting can also be referred to, for example, when shifting to an advantageous section.

  A game machine whose setting can be referred to at the time of shifting to the advantageous section and / or at the time of processing related to the instruction function during the advantageous section (addition of ART continuous game number, etc.) is hereinafter referred to as a 7P-type gaming machine. .

  On the other hand, a gaming machine which does not refer to the setting when shifting to the advantageous section and / or during processing relating to the instruction function during the advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a 7U type gaming machine.

  The 7U type gaming machine has an advantageous section ratio (also referred to as an advantageous section stay ratio) of less than a predetermined value, for example, less than 70%, with the total number of games as the denominator and the total number of games in the advantageous section as a numerator. For example, in the ratio display (role ratio monitor) as shown in FIG. 71, for example, “7U” is displayed in the upper two digits of the seg, “69” is displayed in the lower two digits of the seg, and the advantageous section ratio is satisfied. It suffices to be able to explain what you are doing.

  The 7U-type gaming machine does not need to display the designated accessory ratio required for the 7P-type gaming machine, nor does it have to satisfy the designated accessory ratio of less than 70%. On the other hand, the 7P type gaming machine does not need to display the advantageous section ratio required for the 7U type gaming machine, nor does the advantageous section ratio need to satisfy less than 70%.

  Further, in both the 7P-type gaming machine and the 7U-type gaming machine, the specific combination that triggers the shift to the advantageous section is the random combination (1000 of “F_common bell”, regardless of the setting 1 to 6). There may be no setting difference in which 610 of “F_Sabo 1” and 150) of “F_Strong Chile 1” do not change, or there may be a setting difference in which each lottery value changes depending on the difference between the settings 1 to 6. It is permissible for any of the 7P and 7U types of gaming machines that the specific combination that is the trigger for the transition to the advantageous section is set differently and that the resulting difference in the rate of transition to the advantageous section results in a setting difference.

  During the advantageous section between the five games to function as the ART specific high-precision section, a countdown display of the number of games is displayed on the display unit 100 controlled from the so-called sub-side, and a tantalizing effect such as a battle video effect in which an enemy and an ally compete against each other is displayed. When the ART is won after the finger is released from the stop button pressed at the end of the fifth game and the third button is released, a blessing message such as "Get ART" is issued together with the victory screen of the ally. If no ART has been won, a message such as "Sorry" is issued together with the defeat screen of the ally.

  During the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, the winning of the ART is determined according to a predetermined specific condition that does not change with each game, as processing relating to the instruction function during the advantageous section in each game. The specific condition is based on a common process that does not refer to the setting, in which a two-stage lottery following the internal lottery in a general game is performed with a winning probability of 17/256 ≒ 1/15.

  During the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, ART winning can be expected regardless of the type of internal winning combination including a loss, as long as the game is a normal game. Alternatively, the specific condition may be that a two-stage lottery with a winning probability of about 1/15 is won, or that a predetermined role such as a so-called rare role is won in advance. In this case, It is possible to prevent a so-called losing feeling of the rare role from being given to the player.

  Since the specific condition that the two-stage lottery following the internal lottery in the general game is performed with a winning probability of about 1/15 does not refer to the setting, the present modified example is performed when shifting to the advantageous section. And / or it can be constructed as a 7U-type gaming machine that does not refer to settings during processing related to the instruction function during the advantageous section.

  Generally, in a so-called A plus ART machine using both a bonus such as BB and an ART together, a 7U type gaming machine requires a 7U type gaming machine rather than satisfying a condition that an instructed accessory ratio required is less than a predetermined value (less than 70%). It may be easier to satisfy the condition that the advantageous section ratio required for the gaming machine is less than a predetermined value (less than 70%), and the flexibility in designing the gaming machine is increased.

  If a game during SB1 operation or SB2 operation is inserted based on the winning of SB1 or SB2 between the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, the game during operation is not a general game. ART is not randomly selected based on the winning probability of / 15, and during the SB1 operation or the SB2 operation, the ART cannot be won.

  In the first example of FIG. 175 [A], the SB1 is won in the second game (2G), the combination of the operating symbols “Replay”, “Hat”, and “Cactus 1” is displayed, and the third game (3G) The game in which the SB1 is activated is inserted in the eye, and the lottery of the ART is not performed in the third game, and the SB2 is won in the fourth game (the fourth game), and the combination of the operation symbols “replay”-“hat” -Avoid the display of "Cactus 3" ("Replay"-"Hat"-"Replay" is displayed). In the fifth game (5G), the SB2 operation is avoided and the game becomes a normal game, and the lottery of ART is performed. Is performed.

  The lower the setting that is easier to win SB1 or SB2, the higher the possibility that the number of games in which the ART random determination is not performed increases, and the lower the probability of winning the ART. Conversely, the higher the setting of SB1 and SB2, the lower the possibility that the number of games in which the ART lottery is not performed will be lower, and the higher the ART winning probability.

  Therefore, the game machine is a 7U type gaming machine that does not refer to the setting when shifting to the advantageous section and when processing the instruction function in the advantageous section, that is, while having high flexibility in the gaming machine design. The higher the setting, the higher the ART winning probability. In addition, the advantage of SB1 and SB2 of the setting difference in the ART specific high-accuracy section is disadvantageous when the specific combination that is the trigger for transition to the ART specific high-accuracy section is the setting difference. Since the advantage or disadvantage that occurs in the future can be added or multiplied, the fluctuation range of the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting difference can be effectively expanded.

  If there is one or more ART wins in the general game between the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, the advantageous section is continued even after the elapse of the five games and is promoted to RT4 with a high replay probability. After preparation for ART, and after being promoted to RT4, ART is started. The number of the initial continuing games of the ART is, for example, 50 games when the ART is won once among the 5 games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, 100 games when the ART is won, 300 games when the winning is three, and 4 times. In the case of, there are 500 games and in the case of 5 times, there are 1000 games, which are specified together with the blessing message after the third release in the final fifth game.

  If the SB1 or SB2 is won during the preparation of the ART or during the ART, during the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, the number of the won games is increased by the number of the won games by the ART. If BB1 or BB2 is won during the preparation of the ART or during the ART, after the operation of the BB1 or the BB2 is completed, the replay time RT1 at the return destination is changed from the replay time RT1 at the return destination to the ART performed at the preparation of the ART, and at RT4 while maintaining the advantageous section. Let it return. When the number of continuous games in the ART becomes zero and the instruction information is not reported and the game falls to RT2 with a low replay probability, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is returned.

  During the 5 games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, when one of the pushing order bells “F_3 choice bell_1st”, “F_3 choice bell_2nd”, and “F_3 choice bell_3rd” is won, a maximum of nine medals are paid out. Although it is conceivable to impose a one-navigation guarantee that the correct answering order navigation is issued at least once, this modification does not impose such a one-navigation guarantee. Therefore, if the ART is not being prepared or the ART is not being performed, and if the ART has not been won during the five games in the ART specific high-accuracy section, the correct push order navigation is performed regardless of whether the push order bell has been won or not. The advantageous section is ended without returning to the normal section, and is returned to the normal section.

  One advantageous section is the total net medal increase number (total number of medals) when a predetermined maximum continuous continuation game number, for example, 1500 games is exceeded, or when the number of medals decreases or when the one advantageous section starts. Forcible termination is performed when the number of acquired medals minus the total number of inserted medals plus a difference exceeds a predetermined one shot acquisition upper limit number of, for example, 2400 (MY2400), whichever comes earlier. When terminating the advantageous section and returning to the normal section, including the forced termination, the main CPU 31 initializes all variables that affect the performance related to notification of instruction information managed internally.

  As shown in the second example of FIG. 175 [B], in the general game of RT0 to RT4, at the time of winning of any one of the specific combinations “F_common bell”, “F_sabo 1”, and “F_strong chile 1”. ART-specific high-precision section (for each game in general, about 1 game) in which there is a notification to notify which of SB1 and SB2 has been won with a predetermined probability, for example, a probability of 50% (128/256) by a two-stage lottery. The period is shifted to the advantageous section A to function as a period for winning the ART at (/ 15), and it is determined that there is no notification to determine which of SB1 and SB2 has been won with a predetermined probability, for example, 50% (128/256). It may be shifted to an advantageous section B that functions as an ART specific high-accuracy section.

  In the advantageous section A, for example, in the second game, when the SB1 is won by the internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 13, the display is started from a stage before the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R can be accepted. On the screen of the unit 100, a message "Right reel; SB operation for 7 whites, operation avoidance for big dust" is notified.

  When aiming at the "white 7" symbol, "cactus 1" is displayed in the middle row of the right reel, and the third game, which is the next game after the second game, is in SB1 operation, and the ART lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when aiming for the "Deca Chile" symbol series, "Replay" is displayed in the middle row of the right reel, and the third game, which is the next game after the second game, is not a SB1 operation but a general game. ART is randomly selected.

  In the advantageous section A, for example, in the fourth game, when the SB2 is won by internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 13, the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is started before the stage in which the operations can be accepted. Is notified on the screen of the display unit 100, "Right reel; SB operation for aiming at big dick, avoiding operation for aiming at white 7".

  When aiming at the "Big Decal" symbol series, "Cactus 3" is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel, and the SB5 is being operated in the fifth game, which is the next game after the fourth game, so that the ART lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when aiming for the "white 7" symbol, "replay" is displayed in the middle row of the right reel, and the fifth game, which is the next game after the fourth game, is not a SB1 operation but a general game. ART is randomly selected.

  Many players who think that it is advantageous to avoid reducing the chance of winning the ART with a high probability by inserting a game during the operation of SB1 or SB2 when the player wins SB1 or SB2 are displayed on the display unit. The stop operation for avoiding the operation of SB1 or SB2 related to the winning is performed by relying on the navigation on the screen of 100. Therefore, in the advantageous section A, which is the ART-specific high-probability section in which the notification is made, the game between the five games, which is the maximum number of games, can be a general game, and it can be expected to win the ART every time in all five games.

  On the other hand, in the advantageous section B, unlike the advantageous section A, the display unit 100 only displays a tanning effect such as a battle moving image effect on the screen of the display unit 100. Therefore, when the SB1 or SB2 is won, the SB1 or SB1 related to the winning is won. The number of cases in which the operation of SB2 cannot be avoided increases, and a game in which SB1 or SB2 is operating is inserted, and the chance of winning the ART with a high probability is more likely to be taken than in the advantageous section A.

  As described above, the advantageous section A has an advantage difference that the advantageous section B is more advantageous than the advantageous section B, and the interest of the game can be further improved. If SB1 or SB2 has not been won during the advantageous section A or the advantageous section B, the notification such as “Right reel; SB operation for aiming at the big shot, avoiding operation for aiming at white 7” on the screen of the display unit 100 is displayed. Since the player does not appear, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the player has shifted to the advantageous section A or the advantageous section B, and the player is less likely to be discouraged even if the player has shifted to the advantageous section B.

  As described above, the gaming machine of this modification rotates the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols upon the operation of the start lever 6 when a game medal is inserted, and the stop button corresponding to the internal winning combination. In the gaming machine for stopping the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being rotated based on the operation of 7L, 7C, 7R, the operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is determined to be different for each type as the internal winning combination. Operation pattern combinations that can be displayed when the operation mode is matched "Replay"-"Hat"-"Cactus 1", "Replay"-"Hat"-"Cactus 3", and after displaying the combination of operation patterns The first single bonus SB1 and the second single bonus SB2 as a plurality of types of specific operating combinations that change the game medal acquisition performance in the active game to the small combination all state.

  In addition, when one of the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 serving as the specific actuation combination is won, when the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is operated in a manner that matches the operation mode corresponding to the single bonus related to the winning, the single bonus related to the winning is obtained. A combination of operating symbols for activating the bonus is displayed, and when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are operated in a manner that does not match the operating mode corresponding to the specific operating combination for winning, the operating symbol for operating the single bonus for winning is displayed. Combinations are not displayed.

  Further, in RT0 to RT4 during a general game in which the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 as the specific activator are randomly selected, the predetermined start condition is satisfied, that is, “F_common bell” and “F_sabo1” as the specific combination. , "F_Strong Chile 1", and is started by providing a start condition of being a predetermined probability of 256/256 by a subsequent two-stage lottery, and satisfying a predetermined end condition, that is, five games have elapsed. That is, an "advantageous section that functions as an ART specific high-accuracy section" can be generated as a specific game section to be ended by satisfying an end condition based on the passage of the predetermined number of games.

  Furthermore, during an advantageous section that functions as an ART specific high-accuracy section, in a general game that is a game other than the single bonus SB1 and SB2 that is being operated as a specific activator, predetermined grant conditions are satisfied, that is, each game It is possible to grant a privilege of fixing (or adding) an ART that is advantageous to the player by providing an award condition of two-stage lottery with a fixed probability of 1/15, and this is a game in which a specific actor is in operation. In the game in which the SB1 is activated or the SB2 is activated, the privilege of determining (or adding) the ART by winning the two-stage lottery of about 1/15 is not given without performing the two-stage lottery for determining the grant condition.

  As described above, when one of the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 serving as the specific activator is won during the ART specific high-accuracy section serving as the specific game section, a combination of operating symbols for activating the single bonus related to the winning is displayed. Depending on whether or not the information is displayed, the number of games that can be expected for the privilege of determining (or adding) the ART changes, and new gaming properties can be created.

  Also, the privilege to be provided activates an instruction function for instructing at least 50 games to activate an instruction function for notifying an operation mode of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which is advantageous to the player in accordance with the internal winning combination. It is assumed that the number of game opportunities to be increased is increased. For the start condition of the ART specific high-accuracy section as the specific game section and the condition of granting the privilege in the ART specific high-accuracy section, refer to the setting for specifying the combination of the winning probabilities of the internal winning combination It is possible to distinguish between possession and deficiency by common processing that is not performed, and each of the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 serving as a specific actuation combination has a setting difference in which a higher setting has a smaller winning probability than a lower setting.

  As a result, an ART specific high-accuracy section which is a specific game section can be generated by the common processing without referring to the setting, and the instruction function of determining (or adding) the ART of at least 50 games by the common processing without referring to the setting is performed. You can give benefits that increase opportunities.

  However, since the high setting has a smaller winning probability of each of the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 serving as the specific activator than the low setting, the number of games that cannot be expected as a privilege during the ART specific high-accuracy section as the specific game section is small. The number of games that can be expected as a privilege can be increased, and as a result, advantages and disadvantages due to a setting difference can be brought out. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the internal winning combination can be exceeded, and the width of the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting difference can be expanded.

  Further, the ART specific high-accuracy section, which is a specific game section, includes an advantageous section A with a notification that informs the player of information on operation modes corresponding to the single bonuses SB1 and SB2 related to the winning, and a single bonus SB1 and SB2 related to the winning. And an advantageous section B that does not notify the player of the information on the operation mode corresponding to.

  For this reason, in the advantageous section A with the notification, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to display the combination of the operation symbols for activating the single bonus related to the winning based on the notification information, and display the combination of the operation symbols. By not selecting, it is possible to reduce the number of games that cannot be expected as a privilege and increase the number of games that can be expected as a benefit.

  On the other hand, in the advantageous section B without the notification, such an optional selection cannot be performed, and the number of games that can be expected for the privilege may be reduced regardless of the player's intention, which is disadvantageous compared to the case with the notification. Become. The playability at the time of operating the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R changes depending on whether the notification is made or not, and the range of the gameability can be further expanded.

  In the above modified example, two types of single bonuses SB1 and SB2 each having a display probability of 各 are used. For example, the left reel 3L is provided with a first color such as “red 7” or “red cherry”. A symbol, a symbol of a second color such as "blue 7" or "blue cherry", and a symbol of a third color such as "black 7" or "black cherry" are evenly or substantially evenly distributed and arranged. It is also possible to use three types of single bonuses SB1, SB2 and SB3 composed of a combination of differently colored operation symbols with the display probability set to 1/3 each.

  In addition, if the player cannot display the combination of the operation symbols arbitrarily or cannot avoid the display, four or more types of single bonuses may be used. Further, as the specific actor, a second-class special accessory (CB) or the like may be used. In the case of using the special bonus of the second kind (CB), during the operation of the accessory (during the operation of the CB), the number of payout medals is reduced by changing the prescribed insertion number, or the acquisition of displayable medals is performed. It is preferable to reduce the number of obtained medals by substantially reducing the combination of symbols.

  In the above-described modification, the present invention is applied to a 7U type gaming machine, but may be applied to a 7P type gaming machine. For example, the winning probability in the two-stage lottery as the specific condition in the ART specific high-probability section is changed to a constant value of about 1/15, and setting 1 is about 1/17, setting 2 is about 1/16, and setting 3 Is about 1/15, setting 4 is about 1/14, setting 5 is about 1/13, setting 6 is about 1/12, etc., and is set to the ART winning probability in general medium games in the ART specific high-accuracy section. Make a difference.

  In this case, the winning probability of the ART is directly affected by the difference in the setting, in addition to the resulting advantage and disadvantage caused by the variation in the number of games in general due to SB1 and SB2 having the setting difference in the ART specific high-accuracy section. Advantageous and disadvantageous can be reflected, and the fluctuation range of the advantage and disadvantage due to the setting difference can be further expanded.

Modification Example of "Gaming Machine with Increased Proportion and Match Rate by Not Winning High Payouts in MB During RT" The first embodiment is a so-called A plus ART machine, and increases medals by bonus and ART Although it is a specification, the ART function is not mounted while the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 8 is maintained, and the first bonus role in which the total number of acquired game media is larger than the total number of game media inserted from the start to the end of the operation. A so-called normal machine or an A-type machine equipped with BB1 and BB2 constituted by a "continuous actuating device for a first-class special accessory" may be used.

In this case, for example, in FIG.
Each lottery value of F_BB1 and F_BB2 is changed from 20 to 100,
The lottery values of F_3 option bell_1st, F_3 option bell_2nd, F_3 option bell_3rd are changed from 5250 to 0,
The lottery value of the F_common bell is changed from 1000 to 6790.

In addition, a second bonus that completes the game without newly displaying a winning or combination of operation symbols or ending the operation as a trigger for changing the re-game lottery mode (combination of the breakdown of re-gaming combinations and each lottery value). As a role, a so-called penetrating two-type big MB composed of a “type 2 continuous special device for a special type of special role” is added to the internal winning combination (F_MB),
The lottery value of F_MB is set to 9800 (the winning probability is about 1 / 6.7).

  The two types of big MB (hereinafter simply referred to as MB) as the second bonus combination are, for example, a combination of “Replay”-“Replay”-“Hat” (combination name “C_MB”), and When the combination is displayed on the activated line, the operation starts from the next game, and the second special special CB is always activated during the MB operation. With regard to the combination of the operating symbols of the MB, the corresponding symbol of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be drawn into the activated line by sliding at a maximum of four frames, and the combination of the operating symbols of the MB can always be displayed in the MB winning game.

  In the game during the MB operation, one or more reels, in this modification, the right reel 3R stop within 75 ms, which is the second specified time, after pressing the right stop button 17R. Also, while the maximum number of sliding frames of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C maintaining the first specified time 190 ms is four, the maximum number of sliding frames of the right reel 3R during the second specified period 75 ms is one. It becomes. Therefore, the right reel 3R either stops immediately for less than one frame or stops for one or more frames and less than two frames.

  Further, in the game in which the MB is being operated, the normal three-seat game excluding the game in which the MB is being operated is changed to the two-seat game, and the specified number is two. When the MB bet button 11 is pressed once during the MB operation, a double bet is automatically performed. In the game in which the MB is operating, the number of cards may be changed to one, and the specified number may be one. During the MB operation, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, all small lots to be drawn in the general game are won. In the present modification, the winning of the small role with payout of medals is prioritized over the re-game combination. It is assumed that the combination of the symbols relating to the re-game combination is not displayed.

  Further, in the game in which the MB is activated, the payout number of the small role (bell in FIG. 11) for paying out nine medals in the game of three-piece game is seven, and three, two or one piece in the game of three-piece game. The payout number of the small combination paying out the medals (cactus, weak / strong cherry, first roll of FIGS. 11 and 12) is all changed to one.

  Furthermore, as a small part that pays out nine medals during a three-piece game and pays out seven medals during a two-piece game during MB operation, a new combination of six types of symbols listed below (“C_CB_A1”) To “C_CB_A6”), a CB small combination A “F_CB small combination_A” that causes each constituent small combination to be repeatedly won is added to the internal winning combination. In a normal game, the CB small role A rarely wins with a predetermined probability, for example, a probability of 1/65536, which is a very low probability of one-thousandth or more, but during MB operation, regardless of the result of the internal lottery. First, since all the small wins to be randomly drawn during the general game are won, the CB small win A and the other small wins are also in a winning state in the entire range of numerical values that can be taken by the random numbers used for the internal lottery.

"Hat"-"Replay"-"Replay" (combination name "C_CB_A1")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Chile Top 1" (combination name "C_CB_A2")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Chilli 2" (combination name "C_CB_A3")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Under Chile" (Combination name "C_CB_A4")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"White 7" (combination name "C_CB_A5")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Blue 7" (combination name "C_CB_A6")

  The CB small win A that wins these six types of constituent small wins can draw the “hat” of the left reel 3L and the “replay” of the middle reel 3C into the active line by sliding up to 4 frames, and sliding up to 1 frame. Thereby, any one of the symbols “Replay”, “Chile upper 1”, “Chile upper 2”, “Chile lower”, “White 7”, and “Blue 7” on the right reel 3R can be drawn into the active line. During the MB operation, when the left first stop or the middle first stop for stopping the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C first is performed, the CB small win A is displayed with priority over the other small wins, and seven sheets are displayed. Pay out medals.

  In addition, as a small part that pays out nine medals in a three-piece game and pays seven medals in a two-piece game during MB operation, a combination of four types of existing or new symbols listed below (“C_9 CB small win B “F_CB small win_B”, in which each constituent small win corresponding to “sheet A_01”, “C_RB win G_01”, “C_RB win G_02”, “C_CB_B1”) is added to the internal winning win. I have. In a normal game, the CB small role B rarely wins with a predetermined probability, for example, a probability of 1/65536, which is an extremely low probability of one-thousandth or more, but during MB operation, a random number used for internal lottery is determined. In the entire range of possible values, the CB small win B is also in a winning state along with the other small wins.

"Hat"-"Hat"-"Hat" (Combination name "C_9 pieces A_01")
"Hat"-"Hat"-"Chile top 1" (combination name "C_RB role G_01")
"Hat"-"Hat"-"Chile Top 2" (combination name "C_RB role G_02")
"Hat"-"Hat"-"Replay" (combination name "C_CB_B1")

  The CB small win B, which wins these four types of constituent small wins, can draw the “hat” of the left reel 3L and the “hat” of the middle reel 3C into the active line by sliding up to 4 frames, and sliding up to 1 frame. Thereby, any one of the "hat", "chile top 1", "chile top 2", and "replay" of the right reel 3R can be drawn into the activated line. When the right reel 3R is stopped first, that is, when the right reel 3R is stopped first, that is, when the MB reel is operated, the CB small win B is displayed prior to the CB small win A, and seven medals are paid out.

  Further, as a small part of paying out nine medals in a three-piece game and paying one medal in a two-piece game during MB operation, a combination of two new symbols listed below (“C_CB_A4”, CB small combination C “F_CB small combination _C” that allows each constituent small combination corresponding to “C_CB_C1”) to be repeatedly won, “C_CB_A4” functions exclusively as a stop control change combination, and only “C_CB_C1” can be displayed. Added to internal winning combination. In a normal game, the CB small role C rarely wins at a predetermined probability, for example, a probability of 1/65536, which is an extremely low probability of one-thousandth or more, but during MB operation, a random number used for internal lottery is determined. In the entire range of possible numerical values, the CB small win C is also in a winning state along with the other small wins.

"Hat"-"Replay"-"Under Chile" (combination name "C_CB_A4")
"Hat"-"Hat"-"Under Chile" (Combination name "C_CB_C1")

  The CB small win C that wins these two types of constituent small wins can draw the “hat” of the left reel 3L and the “hat” of the middle reel 3C into the active line by sliding up to four frames, but the right reel 3R Is "first lower right", that is, reverse pressing to stop the right reel 3R first (the second stop may be the middle reel 3C or the left reel 3L), and "lower dust". Only when the so-called "biter-pressing" operation of stopping the right stop button 7R at a timing at which the symbol can be immediately stopped at the middle effective line by slipping less than one frame has succeeded over the right symbol of the CB small role B. Stop on line. In addition, only when the “lower dust” symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 3R due to the first stop, the CB small role A has a higher priority than the “hat”-“replay”-“lower dust” and the CB small role. "Chat"-"Hat"-"Under Chile" of role C is displayed, and one medal is paid out.

  The operation of the MB is terminated when the total number of acquired medals in operation becomes equal to or more than a predetermined upper limit of, for example, seven or more. In the MB of this modification, the game is digested without the display of the winning or the combination of the operation symbols or the end of the operation as a trigger for the variation of the re-game lottery mode. Return to the gaming state. Therefore, for example, when the MB is won at RT1, the number of games at RT1 advances from the winning to the end of the operation, and returns to RT1 after the end of the operation.

  During the MB operation, if the game is exhausted at the first left stop or the first middle stop, or if the "Chill down" symbol fails to be pressed even at the first right stop, CB Small Role A or CB Small Role B wins Then, seven medals are paid out, and the operation of the MB ends with only one game.

  On the other hand, during the MB operation, if the first right stop (reverse push) is performed and the "Chile down" symbol is successfully pressed, the CB small role C wins "Hat"-"Hat"-"Chile down" Then, the payout of one medal can be stopped. For this reason, if the MB operation does not end in a single game, and if the "Chill Down" symbol is successfully pushed in the reverse direction, a game with a maximum of seven games during the MB operation can be performed. If the “flip down” symbol fails to push or the intentionally changed to the first left stop or the first middle stop, the operation of the MB ends only in the game. Therefore, the number of games during MB operation can be adjusted between 1 and 7 games by the technical intervention of the player.

  In RT1, it is assumed that increasing the number of games during MB operation will bring out a gaming property that is advantageous to the player. Only during RT1, when MB operates, on the sub-side display unit 100, Navigating a specific pressing order and a specific pressing position, such as “pressing backwards and“ pressing down ”, and so on, to facilitate the player's technical intervention. On the other hand, except for RT1, such a navigation is not provided, and seven medals can be obtained in one game, and the operation of the MB is completed in the shortest time, so that the number of net increased medals can be increased.

Further, in the case of the present modification, at RT1 in FIG.
The lottery value of F_maintenance lip A is changed from 37600 to 15897,
The lottery values of F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, and F_maintenance lip_3rd are changed from 0 to 7300, respectively.

Further, RT0 in FIG. 13 is changed to RT2, and in the changed RT2 (RT0 before the change),
The lottery value of the loss is changed from 37779 to 37776.

Further, RT2 and RT3 in FIG. 13 are deleted, RT4 in FIG. 13 is changed to RT0, and in the changed RT0 (RT4 before change),
The lottery value of the loss is from 1299 to 1296,
The lottery value of F_maintenance lip A is changed from 11800 to 20050,
The respective lottery values of F_maintenance_lip_1st, F_maintenance_lip_2nd, and F_maintenance_lip_3rd have been changed from 2750 to 0, respectively.

In short, in this modification, instead of the internal lottery table (setting 1) of FIG.
This is changed to the internal lottery table (setting 1) in FIG. In the table of FIG. 176, “F_RT3 lip — 1st” to “F_3 selection bell — 3rd”, which are the lottery targets in the table of FIG. 13, are not set as the lottery targets, and the lottery values are all 0s. Therefore, in the present modification, it is not necessary to define “F_RT3 lip — 1st” to “F_3 alternative bell — 3rd” in the first place.

In this modification, instead of the internal lottery table (setting 1) of FIG.
177 is changed to the internal lottery table (setting 1). In the table of FIG. 177, “F_BB1 + F_RT3 lip_1st” to “F_BB1 + F_3 alternative bell — 3rd”, “F_BB2 + F_RT3 lip_1st” to “F_BB2 + F_3 alternative bell — 3rd”, which are the lottery targets in the table of FIG. All 0s. Therefore, in the present modification, it is not necessary to define “F_BB1 + F_RT3 lip_1st” to “F_BB1 + F_3 alternative bell — 3rd” and “F_BB2 + F_RT3 lip_1st” to “F_BB2 + F_3 alternative bell — 3rd” in the first place.

And in this modification, instead of the transition diagram of the game state of FIG. 6,
178 is changed to a transition diagram of the game state.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 178, after the game in operation of the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is completed, a predetermined finite number of games, for example, 10 games, is set to the upper limit, and the replay combination shown in the RT1 column of FIG. A transition is made to a first replay time RT1 in which a predetermined first re-game lottery mode having details and each lottery value can be maintained.

  In addition, during the first replay time RT1, as a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols, any one of F_maintenance_1st, F_maintenance_2nd, and F_maintenance_2rd with the lottery value of 7300 is won, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the RT2 shift lip shown in FIG. 9, which is "hat"-"replay"-"cactus 1" or "hat"-"replay"-"cactus 3" If either of them is displayed, the replaying lottery mode is different from the first replaying lottery mode having the breakdown of replays and the respective lottery values shown in the RT1 field of FIG. 176, and is a RT2 field of FIG. 176. In the second replay time RT2 in the second replay lottery mode having the breakdown of replays and the respective lottery values shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, during the first replay time RT1, any combination of the transition trigger symbols of "hat"-"replay"-"cactus 1" or "hat"-"replay"-"cactus 3" which is the transition lip for RT2 is displayed. When there is no game, after the result of the finite number of games of 10 is obtained, the replay probability at the second replay time RT2, that is, (5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 8900) /65536=8924/65536７1/7.3. The game is shifted to the high-precision replay time RT0 with the game probability, that is, (5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 5500 + 13400 + 3300 + 1200 + 500 + 600 + 500 + 19990 + 330) /65536=45364/65536≒1/1.4. It is possible. At RT0, the number of medals on hand does not decrease so much, but can be increased slightly.

  As described above, in the case where the operation of the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is completed and the process shifts to the first replay time RT1, the winning of the MB serving as the second bonus combination is obtained and the MB is activated to thereby activate the first replay time RT1. In this case, the game can be used for the finite number of games 10 times during the game, and before the result of the finite number of games is obtained, the combination of the transition trigger symbols by the RT2 transition lip is displayed and the transition to the second replay time RT2 is performed. And a finite number of game results can be obtained during the first replay time RT1.

  In this manner, when a finite number of game results are obtained during the first replay time RT1, the process shifts to the high-accuracy replay time RT0, and can stay at RT0 until the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is won. Therefore, even if the operation of the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is completed once, under the circumstances where the replay probability is high, the number of medals on hand is not reduced so much, or rather, the medals are slightly increased, and the first medals are increased again. It can be expected to win the bonus combination BB1 or BB2. RT1 functions as a chance zone, and RT0 functions as a so-called heaven zone.

  Since the first replay time RT1 to be shifted to after the operation of the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is set to a finite number, the number of net bonus medals in the first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 or the first replay time RT1 also needs to be significantly reduced. Can be lost.

  Further, in a test of a predetermined gaming machine, in particular, in a simulation test on the assumption that a maximum payout number of medals is obtained, seven medals are paid out during MB operation, and the game ends once. On the other hand, because the player can avoid the end of the game once and then easily transition to RT0 without transitioning to RT2 due to the technical intervention of the player, the accuracy of the test can be increased and the total number of inserted medals can be reduced. The so-called payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of payout medals, can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the gaming machine of this modification does not have the ART and does not have the specific performance of increasing the number of medals obtained by notifying the instruction information, there is no need for a trial test in consideration of the pressing order, etc. In addition, the testing of the gaming machine can be simplified.

  Further, during the operation of the MB of the second bonus combination, even if the display of the RT2 transition lip, which is a combination of transition trigger symbols for transitioning to the second replay time RT2, is allowed, the MB continuous actuation device called MB Since the game is in operation, the game does not function as a so-called d-trigger symbol and does not shift to RT2. However, during MB operation, medals are paid out more than in re-playing so as not to give the player unnecessary useless worries. Since the winning of a certain small winning combination is prioritized and the symbol combination relating to the replaying combination is not displayed, the RT2 transition lip, which is the combination of the transition trigger symbols for shifting to the second replay time RT2, is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having to worry about the transition to RT2 during the operation of the MB without giving the player an unnecessary worry.

  Further, during the operation of the MB as the second bonus combination, the operation mode of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, that is, whether or not the first stop right (reverse push) and whether or not the “Chile lower” symbol has been successfully pressed is determined. Since the number of acquired medals can be changed, and the number of games until the operation is completed can be adjusted by technical intervention by the player, a larger number of games can be secured until the MB is completed. It is possible to further promote the digestion of the finite number of games during the first replay time RT1, and to increase the probability of staying at the high-accuracy replay time RT0 from the first replay time RT1 after the finite number of game results are obtained. it can.

  Further, in the present modification, from the viewpoint of further enhancing the gaming interest, the second replay time RT2 is shifted to the high-accuracy replay time RT0 after the result of the second finite number of predetermined games, for example, 500 games has been obtained. I have to.

  Thereby, even if the game shifts from the first replay time RT1 to the second replay time RT2, the game shifts to the high-accuracy replay time RT0 when a second finite number of game results are obtained. Functioning as a number, when the player directly stays at the high-precision replay time RT0 from the first replay time RT1 without passing through the second replay time RT2, it is possible to give the player the impression of going straight to the ceiling, Amusement of entertainment can be further enhanced.

  The first bonus combination BB1 or BB2 has the same winning probability in any of RT0, RT1, and RT2. In the case of the present modified example, even in the setting 1, the winning is about 1/183 in total, and the flag RT5 is in the inter-flag state. , The bonus state (BB1 operating state or BB2 operating state, which is the BB gaming state) is displayed by displaying the combination of the operating symbols of the first bonus combination related to the winning.

  RT2 is a disadvantageous normal zone compared to RT1 and RT0. However, in RT2, even if a game equivalent to three times the probability denominator is digested, a so-called triple harm that does not lead to a win is obtained. Since the number of times is set, an advantageous transition to RT0 is guaranteed at the end of the game, so that the player is not extremely uncomfortable.

  In the above modified example, the finite number of times of the first replay time RT1 is set to 10, but may be set to 2 or more and less than 10, or may be set to a finite number exceeding 10 times. In addition, the replay probability at the first replay time RT1 is larger than the second replay time RT2 and smaller than the high-accuracy replay time RT0, but may be as low as or equal to the second replay time RT2. Alternatively, the probability may be the same or as high as that of the highly accurate replay time RT0.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, the first bonus combinations BB1 and BB2 are determined to have been paid out for medals exceeding 216, but may be determined to have been paid out for medals exceeding 250. Further, although the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is set to 9, it may be set to a predetermined maximum number of 15 medals.

  Also, although two types of BBs (BB1, BB2) are used for the first bonus combination, in addition to these two types of BBs, or instead of one or more types of BBs, several tens to hundreds of For example, a so-called regular bonus RB composed of a first-class special accessory that is completed by paying out 100 medals, or a second type that is completed by paying out several tens to several hundreds of, for example, 200 medals. A so-called middle bonus composed of a special accessory continuous actuation device may be used. In addition, the first bonus combination is used in which the total number of acquired game media is larger than the total number of inserted game media from the start of operation to the end of operation. As long as the operation is terminated by the provision of the above, the number of acquired game media equal to or less than the total number of inserted game media from the start of operation to the end of operation may be used.

  In the above modification, at least one medal is paid out during the operation of the MB of the second bonus combination. However, when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order and / or a specific pressing position, a small medal is paid. The role may be missed and the medal may not be paid out. Alternatively, in the above-described modified example, while the MB is operating, the small win with payout of medals is preferentially displayed, and the replaying role is not displayed. However, the value of the random number for internal lottery is If the winning combination is within the winning range, the replayed winning combination may be displayed with priority over the small combination. In these cases, the number of games during MB operation can be increased.

  In addition, when the re-playing combination is displayed preferentially over the small combination during the operation of the MB, when any one of F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, and F_maintenance lip_3rd is won, the winning of all the small combinations is won. In the situation where the flag is established, the winning is repeated. Therefore, by changing the stop control, regardless of the pressing order, the symbol combination for simply displaying the replay without displaying the RT2 shift lip is displayed, and the player is presented with the symbol combination. It is preferable not to give unnecessary confusion.

  In the above modified example, when the setting is changed by the game room staff outside the business hours of the game, the RT state is not changed. Alternatively, when the setting is changed, the game may be started uniformly from RT2.

Modification Example Having [Division and Rotating Liquid Crystal] FIG. 179 shows details of an upper internal structure 600 of the housing 60 provided with the display unit 100 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment.

  The display unit 100 includes a projector 110 that irradiates a projection light for projecting a still image and / or a moving image created in advance, a mirror 120 that holds a projection light from the projector 110 on a mirror cover 610 that reflects the projection light obliquely downward and backward. And a box-shaped screen 130 for projecting an image based on the projection light reflected by the mirror 120. By so-called projection mapping, the bottom 131, the left side 132, the right side 133, and the back side 134 of the box-shaped screen 130 opened forward and upward are formed. A three-dimensional image and / or a two-dimensional image is projected on the included three-dimensional projection area, and is visually recognized by a player whose viewpoint is on the front open side of the box-shaped screen 130.

  Each surface on the inner side of the box-shaped screen 130 is made white or the like to enhance the reflection efficiency, and the front opening 135 is slightly wider than the back. An image display device 140 composed of a liquid crystal display device is arranged inside the box screen 130. On the image display surface of the image display device 140, a self-display image (still different from the image projected from the projector 110, the display image from the liquid crystal display device, unlike the image projected from the projector 110) is displayed on the image display surface of the image display device 140. Is displayed), and is visually recognized by the player.

  The image display device 140 includes a plurality of, for example, three components 150 having image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R, that is, a left component 150L, a middle component 150C, and a right component 150R. Each of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R is replaced with a first position where the player faces the front and the self-display image is visually recognized by the player, and a screen 170 that projects the projection light from the projector 110 without facing the front. The projection image can be changed to a plurality of positions including a second position where the player visually recognizes the projection image. In this manner, the first effect of performing the effect by the first expression in which the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R are located at the first position and the self-display image is visually recognized by the player, and the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R are the first effect. A second effect of executing an effect based on the second expression in which the player visually recognizes a projection image having a different expression mode from the first expression by being positioned at two positions is enabled.

  Each component 150 of the image display device 140 is supported by a support 162 erected on a circular base 161 whose rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle can be controlled by a stepping motor directly connected to the rotation shaft 160. I have. The right component 150R in FIG. 179 [B] shows a posture state rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise with respect to FIG. 179 [A]. The support 162 further supports a first screen 171 and a second screen 172 constituting a screen 170 for projecting an image emitted from the projector 110. The component 150 and the first and second screens 171 and 172 are combined so as to present a triangle in plan view as shown in FIG. 179 [C].

  The first screen 171 is formed of, for example, a white flat plate, and the second screen 172 is formed of, for example, a decorative plate having irregularities such as a relief. In this way, the rotation angle of each base 161 is controlled by the sub CPU 81 via each stepping motor, and the first and second screens 171 and 172 are selectively turned to the front front instead of the image display surface, or By turning both the first and second screens 171 and 172 obliquely forward, for example, the image display can be replaced with a projection image by projection mapping, and the visual effect of the projection image can be changed to a plurality of modes. .

  By controlling the rotation angle of each base 161, the relative positional relationship between the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R of each component 150 also changes, and all of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R face forward. It can be changed in a number of ways, such as a mode that faces backward, a mode in which some faces forward, and another mode faces backward.

  For example, at the first position in which all of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R face forward, the left image display surface 151L displays a change display image of a left effect symbol in conjunction with or associated with the change of the left reel 3L. Then, on the middle image display surface 151C, a fluctuation display image of the middle effect symbol is displayed in association with the fluctuation of the middle reel 3C, and on the right image display surface 151R, the fluctuation display image of the right reel 3R is displayed. Performs a first effect by three-image display that displays a variation display image of the associated right effect symbol. Thereby, the first effect of making the player visually recognize the self-display image displayed on the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R is performed.

  In the second position where all of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R face rearward, the self-display image is hidden or the self-display image is not displayed, and the projector is projected on the first screen 171 and / or the second screen 172. A second effect is performed in which the image projected from 110 is projected, and the projected image is visually recognized by a player. As a result, a second effect capable of providing a completely different visual stimulus from the first effect is performed. Note that, as a mode in which the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R are rotated from a position not facing forward to a position facing forward, a self-display image is displayed by irradiating an image from the projector 110 and not displaying the self-display image. And a second effect start mode in which the self-display image is displayed without displaying the image from the projector 110 and a second effect start mode in which the self-display image is displayed. In addition, as a rotating mode of the component 150, a first rotation mode in which the image is emitted from the projector 110 and the self-display image is not displayed, and a self-display image is displayed without emitting the image from the projector 110 And a second rotation mode in which the rotation is performed in a state where the rotation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 [A], the middle component 150C which is at least one component of the image display device 140, and the left component 150L and the right component 150R which are other components are in line of sight of the player. For example, the left and right components 150L and 150R may be arranged in front, and the middle component 150C may be arranged in the back. In this case, at the first position where each of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R is directed parallel to the front front, a first effect that can induce a somewhat flat perspective is performed, whereas, for example, the left and right image display surfaces 151L. , 151R in a U-shape in plan view, the image can be displayed in a posture as if the left and right mirrors of the three-sided mirror were opened, and the second effect that emphasizes the sense of depth becomes possible.

  The left and right components 150L and 150R may be arranged at the back and the middle component 150C may be arranged at the front, or one of the left, middle and right may be arranged at the front and the other at the back. In addition, the components 150L, 150C, and 159R may be sequentially shifted rearward in the order of left, middle, right, or the reverse order. Further, each base 161 may be movable back and forth and left and right with respect to the bottom surface 131 of the box screen 130. Further, instead of supporting each of the components 150L, 150C, and 159R on the bottom surface 131 of the box-shaped screen 130, the components 150L, 150C, and 159R may be supported on the left surface 132, the right surface 133, or a portion corresponding to the upper surface. May be supported on different portions depending on the components such as the left component 132, the middle component 150C on the bottom surface 131 or the upper surface corresponding portion, and the right component 150R on the right surface 133. Further, one component may be supported on the bottom surface 131 or the upper surface corresponding portion, and the other component may be supported on the left surface 132 or the right surface 133, and the components may be arranged so as to cross each other in the depth direction.

  As described above, in the present modification, each surface 131-134 of the box screen 130 includes or excludes the self-display image displayed on each image display surface 151L, 151C, 151R and each image display surface 151L, 151C, 151R. It is possible to produce an effect that combines with the image to be projected on the screen. In addition, self-display images displayed on some of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R, and the first and / or second screens facing forward by changing the respective surfaces 131 to 134 of the box-shaped screen 130 and the rotation angle. It is also possible to produce an effect by combining an image to be projected onto the image 170 (171, 172). Further, in all or a part of each of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, 151R and the first and / or second screen 170 (171, 172), it is easy to replace a still image and a moving image between image display and image projection. Can be done.

  Moreover, the screens 170 provided corresponding to the respective components 150L, 150C, 150R are provided in a plurality of ways including the first screen 171 and the second screen 172 having different visual effects of the projected images, so that the image display and the second screen 172 are provided. It is possible to realize three or more types of expression directions combining the above-described image projections, and to further enhance the effects. Although the image display surface, the first screen, and the second screen have a three-sided structure, the image display surface and the one screen may have a two-sided structure. The surface may be formed into a two-sided structure without being used. Further, a multi-plane structure of two or more screens combining a single or plural image display surfaces and a single or plural screens may be used. Furthermore, the number of surfaces may be different depending on the components.

  As shown in FIG. 180B, the left component 150L, the middle component 150C, and the right component 150R, which are the respective components 150 of the image display device 140, are individually moved in the up-down direction and / or the left-right direction. You may comprise so that it is possible. In this way, for example, it is possible to change to a plurality of positions including a first position where each component is separated from each other and a second position where each component is combined and the distance between each component is reduced. A first effect by a separated effect of displaying a self-display image in a separated state on the image display surface of each component at a first position, and a self-display image in a state combined with the image display surface of each component at a second position And the second effect by the combined effect of displaying.

  More specifically, for example, a left display panel 153L and a right display panel 153R that allow the left component 150L and the right component 150R to be viewed from the symmetric triangular display windows 152L and 152R on the respective image display surfaces 151L and 151R. These display panels 153L, 153R are movably held by panel holding plates 162L, 162R attached to a support 162 on a base 161 via rack pinion mechanisms in the vertical and horizontal directions. It is possible to move up, down, left and right by control. The left display panel 153L can also move right beyond the right edge of the panel holding plate 162L, and the right display panel 153R can also move left beyond the left edge of the panel holding plate 162R.

  In addition, the middle component 150C is formed by a middle display panel 153C that allows the image display surface 151C to be viewed in a rectangular shape, and the display panel 153C is vertically attached to a panel holding plate 162C attached to a support 162 on the base 161. It is held movably via a rack and pinion mechanism, and can be moved up and down under the control of the sub CPU 81.

  Thus, at the first position where the display panels 152L, 152C, and 152R are separated from each other, it is possible to perform a separation effect of displaying an image on each of the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R or any image display surface. In addition, at the second position where the distance between the display panels 152L, 152C, and 152R is reduced, the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R or the adjacent image display surfaces are regarded as one display surface. It enables a combined effect of displaying images, images with continuous motion, and the like. Note that the display panels 152L, 152C, and 152R may be configured to be rotatable instead of being movable up, down, left, and right, or in combination therewith, to enable a combined effect at a specific rotation angle. .

  The number of components 150 may be any number including one. For example, only the first effect of displaying the self-display image on one image display surface at the first position and the second effect of displaying the projection image from the projector 110 at the second position may be allowed. Further, the box-shaped screen 130 is not provided, the bottom surface 131, the left surface 132, the right surface 133, and the back surface 134 are not provided, and the function as an image projection medium is mainly given to the screen 170 provided corresponding to each component 150. You may let it. In this case, the projection image on the screen 170 provided corresponding to the component 150 can be emphasized, and even if the irradiation light from the projector 110 is slightly shifted, it is not reflected on the back surface or the like, and the There is no need to require strict accuracy for the adjustment of, and the cost can be reduced. The present modification can be widely applied to a pachinko game machine and the like in addition to a spinning game machine and other slot machines as long as the game machine has an image display device for displaying an image.

Modification Example Having [Mechanism for Selecting a Game Property of Reel Control by Player] In the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of items having different contents and / or lottery values of the internal winning combination related to the replay in which the next game is a replay As the replay time, six types of RT0 to RT5 (see FIG. 6) are provided, but in this modification, eight types of RT0 to RT7 are provided instead, as shown in FIG.

FIG. 181 differs from FIG.
This is the point that an RT6 which is shifted by displaying a combination of RT6 shift trigger symbols newly established from RT2 having a low replay probability and an RT7 which is shifted by display of a combination of RT7 shift trigger symbols which are newly established from RT2 are newly provided.

  In the newly-installed RT6, the player stays in the RT6 state without shifting to another state such as RT2 even if the bell spilled is displayed until a predetermined finite number of games, for example, ten games are obtained, and the RT6 state. If the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is won during the 10 games, the process proceeds from the next game to RT5 which is the state between the flags, but if the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is not won, 10 games at RT6 are performed. When the result is obtained, the process moves to RT0. From RT0, the display returns to RT2 with a bell spilling display.

  Similarly, in the newly installed RT7, the player stays in the RT7 state without shifting to another state such as RT2 even if the bell spilling is displayed until the same finite number of 10 games as the result of RT6 is obtained. If the player wins the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 during the ten games at RT7, the game shifts from the next game to the flag intervening state RT5. If the player does not win the bonus combination BB1 or BB2, the game proceeds to RT7. When the result of 10 games is obtained, the process shifts to RT0. From RT0, the display returns to RT2 with a bell spilling display.

  In RT2, "F_RT67 transition lip" is added to the internal winning combination, which enables the combination of the RT6 transition trigger symbol combination and the RT7 transition trigger symbol combination to be selectively displayed according to the pressing order of the stop button. In RT2, the lottery value of the F_maintenance lip A is 1300, which is 50, and the F_RT67 transition lip is randomly selected with the lottery value 1250. Therefore, the F_RT67 shift lip is won with a probability of 1250/65536 ≒ 1/52 only in RT2.

In the F_RT67 shift lip, for example, the constituent combination corresponding to the combination of the following existing and new symbols is repeatedly won.
"Cactus 1"-"Replay"-"Hat" (existing "C_Maintenance Lip F_01")
"Chile Top 1"-"Replay"-"Hat" (Existing "C_Maintain Lip G_01")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Cactus 1" (existing "C_RT2 Lip A_01")
"Hat"-"Replay"-"Cactus 3" (existing "C_RT2 Lip A_02")
"Replay"-"Hat"-"Cactus 1" (new "C_RT6 Lip A_01")
"Replay"-"Hat"-"Cactus 3" (new "C_RT6 Lip A_02")
"Replay"-"Hat"-"Chile Top 1" (new "C_RT7 Lip A_01")
"Replay"-"Hat"-"Chilli 2" (new "C_RT7 Lip A_02")

When the F_RT67 shift lip is won in RT2,
When the left first stop of the left reel 3L is stopped first,
Either “Replay”-“Hat”-“Cactus 1” (new “C_RT6 Lip A_01”) or “Replay”-“Hat”-“Cactus 3” (New “C_RT6 Lip A_02”) RT6 transition lip (RT6) (The combination of transition trigger symbols) is displayed, the next game is re-played, and the transition from the next game to RT6 is made.

When the F_RT67 shift lip is won in RT2,
When the right first stop is performed to stop the right reel 3R first,
Either "Replay"-"Hat"-"Chilli 1" (new "C_RT7 Lip A_01") or "Replay"-"Hat"-"Chilli 2" (new "C_RT7 Lip A_02") (Combination of RT7 transition trigger symbols) is displayed, the next game is re-played, and the transition from the next game to RT7 is made.

When the F_RT67 shift lip is won in RT2,
When the first stop is performed while the middle reel 3C is stopped first,
Either "Hat"-"Replay"-"Cactus 1" (existing "C_RT2 lip A_01") or "Hat"-"Replay"-"Cactus 3" (existing "C_RT2 lip A_02") and display the next game Keeps RT2 while playing again.

  RT6, which is one replay time, and RT7, which is another replay time, are different in the breakdown and / or lottery value of the internal winning combination related to the replay, but the total replay probability is lower than the low replay probability of RT2. Is the same during the replay probability, the breakdown and the lottery value of the internal winning combination relating to the bonus combination and the small combination are also the same, the winning probability of the chance zone CZ and the assist replay time ART are also the same, and the replay probability is It is assumed that there is no superiority or inferior in the profit obtained according to the game result including the game.

  At RT6 or RT7, if the player wins the chance zone CZ or ART triggered by the win of a so-called rare role such as a cactus, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, or a common bell, or if the player wins a mode-up lottery, the winning right is It is determined, and during the 10 games during RT6 or RT7, there is no so-called damage such as a rare combination. When the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 has been won, the next game shifts to the state between the flags (RT5), and there is no need to wait for the shift to RT5.

  However, RT6 and RT7 are different in the following points. That is, as will be described in detail later, during RT6, the combination of symbols to be displayed when a predetermined game result can be obtained here is a first mode (F_reach-eye lip A to F_reach-eye lip D described later). During the RT7, a combination of symbols displayed when the same game result as the predetermined game result, that is, a re-game can be obtained, is different from the first embodiment in the second mode (F_maintenance described later). (Display based on winning of Lip B).

  In this modification, the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 182 is used instead of FIG. 13. In RT6, for example, the replaying game that is won independently and does not overlap with the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is represented by F_reach eye lip A , F_reach-eye B, F_reach-eye lip C, and F_reach-eye lip D, and the lottery value is 4600, respectively. RT6 has a higher replay probability than RT2, and the lottery value of the loss is 28279.

  Originally, the reach lip that can be displayed when the F_reach eye lip A, the F_reach eye lip C, the F_reach eye lip C, and the F_reach eye lip D are won in a game in which the bonus role BB1 or BB2 is duplicated and won. Plays a role in informing the player of the winning of the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 in the game in the inside of BB1 or BB2 which is the state between the flags. Also in RT6, the probability that the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 and the F_reach eye lip A to F_reach eye lip D will be won is set to the same low value as RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. Even if the lip can be displayed, in many cases, it is a so-called fake without winning of the bonus combination BB1 or BB2.

  Also, at RT6, even if the reach lip is displayed, the normal ART medium-high probability lottery (FIG. 34), the ART CT lottery (FIG. 35), the CT flag conversion lottery (FIG. 39), and the CT The next game is merely a re-game without performing the lottery (FIG. 41) on the medium set number.

  However, in the RT6 of this modified example, when winning the F_reach-eye lip A, F_reach-eye B, F_reach-eye lip C, and F_reach-eye lip D, a symbol combination that simply indicates a replay is not displayed. The priority is given to the reach lip. This allows the player to simulate a reach lip that is a fake but is rarely displayed normally.

  On the other hand, in the RT7, for example, a re-game combination that is won independently without overlapping with the bonus combination BB1 or BB2 is set to F_maintenance lip B, and the lottery value is 18400. RT7 has the same replay probability as RT6 as a whole, and the lottery value of the loss is also 28279.

  Although the combination of symbols that can be displayed at the time of winning the F_reach-eye lip A to the F_reach-eye lip D includes that in which the corresponding symbol on the left reel 3L is “white 7” or “blue 7”, On the other hand, among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed at the time of winning the F_maintenance lip B, those in which the corresponding symbol of the left reel 3L is “white 7” or “blue 7” are not included (FIGS. 9 and 10). , FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. 17).

  That is, among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed when the F_maintenance lip B is won, the symbol on the left reel 3L is “hat” or “cactus 1” or “cactus 3” (see FIG. 9). In general, many players stop the left reel 3L at a timing at which either the “white 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol, which is easier to see than other symbols, appears in the display window 4. It is considered that there are many operations, but in the case of such a general stop operation, the symbol “white 7” or the symbol “blue 7” is not stopped at the middle stage when the F_maintenance lip B is won. Position No. 3 “White 7” is at the bottom, and No. 4 “Cactus 3” is stopped at the middle, or No. 12 “Blue 7” is under the frame of the display window 4 and “No. The "hat" stops in the middle.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the F_maintenance lip B, the reels are stopped from the time of operation of the stop button as compared with the case where the reach lip including the “white 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol in the left corresponding symbol is displayed. There is a tendency for the number of sliding pieces of symbols to move up to increase. Therefore, at RT7, when the F_maintenance lip B is won, the player can experience the stop behavior mainly of the slip.

  When the F_RT67 shift lip is won in RT2, the message “Leach first experience at left first stop and slip experience at right first stop” is displayed on the sub-side display unit 100, and “Reach” is displayed above the left reel 3L. An "eye", a "slip" message above the right reel 3R, and a "x" (don't choose) message navigation above the middle reel 3C are displayed, depending on the player's choice. It is possible to select the middle second stop, but in this case, the game is continued with the lowest replay probability.

  However, when the F_RT67 transfer lip is won in RT2, if the ART has already been determined, the transition to RT6 or RT7 will result in a longer period during which the ART is being prepared. (The first stop must not be performed), "1" (the first middle stop) above the middle reel 3C, and "x" (the first stop must be performed) above the middle reel 3C. Do not push) navigation is performed, RT2 is maintained, and the winning of “F_RT3 lip — 1st”, “F_RT3 lip — 213”, “F_RT3 lip — 231”, and “F_RT3 lip — 3rd” is obtained at RT2 at an early stage. ing.

  As described above, in the present modification, one replay time RT6 and another one replay time RT7 have no difference in profit obtained according to a game result including a probability of a replay, and during one replay time RT6 , The combination of the symbols to be displayed when the replay result can be obtained is the first mode based on the display of the reach lip based on the winning of the F_reach lip A to the F_reach lip D, and one other replay time. During RT7, when the same replay result can be obtained, the symbol combination displayed in the second mode is different from the first mode in that the number of sliding frames based on the winning of the F_maintenance lip B tends to increase. The game at one replay time RT6 and the game at another replay time RT7 can be selected by the player.

  This makes it possible for the player to simulate a reach lip that is rarely displayed in RT6, regardless of whether one replay time RT6 or the other replay time RT7 is selected. At RT7, the player can experience a stopping behavior in which the number of sliding frames tends to increase, and the player can select a replay time that gives a desired mode.

  Moreover, when the stop button 7L and the like are operated under the same conditions at RT6 and RT7, the number of sliding frames of the symbol that moves from the time when the stop button 7L or the like is operated to the time when the left reel 3L or the like stops is F_reach. Since the combination of the symbols in the first mode based on the winning of the eye lip A to F_reach eye lip D is displayed and the case of displaying the combination of the symbols in the second mode based on the winning of the F_maintenance lip B, this is different. The player can select a reel stopping behavior that suits his / her taste and enjoy the stopping behavior.

  Further, the game at one replay time RT6 and the game at another replay time RT7 can be performed by selecting one of a plurality of options in the operation mode (push order) of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R. Since the selection is made, a wide range of players from beginners to advanced players can easily and clearly select the replay times RT6 and RT7.

  In the above modified example, the reel stop behavior in different modes can be enjoyed by changing the details of the replaying combinations at RT6 and RT7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the same combination is won by internal lottery, such as when a small combination paying out a medal is won, when a bonus combination is won, or when a loss is made, stop control is performed according to the RT state. May be changed. When the stop control is changed, the same combination of symbols may be displayed, but the displayed line may be changed. For example, there is a low degree of expectation of a bonus such as a winning with a bonus or a chance zone CZ, an assist time AT, or an assist replay time ART. For example, when a second component small role of "sliding bell" in which the bell pattern is aligned on the lower line is overlapped and the first component small portion is awarded, there is usually a role of "bell", one RT In this state, stop control is performed so that a part of the bell becomes a sliding bell. According to this, the degree of expectation of privilege at the time of displaying the "slip bell" is lowered, but the expectation can be frequently increased. When the stop control is changed, the combination of symbols to be displayed may be changed. For example, a first constituent small role in which the expected degree of privilege such as overlapping winning with a bonus or a winning of CZ, AT or ART is low and the bell symbols are aligned, and a second constituent small role in which the expected degree of privilege is high and the watermelon symbols are aligned. In the case where there is a role of "bell" which causes the first winning combination to win, the stop control in which a part of the bell becomes a watermelon in one RT state. According to this, the degree of expectation of the privilege at the time of displaying “watermelon” is reduced, but the expectation can be frequently increased.

  When the stop control is changed in accordance with the RT state even when the internal winning combination is the same, for example, the stop line 7L, 7C, 7R can be immediately stopped on the middle effective line by sliding less than one frame at the time of operation. 0th frame, 1st frame that can be stopped by sliding 1 frame from 1 frame to less than 2 frames, 2nd frame that can be stopped by sliding 2 frames from 2 frames to less than 3 frames, 3 frames sliding from 3 frames to less than 4 frames The third frame that can be stopped with 4 frames and the fourth frame that can be stopped by sliding 4 frames or more and less than 5 frames, out of a total of 5 frames of stop candidate symbols, can be stopped with a corresponding symbol such as a winning combination etc. When there are a plurality of symbols, the minimum slip control is performed by RT6 in which the symbol having the smallest number of sliding frames is preferentially stopped in the middle stage, and the RT7 is configured by the maximum sliding control in which the symbol having the largest number of sliding frames is preferentially stopped in the middle stage. Is also feasible That.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, RT2 is shifted to one replay time RT6 and another one replay time RT7. However, RT2 is set as one replay time, and RT6 shifted from RT2 is set to another one replay time RT6. It is assumed that RT6 and RT2 are different in breakdown and / or lottery value of the re-gaming combination, but that there is no difference in profit obtained according to the game result including the total re-gaming probability, and whether to shift to RT6 in RT2. The player may select whether or not to shift the game, and the stop mode may be changed between the game at RT6 to shift and the game at RT2 to not shift. Note that the number of RT states that can be selected by the player is not limited to two, and may be an arbitrary number of two or more. In addition, the player does not have to be arbitrarily selectable.

[Appendix 1]
The gaming machine of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating so-called payout design, there is known a gaming machine in which an internal winning combination is repeatedly won so that the payout ratio is less than 1 in some bonus states. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-202331). In addition, as a precursor effect of whether or not an AT (assist time) which is in a state advantageous to the player has been won, a gaming machine elaborated mainly by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player may be used. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player plays a game mainly in the carryover state of the bonus, and the pleasure of obtaining a payout by a bonus win has been lost. Further, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2, the production mode and specifications are complicated, and it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what condition is advantageous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a gaming machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom of payout design by a method different from the conventional one. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
A variation control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units, a result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
(For example, pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which the operation mode informing unit can notify when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery in the advantageous section shift is won), and At least a second advantageous state (for example, “ART” state) in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means is higher than the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display units is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operating units, A specific role (for example, a pressing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode; Has a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means is configured to perform the notification by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (eg, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display is derived,
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppression state (for example, a bell navigation non-occurrence state) in which notification by the operation mode notification unit is not performed in the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, A notification allowed state (for example, a bell navigable state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination,
From the start of the first advantageous state to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the lapse of a predetermined number of games (100G)), the notification suppression state is set.

  According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different notification possibilities are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically ended as the information suppression state until a specific condition is satisfied. Since such specific conditions are appropriately set, the notification of the operation mode can be suppressed, and the advantage balance between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be achieved. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the payout design while making it easy to grasp.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number is larger than an average unit game number until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that a predetermined bonus combination is determined and a result of ending the advantageous state is obtained before the specific condition is satisfied, so that the advantage balance between the advantageous state and the bonus is obtained. Can be appropriately achieved.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while making it easy to grasp | ascertain an advantageous state for a player, the gaming machine which can raise the degree of freedom of a payout design by the method different from the old can be provided.

[Appendix 2]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication effect of whether or not an AT (assist time) which is in an advantageous state for the player has been won, an intriguing effect is mainly provided by a complicated effect mode assuming a highly skilled player. An elaborate gaming machine is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the production mode and specifications are complicated, and it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what state is advantageous. In addition, since the precursor effect ends without gaining any profit, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier for a player to grasp an advantageous state and that can enhance the interest of a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
A variation control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units, a result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
(For example, pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which the operation mode informing unit can notify when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery in the advantageous section shift is won), and At least a second advantageous state (for example, “ART” state) that can be shifted from the first advantageous state and is more likely to be notified by the operation mode informing means than the first advantageous state;
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display units is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operating units, A specific role (for example, a pressing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode; Has a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means is configured to perform the notification by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (eg, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display is derived,
The modes in the first advantageous state include a first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "heaven preparation" in the normal mode) and a second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven" and "special" in the normal mode). , "Next sign"),
The first mode and the second mode are characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of “ART”) is different.

  According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different possibilities of notification are provided. In the first advantageous state, the first mode and the second mode differing in the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state are provided. Since the two modes are provided, the player can play the game while staying in any mode and expecting the transition to the second advantageous state, while easily grasping the advantageous state for the player, Enhance the interest of the game.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while making it easy to grasp | ascertain a favorable state for a player, the gaming machine which can raise the interest of a game can be provided.

[Appendix 3]
The gaming machines in Appendix 3 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication effect of whether or not an AT (assist time) which is in an advantageous state for the player has been won, an intriguing effect is mainly provided by a complicated effect mode assuming a highly skilled player. An elaborate gaming machine is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the production mode and specifications are complicated, and it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what state is advantageous. For example, if the game is completed without noticing that despite the fact that the AT has been won internally, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that should be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reduces the risk of a player overlooking the game, while also providing a variety of game states related to AT lottery. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
A variable control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units, a result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification by the operation mode notifying means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which the notification by the operation mode notifying means cannot be executed. Substrate 71),
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
(For example, pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which the operation mode informing unit can notify when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery in the advantageous section shift is won), and At least a second advantageous state (for example, “ART” state) that can be shifted from the first advantageous state and is more likely to be notified by the operation mode informing means than the first advantageous state;
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display units is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operating units, A specific role (for example, a pressing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode; Has a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means is configured to perform the notification by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (eg, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display is derived,
The modes in the first advantageous state include a first mode (for example, “low accuracy”, “heaven preparation” in a normal mode) and a second mode (for example, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special, “Next sign”)
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode,
The general state has a higher possibility of transition to the second advantageous state than the first mode (for example, a winning probability of “ART”).

  According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed, and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided. In the first advantageous state, a transition is made to the second advantageous state. There are provided a first mode and a second mode which are different in the possibility of performing the operations. Since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player is not notified. Even in the general state where the game cannot be performed, the player can play the game while expecting the transition to the second advantageous state, so that the player can easily grasp the advantageous state and reduce the risk of the player overlooking the AT. A variety of game states related to the lottery can be provided.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, reduces the risk of the player overlooking the game, and enables a variety of gaming states related to AT lottery. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The gaming machines in Appendix 4 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication effect of whether or not an AT (assist time) which is in an advantageous state for the player has been won, an intriguing effect is mainly provided by a complicated effect mode assuming a highly skilled player. An elaborate gaming machine is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the production mode and specifications are complicated, and it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what state is advantageous. For example, if the game is completed without noticing that despite the fact that the AT has been won internally, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that should be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reduces the risk of a player overlooking the game, while also providing a variety of game states related to AT lottery. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
A variation control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units, a result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the notification by the operation mode notifying means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which the notification by the operation mode notifying means cannot be executed. Substrate 71),
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
(For example, pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) in which the operation mode informing unit can notify when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lottery in the advantageous section shift is won), and At least a second advantageous state (for example, “ART” state) that can be shifted from the first advantageous state and is more likely to be notified by the operation mode informing means than the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display units is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operating units, A specific role (for example, a pressing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode; Has a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means is configured to perform the notification by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (eg, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display is derived,
When the end condition of the second advantageous state (for example, the number of games of “ART” is 0) is satisfied, a determination is made as to whether to shift to the first advantageous state or to the general state (for example, to be advantageous at the end). (Section end lottery) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the general state in which notification is not performed and the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided. In the advantageous state, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The notification may be made, or the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination may be derived, or after either one of the conditions is satisfied, it may be possible to shift to the general state depending on the result of the end determination. At the end of the second advantageous state having a higher possibility, the state may be shifted to the first advantageous state without shifting to the general state and the advantageous state may be continued, so that a state advantageous to the player is grasped. It is possible to make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various, while making it easier to reduce the risk of the player overlooking.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, reduces the risk of the player overlooking the game, and enables a variety of gaming states related to AT lottery. it can.

[Appendix 5]
The gaming machines in Appendix 5 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication effect of whether or not an AT (assist time) which is in an advantageous state for the player has been won, an intriguing effect is mainly provided by a complicated effect mode assuming a highly skilled player. An elaborate gaming machine is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1, the production mode and specifications are complicated, and it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what state is advantageous. For example, if the game is completed without noticing that despite the fact that the AT has been won internally, the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits that should be obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, and reduces the risk of a player overlooking the game, while also providing a variety of game states related to AT lottery. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
A variation control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units, a result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
RT control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of RTs having different winning probabilities of at least one kind of replaying game (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination;
Operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed;
An advantageous state notifying means (for example, a state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
(For example, pachislot machine 1),
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display units is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operating units, A specific role (for example, a pressing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode; Has a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB),
The state control means is configured to perform the notification by the operation mode notifying means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (eg, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the display is derived,
The RT control means can control a specific RT (for example, RT0) at the time of setting change,
The advantageous state determined to be controlled by the specific RT may have a higher degree of advantage for the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled at an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by being expensive.

  According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which the notification can be executed is provided, and the advantageous state is such that the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the notification is performed, or the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination is performed. After being derived or satisfying one of the conditions, there is a possibility that the game will be terminated according to the result of the termination determination, but if the setting is changed, the gaming state will be controlled to a specific RT, thereby providing an advantageous state. Since it is more likely that the degree of advantage is higher than that, it is easy to grasp the advantageous state for the player, and it is possible to make the gaming state related to the so-called AT lottery various while reducing the risk of the player overlooking. it can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp an advantageous state for a player, reduces the risk of the player overlooking the game, and enables a variety of gaming states related to AT lottery. it can.

[Appendix 6]
The gaming machines in Appendix 6 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) that is advantageous to the player, and a precursory state (the advantageous state) is determined based on the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine which is capable of shifting to a sign that has been determined to shift to (a), or a gaseous sign (a sign in the case of not shifting to an advantageous state).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect that fuels the transition to the advantageous state during the omen (the real omen state or the gaseous omen state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the case where the game has shifted, the game does not shift to the advantageous state, and as a result, medals are consumed and there is no benefit.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in willingness to play a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) capable of performing a stop operation, and a fluctuation control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition. ), An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of internal winning combinations. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on a stop operation via the stop operation means; The operation mode notifying means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the advantageous operation modes of the plurality of stop operation means, and the notification by the operation mode notifying means are provided. A state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling an executable notification state (for example, an advantageous section), wherein the operation state notification is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied as the notification state. A first notification state in which notification by means is possible (for example, “normally advantageous”); and a second notification state that can be shifted from the first notification state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first notification state. A notification state (for example, "ART"), and as the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, When a stop operation is performed in the operation mode, an advantageous result display is derived to the plurality of variable display units. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, the plurality of variable display units are displayed. Has a specific role (for example, a pushing order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display is derived, and a predetermined bonus role (for example, MB). When the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the non-notification state to the first notification state, and the notification by the operation mode notification unit is performed in the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Or ending the notification state after satisfying at least one of the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units. End means (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for judging whether or not to execute the game, and a counting means (for example, a main control board) for counting the number of unit games performed during the first notification state. 71), and a privilege granting unit (for example, the main control board 71) for granting a privilege (for example, promotion of the SCZ mode) according to the number of times counted by the counting unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is provided according to the number of unit games counted during the first notification state. Here, the first notification state is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the second notification state in which there is a high probability that the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the second notification state is more advantageous. A privilege can be given when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period without being able to shift to the notification state. Thus, in the non-notification state, even if the state shifts to the first notification state without being able to shift to the second notification state, it is possible not only to consume medals but also to expect to give a privilege. A decrease in willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming machine further includes a remaining period management unit (for example, a main control board 71) that manages a remaining continuation period in which the second notification state can be continued, and the state control unit includes the first control unit. When the sum of the number of unit games played in the notification state and the number of unit games played in the second notification state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 times), the remaining period management means manages the remaining period. Regardless of the remaining duration, the notification state may be ended (for example, limit processing is performed).

  According to such a gaming machine, if the user stays in the first notification state for a predetermined period, it can be expected that a privilege is provided, but the number of unit games performed during the first notification state and during the second notification state is reduced. When the sum reaches a predetermined number, the notification state is forcibly ended. As a result, even if a great privilege is given as a result of staying in the first notification state for a long time, the notification state (the first notification state or the second notification state) does not continue unnecessarily, and the eagerness is improved. Can be prevented from being raised.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable display units. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player, and a fluctuation control means (for example, main control) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on establishment of a start condition. Board 71), an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. A stop control unit (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units based on a stop operation via the plurality of stop operation units; for Operating mode notifying means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) capable of notifying the operating mode of the plurality of stop operating means, and a normal state (for example, a normal section) And a state control means for controlling a plurality of gaming states including at least an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) which is more advantageous than the normal state. A first advantageous state in which the notification by the mode notification means is suppressed (for example, a normal advantage or a production section) and a second advantageous state in which the notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed (for example, an ART or an increase section). A privilege providing means (for example, main control board 71) which has at least a privilege when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time; When the number of played unit games reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the number-of-games limiter is activated), the game apparatus further comprises ending means (for example, a main control board 71) for ending the advantageous state. I do.

  According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period, so that the second advantageous state cannot be shifted to the second advantageous state as in the above-described gaming machine. Even in the case where the state has shifted to the one advantage state, it is possible to expect not only to simply consume medals but also to give a privilege, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play. On the other hand, the advantageous state (the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state) ends when the number of unit games performed during the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, and thus the advantageous state is longer than the first advantageous state. Even if a great privilege is given as a result of staying for a period, the advantageous state (the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state) does not continue more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being increased unnecessarily. it can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in game motivation.

[Appendix 7]
The gaming machines in Appendix 7 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  As such a gaming machine, JP-A-2006-08663 discloses that when a special role that is advantageous to a player is displayed in an advantageous state, the gaming state is identified, an external signal is transmitted, and a data counter or the like is transmitted. A gaming machine that performs a lively performance suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with an external device. According to such a gaming machine, the effect is not merely performed by the gaming machine but is effected in conjunction with another device, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that some of the players who feel that the gambling property is too high are avoided because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine in which the profit given to a player in a series of states is not excessively balanced and a proper gambling is balanced. The purpose is to do.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that when a value counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player reaches a limit threshold (for example, 1500 times), A gaming machine for performing a limit process for terminating the notification state regardless of a remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display sections, and a start condition is established. A variation control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display portions; and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control base) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on satisfaction of the start condition. 71) and displaying the result by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operating units. (For example, the main control board 71), and a notifying means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Unit 100), and state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed, and the internal winning combination determinable by the internal winning combination determining means. When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, a specific result is displayed on the plurality of variable display units (for example, a single chip, a double chip). And a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display on the plurality of variable display portions when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. ) Is derived (for example, “F_single lip”, “F_2 consecutive lip”, “F_3 consecutive lip”), and the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means as the internal winning combination. In accordance with the above, the privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of granting the privilege related to the notification state, and the privilege granting means grants the privilege when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. A probability changing means (for example, a main control board 71) for changing a privilege probability, which is a probability to be obtained, wherein the probability changing means sets the privilege probability to the first when the numerical value is less than a specific value. When the numerical value is equal to or more than the specific value, the privilege probability is set to a second probability lower than the first probability, and the notifying unit is configured to perform the operation when the numerical value is less than the specific value. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the specific value, the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. And notifying the player of an operation mode different from the specific operation mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, normally, a privilege related to the notification state can be given at the time of winning the specific combination, but after the numerical value related to the notification state reaches the specific value, the specific Even if the role is determined, the probability of granting a privilege is reduced. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and a proper gambling can be balanced. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value reaches the limit threshold, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that gambling can be balanced from this point. In addition, when a privilege is provided at the time of winning a specific combination, a specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means. Accordingly, a predetermined result display is derived. From the viewpoint of the player, the player may feel dissatisfied with knowing that the privilege is not given even though the specific role has been won. Since the result display is different between the case of not giving and the case of not giving, it is not grasped from the result display that it is the time of winning the specific combination. As a result, even when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific combination, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode as the specific combination, a first result display is derived, and the stop is performed in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. A first specific combination from which a second result display different from the first result display can be derived when an operation is performed, and a third result display is derived when a stop operation is performed in a second operation mode And a second specific role from which a fourth result display different from the third result display is derived when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the second operation mode. The privilege granting means is capable of granting the privilege of a first size in response to the first specific combination being determined as the internal winning combination, and wherein the second specific combination is the internal winning combination. And a second size larger than the first size A first privilege probability that is a probability that the privilege granting unit can grant a privilege when the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. And a second privilege probability, which is a probability that the privilege granting unit can grant a privilege when the second specific role is determined as the internal winning combination, can be changed, and the numerical value is the first specific probability. When the value is less than the value, the first privilege probability is a predetermined probability, and when the value is equal to or more than the first specific value, the first privilege probability is a probability lower than the predetermined probability, and the value is the value. When the value is less than a second specific value that is smaller than the first specific value, the second privilege probability is set to a specific probability, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the second specific value, the second privilege probability is set to the specific probability. Lower than the probability, the notification means When the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first operation mode is notified to a player, and the numerical value is equal to the first specific combination. If the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the value is equal to or more than the specific value, an operation mode different from the first operation mode is notified to the player, and the numerical value is changed to the second specific mode. When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the value is less than the value, the second operation mode is notified to the player, and when the numerical value is equal to or more than the second specific value, When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, an operation mode different from the second operation mode may be notified to the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the value of the specific value that is the threshold value for changing the probability of granting the privilege is changed according to the size of the privilege associated with each type of the special combination, and the associated privilege is changed. When the second specific combination with a larger value is larger, the threshold value is set smaller than when the first specific combination is won. As a result, it is possible to adjust the period in which the privilege can be easily provided for each size of the associated privilege, and it is possible to balance an appropriate gambling.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a profit given to a player in a series of states is not excessive and a proper gambling property is balanced.

[Appendix 8]
The gaming machines in Appendix 8 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  As such a gaming machine, JP-A-2006-08663 discloses that when a special role that is advantageous to a player is displayed in an advantageous state, the gaming state is identified, an external signal is transmitted, and a data counter or the like is transmitted. A gaming machine that performs a lively performance suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with an external device. According to such a gaming machine, the effect is not merely performed by the gaming machine but is effected in conjunction with another device, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that some of the players who feel that the gambling property is too high are avoided because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine in which the profit given to a player in a series of states is not excessively balanced and a proper gambling is balanced. The purpose is to do.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that when a value counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player reaches a limit threshold (for example, 1500 times), A gaming machine for performing a limit process for terminating the notification state regardless of a remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display sections, and a start condition is established. A variation control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display portions; and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control base) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on satisfaction of the start condition. 71) and displaying the result by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operating units. (For example, the main control board 71), and a notifying means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display) capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. Unit 100), and state control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the notification state in which the notification by the notification means can be executed, and the internal winning combination determinable by the internal winning combination determining means. When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, a specific result is displayed on the plurality of variable display units (for example, a single chip, a double chip). And a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display on the plurality of variable display portions when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. ) Is derived (for example, “F_single lip”, “F_2 tie lip”, “F_triple lip”), and a predetermined condition (for example, the number of stocks in the additional specialization zone is equal to or more than a predetermined number) during the notification state ), State control means (for example, main control board 71) for setting a special state (for example, a special section) and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means as the internal winning combination. In response, the privilege granting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege related to the notification state, and the privilege granting means when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. A probability changing means (for example, a main control board 71) for changing a privilege probability which is a probability that a privilege can be given, wherein the probability changing means sets the privilege probability to a first when the state is not the special state. The special probability is determined as the internal winning combination when the special condition is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the special condition is in the special state, the privilege probability is defined as the second probability lower than the first probability. In the case of granting, the specific operation mode is notified to the player, and when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege, the specific operation mode and Is characterized in that a different operation mode is notified to the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the specific combination is won during the notification state, the probability of providing the privilege differs depending on whether or not the special state is present, and during the special state, the probability of providing the privilege is different. Go down. As a result, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and a proper gambling can be balanced. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the value counted in relation to the notification state reaches the limit threshold, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that gambling can be balanced from this point. it can. In addition, when a privilege is provided at the time of winning a specific combination, a specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means. Accordingly, a predetermined result display is derived. From the viewpoint of the player, the player may feel dissatisfied with knowing that the privilege is not given even though the specific role has been won. Since the result display is different between the case of not giving and the case of not giving, it is not grasped from the result display that it is the time of winning the specific combination. As a result, even when the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific combination, the player does not feel dissatisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number or more of additional right to extend a remaining period in which the notification state can be continued is held.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the additional right is held for a predetermined number or more, the specific role is reduced, and the probability of granting the privilege is reduced. Therefore, the profit given to the player during the notification state is reduced. It is possible to balance moderate gambling without becoming excessive.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode is a plurality of combinations. The predetermined result is a result display specific to the specific combination, and the predetermined result is derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. The display may be a result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination out of a plurality of combinations.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a privilege is given at the time of winning a specific combination, a result display unique to the specific combination is derived. Since the playability of adding and displaying the result displays (symbols) is preferable even for the player, displaying the unique result display at the time of awarding the privilege can enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, if the privilege is not given at the time of winning the specific combination, a result display that can be derived also at the time of winning another combination is derived, so that the player knows that it is the time of winning the specific combination. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a profit given to a player in a series of states is not excessive and a proper gambling property is balanced.

[Appendix 9]
The gaming machines in Appendix 9 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Conventionally, gaming machines that provide a privilege by referring to a history of past game results are also known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-252212 displays a winning history of five games according to a predetermined condition. In addition, there is disclosed a gaming machine that holds winning history data and performs an ART lottery based on the winning history being a winning history corresponding to the condition code data. According to such a gaming machine, since the control is performed in consideration of not only the current game but also the history of past games, various game properties can be realized.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to keep the winning history data for five games at all times, or to prepare determination data referring to the winning history for five games, which increases the data capacity for processing. There is a problem that the development man-hours increase due to the complexity of the specification.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various gaming characteristics while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine comprising: game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of a game using the game; and effect execution means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of executing an effect related to the game, A display unit (e.g., a history display window displayed on the display unit 100) having a predetermined number of display areas provided for each of a predetermined number of games from the current game to a game a predetermined number of times ago, And a privilege granting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege in response to the determination of the predetermined combination as the winning combination. Depending on The display unit displays predetermined effect information (for example, a history icon) in a display area corresponding to a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, out of a predetermined number of display areas of the display unit, and When the privilege is provided, an effect associated with the privilege can be executed on at least one of the display unit and the predetermined effect information.

  According to such a gaming machine, a privilege can be given when the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, predetermined effect information is displayed on the display unit, and when a privilege is given, the display unit or the predetermined effect information is displayed. Is used to execute an effect related to the privilege provision. For a player, it is an illusion that a bonus has been given as a result of winning a predetermined combination from the stage of presentation, so that a variety of gaming properties can be realized as in a conventional gaming machine. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, unlike the conventional gaming machine, it is not necessary to hold the past history data, and it is possible to realize the gaming ability in which control is performed by referring to the past history from the production side. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced, and the man-hour for development can be reduced because the specifications are monotonous.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in response to the predetermined combination being determined as a winning combination from the plurality of combinations, the second state ( For example, a state control unit (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting the second state when the game is played the predetermined number of times in the predetermined state. Is also good.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, the game machine then enters the second state for a predetermined number of games, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during the second state, The advantage related to the award of the privilege is higher than when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in one state. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is not necessary to hold the past history data as in the conventional gaming machine, and only by entering the second state triggered by the first predetermined combination, it is possible to store the past history. Since the gaming ability controlled by reference can be realized, the data capacity can be reduced, and the man-hour for development can be reduced because the specifications are monotonous.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various gaming properties while suppressing a data capacity and a processing load.

[Appendix 10]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. It is hoped that the number of navigation games will increase.

  Various devices have been devised to increase the number of AT games so far. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 discloses that a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine for increasing the number of AT games (adding the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a bonus is provided (the number of AT games is increased) in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and performs a game, and Although the interest is improved, a particular role that is easily noticed by the player such as watermelon or cherry is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the frequency of not giving the privilege is high, the discouragement of the player will be invited, There was a risk that the interest in the game would decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying a player of a bonus at an appropriate frequency when a specific combination is won. .

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, a specific role (for example, a rare role), and a bonus role (for example, MB). A game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means in accordance with the winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations. The game state to be performed includes a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (for example, a normal section) and a specific game state (for example, “ART”) different from the predetermined game state, and the bonus When the result display corresponding to the role is derived and the bonus is operated, the first additional determining means (for example, the additional amount (for example, the number of added games) for extending the period in which the specific game state can be continued can be determined) For example, main control Board 71), and second addition determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an additional amount for extending a period in which the specific gaming state can be continued when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. An additional control means (for example, a main control board 71) for extending a period in which the specific game state can be continued by the additional amount determined by the first additional determination means or the second additional determination means; A notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of the additional amount, and the first additional determining means determining the additional amount upon activation of the bonus. Further comprising an additional hiding means (for example, a sub-control board 72) that keeps the information unreported without notifying the additional amount, wherein the notifying means determines that the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. Nevertheless, in a case where the second additional determining means does not determine the additional amount, in the range of the additional amount that can be determined with the specific role as an opportunity, the unreported additional amount held by the additional latent means is At least a part can be notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the additional amount is determined in response to the activation of the bonus, the additional amount is kept unreported without notifying, and the additional amount is not determined when the specific combination is won. In such a case, the retained unreported additional amount is reported instead. Thereby, at the time of winning the specific combination, not only the additional processing triggered by the specific combination but also the additional processing triggered by the activation of the bonus (addition effect) can be notified, and the player can easily pay attention. At the time of winning the specific combination, it is possible to notify the player of the award of the privilege at an appropriate frequency.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notifying means may be configured such that the additional hiding means is provided when the second additional determining means does not determine the additional amount even though the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. When notifying at least a part of the held unreported additional amount, the additional amount that is determinable by the second additional determination unit may be notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when notifying the additional amount of the unreported information instead, the additional amount that is the same as the additional amount that can be determined at the time of winning the specific combination is notified, so that the player is added based on the specific combination. It is possible to make an illusion as if the game was performed, and to inform the player of the award of the privilege at an appropriate frequency at the time of winning the special combination that is easy for the player to pay attention to.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination is a combination having the same probability of being determined as a winning combination in each of a plurality of setting values and having the same setting difference, and the bonus combination includes a plurality of setting combinations. The probability that the probability of being determined as a winning combination in at least a part of the value is a combination having a different setting difference, and the probability that the first additional determining means and the second additional determining means determine the additional amount is a plurality of setting values. May be the same.

  According to such a gaming machine, the addition triggered by the specific combination is performed in common at a plurality of setting values, but the addition triggered by the activation of the bonus is performed with a different probability for each setting value. Become. As described above, the extras triggered by the operation of the bonus are kept unreported, and are notified instead of the subsequent winning of the particular winning combination. The frequency at which the notification is made differs depending on the set value. Thereby, for example, even when the setting difference of the lottery table related to the adding process is eliminated, the setting difference of the adding can be made to be felt by the player, and the gaming ability of estimating the setting from the adding frequency is realized. can do.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the player of the award of the privilege at an appropriate frequency when the specific combination is won.

[Supplementary Note 11]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. It is hoped that the number of navigation games will increase.

  Various devices have been devised to increase the number of AT games so far. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 discloses that a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine for increasing the number of AT games (adding the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a bonus is provided (the number of AT games is increased) in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and performs a game, and Although the interest was enhanced, there was room for further improvements in the production of the benefits.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances interest in notification of privilege provision.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , A main control board 71), and as a game state in which a game is played, a predetermined game state (for example, a normal section) and a specific game state (for example, a normal game state) different from the predetermined game state. "ART"), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) that can extend the period in which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. Determining means (for example, main control board 71); and additional control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending a period in which the specific game state can be continued by the additional amount determined by the additional determining means. ,Previous When the additional latency means (for example, the sub-control board 72) that can be held without being notified without reporting the additional amount and when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when “F_SP Lip A1” or the like is won), the additional latency is obtained. Informing means (for example, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100) capable of informing the player of at least a part of the unreported additional amount held by the means, and the additional hiding means An effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of determining one effect stage from among a plurality of effect stages according to the unreported additional amount; It is possible to notify the player of the unreported additional amount by an additional notification effect corresponding to the one effect stage determined by the stage determining means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when an additional addition is made internally, the information may be kept unannounced without notification, and the additional amount kept unannounced may be changed to a specific condition. You will be notified if you meet. This makes it possible to increase the amount of additional information that can be reported at a time, compared to the case where the additional information is notified each time a small additional amount is determined, and to improve the interest of the game with the notification effect of the privilege provision. Can be. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the production stage is determined according to the unreported addition amount, and the unreported addition amount is notified by the notification effect corresponding to the presentation stage. For the player, it is possible to predict an unreported additional amount from the production stage.For example, when the stage shifts to the production stage determined when the unreported additional amount is large, expectations for subsequent games are expected. Can have. Also, in order to notify the additional amount of unreported information by the informational production corresponding to the production stage, for example, a variety of productions such as performing a more lively production at the production stage determined when there is a large amount of additional information not reported Control can be realized.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) which can be stopped by a player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and Stop control means (e.g., a main control unit) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means in accordance with the winning combination determined from, and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means. A control board 71), wherein the plurality of roles include a first result display on the plurality of variable display means when a stop operation is performed in a first operation mode with respect to the plurality of stop operation means. For example, when a replay is derived and a stop operation is performed in the second operation mode with respect to the plurality of stop operation means, a second result display (for example, a red BAR lip) is derived on the plurality of variable display means. , The plurality A specific combination (for example, “F_SP lip B1”) from which a third result display (for example, W-aligned lip) is derived on the plurality of variable display units when a stop operation is performed in the third operation mode for the stop operation unit. ) Is included, and when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is less than a predetermined value (for example, 100), the first operation mode can be notified to the player. If the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than a specific value (for example, 150), the second operation mode can be notified to the player. Further, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is equal to or more than a specific value, the game apparatus further includes an operation mode notification unit that can notify the player of the third operation mode. , The notifying means, If the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the additional amount is less than a predetermined value, the specific combination is determined when the unreported additional amount is equal to or more than a predetermined value and less than a specific value without performing the additional notification effect. Is determined as the winning combination, the additional notification effect of notifying the additional amount of the predetermined value is performed, and when the additional amount not notified is equal to or more than a specific value, the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. Then, the additional notification effect for notifying the additional amount of the specific value may be executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to associate the added amount of unreported information to be reported with the operation mode to be reported to derive the result display. Specifically, when the additional amount is not notified, the operation mode in which the first result display is derived is notified, and when the additional amount for a predetermined value is notified, the second result display is derived. In the case of notifying the operation mode to be added and notifying the additional amount for the specific value, the operation mode from which the third result display is derived is notified. Since the playability of aligning and displaying the result display (symbol) is preferable even from the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by prompting the derivation of the specific result display when performing the notification effect. Can be.

[The invention's effect]
Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances interest in notification of privilege provision.

[Supplementary Note 12]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 12 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform the navigation. It is hoped that the number of navigation games will increase.

  Various devices have been devised to increase the number of AT games so far. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 discloses that a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine for increasing the number of AT games (adding the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, a bonus is provided (the number of AT games is increased) in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and performs a game, and Although the interest was enhanced, there was room for further improvements in the production of the benefits.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing an effect that enhances interest in notification of privilege provision.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , Main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of starting a specific game state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting a first numerical value (for example, the number of digested games) relating to the specific game state, and a second means for indicating a remaining period in which the specific game state can be continued. When the numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games) reaches an end threshold value (for example, 0), the specific game state is ended, and at least the first numerical value counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games). A specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the specific game state even when the value of the second numerical value does not reach the end threshold value when the condition for activating the mitter is satisfied; Remaining period notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, which can notify a predetermined second numerical value (for example, the number of notified remaining games) of the second numerical values as a remaining period in which the specific game state can be continued). The display unit 100) and a specific second numerical value other than the predetermined second numerical value (for example, the number of unreported remaining games) among the second numerical values can be held as unreported without being reported as the remaining period. When a specific condition is satisfied with the remaining period latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72), a part of the unreported second specific value held by the remaining period latent means is reported as the remaining period. With Additional notification means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) for updating the predetermined second numerical value and the specific second numerical value according to the notified value, and determining one effect stage from among a plurality of effect stages. A possible effect stage determining means (for example, a sub-control board 72), wherein as the plurality of effect stages, the first effect stage in which the additional notification means performs the notification at a predetermined frequency and the frequency Has a second production stage higher than the first production stage, and a special production stage that can be determined only in a state where the first numerical value is determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition later. The deciding means, in the state where it is determined that the first numerical value satisfies the predetermined termination condition, sums the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value. Can be determined as the one production stage with a predetermined probability in a first situation where the value is within the range of the first threshold value, and the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value is In the second situation that is within the range of the second threshold value that is a value larger than the first threshold value, the dedicated effect stage can be determined as the one effect stage with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, When the dedicated production stage is not determined as one production stage, the second production stage can be determined as the one production stage with a probability according to the specific second numerical value.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the remaining period of the specific gaming state, a part (predetermined second numerical value) is notified, and the remaining part (specific second numerical value) is kept unreported. In the remaining period of the unreported time, the player is notified (that is, added) at a frequency corresponding to the production stage. In this way, by controlling the notification (addition) of the remaining period according to the effect stage, the effect mode can be finely controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved. That is, since the second production stage in which the frequency of performing the notification of the remaining period is higher as the unreported remaining period is longer is determined, the notification production is performed when the player can shift to the second production stage. Can have expectations about things.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the period (first numerical value) in which the specific gaming state is exhausted satisfies a predetermined end condition, the specific gaming state ends regardless of the remaining period (second numerical value). In a state where it is determined that a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the future from the remaining period, the stage may shift to the dedicated effect stage. From the player's point of view, in the case of transition to the special effect stage, it is possible to grasp that the specific game state continues until the first numerical value satisfies the end condition, so that the subsequent game can be performed with confidence. At this time, the transition to the dedicated effect stage is performed with a higher probability as the sum of the first numerical value (digested period) and the predetermined second numerical value (reported remaining period) increases, and satisfies a predetermined end condition. Even if it is determined that the specific second numerical value (remaining period of the unreported time) is large, the process proceeds to, for example, the second performance stage without moving to the dedicated performance stage, and the notification is performed. Direction is performed. From the standpoint of the player, when the notification (addition) effect is performed, the interest is improved. Therefore, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect of the game is controlled by controlling the effect mode according to the notification state of the remaining period. Can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect that enhances interest in notification of privilege provision.

[Appendix 13]
The gaming machine according to attachment 13 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-233721 discloses an advantageous state (AT) with a predetermined number of games as one set, and an advantageous state after one set of advantageous states is completed. A gaming machine provided with an effect period that encourages the player to restart the game is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, regardless of the number of sets in the advantageous state that the player has, even if one advantageous state ends, the expectation that the next advantageous state may be started again may be expected. Can be given to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, even if there is no remaining number of sets, the effect of stimulating the advantageous state again after the end of one advantageous state is performed. If it is grasped, there is a risk that this effect does not make sense and rather reduces the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game at the end of a specific gaming state.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , Main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of starting a specific game state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting a numerical value relating to the specific game state; and, when the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfies a specific condition (for example, when the number reaches 1500 times), the identification is performed. Specific state ending means (for example, main control board 71) for ending the specific game state regardless of the remaining period in which the specific game state can be continued, and the remaining period in which the specific game state can be continued reaches an end threshold. And an end-time process determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not to perform a predetermined process (for example, last freeze). An end-time process execution unit (for example, a main control board 71) that allows the continuation of the specific gaming state until the numerical value counted by the counting unit satisfies the specific condition. When the end-time process determining means determines that the predetermined process is not to be performed, the specific game state is ended.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the numerical value counted in relation to the specific gaming state satisfies the specific condition, the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. Yes (limit processing). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining period of the specific gaming state reaches the end threshold, it is determined whether or not to perform the predetermined process. Until the processing is performed (until the counted number satisfies the specific condition), the continuation of the specific game state is allowed. With this, when the predetermined process is performed, the specific game state that is considered to end is continued until the limit process is performed, so that the interest of the game decreases with the end of the specific game state. Not only can this be suppressed, but also, on the contrary, the player has a strong interest at the end of a specific game state, and the interest is improved. In the case of performing the limit processing, the specific game state is forcibly ended regardless of the remaining period, so that even if the predetermined processing is performed, it does not unnecessarily increase the gambling spirit , A well-balanced playability can be realized. In other words, even if the specific gaming state has already continued for a long time at the stage where the predetermined processing has been performed, or conversely, even if it has only continued for a short period of time, the specific gaming state is Since the processing is continued only until the limit processing is performed as a whole, an excessive profit is not given to the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end-time process determining means determines that the predetermined process is to be performed, the end-time process execution means sets at least the numerical value in a remaining period in which the specific game state can be continued. A period required until the specific condition is satisfied may be added.

  According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the predetermined process is to be performed at the end of the specific gaming state, the period required until the limit processing is performed in the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued is added. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing with the end of the specific gaming state, but also, on the contrary, the player becomes strongly interested at the end of the specific gaming state. Enhancement of interest.

[The invention's effect]
Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game when a specific gaming state ends.

[Appendix 14]
The gaming machine according to attachment 14 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536 discloses that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) that is advantageous to a player, and a precursor state (an advantage) is determined based on the lottery result. There are known gaming machines that can be shifted to a sign that is determined to shift to a state) or to a gaseous sign state (a sign when the state is not shifted to an advantageous state).

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform an effect that fuels the transition to the advantageous state during the omen (the real omen state or the gaseous omen state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the case where the game has shifted, the game does not shift to the advantageous state, and as a result, medals are consumed and there is no benefit.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in willingness to play a game.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the mode of the stop operation can be notified, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normally advantageous) and the first notification state. A second notification state (for example, "ART") having a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times) ), The gaming machine performs a limit process for terminating the notification state regardless of the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and the first start condition is satisfied in a non-report state (for example, a normal section). And the said First state control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of starting the first notification state, and second state control capable of starting the second notification state when a second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state. Means (for example, main control board 71) and a period required from when the first state control means starts the first notification state to when the second state control means starts the second notification state. And a period determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining a period in which the second notification state can be continued, wherein the period determining means starts the first notification state after the start of the first notification state. The longer the period required until the start of the second notification state, the longer the period during which the second notification state can be continued can be determined.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the second notification state is started. The second notification state started at this time is the second notification state from the first notification state. The period is determined according to the period required to shift to the state, and the longer the period, the longer the period. Thereby, even if the user cannot stay in the second notification state and stays in the first notification state for a long period of time, not only does the medal be consumed, but also the second notification state remains for a long time. Since it is possible to have an expectation of continuing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. Thereby, even if the user stays in the first notification state for a long time and the long period of the second notification state is determined, the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit from being increased unnecessarily.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when an end condition is satisfied in the first notification state, a third state control means (for example, a main control board) capable of terminating the first notification state and starting the non-notification state 71), wherein the average number of unit games played until the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state is less than the average unit game times until the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state. It may be good.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the transition from the non-report state to the first report state and in the transition from the first report state to the second report state, the former has a higher transition frequency. As described above, in the first notification state, the longer the stay period, the longer the period of the second notification state, so that the player feels that the first-stage chance (the first notification state) is close and continues the game. It becomes. On the other hand, if the end condition is satisfied before the second start condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the non-notification state. Therefore, even if the state shifts to the first stage chance (first notification state), The game does not always shift to the second notification state, but sometimes shifts to the non-notification state. Therefore, it is possible to balance the game without unnecessarily increasing the gambling spirit.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in game motivation.

[Appendix 15]
The gaming machine according to attachment 15 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine having such an AT function, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2017-185099 discloses a section indicator (AT winning notification lamp) managed by the main control section when a transition is made to an advantageous section such as an AT. Thus, there is disclosed a gaming machine that notifies that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since the advantageous section is managed on the main control side, the gaming characteristics are clear, but the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is determined only by whether or not the section indicator lights up. Since the player can detect, the player concentrates only on the section display, and there is a possibility that the interest in the effects such as the video and the sound is weakened.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a player does not lose interest in the effect while reliably notifying the transition to an advantageous state. Aim.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. A game control unit (for example, a main control board) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that derives a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit based on the 71), an effect control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the effect, a stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player, and a transition of the game state. Possible transition determining means (for example, main control board 71), a state in which the gaming state can be controlled to at least a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) more advantageous than the normal state. Control means For example, a main control board 71) and instructing means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) capable of instructing a stop operation mode advantageous to a player, The advantageous state includes a first state (for example, a production section) in which the payout rate is lower than 1 and a second state (for example, an increase section) in which an instruction by the instruction unit occurs more frequently than the first state. In the normal state, the transition determination means includes at least a first pattern that transitions to the first state (for example, a pattern that transitions from a normal section to an effect section) and after the transition to the first state. It is possible to determine a second pattern for shifting to the second state (for example, a pattern for shifting from a normal section to an increase section via an effecting section), and the gaming state is the second state. And a notification means (for example, a status display 147b) controlled by the game control unit, and that the game state is determined to be shifted to the second state by the shift determination means. And a notification effect execution unit (for example, a display unit 100) controlled by the effect control unit. The notification unit notifies that the gaming state is the second state. In the unit game in the first state before being performed, the specific effect can be executed by the notification effect executing means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is the second state, the information is notified by the notification means. Here, the notification unit is controlled by the game control unit that controls the progress of the game, so that the main (game control unit) side surely notifies whether or not the transition to the second state is advantageous to the player. Can be. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when shifting from the normal state to the advantageous state, the game machine once shifts to the first state regardless of whether it shifts in the first pattern or in the second pattern. However, during the first state, a specific effect is executed by the notification effect execution means controlled by the sub (effect effect control unit) side. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the unit game before the notification is performed on the main (game control unit) side, an effect is performed on the sub (effect control unit) side. The player has no way of knowing whether or not the player has won the transition to the second state, and does not lose interest in the effect.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state control means may determine that the length of the period for controlling to the first state based on the determination of the first pattern and that the second pattern is determined. The length of the period for controlling to the first state based on the first state may be set to the same length.

  According to such a gaming machine, the length of the period for controlling to the first state is the same regardless of whether the transition is in the first pattern or the transition in the second pattern. From the length of the period of one state, it cannot be determined whether or not to transition to the second state thereafter. From the viewpoint of the player, since the subsequent development cannot be predicted during the first state, the player plays the game without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can be surely notified of the transition to an advantageous state, and does not lose interest in the effect.

[Appendix 16]
The gaming machine of supplementary note 16 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 discloses that if an AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), the AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine for performing a limit process is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous for the player from continuing indefinitely, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when ending a state advantageous to the player (regardless of ending by limit processing or ending by remaining game number), all information on the ending state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would be monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of resetting related information and expanding a range of subsequent gaming properties.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable combinations according to a winning combination determined from among a plurality of combinations. And a stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means. The result display includes a specific state (for example, , At the end of the ART), and a predetermined reset control (for example, initialization of information about ART) is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived. If performed, state control means (for example, a main control unit) that sets the specific state (for example, when the ART is finished) based on the specific result display derived after returning from the reset control. And further comprising a control board 71).

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display is linked to the specific state, and after the predetermined reset control is performed (after the return), the specific result display is determined from the specific result display derived at that time. Is read out. That is, when the predetermined reset control is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived, although the related information is initialized along with the reset control, it is determined that the specific state is obtained from the derived specific result display. Can be set. Thereby, even after the related information is reset, it is possible to widen the range of gaming ability by using the specific state recognized after the return.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in response to the identification result display being derived, a ending unit (for example, a main control board 71) for ending a predetermined gaming state (for example, ART), and the ending unit. Further comprising initialization means (for example, a main control board 71) for resetting information on the predetermined game state when the predetermined game state ends, wherein the state control means After the reset of the above, it may be set that it is the end of the predetermined game state based on the derived specific result display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the specific result display is derived, the ending means ends the predetermined game state, and the initialization means resets information on the predetermined game state. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the reset by the initialization means, it is set from the derived specific result display that the predetermined gaming state is to be ended. As a result, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, the gaming machine side can only grasp that the game machine is not in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) simply by resetting by the initialization means. In the gaming machine according to the above, it is possible to understand that the game state is the normal game state “immediately after the predetermined game state ends”. As a result, for example, by making the transition from the normal gaming state to the predetermined gaming state different between immediately after the termination of the predetermined gaming state and the other, the transition to the predetermined gaming state after the termination of the predetermined gaming state It is possible to have a game property such that pullback is easily performed.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while resetting relevant information, the width of subsequent playability can be expanded.

[Appendix 17]
The gaming machines in Appendix 17 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 discloses that if an AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), the AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine for performing a limit process is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous for the player from continuing indefinitely, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when ending a state advantageous to the player (regardless of ending by limit processing or ending by remaining game number), all information on the ending state is reset (initialized). There was a risk that the game would be monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of expanding a range of playability after a predetermined gaming state is completed.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , A main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, a normal section) capable of reporting the mode of the stop operation, a first notification state (for example, normally advantageous) and a transition from the first notification state. A second notification state (for example, "ART") having a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times) ), The gaming machine performs a limit process for terminating the notification state regardless of the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and starts the second notification state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; The predetermined termination condition is State control means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the second notification state when pressed, and operation receiving means (for example, for receiving a reset operation at the end of the second notification state by the state control means (for example, A main control board 71), wherein when the operation receiving unit receives the reset operation, the state control unit starts a non-notification state after the end of the second notification state, and the operation reception unit If the reset operation is not received, the first notification state is started after the second notification state ends.

  According to such a gaming machine, the reset operation can be accepted at the end of the second notification state, and when the player has performed the reset operation, the game machine shifts to the non-notification state after the end of the second notification state, If the reset operation is not performed, the state shifts to the first notification state after the end of the second notification state. The first notification state is a notification state in which the mode of the stop operation is notified, and is a game state in which the state can be shifted to the second notification state. Therefore, when the state shifts to the first notification state without performing the reset operation, Thus, it is possible to expect the transition (return) to the completed second notification state. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the value counted in relation to the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated (limit processing). ). Here, when the reset operation is not performed, since the notification state (the first notification state) is still after the end of the second notification state, the counting of the numerical values related to the notification state is continued, and thereafter, the limit processing is performed. It will be easier. Therefore, in the case where the reset operation is not performed, there is a demerit that the limit process is easily performed although the pullback can be expected. From the viewpoint of the player, the selection of whether or not to perform the reset operation is performed in consideration of the merits and demerits, so that the selection after the end of the second notification state can have strategicity. , The range of playability can be expanded.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first notification state may have a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined start condition than the non-notification state.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is easier to shift to the second notification state when shifting to the first notification state without performing the reset operation. Can be provided, and the range of playability can be expanded.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the width | variety of a game after completion | finish of a predetermined game state can be expanded.

[Appendix 18]
The gaming machine according to attachment 18 is as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732 discloses that when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of AT games is increased (the number of AT games is increased). A gaming machine is disclosed.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an AT function, a gaming state is advantageous for a player during an AT period in which navigation is performed, so that the player only plays a game aiming at the AT period, and the Was monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is rich in gaming properties.

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. And a game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game using the game control device, and the first state counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the mode of the stop operation can be reported. When the numerical value reaches a specific value (for example, 1500 times), a game is performed in which the notification state is ended and a non-report state (for example, a normal section) is started regardless of the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued. A specific result display (for example, seven replays) is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, and a predetermined operation different from the specific operation mode is performed for the plurality of roles. Stop operation was performed in the mode In this case, a specific role (for example, “F_choice number rip”) from which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived, and a replay role related to the operation of the replay are included. When the specific result display is derived, an RT state control unit (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a high RT state in which the probability of the replay combination being determined as a winning combination is high, and a predetermined state in the non-notification state. State start means (for example, main control board 71) for starting the notification state when a start condition is satisfied, and counting means for counting a second numerical value related to the notification state when the state start means starts the notification state (for example, And the main control board 71), and when the specific result display (e.g., seven matching replays) is derived in the notification state, the notification state is ended and the non-notification state is started. When the specific combination (for example, “F_selection number lip”) is determined as a winning combination during the notification state (for example, the main control board 71), the specific operation mode (for example, the seven replays) is determined. Notification means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) capable of notifying a stop operation required for display). Until the second numerical value reaches a predetermined value, even if the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the second numerical value reaches the predetermined value without notifying the specific operation mode. When the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the specific operation mode is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the specific result display is derived, the notification state ends and the state shifts to the non-notification state, but the high RT state in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is high is started. You. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the notification state ends and shifts to the non-notification state, the high RT state starts. Thus, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, contrary to the conventional gaming machines, it is possible to realize a gaming property aiming at shifting from the notification state to the non-notification state (high RT), thereby improving interest. Can be expected. Here, the specific result display is derived when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode at the time of winning the specific combination, and when the specific combination is won during the notification state, the specific operation mode is notified. Sometimes. Specifically, the specific stop mode is not notified until the second numerical value counted during the notification state reaches the predetermined value, but the specific stop mode is notified after reaching the predetermined value. Thereby, if the user stays in the notification state for a certain period of time, it is possible to expect a transition to a high RT (a specific stop mode is notified). Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, during the notification state, Can be set as the ceiling period to the high RT, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the state starting means starts the notification state, a predetermined value setting means (for example, a main control unit) which determines one numerical value from among a plurality of numerical values and sets the numerical value as the predetermined value. The substrate 71) may be further provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the period until the specific stop mode is notified can be set arbitrarily, so that the ceiling period to the high RT changes each time, and the interest of the game is improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties.

[Appendix 19]
The gaming machines in Appendix 19 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (informing), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2017-153724 discloses that if the notification period (AT) continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), the game is forced regardless of the number of remaining games. Discloses a gaming machine that performs a limit process for ending a notification period. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous for the player from continuing indefinitely, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from being unnecessarily increased.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, the transition from the non-report period to the report period cannot be made different in the probability, such as high probability / low probability, so the report period is divided into the first section and the second section. The second section is set to the AT during the conventional gaming machine, and the difference in the transition probability to the second section during the first section is provided to provide a probability difference in the transition to the AT (second section). And However, since the first section is included in the notification period, in such control, when the first section is continued for a long time and then shifts to the second section (AT section), the notification period is set to the upper limit (1500 times). It is easy to reach, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that does not spoil the interest of a player while suppressing gambling from being unnecessarily enhanced. .

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a game control means (for example, for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means). , Main control board 71), and as a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) in which the mode of the stop operation can be notified, it is possible to shift from the first notification state (for example, normally advantageous) and the first notification state. A second notification state (for example, "ART") having a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in relation to the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times) ), The gaming machine performs a limit process for terminating the notification state regardless of the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and when the first condition is satisfied in a non-report state (for example, a normal section), Before playing state When the game state shifts to the first notification state and the second condition is satisfied in the non-information state, the game state is changed to the second notification state, and when the third condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the game state is changed to the non-information state. The game machine further includes state control means for shifting to the notification state, and for shifting the gaming state to the second notification state when the fourth condition is satisfied in the first notification state, and for shifting to the second notification state in the non-notification state. The probability that the second condition serving as a trigger is satisfied is higher than the probability that the third condition serving as a trigger for shifting to the second notification state in the first notification state is satisfied.

  According to such a gaming machine, the notification state is forcibly terminated when the value counted in relation to the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value. The first notification state and the second notification state) do not continue unnecessarily, and it is possible to prevent the ambition from being unnecessarily increased. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition to the second notification state, which is more advantageous for the player, may be performed from the first notification state or may be performed from the non-notification state. The transition from the non-report state to the second report state is easier than the transition from the report state. As a result, instead of shifting from the non-notification state via the first notification state to the second notification state, a route that shifts from the first notification state to the second notification state via the non-notification state is mainly used. It is possible to realize a game with a simple transition route. In this manner, when the game state shifts to the second notification state, the immediately preceding gaming state is often the non-notification state, and as a result, the numerical value counted for the limit processing also changes to the second notification state. Is reset once immediately before the transition. As a result, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being unnecessarily enhanced by performing the limit processing, but to change the numerical value used for the limit processing from before the start of the second notification state. There is no unnecessary counting, and the interest of the player is not spoiled.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which does not spoil the interest of a player can be provided, suppressing raising gambling.

[Appendix 20]
The gaming machines in Appendix 20 are as follows.

[Background Art]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and as a result, a combination of the displayed symbols is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine in which a privilege is given according to the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, to the player so as not to miss the role determined to be an internal winning combination. Have been. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and a period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, JP-A-2006-104425 discloses a gaming machine provided with a plurality of modes for determining a transition probability to an AT.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since there is a difference in the transition probability for each mode, the degree of expectation of transition to AT changes according to the current mode, and although the interest of the game is improved, the transition to AT is improved. In a situation where a mode with a low probability is suggested, there is a risk that the willingness of the game is impaired and the interest in the game is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in willingness to play when a player stays in an unfavorable state. And

[Means for solving the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player capable of stopping operation corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R); a variation control means (for example, a main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition; An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition; an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means; A stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the stop operation through the game machine. , The game state in which the game is performed has a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. As the internal winning combination, a first winning combination (for example, “F_BB2 + special combination”) in which the bonus combination and the specific combination overlap and are determined as the internal winning combination, and at least the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, the second winning combination (for example, “F_BB2”) in which the type of the winning combination that is duplicated is different from the first winning combination, and the internal winning combination determination unit is configured to perform the first winning combination or the second winning combination. Any one of the second winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of the plurality of setting values, and the other is different in at least a part of the plurality of setting values. If the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, the first privilege (for example, the common privilege is determined regardless of the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination). A common processing means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of providing a privilege based on the processing; and a combination (for example, “F_BB2 +”) having the same setting as the first winning combination or the second winning combination in the normal state. Special combination ”(for example, a main control board 71) that can provide a second privilege (for example, a privilege based on a special process) when the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The second privilege is a privilege that is larger than the first privilege.

  According to such a gaming machine, the privilege to be provided differs depending on the gaming state when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the first privilege is provided regardless of the type of the bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus combination is determined during the normal state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, the second privilege is awarded only when the determined combination is a combination having no setting difference. At this time, since the second privilege is a greater privilege than the first privilege, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the relatively disadvantageous normal state, the greater second privilege is received. Can be. As a result, even if the player stays in the normal state, which is not advantageous to the player, there is a chance of a large privilege (second privilege) that cannot be received during the advantageous state. Can be suppressed from decreasing. It should be noted that the second privilege that can be given during the normal state is given when a hand with no setting difference is determined as an internal winning hand. Since the second privilege can be received without change, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play due to the setting situation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means may include a case where a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in a game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and a case where the second winning combination is performed. When the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode in the game in which the combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the same result display is derived when the plurality of variable display units stop changing. .

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the first winning combination is won and when the second winning combination is won. In the advantageous state, even if a combination having no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination having the setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination. Or whether a winning combination without a setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, a combination having no setting difference has a greater benefit given to a player determined as an internal winning combination during the normal state than to be determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous state. Therefore, by controlling the gaming machine like the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of being lost, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, when staying in the state which is not advantageous to a player, it can suppress that a game willingness falls.

[Appendix 21]
The gaming machines in Appendix 21 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-85849, a high-precision replay time RT having a high replay probability and an operation mode of a stop button which is advantageous to a player in response to an internal winning combination are notified. It is equipped with an assist replay time ART in combination with an assist time AT that activates the instruction function, and in a normal game in which the winning probability of a small role capable of acquiring a game medal is a normal value, a relatively large winning probability of watermelon or cherry is obtained. The opportunity is shifted to a chance zone (mode 10 or the like) where it is easy to win the ART when a low so-called rare role or the like is won, and the ART is randomly drawn with a high probability in the chance zone when the rare role or the like is won, so-called “hot”. Gaming machines that create situations are known (paragraphs 0116, 0119, 0128, 0131, 0137, FIGS. 11 to 17 and the like).
[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, it is easy to fall into one-pattern gaming properties in which the player is expected to win a rare role, etc., and there is a possibility that the gaming properties are not wide and the gaming interest is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a variety of game characteristics and enhancing amusement of a game.
[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the spinning is performed based on an internal winning combination and an operation of a corresponding stop button (e.g., stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R). In the gaming machine for stopping the reel,
The internal winning combination has a combination of operating symbols that can be displayed when the operation of the stop button matches an operation mode determined so as to be different for each type, and an active game after displaying the combination of operating symbols. Including multiple types of specific actors (for example, single bonuses SB1 and SB2) that change the acquisition performance of game media in
When one of the specific actors is won, when the stop button is operated in a mode that matches the operation mode corresponding to the particular actor associated with the winning, a combination of actuation symbols that activates the particular actor according to the win is displayed. Then, when the stop button is operated in a mode that does not match the operation mode corresponding to the specific operating combination related to the winning, a combination of operating symbols for operating the specific operating combination related to the winning is not displayed,
During a game in which the specific operating combination is randomly selected (for example, during a general game), the game is started by providing a predetermined start condition (for example, a specific combination winning and a two-stage lottery), and a predetermined ending condition is provided ( For example, a specific game section (for example, an ART specific high-accuracy section) to be ended by the predetermined number of games such as five games can be generated,
During the specific game section, in a game other than the operation of the specific actuation combination (for example, a general game), the player is provided with a predetermined grant condition (for example, a lottery with a certain probability of each game). It is possible to grant an advantageous privilege (for example, determination of ART), and in a game in which the specific actor is activated (for example, a game in which SB1 is activated or in which SB2 is activated), the privilege is granted by providing the grant condition. It is characterized by not being granted.

  As a result, when one of the specific activators is won during the specific game section, the number of games that can be expected as a privilege varies depending on whether or not the combination of operation symbols for activating the particular actor associated with the win is displayed. And new gameplay can be created.

In the above gaming machines,
The privilege is to increase a chance of a game to activate an instruction function for notifying an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player in accordance with the internal winning combination,
The start condition and the grant condition can be distinguished from provided and not provided by a common process that does not refer to a setting that specifies a combination of winning probabilities of the internal winning combination,
It is preferable that at least one type of the specific actuation combination has a setting difference in which a higher setting has a smaller winning probability than a lower setting.

  Accordingly, a specific game section can be generated by providing the start condition by the common process without referring to the setting, and the privilege to increase the opportunity of the game to activate the instruction function can be provided by providing the providing condition by the common process without referring to the setting. Nevertheless, the high setting has a smaller probability of winning the specific actuation hand than the low setting, so that during the specific game section, the number of games that cannot be expected for the privilege can be reduced, and the number of games that can be expected for the privilege can be increased. The advantages and disadvantages of Therefore, the fluctuation range of the winning probability due to the setting difference of the internal winning combination can be exceeded, and the width of the advantage or disadvantage due to the setting difference can be expanded.

In each of the above gaming machines,
The specific game section has a notification that informs the player of information on the operation mode corresponding to the specific operating combination related to the winning, and a notification that does not notify the player of the information on the operating mode corresponding to the specific operating combination related to the winning. It is preferred to include

Thereby, in the specific game section with the notification, the player can arbitrarily select whether to display or not to display the combination of the operation symbols for activating the specific operating combination related to the winning based on the notification information, and to change the combination of the operation symbols. By selecting not to display, it is possible to reduce the number of games that cannot be expected as a benefit and increase the number of games that can be expected as a benefit. On the other hand, in the specific game section without notification, such an optional selection cannot be performed, and regardless of the player's intention, the number of games that can be expected for the privilege may be reduced, which is disadvantageous compared to the case with notification. Become. The playability at the time of operating the stop button changes depending on whether the notification is made or not, and the range of the gameability can be further expanded.
[The invention's effect]

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can have a wide range of game characteristics and can enhance amusement in gaming.

[Supplementary Note 22]
The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 22 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-150347, after the end of the operation of the so-called big bonus BB, which is a “continuous actuating device for a first-class special accessory,” the replay probability under predetermined conditions A gaming machine that can shift to a high-accuracy replay time RT and that can be expected to win a BB again without reducing the number of medals in hand during the high-accuracy replay time RT even after one BB operation is completed is known. (Paragraph 0468 etc.).
[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, in the gaming machine described above, if a combination of the falling trigger symbols is displayed during the highly accurate replay time RT after the end of the BB operation and the combination of the falling trigger symbols is displayed, the gaming machine falls down to a state having a low replay probability. In many cases, it is not possible to obtain the BB winning again before the fall, and there is a possibility that the gaming interest may decrease. Here, it is conceivable that the high-accuracy replay time RT after the end of the BB operation is continued until the next BB is won. In this case, during the BB operation and / or during the high-accuracy replay time RT, The net additional medal number (total acquired medal number−total inserted medal number) must be greatly reduced, and it is difficult to satisfy the player.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can give a player a sense of satisfaction and enhance a gaming interest.
[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the spinning is performed based on an internal winning combination and an operation of a corresponding stop button (e.g., stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R). In the gaming machine for stopping the reel,
For the internal winning combination, display or operation of a combination of a first bonus combination (for example, BB, RB) for starting operation by displaying a combination of operation symbols and terminating the operation when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and a winning or operation symbol. Including a second bonus role (for example, a penetrating MB) that completes the game without ending the re-game probability.
After the game in operation of the first bonus combination is finished, the game is shifted to a first replay time (for example, RT1) in which a predetermined first re-game lottery mode can be maintained up to a predetermined finite number of times. ,
If a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols is displayed during the first replay time, a second replay time (for example, RT2) in a second replay lottery mode different from the first replay lottery mode is displayed. )
If there is no display of the combination of the transition trigger symbols during the first replay time, after the result of the finite number of games is obtained, the replay in the second replay time is performed until the first bonus combination is won. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to stay at a high-precision replay time (for example, RT0) in which the replay probability is higher than the game probability.

  Accordingly, when the operation of the first bonus combination ends and the process shifts to the first replay time, the winning of the second bonus combination is obtained and the second bonus combination is activated, so that the finite number of times during the first replay time is achieved. It is possible to reduce the number of cases in which the number of games can be consumed, and the combination of transition trigger symbols is displayed before the result of the finite number of games is obtained and the transition to the second replay time is reduced. Game results can be obtained. In this way, after a finite number of game results are obtained during the first replay time, it is possible to stay in the high-accuracy replay time, and even if one operation of the first bonus combination is completed, the replay probability is reduced. In the high state, it can be expected that the first bonus combination is won again.

  In addition, since the first replay time to be shifted after the operation of the first bonus combination is set to a finite number, it is not necessary to particularly greatly reduce the number of net additional game media in the first bonus combination and the first replay time.

In the above gaming machines,
During the operation of the second bonus combination, it is preferable not to display a combination of transition trigger symbols for shifting to the second replay time. In this case, the second replay time is set during the operation of the second bonus combination. It is possible to prevent the player from having to worry about unnecessary transition to the game, without giving the player a fear that the game may be shifted to.

In each of the above gaming machines,
During the operation of the second bonus combination, the number of acquired game media can be changed in accordance with the operation mode of the stop button, and the game until the operation of the second bonus combination is completed by changing the number of acquired game media. It is also preferable that the number can be adjusted. In this case, a larger number of games can be secured until the operation of the second bonus combination is completed, and a finite number of games can be consumed during the first replay time. It is possible to further promote, and it is possible to increase the probability of staying in the high-precision replay time from the first replay time after a finite number of game results are obtained.

Furthermore, in each of the above gaming machines,
Preferably, the second replay time is such that the game proceeds to the high-accuracy replay time after a predetermined second finite number of game results have been obtained. Even if it shifts to the 2 replay time, it shifts to the high-precision replay time when the result of the second finite number of games is obtained. Therefore, the second finite number of times functions as a so-called ceiling game number and passes through the second replay time. When the player directly stays at the high-precision replay time from the first replay time, the player can be given an impression as if he / she went straight to the ceiling, and the gaming interest can be further enhanced.
[The invention's effect]

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a player a sense of satisfaction and enhancing amusement in a game.

[Appendix 23]
The gaming machines in Supplementary Note 23 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, as described in JP-A-2017-93504, an image display device including a liquid crystal display device for displaying a still image and / or a moving image is used as a rendering device, and a desired latent image of a latent image is provided in front thereof. 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a gaming machine in which a panel illuminating body for switching between visualization and non-visualization is arranged, and an effect is produced by superimposing a visualized latent image on an image on an image display device ( Paragraphs 0036 to 0040, FIGS. 3, 130, etc.).
[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, since the base image display device displays an image on a single stationary plane, even if the visualized latent image is superimposed on the planar image, the entire image is statically planar. It was limited to a simple expression method, and there was a limit to the expression of the production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of expressing an unprecedented effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
In a gaming machine including an image display device that displays an image (for example, an image display device 140 including a liquid crystal display device),
The image display surfaces of the image display device 140 (for example, the image display surfaces 151L, 151C, and 151R) are not positioned at a plurality of positions including the first position and the second position (for example, the first position facing the front and the front position). To a plurality of positions including a second position to be replaced with a screen, or a plurality of positions including a first position to separate components and a second position to combine components, etc.)
A first effect of locating the image display surface at the first position and performing an effect by a first expression (for example, an image expression or a separated image expression); and positioning the image display surface at the second position. And a second effect of executing an effect by a second expression having a different expression mode from the first expression (for example, a projection video expression or a combined image expression).

  As a result, the first effect and the second effect have different expression modes, and can give different impressions to the player, and a surprising effect that has never existed in the past becomes possible.

In the above gaming machines,
The image display device (for example, the image display device 140) is configured by a plurality of components (for example, the components 150L, 150C, 150R) each having an image display surface (for example, the image display surface 151L, 151C, 151R). ,
It is preferable that the first position and the second position have different relative positional relationships between the respective image display surfaces of the constituent elements.
In this case, by changing the relative distance, angle, posture, and the like between the constituent elements, the impression between a two-dimensional impression and a three-dimensional impression, or an impression with a distractive impression and a sense of unity can be obtained. , The impression given to the player can be changed effectively.

In each of the above gaming machines,
A projector (for example, projector 110) that irradiates a predetermined image to a projection area (for example, a three-dimensional area inside the box-shaped screen 130) that can be visually recognized by a player, and the image display device (for example, It is also preferable to dispose the image display device 140).
In this case, various effects such as an effect in which an image displayed on the image display surface and an image radiated from the projector are combined or an effect in which one is selected can be performed.

Also, when combined with a projector,
A screen (for example, a screen) that projects an image projected from the projector on the image display surface of the image display device (for example, the image display device 140) that can be visually recognized by the player at the first position. 170).
It is preferable that the first expression is represented by an image displayed by the image display device, and the second expression is represented by an image projected on the screen.
In this case, the image displayed by the image display device and the image projected from the projector can be effectively changed while sharply changing the impression.

Furthermore, in this case,
It is also preferable that the screens are provided in a plurality of ways including a first screen (for example, a first screen 171) and a second screen (for example, a second screen 172) in which a visual effect of a projected image is different.
In this case, three or more types of expression directions, which are a combination of image display and two or more video projections, can be realized, and the effect can be further diversified.
[The invention's effect]

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of expressing an unprecedented effect.

[Appendix 24]
The gaming machines of Appendix 24 are as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-85849, a plurality of replay times RT0 to RT3 having different breakdowns and lottery values of replaying combinations to be randomly selected are provided, and a player is provided to a player in accordance with an internal winning combination. When an assist time AT for navigating an advantageous stop button pressing order and the like is won and a specific pressing order dependent combination is won at RT1 as a preparatory RT, a combination of promotion trigger symbols is displayed according to the pressing order navigation. In this case, the assist replay time ART is enabled by elevating to RT3 where the replay high accuracy state is stably maintained. On the other hand, even if the push order navigator does not appear or the push order navigator appears in the AT without being won. There are known gaming machines which, when displayed in combination with a fall trigger symbol, fall to RT2 with a low replay probability (paragraphs 0089 to 0095, FIG. 7, FIG. 9, etc.).
[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned document, it is expected that the number of medals will increase in RT1 whether a combination of promotion motif symbols is displayed and promoted to RT3 or a combination of falling motive symbols is displayed and RT2 is displayed in RT1. The player who plays the game does not enjoy the game no matter which one is selected. That is, under the non-winning of the AT, even if the player does not like it, the combination of the falling trigger symbols is displayed and the player falls down to RT2, and the player feels uninteresting, and under the AT winning, the promotion trigger symbol Is displayed and promoted to RT3, and the player is pleased, and almost no player chooses to fall to RT2 despite being able to be promoted to RT3. You can't have fun.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which a player can arbitrarily select a transition of a replay time and can enjoy a game according to the selection.
[Means for solving the problem]

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 3L, 3C, 3R) having a plurality of symbols are rotated, and the spinning is performed based on an internal winning combination and an operation of a corresponding stop button (e.g., stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R). In a gaming machine that stops the reel and derives one game result by a combination of displayed symbols,
Providing a plurality of replay times having different breakdowns and / or lottery values of internal winning combinations pertaining to a replay in which the next game is a replay;
One replay time (for example, RT6) and another replay time (for example, RT7) do not differ in profit obtained according to the game result including the probability of being replayed, and during the one replay time. In the case where a combination of symbols to be displayed when a predetermined game result can be obtained is the first mode, and during the other one replay time, the same game result as the predetermined game result can be obtained. The combination of symbols to be displayed is allowed to be a second mode different from the first mode,
The game at the one replay time and the game at the other one replay time can be selected by the player as desired.

  As a result, regardless of whether one replay time or another replay time is selected, there is no difference in profit obtained according to the game result including the probability of being a replay, and no loss occurs regardless of which one is selected. On the other hand, when the same game result can be obtained, the combination of the symbols displayed in one replay time and the combination of the symbols displayed in another one replay time may be in different modes. The user can select the replay time that gives the desired mode.

In the above gaming machines,
When the stop button is operated under the same condition, the number of sliding frames of the symbol moving from the time of operation of the stop button to the stop of the reel, the case of displaying the combination of the symbols of the first aspect, and It is preferable that the combination is changed between the case of displaying the symbol combination of the second aspect.

  In this case, the player can select a reel stopping behavior that suits his or her taste and enjoy the stopping behavior.

In each of the above gaming machines,
It is preferable that the game at the one replay time and the game at the other one replay time are selected by selecting one operation mode of the stop button from a plurality of options.

In this case, a wide range of players from beginners to advanced players can easily and clearly select the replay time.
[The invention's effect]

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player can arbitrarily select a transition of a replay time and can enjoy a game according to the selection.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub-control board, 100 ... Display unit, 147b ... Status display

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine that rotates a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols and stops the rotating reel based on an internal winning combination and an operation of a corresponding stop button,
For the internal winning combination, a first bonus combination in which the operation is started by displaying a combination of operation symbols and the operation is terminated when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, and a display of the combination of the winning or operation symbol or the end of the operation is changed in the replay probability. Including a second bonus role that completes the game without triggering,
After the game in operation of the first bonus combination is completed, the process is shifted to a first replay time in which a predetermined first re-game lottery mode can be maintained up to a predetermined finite number of times,
During the first replay time, when a predetermined combination of transition trigger symbols is displayed, the process is shifted to a second replay time in a second replay mode different from the first replay mode,
During the first replay time, if there is no display of the transition trigger symbol combination, after the result of the finite number of games is obtained, the replay in the second replay time is continued until the first bonus combination is won. A gaming machine characterized by being able to stay at a high-precision replay time with a replay probability higher than the game probability. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein during the operation of the second bonus combination, a combination of transition trigger symbols for transitioning to the second replay time is not displayed. During the operation of the second bonus combination, the number of acquired game media can be changed in accordance with the operation mode of the stop button, and the game until the operation of the second bonus combination is completed by changing the number of acquired game media. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number is adjustable. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second replay time shifts to the high-accuracy replay time after a predetermined second finite number of game results are obtained. 5.

Images